# Programming Manual **33124.** mx-20 

## HoTT.1.en

HOPPING.TELEMETRY.TRANSMISSION 

# mx-202 **Table of contents** Transmitter initialization ............................................... 38 Firmware update ................................................... 39 Receiver initialization ................................................... 42 Firmware update ................................................... 43 Installation notices ....................................................... 46 Receiver system power supply .............................. 47 Term defi nitions ........................................................... 50 Switch and control assignments .................................. 52 Digital trimming ............................................................ 54 Winged models ............................................................ 56 Receiver layout ...................................................... 57 Helicopter models ........................................................ 58 Receiver layout ...................................................... 59 **Program descriptions** Loading a new memory location .................................. 60

" **Model select** " ............................................................ 63

" **Copy / Erase** " ............................................................ 64 Erase model .......................................................... 64 Copy model  model ........................................... 64 Export to SD card .................................................. 65 Import from SD card .............................................. 66 Copy fl ight phase ................................................... 66

" **Suppress menus** " ..................................................... 67

" **Suppress models** " .................................................... 67

" **Base setup model** " Winged model ....................................................... 68 Model name .................................................... 68 Stick mode ...................................................... 68 Bound receiver ................................................ 68 Binding receivers ............................................ 69 Receiver output ............................................... 70 RF transmit ...................................................... 71 Range test ....................................................... 71 DSC output...................................................... 72 **General notices**
Table of contents ........................................................... 2 Environmental protection notices .................................. 3 Safety notices ................................................................ 4 Safety notices and handling regulations for nickel-metal-hydride rechargeable batteries ............. 8 Foreword ...................................................................... 10 Remote control set description .................................... 11 Recommended chargers ............................................. 13 Transmitter power supply ............................................. 14 Receiver power supply .......................................... 16 Joystick length adjustment........................................... 17 Opening the transmitter housing ................................. 17 Changing joystick behavior .......................................... 18 Transmitter description ................................................ 20 Operating elements ............................................... 20 Backside of the transmitter .................................... 21 Headset connector ................................................ 21 Mini-USB connector .............................................. 21 Data jack ............................................................... 21 DSC (Direct Servo Control) ................................... 22 Data storage / card slot ......................................... 22 Display and keypad ............................................... 24 Operating the "data terminal" ................................ 25 Shortcuts ............................................................... 26 Hidden menu columns ........................................... 27 Hidden mode ......................................................... 28 Language selection and display contrast .............. 28 Joystick calibration ................................................ 29 Telemetry data display ........................................... 32 Displayed warnings ............................................... 36 Function fi eld displays ........................................... 37 Position display for rotary controls, CTRL 7 & 8 .... 37 Entry lockout .......................................................... 37 

# Table of contents

Cut-off ............................................................. 72 Helicopter model ................................................... 74 Model name .................................................... 74 Stick mode ...................................................... 74 Bound receiver ................................................ 74 Binding receivers ............................................ 75 Receiver output ............................................... 76 RF transmit ...................................................... 77 Range test ....................................................... 77 DSC output...................................................... 78 Autorotation ..................................................... 78 Auto.C1 Pos. .................................................... 79 Cut-off ............................................................. 79

" **Model type** " ............................................................... 82

" **Helicopter type** " ........................................................ 86

" **Servo adjustment** " .................................................... 90

" **Stick mode** " Winged model ....................................................... 92 Helicopter model ................................................... 94

" **Control adjust** " Winged model ....................................................... 96 Helicopter model ................................................. 100 Throttle limit function ...................................... 104 Idle setting ...................................................... 105 Throttle limit in combination with AR in the **"Stick mode"** menu ...................................... 107

" **Dual Rate / Expo** " Winged model ..................................................... 108 Helicopter model ................................................. 112

" **Channel 1 curve** " Winged model ..................................................... 116 Helicopter model ................................................. 119

" **Switch display** " ....................................................... 122

" **Control switch** " ....................................................... 123 How do I program a fl ight phase? .............................. 1263 **Table of contents** " **Phase settings** " Winged model ..................................................... 128 Helicopter model ................................................. 132

" **Phase assignment** " ................................................ 134

" **Phase trim** " (winged model) .................................... 136

" **Non-delayed channels** " .......................................... 137

" **Timers (general)** " .................................................... 138

" **Flight phase timers** " ............................................... 142 What is a mixer? ........................................................ 145

" **Wing mixers** " ........................................................... 146

" **Helicopter mixer** " .................................................... 164 Adjusting the throttle and pitch curve .................. 175 Autorotation setting ............................................. 178 General remarks about freely progr. Mixers .............. 180

" **Free mixers** " ............................................................ 181 Linear mixers ...................................... beginning 185 Curve mixer ........................................ beginning 187 Examples............................................................. 190

" **MIX active/phase** " ................................................... 192

" **Mix Only Channel** " .................................................. 193

" **Dual mixer** " .............................................................. 194

" **Swashplate mixer** " .................................................. 196

" **Fail-safe** " ................................................................. 196

" **Teacher / pupil** " ....................................................... 198 Connection schematic ......................................... 201 Wireless HoTT system ........................................ 202

" **Tx. output swap** " ..................................................... 206

" **Telemetry** " ...............................................................208 Setting& Data View .............................................. 209 Satellite operation of two receivers .............. 218 Sensor Select ...................................................... 220 RF Status View .................................................... 221 Voice Trigger ........................................................ 222

" **Basic Settings** " ....................................................... 224 " **Servo display** " ......................................................... 230

" **Servo test** " ............................................................... 231

" **Code lock** " ............................................................... 232

" **Info display"**  ........................................................... 234 **Programming examples**
Introduction ................................................................ 236 Winged model First steps ............................................................ 238 Incorporating an electric drive ............................. 244 C1 joystick switchover between electric motor and butterfl y ............................ 247 electric motor and airbrake ............................ 250 Timer activation by control or switch ................... 252 Parallel operating servos ..................................... 254 Using fl ight phases Example 1 ..................................................... 256 Example 2 ..................................................... 260 Control of temporal processes ............................ 266 Eight-fl ap wing ..................................................... 268 Delta and fl ying wing models ............................... 272 F3A model ........................................................... 276 Helicopter model ........................................................ 280 **Appendix** Appendix .................................................................... 290 FCC Information ........................................................ 293 Declaration of Conformity .......................................... 294 Warranty Certifi cate ................................................... 295 **Environmental protection notices** The symbol on this product, its operating instructions or packaging gives notice that this product may not be discarded as common household waste at the end of its service life. It must be turned over to a recycling collection point for electric and electronic apparatus. The materials can be recycled according to their markings. You make an important contribution to protection of the environment by utilizing facilities for reuse, material recycling or other means of exploiting obsolete equipment. Batteries must be removed from the unit and disposed of separately at an appropriate collection point. Please inquire with local authorities about the responsible waste collection locations.

This manual serves only as a source of information and can be changed without prior notifi cation. Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in the information section of this manual.4 **Safety notices** In order to enjoy your modeling hobby for a long time, please read these instructions thoroughly and give particular attention to the safety notices. You should also register yourself athttps://www.graupner.de/de/ service/produktregistrierung.aspx right away in order to automatically receive current information per email about your product. If you are a beginner with remote controlled model aircraft, ships or cars, you should really ask an experienced model pilot for assistance. If this remote control system changes ownership, these instructions should surely be included with remote control system. **Intended usage** This remote control system may only be used for the purpose intended by the manufacturer - specifi cally - for the operation of unmanned remote controlled models

. Any other usage is not permissible. **Safety notices** SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT and REMOTE CONTROLLED MODELS ARE NOT TOYS ... because even small models can cause substantial property damage and/or personal injuries if they are not handled properly - even if caused by third parties. Technical defects of an electrical or mechanical nature can lead to unexpected startup of a motor and/or parts being hurled through the air to pose a danger of injury to you and to others. Short circuit conditions are to be avoided absolutely! A short circuit condition may not only destroy parts of the remote control system but, depending on the circumstances and the battery energy involved, may also pose acute danger of incineration or even explosion. All motor-driven parts, such as aircraft or ship propellers, helicopter rotors, open gearboxes etc. represent a constant danger. Contact with these parts must be avoided. A rapidly turning aircraft propeller can, for example, sever a fi nger. Also pay attention that other objects do not come into contact with driven parts. When a drive battery is connected or a motor is running:

**never**get into the danger zone of driving mechanisms. Be sure to pay attention that motors do not start up unintentionally while performing programming operations. Disconnect the fuel supply or battery terminals to motors before programming. Protect all units from dust, dirt, moisture and other foreign parts. Never expose these units to vibrations or excessive hot or cold temperatures. Remote control operation may only be performed under "normal" outdoor temperatures, i. e. within a range of -15 ° C to +55 ° C. Avoid mechanical jarring and pressure stresses. Always check units for damage to housings and cables. Do not use units which have been damaged or become wet, even after they are dry again. Only those components and accessories which we recommend may be used. Always use original Graupner plug and jack connectors which are made for one another out of the same materials. When routing cables, pay attention that they are not stressed, unduly kinked or broken. The sharp edges of adjacent parts also represent a hazard for insulated conductors. Be sure that all plug and jack connections are fi rmly seated. Do not pull on the cable to disconnect a plugged connector. No modifi cations whatsoever may be made to units. Modifi cations will void the operating permit and all insurance protection.

**Receiver installation** The receiver is to be installed with a cushion of foam rubber to afford protection against jarring; in aircraft models behind a strong rib, for a car or ship model the location must be protected against dust and spray water. The receiver may not be mounted in direct contact with the hull or chassis as this would allow motor vibrations and/or roadway jarring to be transferred directly to the receiver. When a receiver system is installed in a model with a combustion motor, all receiver parts should always be protected against the intrusion of exhaust gasses and oil residue. Above all, this applies to the model's ON/OFF switch, which is typically built into the model's outer surface. Position the receiver such that connecting cables to the servos and the power supply are routed with a bit of slack and that the receiver's antenna is at least 5 cm away from any large metal parts or wiring except for other receiver wires/cables. In addition to steel, this also includes carbon fi ber parts, servos, electric motors, fuel pumps and all sorts of cables, etc. Preferably, the receiver should be mounted in a readily accessible location in the model that is well apart from all electrically operated units. Under no circumstances may a servo cable be wrapped around the antenna or routed close to it. Make sure that cables near the antenna cannot move about during fl ight. 

# Safety notices Be sure to pay attention!5 **Safety notices** transmitter's antenna directly toward the model will not produce good reception but rather degrade reception. When multiple remote controls are operating simultaneously, pilots should position themselves in a loose group. Pilots standing off to themselves not only endanger their own models but those of others as well. However, when 2 or more pilots using 2.4 GHz remote control systems are closer than 5 m to one another this can lead to return channel overdrive which, in turn, will trigger a range warning much too early. Increase your distance between one another until the range warning

ceases.
**Pre-start checks Before**  switching the receiver on, ensure that the gas control is at its Stop/Idle position.

**Always switch the transmitter on fi rst and then the**  **receiver. Always switch the receiver off fi**  **rst and then the transmitter.**  If this sequence is not maintained, such that the receiver is still switched on when the corresponding transmitter is switched to "OFF", then the receiver may respond to other transmitters or general radio frequency noise. This can cause the model to execute uncontrolled operations that may cause personal injuries and/or property damage. In particular, for models equipped with a mechanical gyro : before switching off the receiver, disconnect the model's power supply to prevent the motor from revving up unintentionally. **The residual spin of a gyro often produces so much voltage that the receiver may falsely interpret a**  **throttle signal! This will then cause the motor to start up unexpectedly.** 
**Range test** Perform checks for proper operation and range before every session. Secure the model adequately in place and ensure that no one is in front of the model. Perform a complete functional test on the ground and execute a complete simulated fl ight to exclude the possibility of system faults or problems with the model's programming. When doing this, be sure to follow the notices provided on pages 71 and77. Never operate the transmitter in Model mode, i.e. for fl ying or driving, without an antenna. Be sure the antenna is fi rmly seated in its socket. **Operating a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or car** Never fl y over spectators or other pilots. Never endangerhumans or animals. Never fl y in the vicinity of highvoltage wires. Do not operate the model in the vicinity of sluice locks or where real boats or ships are operating. Do not operate a model on public streets or highways, paths or plazas, etc. **Monitoring transmitter and receiver batteries** You must stop running the model to recharge the transmitter's battery no later than when low transmitter battery voltage triggers the " **Batt must be recharged!!** " display and acoustic signal. Check the charge in batteries routinely, particularly the receiver's battery. Do not wait until the movements of controlled mechanisms are noticeably slower. Replace expended batteries before they cause problems. The battery manufacturer's charging instructions **Routing the receiver's antenna** The receiver and its antennas must be positioned as far away as possible from drives of any kind. If the model's hull is made of carbon fi ber material, the ends of the antennas must extend outside of the hull. The orientation of antennas is not critical. Nevertheless, a vertical (upright) installation of receiver antennas is advantageous. In the case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the second antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to the fi rst antenna.
**Servo installation**Always mount servos with the provided rubber vibrationdamper parts. Only in this manner can these parts be protected against excessively hard vibrations. **Installing control rods** Control rods must be installed such that they operate freely and smoothly. It is particularly important that all rudder levers are able to move to their full limits, i.e. not otherwise mechanically blocked. In order to be able to stop a running motor at any time, control rods must be adjusted such that the carburetor tap is completely closed when the joystick and trim lever are brought into their end idle position. Pay attention that no metal parts, e. g. as a result of rudder actuation, vibration, rotating parts, etc., rub against one another. Metal-to-metal contact causes electrical "noise" which can interfere with the correct operation of the receiver.

**Transmitter antenna orientation** Transmission fi eld strength is minimal in an imaginary line extending straight out from the end of the transmitter's antenna. This means that "pointing" the6 **Safety notices** are always to be followed, this includes mandatory adherence to the length of charging time. Never leave batteries being charged unattended.Never attempt to charge primary batteries (nonrechargeable batteries) because they can explode. All secondary batteries (rechargeable batteries) must be charged before every session. To avoid short circuit conditions, fi rst connect the charger cable's banana plugs, polarity correct, into the charger and thereafter connect the charger cable's plugs to the transmitter and receiver batteries. Disconnect all power sources from the model when it is not to be used for an extended period of time. **Never**attempt to use defective batteries, damaged batteries or mixed-type battery combinations as a single group. Do not use mixed combinations of old and new batteries or batteries of different manufacture. **Capacity and operating time** The rule: "capacity is reduced with every successive recharging", applies to all batteries. Internal resistance increases at low temperatures to further reduce capacity. As a consequence, the battery's ability to provide current and hold its voltage is reduced. Frequent charging or the use of battery maintenance programs can also result in gradual loss of battery capacity. Therefore the capacity of batteries should be checked at regular intervals, not in excess of every six months, and replaced if performance is found to be signifi cantly defi cient. Purchase only genuine Graupner batteries! **Interference suppression for electric motors** All conventional electric motors produce sparks between their collector and brushes. Depending on the type of motor involved, this may cause more or less interference with the functionality of the remote control system. The electric motors of a properly built system should therefore have interference suppression features. For electric drive models it is particularly important that every one of its motors is provided with proper interference suppression. Interference fi lters extensively suppress such disturbances and should always be included. Follow the respective recommendations included in the motor's operating and installation notices. For further details about interference fi lters, refer to the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de.
**Servo interference fi lters for extension cables**  Order No. **1040** The servo interference fi lter is necessary when an extended-length servo cable is used. This fi lter is attached directly to the receiver output. In critical cases a second fi lter can be attached to the servo. **Using electronic speed controllers** Choosing the right electronic controller is largely a matter of matching controller performance to the motor to be controlled. In order to prevent an overload or damage to the speed controller, its current rating should be at least half of the maximum locked-rotor current draw of the motor to which it is connected. Particular attention is appropriate for so-called "tuning motors". Because of their low-turns coils these motorscan draw a multiple of their rated current in a lockedrotor condition and this can lead to the destruction of the speed controller. **Electric ignition systems** Combustion motor ignition systems also produce interference that can negatively infl uence remote control functionality. Always supply power to an electric ignition system from a separate, dedicated battery. Use only interference-suppressed spark plugs, spark caps and shielded ignition leads. Mount the receiver suffi ciently far away from ignition system components. **Static charges** A remote control system will be destroyed by the magnetic shock waves produced by a lightning strike - even if the storm is miles away. Therefore ... **... stop fl ying right away if a storm is approaching.**  **Static charging via the antenna also represents a lethal hazard.** 

**Attention** In order to fulfi ll FCC HF emission requirements for • mobile transmitters, a distance of at least 20 cm must be maintained between this system's antenna and other persons when this system is operating. Operation of this system at a lesser distance is therefore not recommended. To avoid disturbance caused by the electrical • characteristics and emissions of other transmitters, keep at least a 20 cm distance from other transmitters. Operation of the remote control system requires a • correct program setting for the given country in the transmitter unit. This is necessary for compliance with diverse regulations like FCC, ETSI, CE etc. Follow the respective instructions provided for this with the 

# Safety notices7 **Safety notices** transmitter and receiver. Prior to every fl ight, perform a complete functional • test, range test and execute a complete simulated fl ight in order to exclude the possibility of system faults or problems with the model's programming. Never program the transmitter or receiver while the • model is being operated.
**Care and maintenance** Never clean the housing, antenna, etc. with cleaning agents, gasoline, water or similar means. Use only a dry, soft cloth. **Components and accessories** As manufacturer of this equipment Graupner GmbH & Co. KG recommends only components and accessories which have been tested and approved by Graupner for their suitability, functionality and safety. If this recommendation is followed, Graupner accepts responsibility for the product. **Graupner cannot accept any responsibility for the**  **parts or accessories of other manufacturers which have not been approved and Graupner cannot**  **evaluate every individual product made by other companies to assess if they are safe to use.**  **Liability exclusion / damage compensation** This manual serves only as a source of information and can be changed without prior notifi cation. Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors or inaccuracies which may be contained in this manual. Graupner cannot monitor compliance with the assembly instructions, the operating instructions or the conditions and methods under which remote control components are installed, operated, utilized or maintained. Therefore Graupner accepts no form of liability for loss, damage or costs consequential to incorrect usage or operation or which can be attributed to same. Unless otherwise prescribed by law, the obligation of Graupner to provide damage compensation, regardless of legal grounds, is limited to the invoice value of the quantity of Graupner. goods contributing directly to the damage-inducing event. This does not apply if Graupner is found to be subject to unlimited liability pursuant to binding legal stipulations with respect to intent or gross negligence.8 **Safety notices** 

# Safety notices and handling instructions for nickel-metal-hydride rechargeable batteries

As applicable for all highly technical products, observance of the following safety notices, along with the handling instructions, is essential for a long service life, fault-free operation, and harmless utilization. **Safety notices** Individual battery cells and batteries are not toys and • must therefore not get into the hands of children. Batteries/cells must be kept out of the reach of children. Batteries are to be checked for fl awless condition • prior to every use. Defective or damaged cells/ batteries may no longer be used. Cells/batteries may only be utilized within the limits • specifi ed by the technical data for the given battery type.**Batteries/cells may not be heated, burned, short •**  **circuited or subjected to overload current or reverse polarity.**  **Battery confi gurations formed by parallel**  **• connected cells, combinations of old and new**  **cells, or cells of different production, size, capacity, manufacturer, brand or cell type may**  **not be used.** Remove batteries from the unit prior to long-term • storage periods (weeks or months). Always switchoff units whenever they are no longer in use (shortterm). Always charge batteries before it is too late.The battery to be charged must be placed on a non• combustible, heat resistant, non-conducting surface during the charging process. Combustible or readily ignited objects are to be kept away from the charging confi guration. Batteries may only be charged under supervision. • The quick charge current rating for the given type of battery must never be exceeded. If the battery heats up during charging above 60 °C • charging must be stopped immediately. Allow the battery to cool off to about 30 °C before resuming the charging process. Never charge batteries which are already charged, • batteries which are hot or batteries which have not been discharged to their end-point voltage. No modifi cations may be made to the batteries. • Never solder or weld directly on battery terminals. The mistreatment of batteries presents a danger of • ignition, explosion, chemical burns and combustion burns. Use of an extinguishing blanket, CO 2 -fi re extinguisher or sand are suitable methods of extinguishing such a fi re. Leaking electrolyte is caustic; do not allow it • to contact the skin or eyes. In the event of an emergency, immediately rinse with a generous amount of water and get the care of a doctor. Battery vent openings may never be blocked or • sealed, e. g. by solder. Soldering temperature may not exceed 220 °C and not be applied for longer than 20 seconds. To avoid deformation, do not exert excessive • mechanical force. If a battery should become overcharged, proceed as • follows:Simply disconnect the battery and place it on a noncombustible surface (e. g. masonry fl oor) until it has cooled off. To avoid the hazards associated with an explosion, never hold the battery in your hands. Pay attention that the charging and discharging rules • are followed.
**General notices** Battery capacity is reduced by every charge/discharge cycle. Storage can also be cause for a gradual reduction of battery capacity. **Storage** Batteries should only be stored when they are not in a completely discharged condition. They should be stored in a dry room having an ambient temperature between +5 °C to +25 °C. When stored for longer than 4 weeks, cell voltage should **not be more** than 1.2 V. **Matching up individual batteries** To match new batteries with older ones, put a full • charge on all of the batteries using a standard charging process. As a rule of thumb, an empty battery must be charged for 12 hours at a current rate equal to one tenth of its specifi ed capacity ("1/10 C" method). The batteries are then all charged equally. Such a matching procedure should be repeated about every 10th charge cycle so that batteries are matched again, which contributes to longer battery life. If it is possible to discharge individual batteries, this • should be done prior to every charging process. Otherwise the battery pack should be discharged to a voltage of 0.9 V per cell. For example, this corresponds to a charge voltage of 3.6 V for the 4-cell pack used in the transmitter. **Charging** Charging is only permissible at specifi ed current rates, charging durations, temperature ranges and continuous9 **Safety notices** supervision. If a suitable quick charger is not available on which the exact charging current can be set, the battery can be charged by standard charging according to the 1/10 C-method, see example above. **Whenever possible, transmitter batteries should charged with the 1/10 C method because of the**  **differing charge states of the cells. However, charging current may never be allowed to exceed**  **the maximum permissible rate specifi ed in the given**  **transmitter's instructions. Quick charging**  If your charger offers this option then set the delta • peak charge cutoff voltage to 5 mV per cell. However, most chargers are set to a fi xed value of 15 ... 20 mV per cell so they can be used for both NiCd batteries as well as NiMH batteries If in doubt, fi nd out if your charger is also suitable for NiMH batteries by referring to the charger's operating instructions or consulting a dealership. If you are unsure, charge your batteries at half of the specifi ed maximum current rate. **Discharge** All batteries sold under the Graupner and GM-Racing trade names are, depending on battery type, suitable for a continuous maximum current load of 6 ... 13 C (check the manufacturer's data). In general, the higher the continuous current load, the lower the battery's service life will be. Use your battery until its performance degrades or • the under-voltage warning sounds. **Attention:** A cell voltage of 1.2 V should not be underrun during a long storage period. If necessary, charge the battery before putting it into storage. Refl ex charging and charge/discharge programs • unnecessarily shorten a battery's service life and are only useful in checking battery quality or to "revive" old cells. It is also meaningless to charge/discharge a battery before using it. The exception to this is if your intention is to check the battery's quality. **Disposal of used batteries** Some countries have laws requiring that all used batteries be turned over to an authorized collection center. Disposing of batteries along with common household garbage is forbidden. Old batteries can be turned into communal collection centers for disposal at no charge or they can be returned to one of our dealerships or anywhere else where batteries of that given type are sold. Used batteries we have delivered can also be sent back to us, at your cost, through the mail. Use the return address below: Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Service: Used batteries Henriettenstr. 94 - 96 D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck This represents an essential contribution to environmental protection.
Caution: Damaged batteries require among other things, special packaging, because they are very toxic!10 **Introduction** 

# mx-20 **the newest generation of remote control technology**

HoTT ( **Ho** pping **T** elemetry **T** ransmission) is a synthesis of know-how, engineering and testing done around the world by experienced model pilots. HoTT technology combines 2.4 GHz band transmission/reception with bi-directional communications via a "return channel" integrated into the receiver unit. Based on the Graupner/JR computerized remote control system mc-24 that was introduced in 1997, the mx-20 HoTT remote control system has been especially developed for experienced RC pilots All conventional model types can be readily operated with the mx-20 HoTT system, regardless of whether the model is a winged aircraft, helicopter, ship or land vehicle. Complex mixed-control functions of guiding surfaces are often necessary for winged aircraft (rudder, elevators) and helicopter models (swashplate). Thanks to this computer technology it is possible to activate these diverse functional requirements with a single "press of a button". Simply select the given model type from the mx-20 HoTT program and its software will automatically assemble signifi cant mixed-control and coupled functions. This eliminates the need for separate modules in the transmitter to implement complex coupled functions and also makes sophisticated mechanical mixer mechanisms in the model unnecessary. The mx-20 HoTT remote control system offers the highest level of safety and reliability. Its software is clearly structured. Functionally-related options are clearly arranged by content in a simple organization. The mx-20 HoTT remote control system has 24 model memory locations. Additional fl ight-phase-specifi c settings can be stored in every model memory location. For example, such settings can be made for various parameters that can be called up to implement particular fl ight maneuvers at the "press of a button". The large graphic display is well organized and simple to operate. The mixer's graphic representation is exceptionally helpful. Familiarization with the various functions in this remote control system is quick, even for a beginner, because of its clear, straightforward program structure. The user makes his settings with the four-way, touch sensitive buttons located to the left and right of the high-contrast display. Thus, with only little practice, the pilot learns to implement all of the remote controlled model options with which he/she has experience. This Graupner HoTT technique theoretically allows over 200 models to be operated simultaneously However, because of the interspersed radio-frequency utilization permitted by certifi cation for the 2.4 GHz ISM band, this number is signifi cantly lower in practical application. Nevertheless, in general more models can be operated simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band than would be the case in conventional 35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting factor is – as often before – is still likely to be the size of available operating space (i.e. airspace for aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite diffi cult in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) represents an enormous boost for remote control operating security. The integrated telemetry menu affords simple access to data and HoTT receiver programming. For example, this can be used to map receiver outputs, assign control functions to multiple servos, and to coordinate the magnitude and direction of multiple servo movements with one another. This handbook describes every menu in detail. There are tips, many notices and programming examples to supplement the descriptions and also explanations for model specifi c technical terms, like transducer, dual rate, butterfl y, etc. An appendix is provided which contains additional information about the HoTT system. This manual is rounded out with the conformity declaration and the guarantee certifi cate for the transmitter. Please observe the safety notices and technical notices. Read the instructions carefully then test all functions by simply attaching servos to the receiver included in the kit for order no. **33124** . When doing this, please observe the corresponding notice provided on page 20. This will help you learn the essential operating steps and functions of the mx-20 HoTT in the least amount of time. Always handle your remote controlled model with a sense of responsibility so that you do not endanger yourself or others. The Graupner team wishes you much fun and success with your mx-20 HoTT remote control system of the newest generation

Kirchheim-Teck, September 201111 **Introduction - Remote control set** 

# Computer System mx-20 12 channel remote control s et in 2.4 GHz Graupner HoTT technology ( **Ho** pping **T** elemetry **T** ransmission)

**The superior functional security of Graupner**  **HoTT technology accomplished with bidirectional communications between transmitter and receiver**  **with integrated telemetry, freely programmable voice output via headset connector, and ultra-fast**  **response times. Programming is simplifi**  **ed by a programming technique implemented with capacitive touch**  **buttons. High contrast, 8 line, blue illuminated graphic**  **display for perfect presentation of all parameter settings and telemetry data. Storage of telemetry**  **data on a micro SD memory card. Integrated real time clock**  **4096 steps of 12-bit resolution on the channel signal assures extreme control sensitivity.**  **USB connection to read and write the model's memories as well as for making fi**  **rmware updates.** Microcomputer remote control system in modern • 2.4 GHz Graupner HoTT technology Bidirectional communications between transmitter • and receiver Five different languages: • German, English, French, coming soon per software update Italian and Spanish. Ultra fast response times due to reliable, direct • transmission of data from the main processor to the 2.4 GHz HF module. No additional delays due to routing over a module processor. Telemetry menu for display of telemetry data and • for programming optional attachment sensors and receiver outputs The telemetry screen provides many programming • and evaluation functions to be presented directly in the transmitters display Voice output can be called up via freely • programmable switches Digital servo cycle times of 10 ms selectable • Short antenna, collapsible • Operating and programming techniques are similar • to the proven concepts implemented in mc-19 to mc-24 High contrast, blue illuminated graphic display • assures perfect control of parameter settings like model type, model memory, clocks and operating voltage. Function encoder with two touch-sensitive, four-way • buttons permit simplifi ed programming and precise settings Key-lock function to prevent unintentional operation. • 7 fl ight phases can be programmed •12 **Introduction - Remote control set**24 model memories with storage for all model• specifi c programs and parameter settings 7 switches (2 three stage switches, 3 two stage • switches and 2 touch switches) and 3 digital actuators are already built-in and can be used as desired Free assignment of switches to switched functions by • simply switching the desired switch Simple programming of motor and brake switchover • for electric gliders on the K1 joystick. Internal realtime clock for time-stamping log fi les • User-replaceable CR2032 buffer battery for the • internal realtime clock Model memory storage in a modern, non-volatile • backup system 12 control functions with simplifi ed arrangement • of operating elements for supplementary functions like switches and proportional transducers make operating convenient Convenience mode selector for simplifi ed switchover • between MODES 1 ... 4 (Gas left/right, etc.) All affected settings are also automatically switched

over. Graphic servo position display for fast, simple • overview and for checking servo movements Transmitter output swapping • Extensive programs for winged aircraft and helicopter • models: Winged aircraft menu for: 1 QR, 2 QR, 2 QR + 1, 2 and 4 WK as well as 4 QR + 2 and 4 WK, V tail unit, delta/all-wing, 2 elevator servos Surface mix: QR-diff, WK-diff, QR  SR, QR  WK, brake  HR, brake  WK, brake  QR, HR  WK, HR  QR, WK  HR, WK  QR and diff. reduction Heli menu for: 1-, 2-, 3- and 4-point linkage (1 Sv, 2 Sv, 3 Sv (2 roll), 3 Sv (140°), 3 Sv (2 nick), 4 Sv (90°)) 16 free mixers, • 8 linear mixers, 4 curve mixers and 4 cross mixers Swashplate limiter • ±150 % servo adjustment for all servo outputs, • independently adjustable per side (Single Side Servo Throw) Sub-trim in the ±125 % range for setting all neutral • servo positions Servo reverse can be programmed for all servos • Two stage DUAL RATE/EXPO system, individually • adjustable for specifi c fl ight phase and switchable during fl ight Stop watches/countdown timers with alarm function • Copy function for model memory • Built-in DSC jack for connecting fl ight simulators or a • teacher/pupil system Envisioned for a later update: • Voith-Schneider limiter, works similar to a swashplate limiter Door sequencer, e. g. for putting down landing gear automatically or retractable powerplant with runout controller Nautical program
**General HoTT features** Maximum noise immunity due to optimized frequency • hopping and wider channel spread Intelligent data transfer with correction function • 

# Computer System mx-20 12 channel remote control set with 2.4 GHz Graupner HoTT technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)

Realtime telemetry evaluation • Over 200 systems can be used simultaneously • Update capability via USB interface guarantees • future viability Simple, very fast transmitter to receiver binding • Binding with multiple receivers per model • in parallel operation is possible Extremely fast rebinding, even at maximum distance • Range test and warning function • Receiver under-voltage warning in the transmitter's • display Extremely wide receiver operating voltage range of • 3.6 V to 8.4 V (fully functional to 2.5 V) Failsafe • Arbitrary channel assignment (channel mapping), mix • functions and all servo settings can be programmed in the telemetry menu Up to 4 servos can be controlled simultaneously as • a block at a servo cycle time of 10 ms (digital servos only)13 **Introduction - Remote control set** mx-20 **HoTT technical data** Frequency band 2.4 ... 2.4835 GHz
Modulation FHSS Transmit power see country setting, page 227 Control functions 12 functions, 4 of these can be trimmed Temperature range -10 ... +55 °C Antennae collapsible Operating voltage 3.4 ... 6 V
Current draw about 180 mA
Dimensions about 190 x 195 x 90 mm Weight about 770 g with transmitter battery

**Accessories** Order No. Description **1121** Neck strap, 20 mm wide **70** Neck strap, 30 mm wide **3097** Hand transmitter wind protection

Teacher/pupil cable for mx-20 HoTT see page 201

**Replacement parts** Order No. Description **2498.4FBEC** 4NH-2000 RX RTU fl at **33800** HoTT transmitter antenna **Technical data, receiver GR-24 HoTT** Order No. **33512** Operating voltage 3.6 ... 8.4 V*
Current draw about 70 mA Frequency band 2.4 ... 2.4835 GHz
Modulation FHSS Antenna Diversity antennas, 2 x about 145 mm long, about 115 mm encapsulated and about 30 mm active Plug-in servos 12 Plug-in sensors 1 Temperature range about -10 ... +55 °C
Dimensions about 46 x 31 x 14 mm Weight about 16 g
* The specifi cation for permissible operating voltage range applies

only to the receiver. Please note in this context that receiver input voltage is applied without regulation to connected servos but the voltage range for most connectible servos (speed controls, gyros, etc.) is only 4.8 to 6 V. **The** Order No. **33124 set includes** Microcomputer transmitter mx-20 HoTT with builtin NiMH transmitter battery 4NH-2000 RX RTU fl at (change reserved), plug-in charger and Graupner bidirectional receiver GR-24 HoTT.

**Recommended charger units (accessories)**

Order No. DesignationInput voltage 220 VInput voltage 12 V appropriate for the following

batteriesintegr. balancerNiCdNiMHLiPolead battery

6411 Ultramat 8 x x x x x 6463 Ultramat 12 plus x x x x x x 6424 Ultramat 14 plus x x x x x x x 6466 Ultra Trio plus 14 x x x x x x x 6468 Ultramat 16S x x x x x x x
6469 Ultra Trio Plus 16 x x x x x x
6470 Ultramat 18 x x x x x x x
6475 Ultra Duo Plus 45 x x x x x x x
6478 Ultra Duo Plus 60 x x x x x x x
6480 Ultra Duo Plus 80 x x x x x x x

Transmitter charger cable, order no. **3022** and receiver charger cable, order no. **3021**are also needed to charge batteries. Other charger units and details about the listed chargers can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de. Other accessories are listed in the appendix or can be found in Internet at www.graupner.de. Feel free to contact your dealer too. He will be glad to provide advice.14 **Operating notices** 

# Operating notices

**Transmitter power supply** The mx-20 HoTT transmitter has a highly capacitive, rechargeable NiMH battery, 4NH-2000 RX RTU (Order

no. **2498.4FBEC** ), as standard equipment. (changes reserved) **However, the standard built-in battery is not charged upon delivery of the transmitter.**  When the transmitter is used, its battery voltage should be monitored by way of the indicators provided in the LCD display. If battery voltage drops below the adjustable voltage setting (set via item "Batterie warning" in the " **Basic Settings** " menu, page 226,), default value 4.7 V, an audible warning signal will sound and the message window shown below will appear in the screen

GRAUBELE #01

0:22h Stop Flug **«normal »**

**K78** 0:00 0:00

0.0V 10% 4.6V M x x HoTT battery needs charging

No later than now, operation must be terminated so the battery can be charged again.

Notice: Be sure that the correct battery type is set in the " **Basic Settings**  " menu, page 224! **NiMH must be set as standard.** 
**Charging the transmitter's battery** The transmitter's rechargeable NiMH battery can be recharged by connecting the charging jack located, on the right side of the transmitter, with the included charger (order no. **33116.2** ). As a rule of thumb for charging time, an completely discharged battery will require 12 hours to recharge at a current rate equal to one tenth of its specifi ed capacity. For the standard transmitter battery and included charger, this is a current rate of 200 mA. However, you must yourself ensure that the charging process is terminated when it should be ... The transmitter must be switched "OFF" during the entire charging procedure. Never switch on the transmitter when it is connected to the charger. Even a brief interruption to charging can cause charging voltage to rise to a level that will immediately damage the transmitter with over-voltage. Also for this reason, be sure all connectors are always plugged in securely and have good contact.
mx-20 **HoTT charging jack polarity** The charger cables on the market from other manufacturers often have different polarities. Therefore use only an original Graupner charger cable, order no. **3022**

.

**Charging with automatic chargers** The transmitter's charger jack does come standard with reverse polarity protection but nevertheless it can be used with suitable chargers for quick charging the transmitter's battery. Set the quick charger unit, according to its manual, for a delta peak voltage difference of 5 mV ... 20 mV or equivalent such that it is adapted for quick charging NiMH cells **First connect the charger cable's banana plugs to the charger and only then connect the cable's other**  **end into the charging jack on the transmitter. Never allow the bare ends of the banana plugs to come**  **into contact with one another when the other end of the cable is plugged into the transmitter.**  **In order to prevent damage to the transmitter, charging current**  **should never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit the current at the charger.**  **Removing the transmitter's battery** To remove the transmitter's battery, fi rst unlatch the cover of the battery compartment on the rear side of the transmitter housing then remove the cover.

Take out the transmitter's battery then disconnect the transmitter battery's connector by carefully pulling on the supply line cable. **Inserting the transmitter's battery** Hold the transmitter battery connector such that the black or brown cable is oriented toward the antenna side and the empty jack of the battery connector is oriented toward the fl oor side then push the battery connector in the direction of the board onto the three pins sticking out out of the board inside the transmitter. (The battery connector is protected against a reverse polarity connection by two slanted edges, see illustration.) Place the battery into its compartment and close the

cover. Transmitter connector polarity15 **Operating notices Battery operation timer at the bottom left of the** 

**screen** This timer shows the transmitter's cumulative operating time since the transmitter's battery was last charged. This timer is automatically reset to "0:00" when the transmitter is switched on and its battery voltage is signifi cantly higher than when the transmitter was last used, e. g. because the battery was charged.

GRAUBELE #01

0:00h Stop Flt **«normal »**

**K78** 0:00 0:00

0.0V 5.9V M x HoTT

**Lithium battery, CR 2032**
At the left side of the transmitter board there is a fi xture for a lithium battery. The user can replace this battery when necessary with another lithium battery of type CR 2032:

This battery maintains the date and time settings during a transmitter power supply outage, for example when the transmitter's main battery is being replaced.16 **Operating notices Receiver power supply**  A selection of 4 and 5 cell NiMH battery packs having different capacities are available to power the receiver. If digital servos are in use, we recommend a 5 cell battery pack (6 V) to afford adequate battery capacity. If analog and digital servos are used in mixed operation, be sure to pay attention to the given maximum permissible operating voltage. A stabilized, adjustable power supply for the receiver with 1 or 2 receiver batteries can be provided, e. g. the PRX-unit, order no. **4136** , see appendix. For reasons of safety, do not use battery boxes or dry cell batteries. The voltage of the on-board power supply will be displayed at the bottom right of the transmitter's screen while the model is in operation.

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «normal »

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT

If the adjustable warning threshold (default value 3.8 V) set in the Telemetry menu, see page 217, is underrun, an optical and acoustic under-voltage warning will be issued. **Despite this feature, be sure to check the condition of the battery at regular intervals. Do not wait for the**  **warning to be issued before recharging the battery.**

Notice: An overview of available batteries, chargers and current source test instruments can be found in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de. **Charging the receiver battery** Charger cable, order no. **3021** , can be plugged directly onto the receiver's battery for charging. If the battery in the model is connected by way of an order no. **3046**

, **3934**

, **3934.1** or **3934.3** power supply cable, then charging can be accomplished via the charging jack or special charging connector integrated into the switch. The switch in the power supply cable must be in its "OFF" position for charging.

Receiver battery connection polarity **General charging notices** The charging instructions for the charger as well as • for the battery from its manufacturer to be observed. Pay attention to the maximum permissible charging • current specifi ed by the battery's manufacturer. In order to prevent damage to the transmitter, charging current should never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit the current at the charger. If the transmitter battery is nevertheless to be • charged at a current rate in excess of 1 A, then it is imperative that this is done outside the transmitter. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the transmitter's board due to overloading its printed circuit paths and/or overheating of the battery. If an automatic charger is to be used for charging, • perform several test charging procedures to ensure the fl awless functionality of its automatic shut-off. This applies particularly if you want to charge the standard installed NiMH battery with an automatic charger unit intended for NiCd batteries Monitor the charger's shut-off behavior if it has that option. Do not execute a battery discharge or battery • maintenance program through the charger jack. The charger jack is not suitable for this purpose. Alway connect the charger cable to the charger fi rst • and then to the receiver or transmitter battery. This avoids the possibility of shorting the bare banana plug ends together. If the battery heats up signifi cantly, check the • battery's condition, replace the battery or reduce the charging current. **Never leave a charging battery unattended. •**  **Follow the safety notices and handling •**  **instructions provided on page 8.** 

# Operating notices17 **Operating notices Joystick length adjustment**  The length of both joysticks can be continuously adjusted to adapt these transmitter controls to the pilot's preference. Hold the lower half of the knurled grip in place then turn the upper section to release its counter-locked threads.

Now pull up or push down on the joystick's end to the desired length. When the length is suitable, tighten the counter-locked threads of the upper and lower sections again. **Opening the transmitter housing** Carefully read the notices below before opening the transmitter housing. It may be better if unexperienced users ask a Graupner Service location to take care of the procedures described below. The transmitter should only be opened in the following situations: to convert a neutralized joystick to a non-neutralized • joystick or a non-neutralized joystick to a neutralized joystick. to adjust joystick return tension. • Switch off the transmitter before opening its cover (power switch to " **OFF** "). Open the battery compartment as described on the previous double-page, remove the battery and if a micro SD card is inserted be sure to remove it too. Once the battery and any micro SD card have been removed, loosen the six countersunk screws on the rear of the transmitter with a Phillips, size PH1, screwdriver, see illustration. **Housing screw locations** Hold the two housing sections together by hand then turn the transmitter upright over a suitable surface so these 6 screws can fall out without getting lost. Now lift up on the backplate carefully and turn it open to the right like you would open a book.
**A T T E N T I O N: Two multi-conductor cables connect the backplate**  **with the transmitter electronics in the upper section. These connections must not be damaged.**  **Important notices: Make no modifi**  **cations of any kind to the circuitry •**  **as this will void the guarantee as well as the unit's offi**  **cial permit. Be sure not to touch the circuit boards with any**  **• metallic objects. Do not touch contacts with your**  **fi ngers.**  **Never switch the transmitter on when its housing •**  **is open. When you close the transmitter again, be sure**  **that ...** ... no cables are caught between housing edges • when the backplate is put into position. ... both housing parts are properly seated with one • another before screwing them together. Never force the housing sections together. Turn the screws down into the existing housing • threads without stripping them out. ... reconnect the battery. •18 **Operating notices** 

# Operating notices

**Converting joysticks**

**Neutralization** Both the left and the right joystick can be confi gured for neutralized or non-neutralized operation as desired. Open the transmitter housing as previously described. To change the joystick's factory setting, locate the screw shown in the fi gure below enclosed in a white circle.

Notice: The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so the corresponding screw for the right joystick is on the right side just below the middle.

Now turn this screw down until the respective joystick is free to move from limit to limit - or turn the screw out until the joystick again completely self-restoring. D

o n o

t t

o

u

c

h t

h

e o not touch the

c

i r c

u

i tb

o

a

r d

! ircuit board!DonottouchtDo not touch thecircuitboard!he circuit board!

user-replaceable CR2032 lithium battery to buffer the integrated realtime clock Slot for memory cards Charger jack l eft j o

y

s t i c

k a g

g

r e

g

a

t e oystick aggregate brake springs

adjustment screws brake springs

adjustment screws collapsible antenna

neutralization screw

r ight j o

y

s t i c

k a g

g

r e

g

a

t e oystick aggregate neutralization screw adjustment screw for joystick restoration force19 **Operating notices Joystick restoring force**  The joystick's restoring force can also be adjusted to the pilot's preference. The adjustment is located next to the return springs, see markings in the fi gure below. Spring force for the given direction of motion can be adjusted by turning the respective screw with a Phillips screwdriver. Right turn (clockwise) = return harder, • Left turn (counter clockwise) = return softer. •

**h o** 

**r i**  **z**

**o**

**n**

**t a** 

**l orizontal**  **v**

**e**

**r t**  **i c** 

**a**

**l ertical** 

Notice: The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right joystick are located to the right of the middle. **Brake spring and ratchet** The outboard screw of the two marked in the next fi gure adjusts the braking force and the inboard screw adjusts the strength of the ratchet for the respective joystick.

Notice: The aggregate for the right joystick is a mirror image of the left joystick so corresponding screws for the right joystick are located at the top left.20 **Transmitter description** 

# Transmitter description Transmitter operating elements

**Attaching the transmitter's neck strap** There is an eyelet on the top side of the mx-20 HoTT transmitter (see fi gure at the right) to which a neck strap can be attached. This anchor point has been chosen because the transmitter is optimally balanced here when it hangs from the strap. Order No. **1121** Neck strap, 20 mm wide Order No. **70** Neck strap, 30 mm wide

Important notice: In its delivered confi guration, the transmitter can only operate any servos attached to the receiver by way of the two joysticks. For reasons of fl exibility, all other operating elements (CTRL 6 ... 8, SW 1 ... 9) are designated as "free" by the software. These other operating elements can be freely assigned to actuators as described in the text for the "Control adjust" menu on page 96 (winged aircraft models) or page 100 (helicopter models). antenna with kink and twist joint

proportional speed control CTRL 7

3 position switch SW 4/5 or CTRL 9
2 position momentary contact switch SW 1

proportional speed control CTRL 6

left joystick

trimmer

ON/OFF switch

left touch pad

LC display right touch pad trimmer right joystick 2 position switch SW 3 carrying handle eyelet for neck strap

3 position switch SW 6/7 or CTRL 10 proportional speed control CTRL 8

2 position switch SW 2 2 position switch SW 8 2 position momentary contact switch SW 9 main status LED21 **Transmitter description Headset connector**  The jack centered in the lower portion of the type plate on the back of the transmitter is for connecting conventional earplugs or a headset by way of a 3.5 mm audio plug. (not included in the set) The transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those signals associated with the telemetry menu are output via this connection. These announcements are made in German language by default. More details about "Voice output" can be found in the section " **HIDDEN MODE** " beginning on page 28 and " **Telemetry** " beginning on page 208. The headset connector's volume control can be adjusted in the "Voice volume" line of the " **Basic Settings** " menu, see page 227.
**Mini-USB connector**
This connector socket is used to establish a connection between the transmitter and a PC running a Windows operating system (XP, Vista or Windows 7). The PC software required, such as a suitable USB driver, can be found on the download page for the given product on the Graupner website at www.graupner.de. Once the necessary software is installed on the PC, this USB connection can be used to update the transmitter or even just to set the date and time in the transmitter. **Data jack** For connecting the optionally available Smart-Box, Order No. **33700**

. Details about the Smart-Box can be found with the given product in the Graupner RC main catalog or in Internet at www.graupner.de. DSC jack for connecting fl ight simulators and for teacher/pupil mode housing screw housing screw

housing screw housing screw battery compartment cover housing screw housing screw

Charger jack for transmitter battery Data jack for connecting the Smart-Box, Order No. **33700**

fi ve-pole mini USB socket for connecting the transmitter to a PC earplugs or headset connector 

## Transmitter rear side22 **Transmitter description** Thus the transmitter is ready for operation. To the contrary, teacher mode for the mx-20 HoTT transmitter requires that the transmitter be switched

on prior to plugging in the respective cable. Connect the other end of the cable to the desired unit 2. in compliance with the given operating instructions for that unit. **Important: Be sure that all connectors are seated fi**  **rmly in their respective sockets.**  Notice about fl ight simulators: Because of the myriad of fl ight simulators available on the market, it may be necessary to have the contact layout of the audio plug or DSC module appropriately modifi ed by Graupner Service. 

# DSC Direct Servo Control

The acronym "DSC" is a carryover which stands for the original "Direct Servo Control" function. However, in HoTT systems the "direct servo control" function is no longer available via a diagnose cable due to technical

reasons. The standard two-pole DSC jack in the mx-20 HoTT transmitter is used as the teacher or pupil jack as well as an interface to fl ight simulators. **To ensure a proper DSC connection, please observe:**

Make any necessary menu changes. Refer to the section beginning on page 198 to adapt the mx-20 HoTT transmitter to a teacher/pupil system. When operating a fl ight simulator or when operating 1. the mx-20 HoTT transmitter as a pupil transmitter, **ALWAYS** leave the transmitter's ON/OFF switch in the " **OFF** " position as only in this position does the transmitter's RF module remain inactive after the DSC cable is inserted. This also reduces the transmitter's power consumption somewhat. The main status LED should now constantly illuminate red and the transmitter's basic setup screen should show the string "DSC pupil" on the right just below the middle timer. At the same time, the display of telemetry indicators will be suppressed.

PUPIL #11

0:01h Stop Flt **«normal »** DSC 0:00 0:00

5.9V 0.0V HoTT 

# Data storage Card slot micro SD and micro SDHC With the mx-20 HoTT transmitter switched off, removing the battery compartment cover and the transmitter's battery will make the card slot accessible (located in the right sidewall of the battery compartment). This card slot is intended for micro SD and micro SDHC type memory cards.

All conventional micro SD memory cards up to 2 GB and micro SDHC cards up to 32 GB storage capacity can be used. However, as a manufacturer we recommend the use of memory cards no larger than 4 GB as this is completely adequate for all normal situations. The type of memory card referred to here became known in conjunction with digital cameras and cell phones. It is to be pushed into the slot with its contacts upward, front facing the rear wall and latched in position there. After re-installing the battery and closing the battery compartment, the transmitter can be switched on again. The stylized image of a memory card will appear in the basic setup screen to indicate the presence of the inserted memory card.23 **Transmitter description** GRAUBELE #01

3:33h Stop Flt «normal »

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT

Notice: If a micro SD card is inserted, be sure to remove it BEFORE taking off the transmitter's backplate. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the memory card.
**Data acquisition / storage** The storage of data on the SD card is coupled to the fl ight timer. If this timer is started – when a suitable memory card is inserted in the card slot and a telemetry link to the receiver exists – both the timer and data acquisition will stop when the fl ight timer is stopped. The fl ight timer is started and stopped as described in the section "Timers (general)" on page 138. While data acquisition is ongoing, the on-screen card image will blink continuously at a slow rate. The amount of data written on the memory card is presented as a black bar graph which grows from left to right as data fi lls the memory card. After a data acquisition session is fi nished, there will be an (empty) folder "Models" and a "LogData" folder on the memory card. Within the "LogData" folder there will be log fi les in sub-folders that are designated with names in the format 0001_year-month-day.bin, 0002_ year-month-day.bin, etc. If a model memory folder is still "unnamed" when the memory card is removed from the transmitter and inserted into the card slot of a PC orlaptop, the respective log fi les can be found in a subfolder designated "NoName". There is a PC program available on the transmitter's download web page at www.graupner.de with which the stored data can be evaluated on a compatible PC. **Importing voice fi les**  As already mentioned in the section "Headsets" on page 21, this connection can also be used to output the transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those signals and announcements associated with telemetry menu settings. These announcements are made in German language by default. These announcements are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a transmitter-internal memory but they can be replaced by a voice packet of a different language at any time. More information about this can be found in the section

" **HIDDEN MODE** " beginning on page 28. **Importing/exporting model memories** Any model memory can be stored to an inserted memory card or from an inserted card into the transmitter. This feature is intended to support data exchange between identical transmitters or even use as data backup. More information about this can be found in the section

" **Copying/deleting** " beginning on page 64.

Notice: Some special symbols that can be used in model names are subject to specifi c restrictions associated with the FAT or FAT32 fi le system used by the memory cards and these special symbols will be replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~).24 **Transmitter description - Display and keypad** 

# Display and keypad

Signal strength indicator **Battery time** since last re-charge in h:min **Flight timer**in min:s (upward/downward) **Stopwatch** in min:s (upward/downward)

**Flight phase name** switchover between fl ight phases by switch **Receiver power supply voltage right touch pad:**    Paging / changing values **SET**select / confi rm **Model name**

**Memory location 1 ... 24**

**Battery voltage and charge state bars** (if the preset threshold voltage is underrun, a warning will appear – see "Warnings" on page 36 –, and an acoustic warning tone will sound) optical indication of trim lever positions or, during activation of speed controls CTRL 7 + 8, an alternative display of the current positions of these controls

**Model type indicator** (winged aircraft / helicopter)

**left touch pad**
  paging
 simultaneously pressed: Change to the servo display menu
**ESC** = cancel/return **ESC** touched for about 1 s: Change to the Telemetry menu and return to basic display possible warnings, see page 36

simultaneous pressing of  or  = **CLEAR**25 **Transmitter description - Display and keypad** 

# Operating the "data terminal" Entry keys **ESC** and **SET** Display symbols **Displayed telemetry symbols** the active model memory has not yet "bonded"

with a HoTT receiver. More about the "Binding" process, see page 69 or 75. non-blinking: Switched off on RF transmitter side blinking antenna symbol: The last receiver bound to the active model is inactive or out of range

> Mx no telemetry signal to receive

> M signal strength indicator

> P indicator for pupil signal strength on the teacher transmitter display **Keys left of the display ESC**  • key brief repeated pressing the **ESC** key will cause a stepwise return to the function selection screen or even further to the base screen. Any changes made to settings remain. Momentarily touching the **ESC** key for about 1 s while in the base screen will open and close the Telemetry menu. arrow keys •   Momentarily pressing one of these keys will cause 1. analogous paging in the given arrow direction through lists, e. g. through the model selection list or the multi-function list or within menus though the menu's lines. Simultaneous pressing on 2.  will change the transmitter's base screen and almost any menu position to the " **Servo display** " menu. **Keys to the right of the display SET**  • button After switching the transmitter on, briefl y pressing 1. the **SET**key will cause a jump from the displayed base screen to the Multi-function menu. In the same manner a selected menu can now be called up with the **SET**key. Momentarily pressing the 2. **SET**key from within the Basic Settings menu will activate / deactivate (confi rm) the given setting fi elds. arrow keys •   1. "Paging" through the Multi-function menu and the menu lines within the Basic Settings menu analogous to the arrow keys of the left touch pad. 2. Select or set parameters in setting fi elds after they have been activated by briefl y touching the **SET** key, whereby the  keys and  are used for the same corresponding functions. In this case it is completely irrelevant which of these two keys are used. By briefl y pressing the 3.  keys simultaneously

or  an altered parameter value for the active entry fi eld will again be restored to its default value ( **CLEAR)**

. Notice: Touching the given touch pad does not itself initiate • the given action but rather the end of the touch. In the event the touch pads do not exhibit any • functionality immediately after switching the transmitter off and then on again right away, this is not a fault. Just switch the transmitter off again then wait for several seconds before switching it on again.26 **Transmitter description - Shortcuts** 

## Shortcuts

The following key combinations can be used to directly call up certain menus and options: **CLEAR** • Brief simultaneous activation of the  keys or  on the right touch pad will restore the active entry fi eld's changed parameter value back to its default value.

" • **Servo screen** " Brief simultaneous activation of the  keys of the left touch pad will cause a jump from the transmitter's base screen or from almost any menu position to the

" **Servo** " menu, see page 230.

" • **Telemetry** " menu Press the center **ESC** key in the left touch pad for about 1 s to call up the "Telemetry" menu from the transmitter's base screen, see text beginning on page 208, or to return to the base screen again. **Graphic display of telemetry data •**  Briefl y touching one of the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad will cause a jump from the base screen directly to the transmitter's graphic display of telemetry data or will allow paging back and forth between individual graphic displays. Briefl y touching the centered **ESC** or **SET**key will cause a return back to the base screen.

" • **HIDDEN MODE** " (language selection and contrast) Press and hold arrow keys  of the left touch pad then momentarily touch the **SET**key of the right touch pad, see next double-page. **Entry lockout** • Entry lockout is activated and deactivated from the base screen by simultaneously pressing the **ESC** and **SET**keys for a little longer (about 2 s). **Quick-Select •**  From the multi-function list, a jump can be made to a "Structure overview" by a brief, simultaneous touch on the  or  keys of the right touch pad. Menus are arranged in clear groups in this overview.

Memory Servo settings Transm. controls Switches Flight phases Timers Mixers Special funct. Global functions All menus

Now the desired group can be selected with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad ...

Memory Servo settings Transm. controls Switches Flight phases All menus

... and then briefl y touching the center **SET**key in the right touch pad. As soon as the key is released, only the respective generic term for the given menu will remain listed. For example: Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select27 **Transmitter description - Concealed menu columns** 

## Concealed menu columns

Some menus have concealed columns to improve legibility. Menus with concealed columns can be recognized by virtue of a triangle pointing to the right in the bottom left corner of the screen. For example, in the menu " **Servo settings** ":

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

In this menu, e. g. the column "lim" +" (servo travel limit) to the right of column "- travel +" is "concealed". To reach this column, use the pointing triangle at the bottom left of the screen to push the frame marker with the arrow key  of the left or right touch pad to just beyond the column for "- travel +":

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + lim 0% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% S4 S5

To again return to the now-concealed column "- travel +" or even further to the left, push the frame marker with arrow key  of the left or right touch pad appropriately to the left: S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

This procedure is analogous for the other menus.28 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** The **mx-20** HoTT transmitter's " HIDDEN MODE " can be reached from almost any menu position by pressing and holding the  arrow keys of the left touch pad and the **SET**key of the right touch pad for about one second until the screen shown below is displayed.

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0 DEUTSCH VOICE DEUTSCH STICK CALI.

**CONTRAST** The screen's contrast characteristic can be adapted as needed in this screen's "CONTRAST" line, as described in more detail on pages 226/226, by tapping on the center **SET**key of the right touch pad. Tapping again on the **SET**or **ESC** keys will cause a return to line selection. The line ...
**LANGUAGE** ... can be reached by tapping arrow key  in the left or right touch pad. One of the transmitter's available languages can then be selected from the screen which appears.

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0 DEUTSCH VOICE DEUTSCH STICK CALI.

Activate language selection by pressing on the center 

## HIDDEN MODE Language selection and display contrast **SET**key in the right touch pad.

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0

VOICE DEUTSCH STICK CALI. DEUTSCH

Now the default language "GERMAN" can be replaced with the desired language by making a selection with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example:

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0

VOICE DEUTSCH STICK CALI. ENGLISH

Confi rm the selection by tapping again on the center **SET**key in the right touch pad. All settings stored in the transmitter remain intact after a change of language has been made. The following languages are available for selection at the time this handbook was printed: German • English • French • The Italian and Spanish languages are planned for inclusion at a later point in time. These will then be made available by way of an update download from the transmitter's web page at the Graupner website www.graupner.de. **VOICE TRIGGER** As mentioned in section "Headsets" on page 21, the transmitter's acoustic signals as well as those signals and announcements associated with the telemetry menu can be output by way of the headset connector. These announcements are made in German language by default. These announcements are summarized in a voice packet which is stored in a transmitter-internal memory but they can be replaced by a voice packet of a different language at any time. The following languages are available for selection at the time this handbook was printed: German • English • French • The Italian and Spanish languages are planned for inclusion at a later point in time. These will then be made available on the transmitter's download web page at the Graupner website www.graupner.de. The given active language packet can then be swapped out either with the PC program (also available as a download from the transmitter's web page at www.graupner.de) or per SD card as described below. **Preparation** If not already done, insert the SD card or SDHC card into the transmitter as described on page 22. Now when the transmitter is switched on it will perform some operations which will include the creation of a "VoiceFile" on the memory card. Take this memory card, which has now been prepared by the transmitter, out of the transmitter and insert it into a suitable card reader. If necessary, attach the card reader to your PC or laptop. Now copy the language29 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** packet downloaded from the transmitter's web page (e.g. "voice_gb.vdf") into the folder created by the transmitter. Now take the memory card out of the card reader and re-insert it into the transmitter. Once the memory card is inserted in the transmitter, switch the transmitter on with RF switched off

.

RF on/off? ON Please select

OFF

**Language change** Use the left or right arrow touch key to select the line "VOICE".

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0

VOICE DEUTSCH STICK CALI. ENGLISH

Activate language selection by pressing the center **SET** key in the right touch pad.

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0

VOICE STICK CALI. ENGLISH DEUTSCH

Now use the right touch pad arrow keys to replace the default language "DEUTSCH" with the language you want. For example:  HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0

VOICE STICK CALI. ENGLISH ENGLISH

Confi rm your selection with another tap on the center **SET**key in the right touch pad. The selected language packet will be loaded into the transmitter's memory.

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0

VOICE STICK CALI. ENGLISH ENGLISH

22/100% I The loading process is fi nished as soon as the progress bar at the lower edge of the display disappears.

 HIDDEN MODE  CONTRAST LANGUAGE 0

VOICE STICK CALI. ENGLISH ENGLISH

When this process is fi nished, switch off the transmitter. All settings stored in the transmitter remain intact after a change of language has been made. Notice: If the warning ... •

RF MUST BE OFF OK
... appears, then the transmitter's RF radiation is still active. Jump to the " **Basic settings** " menu, select the "RF transmit" line, select its "OFF" option and then repeat the procedure If the warning ... •
SD-CARD INSERT OK
... appears then the transmitter does not detect a memory card in its card slot or the card found cannot be read. If the warning ... •

MISSING IMPORT

DATA

OK ... appears then the transmitter could not fi nd an appropriate fi le on the inserted memory card.
**JOYSTICK CALIBRATION** If you feel the neutral position of your self-calibrating joysticks (controls 1 ... 4) are not exactly 0 % of their control travel, then this can be checked and, if necessary, corrected as follows. Jump to the " **Model select** " menu and initialize a free model memory as described on page 60. Whether the model to be initialized is a winged aircraft or a helicopter is irrelevant.30 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** Wait for the notices which typically appear in the base screen following a model change then jump to the

" **Servo display** " menu, for example by simultaneously touching the  keys of the left touch pad (WITHOUT any interim change to trim settings or other program settings). If all four of your transmitter's joystick functions are still self-neutralizing, this display should ideally look like the one shown below.

1 3 5 7



### + 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8



### + 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% –100%

0% 0%

Otherwise the graph bars show current setting percentages for joystick control functions which are not self-neutralizing – typically for the "K1", throttle/brake or throttle/pitch, control stick. For example, if the throttle/ brake control stick is in its "quarter-throttle" position, the display would appear as shown below.

1 3 5 7



### + 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8



### + 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% –50%

0% 0%

One after the other, put both joysticks into each of their four possible limit positions without exerting force at the limit position. In each of these eight possible limit positions, the – side dependent – indication for exactly -100 % or +100 % should be displayed. For example, if Control 2 is at its left limit and the other three joystick functions are in their respective middle positions then your transmitter's display should look like the one shown below.

1 3 5 7



### + 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8



### + –100% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% 0%

0% 0%

Regardless of the number of self-neutralizing joystick functions available on your transmitter, if these checks produce four 0 % results and eight 100 % results then your transmitter's joysticks are optimally calibrated. You can terminate this process then, if appropriate, delete the model memory just created. Otherwise jump (as described at the outset of the previous double page) to the "Stick cali." line in the

" **HIDDEN MODE** " menu then briefl y touch the center **SET**key in the right touch pad.

STICK CALIBRATION C ONTRAST L ANGUAGE 0

V OICE DEUTSC H ENGLIS H

S TICK CALI.

0%  

The arrow keys  of the right touch pad will now allow you to cyclically select the four calibrated joystick planes, e.g. the left/right plane of the right joystick. STICK CALIBRATION C ONTRAST L ANGUAGE 0

V OICE DEUTSC H ENGLIS H

S TICK CALI.

0%

Now position the right joystick – without exerting extra force – to its left limit corresponding with the on-screen blinking arrow pointing to the left.

STICK CALIBRATION C ONTRAST L ANGUAGE 0

V OICE DEUTSC H ENGLIS H

S TICK CALI.

+100%

... and briefl y touch the center **SET**key in the right touch pad. This concludes this example calibration of the right joystick's left limit. The circle in the middle of the stylized joystick plane will now blink as confi rmation of the calibration.

STICK CALIBRATION C ONTRAST L ANGUAGE 0

V OICE DEUTSC H ENGLIS H

S TICK CALI.

+100%

Now release the self-neutralizing joystick so it can return to its center position and then tap again on the center **SET**key to calibrate the joystick's centered position. The right arrow marker will begin to blink.31 **Transmitter description - Hidden mode** STICK CALIBRATION C ONTRAST L ANGUAGE 0

V OICE DEUTSC H ENGLIS H

S TICK CALI.

0%

Repeat the calibration process for the right limit of the right joystick. The other joystick planes are calibrated analogously.

Notice: Correct any bad calibrations by repeating the • respective process. Within a given joystick plane, each of the three • calibration positions can be selected directly with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. Briefl y touching the center **ESC** key of the left touch pad will terminate the process and return to the sub-menu "Stick cali.".32 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display** As described on page 220 in the context of sub-menu

" **SENSOR SELECT** " for the " **Telemetry** " menu ...

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG
... the output of sensors attached to the receiver can be processed and activated for graphic presentation on the screen. This data is then appropriately displayed by the graphic indicators described below. These graphic elements can be reached from the transmitter's base screen by briefl y touching the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad. Page back and forth between individual graphic elements with the same keys and return to the base screen again with the **ESC** key.

Notice: The sequence of the following element descriptions corresponds to their selection sequence when touching the  key. More details about the following named modules can be found in the appendix and in Internet at www.graupner. de in the web page for the given product. **RECEIVER**

RX–S QUA: 100% RX–S STR: 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP L–PACK: 10ms

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE R–LOW V:4.6 +22°C This screen presents the " **RX DATAVIEW** " of the Telemetry menu's " **SETTING & DATA VIEW** ", see page 209, with data processed and displayed graphically. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation** RX-S QUA signal quality in % RX-S ST signal strength in % RX-dBm reception power in dBm TX-dBm transmit power in dBm V PACK Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data packages are lost in the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver. RX-VOLT current operating voltage of the receiver's power supply in volts M-RX V lowest receiver operating voltage since last startup, in volts TMP the thermometer depicts the receiver's current operating temperature **AKKU 1 (GENERAL + ELECTRIC modules)** 

# 0.0V 0.0A 0mAh

This display depicts current voltage, current current draw and, if attached, the expended capacity of "Batt 1" connected to the General-Engine (Order No. **33610** ), General-Air (Order No. **33611** ) or Electric-Air module (Order No. **33620)**

. **SENSOR 1 (GENERAL + ELECTRIC module)**



# 0.0V 0°C SENSOR 1

If attached, this display depicts currenly measured voltage and temperature from a "T(EMP)1" temperature/voltage sensor, Order No. **33612** or **33613** for General-Engine (Order No. **33610** ), General-Air (Order No. **33611** ) or Electric-Air module (Order No. **33620).** 

## Telemetry data display33 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display SENSOR 2 (GENERAL + ELECTRIC modules)** 



# 0.0V 0°C SENSOR 2

If attached, this display depicts currently measured voltage and temperature from a "T(EMP)2" temperature/ voltage sensor, Order No. **33612** or **33613** for GeneralEngine (Order No. **33610** ), General-Air (Order No. **33611** ) or Electric-Air module (Order No. **33620). Rotary speed sensor** 



# U/min 

# 0

0 0

If attached, this display depicts the speed measured by a speed sensor, Order No. **33615** or **33616,** for a General-Engine (Order No. **33610** ), General-Air (Order No. **33611** ) or Electric-Air module (Order No. **33620).**

Notice: The appropriate blade count must fi rst be set in the module's telemetry menu before the correct speed can be displayed. **Vario** 

# 0.0 0 m m s

If attached, this display will depict altitude relative to location or starting location (in m) as well as the current ascent/decent rate (in m/s) from data provided by a GPS-/Vario module (Order No. **33600)** or Vario module (Order No. **33601)** connected to the receiver's telemetry connection.
**GPS**

N

W E

S Kmh 0 km/h DIS m
m/s ALT m 

# 0 0 0.0 0

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order No. **33600**

. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation** km/h Speed
DIS horizontal distance in m
m/s ascent/decent rate in m/s ALT altitude relative to starting location in m **GPS**

N RXSQ 0 DIS 0m ALT 0m 0.0m/1s 0m/3s 0m/10s N 0°00.0000 E 0°00.0000 W E

S Kmh 0

If attached to the receiver, this display will depict the data from a GPS module with integrated Vario, Order No. **33600**

. Aside from the model's current position and speed, the center section of this screen will also display current altitude with respect to the starting location as well as the model's current ascent/decent rate in m/1 s, m/3 s and m/10 s, current reception quality and the model's distance from its starting location. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation**
W / N / E / S west / north / east / south Kmh speed RXSQ return channel signal strength
DIS distance ALT current altitude with respect to starting
m/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent rate
m/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent rate
m/10 s m/10 s ascent/decent rate34 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display VARIO** 

RXSQ 0

MAX 0m

MIN 0m ALT 0 H

L m/1s

0.0

m/3s

0.0

m/10s 0.0 If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the data acquired by a Vario module, Order No. **33601**

. The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation**
ALT current altitude RXSQ Signal strength of the signal received by the receiver in %, see page 209. MAX the preset maximum altitude limit relative to starting location at which, when exceeded, will cause an audible warning to be sounded MIN the preset minimum altitude limit relative to the starting location at which, when underrun, will cause an audible warning to be sounded
m/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent rate
m/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent rate
m/10 s m/10 s ascent/decent rate **ELECTRIC AIR MODULE**

0.0V 0m/3s BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C 0 1L0.00 2L0.00 3L0.00 4L0.00 5L0.00 6L0.00 ALT 0m

7L0.00 0.0V 0A

0.0V 0m/3s BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C 0 1H0.00 2H0.00 3H0.00 4H0.00 5H0.00 6H0.00 ALT 0m

7H0.00 0.0V 0A

If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the data acquired by an Electric-Air module, Order No. **33620** . More details about this module can be found in the appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web page for the given product. Depending on how this module is equipped with sensors, this screen can permanently display the data shown in the adjacent table. The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and BAT2), up to two temperature measurements (T1 and T2), current altitude with respect to the starting location, the model's ascent/decent rate in m/1 s and m/3 s and, in the middle of the screen, the current draw currently being taken from a power source. Along the right edge of the screen is a table of alternating values for cell voltages at balancer connections (L) or voltages for up to 7 attached battery cell packs (H). The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation** V current voltage
A current current BAT1 / BAT2 battery 1 or 2
ALT current altitude
m/1 s m/1 s ascent/decent rate
m/3 s m/3 s ascent/decent rate T1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2 L or H cell voltage of cells 1 ... 14 (14 max) L = balancer connection 1 H = balancer connection 2

**GENERAL MODULE**

0.0V BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C E FUEL F CELL V 1:0.00 2:0.00 3:0.00 4:0.00 5:0.00 6:0.00 0

0.0V BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 0°C T1 0°C E FUEL F ALT 0m 0m1 0m3

0.0A

POWER 0.0V

0 If attached to the receiver, this screen will display the data acquired by a General-Engine module, Order No. **33601** , or a General-Air module, Order No. **33611**

. More details about these modules can be found in the35 **Transmitter description - Telemetry data display** appendix or in Internet at www.graupner.de in the web page for the given product. Depending on how this module is equipped with sensors, this screen can permanently display the data shown in the table below. The current voltage of up to two batteries (BAT1 and BAT2), the measurement results of up to two temperature sensors (T1 and T2) and a fi ll level gage for the fuel tank. An alternating display along the screen's right edge will display a list of current cell voltages for a LiPo battery with up to six cells or operational data (current altitude with respect to the starting location, ascent/decent m/1 s and m/3 s, current current being drawn in amperes and current voltage of the battery connected to the sensor). The displayed items are as follows: **Value Explanation** BAT1 / BAT2 battery 1 or 2 FUEL fuel level / tank gage E / F empty **/** full T1 / T2 temperature of sensor 1 or 2 CELL V voltage of cells 1 ... 6 (6 max)
ALT current altitude
0m1 m/1 s ascent/decent rate
0m3 m/3 s ascent/decent rate A current draw i amperes V battery voltage36 **Transmitter description - Warning notices Warning notices** 

BIND N/A OK "Bind not available" A receiver has not yet been bound to the currently active model memory. Briefl y touching the **SET**key will cause a direct jump to the appropriate option.

RF on/off? OFF ON Please select Please select RF transmission "ON" or "OFF".

battery needs charging Operating voltage is too low

Fail Safe setup t.b.d. Failsafe has not yet been activated

MISSING

IMPORT

DATA

OK A suitable language fi le cannot be found on the memory card

Throttle too high ! Helicopter throttle joystick or limiter too high

RF MUST BE OFF OK Prompt to switch off RF transmission (language fi le can only be loaded when RF is switched off ) 

## Warning notices

CAN‘T RECEIVE

DATA

OK No bound receiver in range

No pupil signal Connection between teacher and pupil is interrupted

SD-CARD

INSERT OK No SD or SDHC memory card in the card slot or card is not legible Is the "wireless teacher/pupil connection" that was • active when the transmitter was last used to be continued, **CONT**or switched off **OFF** ?

TRAINER Wireless Link ACT INH
After being switched on, the transmitter has not • been used within the time limit preset in the "Poweron beep" line of the " **Basic Settings** " menu, see page 227. The message ...

Power on waning is active!

... will appear in the screen, the center LED will alternately blink red and blue and an acoustic warning tone will sound. If the transmitter continues unused it will autonomously switch itself off after one minute. When battery voltage is too low, a model change is • blocked for reasons of safety. The screen will show an appropriate message. not possible now voltage too low37 **Transmitter description - Function fi elds, position indicator and entry lockout**  As soon as one of the proportional controls (CTRL 7 & 8) in the middle console is turned, a small symbol will appear to the left of the two vertical position indicators.

At the same time, for the duration of the control's operation, the position indicator for the two vertical bars in the middle will change from displaying current trim position to a display of the respective current position of the proportional controls CTRL 7 & 8. Logically, the left proportional control (CTRL 7) is displayed by the left bar indicator and the right bar indicator displays the position of the right proportional control (CTRL 8). The two horizontal bars continue to show current trim positions of respective joystick trim controls.

GRAUBELE #01

3:33h Stop Flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

RX0.0V 5.2V M HoTT

About 2 seconds after operating one of the proportional controls has ended, the display will again revert to display of current trim positions of the four trim controls generated by the two joysticks. 

## Position indicator Proportional controls, CTRL 7 and 8 The touch keys can be locked out to prevent unintended access and operation of settings. This lockout is established (when the mx-20 HoTT transmitter is displaying its base screen) by simultaneously pressing and holding both the **ESC** and **SET**keys for about two seconds. This lockout condition is indicated by a key symbol, located at the intersection point of the trim bars, which is displayed in reverse video.

GRAUBELE #01

3:33h Stop Flt «normal »

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT

The lockout is effective immediately but controls remains operationally ready. The lockout can be removed by again touching and holding the **ESC** and **SET**keys for about two seconds. A lockout condition is also removed the next time the transmitter is switched on. 

## Function fi elds in the display **SEL**

, **STO**

, **SYM**

, **ASY**

, , 

## Entry lockout

Depending on the given menu, certain function fi elds will appear on the bottom display line.

CLR SEL STO SYM ASY
A marked function is activated by tapping on the **SET** key.

**Function fi elds**  **CLR** • (clear) delete **SEL •**  (select): selection **STO •**  (store): store (e. g. control position) **SYM •**  set values symmetrically **ASY •**  set values asymmetrically • switch symbol fi eld (assignment of all types of switches) • within a menu, change to the second page (menu continuation)38 **Putting the transmitter into operation Preliminary remarks**  Graupner's HoTT system theoretically permits simultaneous operation of more than 200 models. However, because of the interspersed radio-frequency utilization permitted by certifi cation for the 2.4 GHz ISM band, this number is signifi cantly lower in practical application. Nevertheless, in general more models can be operated simultaneously in the 2.4 GHz band than would be the case in conventional 35 or 40 MHz frequency bands. The real limiting factor is – as often before – is still likely to be the size of available operating space (i.e. airspace for aircraft). Alone the fact that it is no longer necessary to coordinate transmitting frequencies with other pilots in the vicinity (which is sometimes quite diffi cult in broken landscapes, such as on hillside slopes) represents an enormous boost for remote control operating security. **Battery charged?** Since the transmitter is delivered with an empty (not charged) battery, the battery must fi rst be charged according to the charging instructions on page 14. Otherwise a warning tone will be sounded when the low voltage threshold, preset in the "Batterie warning" line of the " **Basic Settings** ", is underrun. This low voltage threshold can be set, as described on page 226. When this threshold is underrun, a warning tone will be sounded and an appropriate message will be overlaid on the base screen. **Transmitter startup** After being switched on, the message shown below will appear in the transmitter's screen for about two seconds. RF on/off? OFF ON Please select

Within this brief period you may be able to switch off RF transmission by using the  or  key of the right touch pad to shift the query's response from "ON" to "OFF" such that the **ON** option is displayed in normal video and the **OFF**option is highlighted in reverse video.

RF on/off? ON Please select

OFF
Now switch the RF module off by tapping on the center **SET**key in the right key pad. The center LED, which in the meantime has been illuminating in blue, will change its color to red again and the transmitter's display will show the screen depicted below.

GRAUBELE #01

0:33h Stop Flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

0.0V 5.2V M HoTT

The symbol combination means that the currently active model memory has already "bonded " with a Graupner HoTT receiver in the past but there is no connection to this receiver at the moment. (In this example, RF transmission has been switched off.) If the transmitter were to be switched on without switching off RF transmission, the center LED would illuminate in blue and the symbolic transmitter antenna battery needs charging 

# Putting the transmitter into operation Preliminary remarks about the mx-20 HoTT transmitter

in the screen would blink. At the same time, an acoustic warning will sound until a connection is established with the respective receiver. As soon as this connection is established, the "x" at the base of the antenna symbol will be replaced by a fi eld strength indicator, for example , and the optical and acoustic warnings will stop. If a telemetry connection has also been established for the incoming signal, that is output by the receiver in the model, then the right side of this same screen line will display a similar indication of signal strength for this reception of the receiver's transmitted signal (> M ) as well as the current voltage of the receiver's power supply. On the other hand, if the screen displays the symbol combination and the center LED illuminates in red continuously then the currently active model memory is not "bonded" to any receiver. **Under-voltage warning** If transmitter voltage drops below the adjustable threshold specifi ed in the " **General Settings** " menu, see page 226 (default value, 4.7 V), an optical and an acoustic under-voltage warning will be issued. **Important notices: The transmitter in the set is already preset, as**  **• delivered, with default values which are correct**  **for operation in most European countries (except France).**  **If the remote control system is to be operated in France then the transmitter MUST be changed over**  **to "FRANCE" mode, see page 227. IN NO CASE may the Universal/EUROPE mode be used IN FRANCE.**  **The receiver included in the set •**  **with the** mx-20 **HoTT 2.4 transmitter (and already bound to the transmitter by settings made in the factory) is** 39 **Putting the transmitter into operation capable of operating up to 12 servos.**  **In order to achieve the greatest possible fl**  **exibility but still preclude unnecessary inadvertent operator errors, control channels 5 ...**  **12 have not been assigned to any controls. This means that servos connected by way of these**  **channels will remain in their middle positions until an operator element has been assigned.**  **Practically all mixers are initially inactive for this same reason. More about this can be found**  **on page 96 (winged aircraft) or 100 (helicopter models).**  **The fundamental procedure for initial •**  **programming of a new model memory location can be found on page 60 and the programming**  **examples that begin on page 236. When the remote control system is switched on,**  **• being bonded or when making settings, that the**  **transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antennas. If the transmitter's**  **antenna is brought too close to the receiver's antennas this will cause receiver over-modulation**  **and its red LED will illuminate. At the same time the return channel will drop out and, as a**  **consequence, the fi eld strength indicator in the**  **transmitter's screen will be replaced by an "x" and the receiver's current battery voltage display will**  **show 0.0 V. The remote control is then in Fail-Save mode, see page 196, i. e. when signal reception**  **drops out all servos will remain in their current positions until a valid signal is again received.**  **In such a case, increase the distance (between the transmitter and the model containing the**  **receiver) until the indicators are again "normal".** Transmitter fi rmware updates are made at one's own risk by connecting the fi ve-pole mini-USB connector on the rear side of the transmitter to a PC running Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7. Current software and information is available in Internet at www.graupner.de under the download link for the given product.

Notice: You will automatically be notifi ed of new updates per email after registering your transmitter at https://www.graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung. The USB cable delivered with the USB interface option, Order No. **7168.6** , is also needed to make an update. This cable's connector is plugged directly into the 5-pole mini-USB connector socket on the rear side of the transmitter **Updating** mx-20 **HoTT software**

**Notice: Be sure to check the charge status of your**  **transmitter's battery or charge its battery as a precaution before every update. Also backup all**  **occupied model memories so they can be restored if that should become necessary.**  **1. Installing drivers** Install the required driver software, included in the "USB Drivers" folder of the program packet, onto your PC or laptop so your computer can handle the transmitter's integrated USB interface. Start driver installation with a double-click on the respective fi le and follow the on-screen instructions. Once this software has been successfully installed, the computer must be re-started. Drivers only need to be installed once. **Installing the software up-loader 2.**  Unpack fi le "Radio_grStudio_Install_VerXX.zip" and start the actual installation program "Radio_ grStudio_Install_VerXX.msi" with a double-click then follow the instructions. This program is installed by default under "Start\ Programs\Graupner\ Radio_grStudio\Radio_ grStudio_Ver-SX.X". **Establishing a transmitter-to-PC connection 3.**  With the transmitter switched off, connect the USB cable by way of its 5-pole mini-USB socket to the rear side of the transmitter. **Updating 4.**  mx-20 **HoTT transmitter software** Start the "Radio_grStudio_Ver-SX.X" program from the respective folder, by default at "Start\Programs\Graupner\ Radio_grStudio\Radio_grStudio_VerSX.X".

Use the selection sequence "Menu", "Port Setup" or open the "Controller Menu" and click on "Port select". 

## Transmitter fi rmware updates40 **Putting the transmitter into operation** Now in the "Port select" window, select the COM port connected to the USB interface. The correct port can be recognized by its designation "Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge" in the "Device Name" column. In the above example this would be the "COM 3" port. Now call up menu option "Firmware Upgrade" from "Menu" or open the "Controller Menu" and click on "Firmware Upgrade".

Click on the button labeled "File Browse" and select the desired fi rmware update fi le with a ".bin" fi lename extension from the "Open fi le" window. Firmware fi les are product-specifi cally coded, i. e. if you should accidentally select a fi le which does not correspond to the product (e. g. receiver update fi le instead of a transmitter update fi le), the "Product code error" popup window will appear and the block the update process from starting. Now switch on the transmitter then start the transmitter update by clicking on the "Download Start" button. After a brief period a warning will appear stating that the transmitter's RF transmission will now be interrupted and that, because of this, any receiver system currently in operation should be switched off. Switch off your receiver system if it is switched on then click on "Yes".

This will start the actual update process. A progress bar will begin to operate above a sequence of running text lines. Do not terminate the update process before the progress bar has reached its right end and the "Firmware Download Success" message appears.

Click on "OK". Subsequently switch off the transmitter and disconnect the USB cable between the transmitter and the PC or Laptop. If the progress bar hangs up without showing any further progress, close the program and repeat the update process. Be sure to watch for any error messages that may appear.41 **Your notes**42 **Putting the transmitter into operation** 

# Receiver initialization Preliminary remarks about the GR-24 receiver

**Receiver system**
The mx-20 HoTT remote control set includes a type GR-24, 2.4 GHz bidirectional receiver for connecting up to 12 servos. After switching on this HoTT receiver, should "its" transmitter not be within range or switched off, then the receiver's red LED will illuminate continuously for about 1 s then begin to blink slowly. This indicates the receiver has not (yet) established a link to a Graupner HoTT transmitter. If a link has been established, the green LED will illuminate continuously and the red LED will extinguish. In order to establish a link to the transmitter, the Graupner HoTT receiver must fi rst be "bound" to "its" particular model memory in "its" Graupner HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding". This "binding" linkage is only necessary once for each receiver/model memory combination. Refer to pages 69 or 74. The "binding" procedure has been done at the factory for model memory 1 of the units delivered together as a set so this "binding" procedure will only be necessary to link additional receivers or if a memory location change becomes necessary (and – e. g. after a change of transmitter – can be repeated anytime). **On-board voltage display** The current voltage of the receiver's power supply will be shown in the right side of the transmitter's screen if a telemetry link exists between the receiver and transmitter. **Temperature warning** Should the receiver's temperature sink below an adjustable threshold (default value -10 °C) or rise above an adjustable threshold (default value +55 °C), an acoustic warning will be issued by the transmitter in the form of a uniform beep of about 1 s duration. The aforementioned threshold limits are stored and adjusted in the receiver. **Servo connections and polarity** Graupner HoTT receiver servo connections are numbered. The connectors used are keyed against polarity reversal. Pay attention to the small side profi les when plugging in these connectors. Never use force. The two outer connections, having designations "11+B-" and "12+B-" are intended for the battery connections. These two connections plus the servo's respective connections can be combined into a single connector at each end by way of a V or Y cable, Order No. **3936.11**

. **Do not reverse the polarity of this connection. Reversed polarity could destroy the receiver and**  **devices attached to it.** The supply voltage is bussed across (i.e. common for) all numbered connections. The function of every individual channel is determined by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. It is not only the throttle servo connection which is different for every manufacturer and model type. For example, in Graupner remote control systems the throttle servo is on channel 1 for winged aircraft and on channel 6 for helicopter models. Concluding notices: The signifi cantly greater servo resolution • characteristic of the HoTT system produces a noticeably fi rmer response behavior in comparison to previous technology. Please take the time to familiarize yourself with this sensitive behavior. If you have a speed controller with integrated BEC* • arranged in parallel with the receiver battery, its positive pole (red cable) may to be removed from the 3-pole connector. Be sure to look for notices about this in the instructions for the speed controller used. Use a small screwdriver to carefully lift the connector's middle latch slightly (1),pull on the red wire to remove its connector pin from the connector (2) then put insulation tapearound the removed connector pin to prevent possible short circuit conditions (3). red

1

2 3

Follow the installation instructions on page 46 for the receiver, the receiver antenna and for mounting the

servo.
**Reset** To execute a reset of the receiver, press and hold the **SET**button on the receiver's top-side while switching the power supply on. Once power is on, release the button again. If a receiver reset is done while the transmitter is switched off or on a receiver which is not bound, the receiver's LED will slowly blink red for about 2 or 3 seconds and then a binding procedure can be started right away on the transmitter. If reset is done on a bound receiver and the corresponding model memory is active in the powered on transmitter, the LED will illuminate in green after a brief period as an indication that your transmitter/ receiver system is again ready for operation.

* Battery Elimination Circuit43 **Putting the transmitter into operation Please note the following:**  **A receiver RESET will cause ALL receiver settings - except for binding information - to return to their**  **factory settings. Therefore if a RESET is triggered unintentionally,**  **any custom settings that had been present in the receiver before the reset will have to be established**  **again by way of the Telemetry menu. A deliberate RESET is recommended, especially if**  **a receiver is to be "transferred" into another model. This is a rather simple method to eliminate settings**  **which are no longer applicable.** Receiver fi rmware updates are made by way of the connector located on the side of the receiver and the help of a PC running under Windows XP, Vista or Windows 7. The optional USB interface cable needed for this is Order No. **7168.6** along with adapter cable, Order No. **7168.6A** . The programs and fi les also needed can be found in Internet on the Graupner website at www.graupner.de under the downloads for the particular product.

Notice: After registering your receiver at https://www.graupner. de/de/service/produktregistrierung, you will automatically receive notifi cation of future updates per email.
**Updating receiver fi rmware** 

**Notice: Before any update procedure, be sure to check the**  **charged status of the receiver's battery. If necessary, charge the battery before beginning with an update.**  **Installing drivers 1.**  If not already done, install the required driver software for the USB interface, Order No. **7168.6,** as described on page 39. **Establishing a receiver / PC connection 2.**  Connect the USB interface cable, Order No. **7168.6**

, via the adapter cable, Order No. **7168.6A** , with the "- + T" connector on the receiver. These connectors are protected against polarity reversal so pay attention to the small profi les on the sides of connectors. Do not use brute force, these connectors should latch in rather easily. 

## Receiver fi rmware updates

Adapter lead Order No. **7168.6A**

If a central red wire is present, cut through it.

**Attention: If the adapter cable is still has wires for all**  **three poles, cut the red insulated wire for the middle connector pin of the adapter cable, Order**  **No. 7168.6A.** Afterward, make the USB interface connection to the PC or laptop by way of the delivered USB interface cable (PC USB/mini-USB). If the USB interface is connect properly, a red LED on the interface board should illuminate for a few seconds. If not already off, now switch the receiver off. **Firmware update utility program 3.**  On the PC, start the "Graupner_Firmware_Update_ Utility_VerX.XX.exe" program with a double-click. This program is located among the fi les in the "Firmware-Updater" folder. (At the time of printing for this manual, this program's current version is 1.18 and it can be started without fi rst being installed.)44 **Putting the transmitter into operation** In the "COM Port Setup" group box, select the COM port to which the USB interface is connected. If you are not sure which selection is correct, press the "Search" control, choose the connection labeled "Silicon Labs CP210x USB to UART Bridge" from the popup window and then activate "OK". The "Baud Rate" setting should be "19200". Afterwards, click on the "Signal 2:Vcc3:Gnd" radio button in the "Interface Type" group box.

Now click on the control labeled "Browse" that is located at the top right corner of the window. From the "Open fi le" window which appears, select the appropriate fi rmware update fi le for your receiver. Such fi les always have the ".bin" fi lename extension. Typically this fi le can be found in the folder whose name is prefi xed with the order number of the receiver to be updated. This folder should contain the ZIP fi le that was downloaded and unpacked. Its fi lename should also be prefi xed with the order number of the receiver to be updated. For the standard GR-12 receiver included in this set, the folder would be designated "33512_12CH_RX". The fi lename will appear in the corresponding window.

Firmware fi les are product-specifi cally coded, i. e. if you should accidentally select a fi le which does not correspond to the product (e. g. transmitter update fi le instead of a receiver update fi le), the "Product code error" popup window will appear and the block the update process from starting. Activate the control labeled "Program". Wait for the progress bar to start. Depending on the speed of the computer being used, this may take several seconds. Now press and hold the receiver's **SET**button while switching on the receiver's power supply. After a few seconds the "Found target device ..." message will appear in the status display. Now you can release the receiver's button. The actual fi rmware update will begin autonomously after this message has appeared. However, if the receiver is not detected, the "Target device ID not found" popup window will appear. If this process terminates before reaching the 100 % mark, switch off your receiver's power supply then try to start the update process all over again. Do this by performing the above steps again. The status display and progress bar will show you the progress of the fi rmware update. The update is concluded when the text "Complete ... 100 %" or "Complete!!" appears in the bottom line of the status display.45 **Putting the transmitter into operation** Both LEDs on the receiver will illuminate during the update process. Upon successful conclusion of the update process, the green LED will extinguish and the red LED will begin to blink. Switch off the receiver, remove the interface cable and repeat the process for any other receivers you have which must be updated. **Receiver initialization 4.**  Following a successful update process you MUST perform a receiver initialization procedure before using the receiver again. This is necessary for reasons of safety. Do this by pressing and holding the receiver's **SET** button then switching the receiver's power supply on. Now release the **SET**button again. When you subsequently switch the receiver on again, the receiver's green LED will illuminate continuously for about 2 or 3 seconds. Except for binding information, all other settings that may have been programmed into the receiver will now be reset to factory defaults and will have to be re-entered again if they are needed.46 **Installation notices** Servo mounting lug

Retaining screw

Rubber grommet

Tubular brass spacer

Servo arms must be free to move throughout their 4. entire range of motion. Pay attention that there are no objects which could hinder servo arm motion. The sequence in which servos are connected to the receiver depends on the type of model. Follow the connection layouts provided for this on pages 57 and 59. Also observe the safety notices provided on pages 4 ... 9. In order to prevent uncontrolled movements of servos connected to the receiver during startup **always fi rst switch on the transmitter**  **and then the receiver** and when fi nished with operation **fi rst switch off the receiver**  **and then the transmitter.** When programming the transmitter, be sure that electric motors cannot start running without control or that a combustion motor equipped with automatic starting cannot start up unintentionally. To be safe, disconnect the receiver's drive battery or, in the case of a combustion motor, disconnect the fuel supply. The function of every individual channel is determined by the transmitter used, not by the receiver. However, channel assignments can be changed in the receiver by programming done in the " **Telemetry** " menu. Nevertheless, it is recommended this be done on the transmitter side via the "Transmitter output" option, see page 206. **Several notices and suggestions for installing remote control components into a model are**  **provided below.** Wrap the receiver in a foam rubber pad that is at 1. least 6 mm thick. Attach the foam rubber to the receiver with rubber bands so it will be protected against vibration and/or the jars of a hard landing. All switches must be installed such that they are not 2. affected by exhaust gasses or vibration. The switch knob must be freely accessible over its entire range of movement. Mount servos on rubber bushes/spacers with hollow 3. brass bearings to protect them from vibration. Do not tighten the fastening screws down too tight as this would negate the vibration protection to be provided by the rubber bush/spacer. Only when servo fastening screws are properly tightened will this arrangement provide security and vibration protection for your servos. The fi gure below shows how a servo is mounted properly. The brass bearings are to be pushed into the rubber bushes/spacers from below. 

# Installation notices

**Receiver installation** Regardless of which Graupner receiver system you use, the procedure is always the same. Please pay attention that the receiver's antennas must be mounted at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts or any wiring that is not directly routed out of the receiver itself. In addition to steel parts, this also includes carbon fi ber parts, servos, fuel pumps and all kinds of cables etc. Optimally the receiver should be placed at a readily accessible location that is well away from all other equipment. Under no circumstances may servo cables be wrapped around the antennas or routed close to it. Please note that cables are subject to the acceleration forces which occur during fl ight and these forces may cause such cables, to shift in position. Therefore be sure the cables in the vicinity of the antennas are not able to move. Such moving cables can cause reception disturbances. Tests have shown that vertical (upright) antennas provide the best results during wide-range fl ights. In the case of diversity antennas (two antennas), the second antenna should be oriented at a 90° angle to the fi rst antenna. The GR-24 HoTT receiver connections designated "11+B" and "12+B" are intended for battery connections. If necessary, an addition battery connection for a servo can be made if a V or Y cable is used, Order No. **3936.11.** The power supply is bussed across all numbered connections so it can be attached at any of these 12 connectors. However, due to additional voltage losses associated with the traverse connectors, connections 8, 9 and 10 should not be used for connecting the receiver's battery.47 **Installation notices** 

## Receiver system power supply

Among other aspects, the safe operation of a model depends on a reliable power supply. In the event that, despite smooth operating rods, fully charged battery, battery leads with adequate cross-section, minimum contact resistances at connectors, etc., the transmitter indicates repeated receiver voltage collapses or is receiver voltage is generally too low; please give attention to the following notices. Give primary attention to fully charged batteries when model operation is to be started. Be sure that the contact surfaces of connectors and switches really are low resistance. If necessary, measure the voltage drop across installed switch cables when they are under load because even new heavy-duty switches can cause a voltage drop of up to 0.2 V. This value can increase in contacts by factors as a consequence of aging and oxidation. The constant vibrations and jarring also takes its toll on contacts to produce a creeping increase of contact resistance. Servos present another possible problem source. Even rather small servos like a Graupner/JR DS-281 can draw up to 0.75 A of current when it is blocks under load. Just four of these servos in a "foam" model can therefore load down the on-board power supply by as much as 3 A ... Therefore you should choose a power supply which will not break down under greater loads but rather always deliver suffi cient voltage. To "calculate" necessary battery capacity you should always fi gure on at least 350 mAh for every analog servo and at least 500 mAh for every digital servo. For example, from this point of view a battery with 1400 mAh would be the absolute minimum to power a receiver system with a total of 4 analog servos. But be sure to also consider the receiver itself into the calculation because its bidirectional functionality will draw about 70 mA of current too. It is also a good practice to connect the receiver to its power source with two cables rather than just one. Cable "1" could be connected to the "12+B" receiver connector as is usual and cable "2" could be connected to the opposite end of the row at the connector labeled "11+B". For example by using two power supply cables to connect one switch or voltage regulator to the receiver. Just use a V or Y cable, Order No. **3936.11** to accomplish this (see fi gure) if you should need one or both of the receiver's connectors to attach a servo, speed controller, etc. This double-connection technique to switches and speed controllers not only reduces the risk of a cable break but also ensures a more uniform supply of power to the connected servo.

Aux. function

Y-lead Order No. **3936.11** PRX stabilised receiver power supply Order No. **4136**

**NiMH 4-cell battery packs** In compliance with the aforementioned conditions, your Graupner HoTT receiver system can be readily operated with traditional 4-cell battery packs as long as the packs have adequate capacity and voltage level. **NiMH 5-cell battery packs** Five-cell battery packs offer a greater voltage tolerance than do 4-cell packs. However, be aware that not every servo available on the market is able to tolerate the voltage level output by a 5-cell pack over the long term, this is particularly true when the battery pack is freshly charged. Some of these servos react to this with a noticeable "grinding" sound. Therefore pay attention to the specifi cations of the servos you use before making a choice for a 5-cell battery pack..

**LiFe 6.6 V batteries with 2 cells** From a contemporary perspective, these new cells are the very best choice. LiFe cells are also available in hard plastic casings to protect them from mechanical damage. Like LiPo cells, LiFe cells can be quick charged in suitable chargers and they are comparatively robust. This type of secondary cell battery is also rated for a signifi cantly greater number of charge/discharge cycles than, for example, LiPo batteries The nominal 6.6 V output of a 2-cell LiFe battery pack does not present a problem for either Graupner HoTT receivers nor for those servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices which have been specifi cally approved for operation in this – higher – voltage range. **Please note however that practically all servos, speed controllers, gyros**  **and other devices built in the past and most such devices currently still offered on the market have**  **only a permissible voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V.** Use of these batteries in conjunction with these devices demand use of a stabilized voltage regulator, e. g. the PRX, Order No. **4136** , see appendix. Otherwise there is danger that attached devices will incur damage within a short period of time. **LiPo 2-cell packs** For a given capacity, LiPo batteries are lighter than,48 **Installation notices** for example, NiMH batteries. LiPo batteries are also available in hard plastic casings to protect them from mechanical damage. The comparatively high nominal voltage, 7.4 V, for a 2-cell LiPo pack does not present a problem for either Graupner HoTT receivers nor for those servos, speed controllers, gyros and other devices which have been specifi cally approved for operation in this – higher – voltage range. **Please note however that practically all servos, speed controllers, gyros and other**  **devices built in the past and most such devices currently still offered on the market have only a**  **permissible voltage range of 4.8 to 6 V.** Use of these batteries in conjunction with these devices demand use of a stabilized voltage regulator, e. g. the PRX, Order No. 4136, see appendix. Otherwise there is danger that attached devices will incur damage within a short period of time.49 **Your notes**50 **Term defi nitions**  

# Term defi **nitions** Control function, control, function input, control channel, mixer, switch, control switch, fi xed switch

To make use of this mx-20 HoTT manual easier, a number of the terms used repeatedly throughout this manual have been defi ned below.
**Control function** A "control function" is a signal intended to affect a given control action – initially independent of its signal course in the – . For example, this could be for throttle, ruder or aileron in a winged aircraft or pitch, roll or crow for a helicopter. A control function signal can be applied directly over a single control channel or also through a mixer and then applied over multiple control channels. A typical example of multiple control channels is separately operated aileron servos or the use of two roll or crow servos in helicopters. The control function explicitly includes the infl uence of the control's mechanical travel on the respective servo.
**Control** "Controls" include all operating elements on the transmitter, which are directly activated by the pilot, that impose an effect on servos, speed controllers etc. connected to the receiver. This includes: both joysticks (control functions 1 through 4), even • though these four control functions can be freely swapped around for both model types ("winged aircraft" and "helicopters") by use of software "Mode" settings, e. g. throttle left or right. The dual-axis function for throttle/airbrake is often referred to as the C1 control (channel 1). the three • proportional rotary controls, which are CTRL 6, 7 + 8, the switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, which are CTRL 9 and 10, • switches SW 1 ... 3 as well as 8 and 9, if assigned to • a control channel via the " **Transm. controls** " menu. The proportional operating elements produce a direct effect on servos which is commensurate with the control's position whereas switch modules can only effect a two or three increment change. **Function input** This is an imaginary point in the signal path and must not be considered the same as the point on the circuit board where the transmitter control is connected. The choice of **"controls arrangement"** and settings in the **"Transm. controls"** menu have their effect "downstream" of this imaginary point of connection. Thus differences between the physical control's number and the number of the downstream control channel can indeed emerge.
**Control channel** From the point at which a signal contains all control information necessary for a particular servo – whether directly from the physical control or indirectly by way of a mixer – the term "control channel" is used. This signal is only yet to be infl uenced by settings made in the **"Servo adjustment"**  menu and the " **Transmitter output** " menu before it leaves the transmitter's RF module. Once it arrives at the receiver, this signal may still be modifi ed by settings made in the telemetry menu before fi nally being applied as a control quantity for the respective servo.

**Mixers** The transmitter's software contains diverse mixer functions. These can be used to apply one control function to multiple servos or, conversely, to apply multiple control functions to a single servo. Please look over the numerous mixer functions in the text beginning on page 145 of this manual. **Switches** The three standard 2-position switches, SW 2, 3 and 8, the two 3-position switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, as well as both pushbutton switches, SW 1 and 9, can also be combined with control programming. However, these switches are generally intended for switching program options, e. g. to start and stop timers, to switch mixers on and off, or as a teacher/pupil switchover, etc. Each of these switches can be assigned any number of functions. Appropriate examples are detailed in the manual.
**Control switches** Since it is very practical to have some functions automatically switched on or off for a certain control's position (e. g. switch on/off of a stopwatch for acquisition of model run time, automatic extension of spoilers and other possibilities), four control switches have been integrated into mx-20 HoTT software. These software switches, designated "G1 ... G4", are triggered by setting a switch-point along the physical control's course of travel. This "trigger setting" is simply defi ned with the press of a button. The switching action can be correlated to the physical control's travel direction by software. Of course control switches can also be freely combined with the aforementioned physical switches to solve even more complex problems. There is a series of instructive examples which make this programming child's play. Learn about this by taking advantage of the programming examples beginning on page 226.51 **Term defi nitions**  **Fixed switches FXI and FX** This type of switch turns a function permanently on, e. b. timers (closed fi xed switch) or off (open fi xed switch) or they can provide a fi xed input signal for a control function, e. g. FXI = + 100 % and FX = -100 %. For example, in fl ight phase programming, these fi xed switches can be used to switch a servo or speed controller between two settings.52 **Physical control, switch and control switch assignments** 

# Physical control, switch and control switch assignments Principle procedure

The mx-20 Hott system exhibits maximum fl exibility when it comes to assigning standard equipment operating elements to specifi c functions. Since the assignment of controls and switches is done in the same way, even though different menus may be involved, it is appropriate at this point to explain the fundamental programming technique so that users can concentrate on the particular contents when reading the detailed menu descriptions. **Physical control and switch assignments**
The " **Control adjust** " menu can be used to assign transmitter inputs 5 ... 12 to operate servos, both from any given joystick direction (K1 ... K4) as well as to assign any other physical control designated "CTRL" or switch designated "SW". After tapping on the center **SET**key in the right key pad, the screen shown below will appear.

Move desired switch or control adj.
Now simply activate the desired control (joystick 1 ... 4, CTRL 6 ... 10 or switch 1 ... 3, 8 or 9).

Notice: Rotary controls, CTRL 6 ... 8, will not be recognized until they "detent". Therefore these controls can be turned back and forth until the correct assignment is shown in the screen. If adjustment travel is insuffi cient, activate the control in the other direction. On the other hand, if you wish to assign a control in the

" **Control switch** " menu, page 119, the "activate desired control" message will appear. push desired switch into position ON

**Important notice: Controls to be assigned (particularly CON TROL 6 ...**  **10) MUST be pre-assigned in the "Control adjust" menu to one of the inputs 5 through 12!** 
**Control assignment** Wherever programming permits a switch to be assigned, a switch symbol will appear in the screen's bottom display line.

Use the arrow keys in the left or right touch pad to select the appropriate column. **How to assign a switch** Briefl y press the 1. **SET** -T key in the right touch pad. The message shown below will appear in the screen.

Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET )
Now it is only necessary to put the selected switch 2. into the desired "ON" position or, as described at the right in "Assignment of external switches", to select a switch from the list of "External switches". This concludes the assignment. The switch symbol to the right of the switch's number indicates the current state of the particular switch. Since CTRL 9 and 10 as well as the 3-position switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, are not only usable as controls but also function as pure switches, there is a total of 9 switches ("SW 1 ... 9") available for use as desired. **Changing switch action** If the activation of a switch is to result in the opposite action, put the switch or joystick in the desired OFF position, again activate the switch assignment and reassign the switch again so it will respond with the desired action.
**Clear switch** A switch which has been assigned as described under point 1 can be cleared by simultaneously pressing the  or  key combination briefl y in the right key pad ( **CLEAR** ). **Assignment from the "external switch" list** Those menus in which the message ...

Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET ) ... appears for switches designated with "SW" can be used to assign so-called "external switches. Do this by confi rming the message text with the **SET** key. A new window will appear with a list of the four control switches "C1 ... C4", followed by two so-called "FX" fi xed switches and the four inverted switches "C1i... C4i".53 **Physical control, switch and control switch assignments** Control/fix sw C1 C2 C3 C4 FX FXi C1i C2i C3i C4i Use the arrow keys in the left or right key pad to select the desired switch then assign it with a brief tap on the center **SET**key of the right touch pad.

Notices: The two FX switches turn a function on "FXI" or off • "FX " permanently. All other switches mentioned can have multiple • assignments. Pay attention that you do not UNINTENTIONALLY assign reciprocally confl icting functions to a single switch. If necessary, note down the given switch functions. Application examples: Shut-off of an on-board glow plug heater upon • underrun or overrun of an idle threshold point programmed for the C1 joystick. In this case the glow plug heater switch is controlled by a transmitter mixer. Automatic switch on/off of the timer to measure pure • "fl ight time" for a helicopter by way of a control switch on the throttle limiter. Automatic switch off of the "AI •  Rud" when brake fl aps are extended, for example to adapt the roll of a model to the ground when making a landing on a slope without inducing a change of fl ight direction due to infl uence on the rudder. Extending landing fl aps with elevator trim adjustment • during a landing as soon as the throttle stick is moved beyond its switch point. Switch on/off of the timer for measuring the operating • time of electric motors. The control switches, freely programmable in the

" **Control switch** " menu, can be incorporated into switch programming, i. e. assigned to a function instead of a "normal" switch. At those program locations where switches can be assigned you always have the opportunity to assign one of the control switches, C1... C4, instead of a physical switch by selecting one of these out of the list of "external switches".54 **Digital trim** 

# Digital trim Functional description and description of C1 cut-off

**Digital trim with visible and audible indicators** Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. When you give the trim lever a brief push (one "click"), the neutral position of the associated joystick channel changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever in one direction, the trim value changes continuously in the corresponding direction with increasing speed. These changes can be made "audible" by way of different frequency tones. This makes fi nding the mid-point duringfl ight easy, without looking at the screen. When the midpoint is overrun, a brief pause will be inserted. Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. Furthermore, digital trim exercises fl ight phase specifi c control within a memorylocation (except for throttle/brake fl aps trim) – the socalled "C1" (channel 1) control function –. This C1 trim includes yet another special function for winged aircraft and helicopter models, it allows the carburetor's idle setting to easily be found for a combustion motor. Since the trim functions described in these instructions are only effective in the direction "Motor off", the presentation in the screen of your transmitter may only change with respect to individual throttle or Pitch-min positioning of the C1 joystick in the "forward" or "back" direction, such as throttle/pitch "left stick" or "right stick". The illustrations in these instructions are always based on "Throttle/Pitch right" for both types of models and "Throttle back" for winged aircraft and helicopters. **2. Helicopter models** In addition to the "Cut-off trim" function described below in "Winged aircraft models", C1 trimming also has another characteristic which is made possible by combining it with a so-called "Throttle limit" function see page 104. As long as the throttle limit control remains in the "left" half of its travel path, i. e. in the startup range, C1 trimming acts on the throttle servo as idle trim and the indication for idle trim is visible in the screen's display.

GRAUBELE #01

3:33h stop flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

RX0.0V 5.2V Last idle position

**2.4** M

motor OFF position **CTRL 6** Throttle limit control Current trim position

Trim at

However, in contrast to winged aircraft models, the position indicator ( ) will be hidden and any preset idle position will be deleted when the throttle limit control is in the "right" half of its travel path.

GRAUBELE #01

3:33h Stop Flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

RX0.0V 5.2V M **2.4 CTRL 6**  Throttle limit control

Notice for helicopters: C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo, not the pitch servo. Notice also that the helicopter throttle servo must be connected to receiver output 6, see receiver layout on page 59. **1. Winged models** C1 trimming has a special cut-off trim function intended especially for combustion motors. This cut-off trim function is confi gured as follows. First put the motor into a safe idle speed. Now if you push C1 trim in a single motion toward its "Motor cut-off" direction until it is in its furthest travel position then an additional end-position marker will remain in the display. When the motor is restarted you can again immediately set the last idle speed with a single movement in the direction of "more gas".

GRAUBELE #01

3:33h Stop Flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

RX0.0V 5.2V Current trim position Current trim position

**2.4** Ch 1 trim leverIdle direction

M

Trim at motor OFF position

This cut-off trim will be deactivated when "None" is entered on the "Motor at C1" line of the **"Model Type"** menu, see page 82.

Notice: Since this trim function is only effective in the "Motor off" direction, the display illustrated above will change appropriately if the C1 joystick's control direction for minimum throttle is changed from "back" to "front" (on which the above illustration is based) in the "Motor at C1" line of the **" Basic Settings**  **"** menu.55 **Your notes**56 **Winged models** 

# Winged models

Convenient support is provided for up to four aileron servos and four fl ap servos on normal models or, for V tail and fl ying wing/delta models, up to two aileron/ elevator servos plus four fl ap servos. The majority of motorized and glider models belong to the tail unit type "normal" and are equipped with one servo each for elevator, rudder and ailerons in addition to a motor throttle or electronic speed controller (or for brake fl aps in the case of a glider model). Beyond this, tail unit type "2HRSv3+8" permits the connection of two elevator servos to receiver outputs 3 and 8. If ailerons, and conditionally the fl aps, are each actuated with two separate servos then settings can be made for differentiated control of all aileron and fl ap pairs in the **"Wing mixers"** menu, i.e. settings for downward ruder throw independent of upward throw. Finally, the position of fl aps can be controlled by a control out of group CTRL 6 ... 10. Alternatively, there is a phase-dependent trim function available for fl aps, ailerons and elevators in the **"Phase trim"** menu. The "V tail unit" is to be selected from the **"Model type"**  menu if the model has a V tail unit instead of a normal tail unit. This V tail unit selection provides coupled elevator and ruder control functions for both tail fl aps – each controlled by a separate servo – which handles both elevator and ruder functionality. For delta and fl ying wing aircraft models, aileron and elevator functionality is affected by way of a common rudder fl ap on the trailing edge of each side (right and left) of the wing. The program contains appropriate mixer functions for both servos. Up to 7 fl ight phases can be programmed into each of the 24 model memory locations. Except for C1 trim, digital trim will be stored on a fl ight-phase basis. C1 trim permits easy location of a carburetor idle setting. Two timers are always available for fl ight operation. The transmitter operating time expired since the last battery charge is also displayed. All transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW) can be assigned in the **"Control adjust"** menu to inputs 5 ... 12 with almost no restrictions. The "Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions for ailerons, rudder and elevators are separately programmable and each are convertible between the two variations on a specifi c fl ight-phase basis. In addition to 8 freely allocatable linear mixers, 4 curve mixers (" **Free mixers** " menu) and 4 dual mixers (" **Dual mixer** " menu), there are also fl ight-phase dependent 6-point curves for control channel 1 (throttle/ brake), see " **Channel 1 curve** " menu).Depending on the number of wing servos, fi xeddefi nition mix and coupling functions can be selected from a list in the " **Wing mixers** " menu. Multi-fl ap menu: control of fl aps as ailerons, the • infl uence aileron trim on fl aps controlled as ailerons, fl ap differentiation, fl ap function throw magnitude for all aileron and fl ap pairs, ailerons controlled as fl aps, elevator mixer  fl aps Brake settings: butterfl y, differential reduction, • elevator curves aileron •  rudder mixer fl aps •  elevator mixer

E l e v a t o r F

l a p

F l a p E

l e v a t o r

F

l a p A

i l er o n A

i l e r o n Fl

a p A i l er on R u d d e r E l e v a t o r A

i l e r o n

left

right E l e v a t o r F

l a p

F l a p E l e v a t o r A i l e r o n R

u d d e r A i l e r o n F

l a p

Airbrake Flap

Airbrake Elevator Airbrake-Function 1

left

right Rudder/Elevator

V-Tail AI

FL

FL

AI Brake FL, FL2

Brake Elevator Brake AI, AI2 AI

FL FL2

AI FL FL2

AI2

F L  A

I F L  A I E L  F L

RU  AI

EL  AI E L  F L AI2

A
I  F L A

I  F

L57 **Winged models Installation notices**  **Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the sequence illustrated here.**  Outputs which are not needed are simply left empty. **Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages. Winged aircraft with and without motor, having up to**  **4 aileron servos and up to 4 fl ap servos ...**  **... and tail plane type "normal" or "2 elevator servos"** 

Receiver power supply

Free or left aileron 2 or aux. function Free or right aileron 2 or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or 1st elevator Free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron or aux. function Flap or left flap Right flap or free or aux. function Free or left flap 2 or aux. function Free or right flap 2 or aux. function **... and tail plane type "V tail unit"**

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Aileron or left aileron Free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron or aux. function Flap or left flap Right flap or free or aux. function Free or left flap 2 or aux. function Free or right flap 2 or aux. function

Left rudder / elevator Right rudder / elevator

**Delta/fl ying wing aircraft models with and without**  **motor having up to two aileron/elevator servos and up to 2 fl**  **ap/elevator servos**

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Right elevon Right elevon Free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Free or aux. function Free or left flap / elevator Free or right flap / elevator Free or aux. function or left flap 2 / elevato Free or aux. function or right flap 2 / eleva t

Free or rudder Because of orientation differences for installed servos and their rudder linkages, the actuating direction of some servos may be initially backward. The table below provides remedies.

**Model type**  **Servo actuation direction** 

**wrong Remedy** 

V tail Rudder and elevator reversed Reverse the polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the " **Servo adjustment**  " menu Rudder correct, elevators reversed Swap the connections for servos 3 & 4 on the receiver Elevators correct, rudder reversed Reverse the polarity of servos 3 & 4 in the " **Servo adjustment**  " menu AND on the receiver Delta, fl ying wing Elevator and aileron reversed Reverse the polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the " **Servo adjustment**  " menu Elevator correct, aileron reversed Reverse the polarity of servos 2 & 3 in the " **Servo adjustment**  " menu AND on the receiver Aileron correct, elevators reversed Swap servos 2 & 3 at the receiver All "program descriptions" for menus relevant to a winged aircraft model are marked with a winged aircraft symbol ...

... so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a winged aircraft model.58 **Helicopter models** 

# Helicopter models

Collective Pitch Curve

Swashplate Rotation

Roll Throttle Pitch-Axis Throttle Channel 1 Throttle

Roll Tail Rotor Pitch-Axis Tail Rotor Channel 1 Tail Rotor C

h an n e l 1 T a i l R ot o r

T

a i l R oto r T h r o t t l e The advanced developments incorporated into the transmitter as well as those now in helicopter models and their components like gyros, speed regulators, rotor blades, etc. make it possible to master a helicopter even in 3D acrobatic fl ight. On the other hand, a beginner needs only a few settings to get started with hovered fl ight training and then can take advantage of mx-20 HoTT features, step-by-step, with increasing expertise. The mx-20 HoTT program can operate all conventional helicopters having 1 ... 4 servos for pitch control. Six fl ight phases plus autorotation are available within a model memory, see menus " **Control adjust** ", " **Phase settings**  " and " **Phase assignment** ". As with winged aircraft, here too, in addition to the basic screen's standard timers there are additional timers as well as a lap counter with fl ight-phase-dependent stopwatch functionality which are available for selection (menus " **Timers (general)** " and " **Fl. phase timers** "). Except for pitch/throttle trimming, digital trimming can be stored as "global" for all fl ight phases or as "fl ight phase specifi c". C1 trim permits easy location of an idle setting. The control assignments of inputs 5... 12 can be made common to every fl ight phase or separate ( **"Control adjust"**  menu). A fl ight phase copy function is helpful during fl ight trials (" **Copy / Erase** " menu). "Dual Rate" and "Exponential" functions can be coupled for roll, nick and tail rotor and programmable in two variations in every fl ight phase. There are 8 freely assignable linear mixers. There are also 4 curve mixers that can be programed and these can also be switched on or off, depending on the fl ight phase, in the " **Mix active/Phase** " menu. Beyond this, there are also 4 dual mixers available. Available in the **"Helicopter mixer"** menu are fl ightphase-dependent 6-point curves for pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixer non-linear characteristics as well as two independent swashplate mixers each for roll and nick. Independent of this, the control curve of the channel 1 joystick can be defi ned with up to 6 points in every fl ight phase. The beginner will initially only adapt the hover fl ight point to the control middle for the non-linear characteristics. Pre-programmed mixers in the **"Helicopter mixer"**

menu: Pitch curve (6-point curve) 1. Channel 1 2.  Throttle (6-point curve) Channel 1 3.  Tail rotor (6-point curve) Tail rotor 4.  Throttle Roll 5.  Throttle Roll 6.  Tail rotor Nick 7.  Throttle Nick 8.  Tail rotor Gyro suppress 9. Swash rotation 10. Swash limiter 11. The "Throttle limit" function (input 12 in the **"Control adjust"**  menu) allows the motor to be started in any fl ight phase. Control 6 – the proportional rotation control, CTRL 6 top left – is assigned to input 12 by default. This "throttle limiter" establishes – depending on its given position – the maximum possible carburetor position. This makes it possible for the motor to be controlled in the idle range, if necessary even by the proportional regulator. The throttle curves become effective only when the proportional regulator is pushed toward the full throttle direction.59 **Helicopter models Notice for those transitioning from older Graupner**  **systems:** In comparison to previous receiver layouts, servo connector 1 (pitch servo) and servo connector 6 (throttle servo) have exchanged places. Servos **must** be connected to receiver outputs as illustrated at the right in the bottom fi gure. Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. More details about respective swashplate types can be found on page 86 in the **"Basic settings"** menu.

**Installation notices Servos MUST be connected to the receiver in the**  **sequence illustrated here.** Outputs which are not used are simply left empty. **Also be sure to follow the notices on the next pages.**

Notice: A speed regulator is also to be connected to receiver output "6" in order to take full advantage of the throttle limiter's convenience and safety features, see text beginning on page 104. See page 169 about this. **Receiver layout for helicopter models ...**
**... with 1 to 3 swashplate servos**

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo Pitch-axis 1 servo Free or speed governor or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Collective pitch or roll 2 or Pitch-axis 2 servo Free or aux. function Throttle servo or speed controller Gyro gain Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

**... with 4 swashplate servos**

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo Pitch-axis 1 servo Free or speed governor or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Roll 2 servo Pitch-axis 2 servo Throttle servo or speed controller Gyro gain Free or aux. function Free or aux. function All menus relevant to helicopter models are marked in the "program descriptions" section with a helicopter symbol ...

... so only these menus need to be dealt with to program a helicopter model.60 **Detail program description - Loading a new memory location** Anyone who has worked through to this part of the manual has certainly already tried out a bit of programming. Nevertheless a detailed description of every menu should not be left out. This section begins with the loading of a "free" memory location, a procedure which would be performed if a new model was being "programmed".

GRAUBELE #01

0:00h Stop Flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

0.0V 5.9V M HoTT

From the base screen, a jump to the "Multi-function list" is made by tapping on the center **SET**button of the right touch pad. (The center **ESC** button of the left touch pad will cause a jump back to the base screen.) By default, when the multi-function list is called for the fi rst time after switching on the transmitter, the " **Model select** " menu item will be active and displayed in reverse video. If this is not the case, use the arrow keys ( 

,  ) of the left or right touch pad to select the **"Model select"** menu item ...

Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Model type
... then (again) tap the center **SET**button of the right key pad. 

# Detail program description Loading a new memory location

03 04 05  free  02 01

06 R12

 free   free   free   free 

In the transmitter's delivered state, the fi rst model memory is initialized to the " **winged aircraft** " model type and the receiver in the delivery is bound to this model memory location, recognizable by the displayed receiver code at the right end of the line. In the above example, R12 is a code for the GR-24 receiver included in the set. In contrast, a "non-bound" model memory would appear with the code placeholder "---". The remaining memory locations, marked

"  free  ", are not occupied and thus also "non-bound". If you wish to program a winged aircraft model then, after leaving the " **Model select** " menu by tapping on the center **ESC** button of the left touch pad, programming of the model can begin right away ... or now use the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad to select one of the free memory locations ...

03 04 05  free  02 01

06 R12

 free   free   free   free 

... and then tap on the center **SET**key of the right touch pad to confi rm the choice. Afterward you will be prompted to select the basic model type, i.e. either "winged model" or "helicopter model". Select model type

Use the  or  of the left or right key pad to select the basic model type then tap the center **SET**button in the right key pad. This initializes the selected model memory with the selected model type and the display will return to the base screen. The memory location is now accordingly occupied. On the other hand, if you wish to begin with a **helicopter** then use the  or  keys of the left or right key pad to select a memory location labeled "  free  " and tap briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right key pad to confi rm your choice. You will be now be prompted to select the basic model type, i.e. either "winged model" or "helicopter model". Select the appropriate symbol with the  or  keys of the left or right touch pad then tap briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad to confi rm your choice. This initializes the selected model memory with the selected model type and you can now program your model into this model memory. Changing over to another model type is still possible if you fi rst erase this memory location ( **"Copy / Erase"** menu, page 64).

Notice: If, from the base screen, the currently active model • memory is to be erased then immediately after the erase action one of the two model types, "Winged" or "Heli" must be defi ned. You cannot avoid this selection even if you switch the transmitter off. When61 **Detail program description - Loading a new memory location** notice that no failsafe settings have yet been made. More about this can be found on page 192. If the screen should display the warning ... •

Throttle too high !
... then move the throttle joystick, or the limiter for a helicopter, into its idle position; by default this is rotary control CTRL 6. The appearance of this warning also depends on the "Motor at C1" or "Pitch min" in the **"Model type" menu,**  refer to page 80 or " **Helicopter type** " page 84 for the selected setting. For winged aircraft models, select "None" to deactivate this message if you have no motor to enter. If the transmitter already has occupied model • memories then submenus of the " **Copy / Erase** " menu will display a pictogram of the selected model type at the respective memory location followed by a blank line or the model name which was entered in the " **Basic settings** " menu (see page 68 or 74) and any bond that may exist between a receiver and this model memory. If battery voltage is too low, you cannot • switch models for safety reasons. A corresponding message will appear in the display:
not possible now voltage too low
As a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake fl aps for winged models the transmitter is switched on again the undesired occupation of the that model memory will have to be erased from another memory location. In contrast, if a non-active memory location is erased, it will subsequently be marked as "  free  " in the "Model select" menu. After the selected model memory is initialized with • the desired model type, the display will switch to the base screen of the freshly occupied model memory. At this time the warning ...

BIND N/A OK
... will appear in the screen for a few seconds as notifi cation that a "bond" to a receiver does not exist. With a brief tap on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad you can jump directly to the appropriate option.

1

BD2 BD1 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a RF transmit OFF

Further details about binding a receiver can be found on page 69 or 75. After the aforementioned "BIND. N/A" warning • message closes automatically, the warning ...

Fail Safe setup t.b.d.
... will appear (also for just a few seconds) to serve * N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated) as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models, to the two joysticks. Just which of these methods is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot. This function is set for the currently active model memory in the " **Stick mode** " line of the " **Basic settings, model** " menu, page 68 or 74.

1 n/a bind

SEL R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map n/a

A default value for this setting can be made for future models in the generalized " **Basic Settings** " menu, page 216.

1 PPM10

SEL BASIC SETTINGS Own Stick mode DSC Output Pitch min back

It should be noted here once again that, in the interest of greatest fl exibility in combination with the prevention of unintentional operating errors, no controls are preassigned to control channels 5 ... 12 by default. This means that, in the system's **delivered state, only servos attached to receiver outputs 1 ... 4 can be**  **moved by the two joysticks and that any servos attached to receiver connectors 5 ... 12 (max)**  **will remain in their middle positions.** When a new helicopter model is initialized, servo 6 may perform a movement – depending on the throttle limiter's position,62 **Detail program description - Loading a new memory location** CTRL 6 – . This condition changes for both model types only after the respective assignments have been made in the " **Control adjust** " menu. On the other hand, if a newly initialized model memory is to be put into operation then it MUST fi rst be appropriately "connected" with one or more receivers before the servos attached to the receiver/s can be operated. More about this can be found in the section "Binding" on page 69 or 75. A fundamental description of programming steps for a winged aircraft model can be found in the programming examples section beginning on 226, or for helicopter models beginning on page 270. The menu descriptions below are arranged in thesequence individual menus are listed in the multifunction list.63 **Detail program description - Model select** 

# Model select

Call up model 1 ... 24 The basic operation of the transmitters keys was explained on pages 24 and 25 and, on the previous double-page, explanations were provided for navigating to the multifunction list and about how to occupy a new model memory. At this point we now wish to begin with the "normal" description of individual menu items in the sequence they are arranged in the transmitter. Therefore we will begin with the menu ...

**Model select**

Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Model type
As many as 24 complete model settings, including digital trim values for trim levers, can be stored. Trimming is stored automatically such that a switchover from one model to another does not cause a loss of current trim settings. To the right of the model number, each occupied model memory line in this display shows a pictograph of the model type as well as the model's name entered for the model in its **"Basic settings, model"**  menu, page 68 or 74 and the code, if present, for the receiver "bound" to the model memory location. Select the **"Model select"** menu with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then press briefl y on the **SET** button in the right touch pad. 01

03 04 05 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G

06 R12 R12 R12

–––  free   free 

Now use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to select the desired model memory from the list and activate the selection by pressing the **SET**button. Pressing the **ESC** button will cause a return to the previous menu page without activating a model change.

Notice: If a model change causes a "Throttle too high" • warning to appear, the throttle/pitch joystick (C1) or the throttle limiter is too far in the full throttle direction. If a model change causes the message ... •

BIND N/A OK
... to appear then binding settings should be checked. If a model change causes the message ... •
Fail Safe setup t.b.d.
... to appear then respective failsafe settings should be checked. If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover • cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen. not possible now voltage too low64 **Detail program description - Copy / Erase Copy model**   **model** Select the "Copy model  model" sub-menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then press the **SET**button.

SEL ––– 0:00 0:00 0:00 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– SEL 0s Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/tim tab Lap Display

Select the model to be copied with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV BIND. 1

... whereby a second activation of the **SET**button in the right touch pad will allow the "Copy to model" window for the destination memory to be selected with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and then confi rmed with yet another press of the **SET**button or canceled with the **ESC** button. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten.

1 bind

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map n/a 1

SEL STARLET Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a RF transmit OFF

... to appear. A **NO** response will cause the process to be canceled and a return to the previous screen. Selecting the YES response with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad followed by confi rmation of the selection by briefl y pressing the **SET**button will erase the selected model memory.

**Attention: This erase process cannot be undone. All data in the**  **selected model memory will be erased completely.**

Notice: If the currently active model memory is to be erased, a model type "Winged" or "Heli" must be defi ned immediately after the erase process. On the other hand, if an inactive memory location is to be erased then it will subsequently appear in the model select screen as

"  free  ". 

# Copy / Erase

Erase or copy model  model, copy from or to SD card, copy fl ight phases Select the "Copy / Erase" menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y press the **SET**button.

Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress menus

**Erase model**

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG

Select the "Erase model" sub-menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y press the **SET**button. Use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to select the model to be erased ...

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG

... now the next time the **SET**button is pressed, it will prompt the confi rmation request ...65 **Detail program description - Copy / Erase** Once selection of the model memory has been confi rmed by pressing the **SET**button, a confi rmation request will appear.
modell really

ULTIMATE

to be copied? NO YES 01 03  frei 

A **NO** response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. If the  **YES** response is selected and confi rmed by activating the **SET**button then the selected source model will be copied into the selected model memory destination.

Notice: In addition to model data, binding data is also copied by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated by its copy without establishing the bond again. **Export to SD** Select the "Export to SD" sub-menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and press the **SET** button.

=>

=>
=>
=>

=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

Select the model to be exported with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.

01

03 04 05  frei  ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G export to SD-CARD: R12 R12 R12

–––

After confi rming the selected model memory by pressing the **SET**button, a confi rmation request will appear.

modell

ULTIMATE

export ? NO YES 01 SD-Karte

A **NO** response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. However, if the  **YES** response is selected then confi rmed by pressing the **SET** button, the selected model will be copied to the SD card. Notice: Should the notice ... •
SD-CARD INSERT OK
... appear instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's card slot, see page 22. In addition to model data, binding data is also copied • by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter by its copy without establishing the bond again. An exported winged aircraft model will be stored • on the memory card in the \\Models\mx-20 folder with a fi lename format of "aModellname.mdl" and a helicopter model with a fi lename format of "hModellname.mdl". On the other hand, if a "nameless" model is exported, its data will be stored on the memory card under "ahNoName.mdl" or "hNoName.mdl", as appropriate. Some special characters that can be used in model • names are subject to specifi c restrictions associated with the FAT or FAT32 fi le system used by the memory cards and these special characters will be replaced during the copy process with a tilde (~). A model fi le already on the memory having the same • name as the fi le to be copied will be overwritten without warning.66 **Detail program description - Copy / Erase** 01

03 04 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G import to model:

05  free  R12 R12 R12

–––

After confi rming the selected model memory by pressing the **SET**button, a confi rmation request will appear.

modell

ULTIMATE

import ? NO YES 01 03  free 

A **NO** response will cancel the process and return the screen to the originating screen. However, if the  **YES** response is selected and confi rmed by pressing the **SET** button then the selected source model will be imported into the selected destination model memory.

Notice: If the message ... •
SD-CARD INSERT OK
... appears instead of a screen for model selection, there is no SD card in the transmitter's card slot, see page 22. In addition to model data, binding data is also • imported by this process. This means that a receiver system which was/is bound to the original model memory can also be operated in the SAME transmitter **Import from SD** Select the "Import from SD" sub-menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and press the SET button.

=>

=>
=>
=>

=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

Select the model to be imported from the SD memory card with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.

05  frei  EXTRA ALPINA

COBRA BELL47G import from SD-CARD: 11/03/10 11/03/11 11/03/11 11/03/12

Notice: The export date posted at the right end of each model name line is represented in the format "year/month/day". After again pressing the **SET**button in the right touch pad, the "import to model" window will appear Now the destination memory location can be selected with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and confi rmed by pressing the **SET**button or the process can be canceled with the **ESC** button. A memory location which is already occupied can be overwritten. by its copy without establishing the bond again. **Copy from phase** Select the "Copy from phase" sub-menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then press the **SET**button.

=>

=>
=>
=>

=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

In the "Copy from phase" sub-menu ...

7 Copy from phase:

3 5 =>

=> 2 4 6 1

... the fl ight phase to be copied (1 ... 7 for winged aircraft models or 1 ... 6 for helicopter models) is selected with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then confi rmed by briefl y pressing the **SET**button in the right touch pad. The next window to appear will be the "Copy to phase" window. In that window the destination is to be selected and then also confi rmed. As described above, another confi rmation request will be issued.67 **Detail program description - Suppress menus and models** 

# Suppress menus

Hide menus in the multifunction Select the "Suppress menus" menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y press the **SET**button.

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models

In the menu which then appears, menu items which are no longer needed or those which should not be changed, can be blocked from appearing in th multifunction list.

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG

This reduces the appearance of the multi-function list considerably, in some cases to only a few menus, thus substantially improving the clarity of the function selection list. Functions are not deactivated because they are hidden. They will simply no longer appear in the list. This also blocks direct access to these functions. The function to be hidden or displayed is to be selected with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then its (hide/display) status switched-over by means of the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG

Tip:If you wish to forgo access-blockage to the multifunction list altogether, hide the **" Code lock**  **"** menu in the multi-function list by way of this menu as a precautionary measure. 

# Suppress models

Hiding model memory locations Select the "Suppress models" menu with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y press the **SET**button.

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress menus Suppress models

Model memories which are rarely needed or to which access is to be blocked for other reasons can be hidden from the model selection list. This also clarifi es the overview layout for model selection. A model to be hidden/displayed is selected with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then its status is switched-over by means of the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

01

03 04 05 ULTIMATE 02 GRAUBELE

STARLET BELL47G E12 E12 E12

–––  free  Suppress: TOG

A model memory which is "stricken through" will no longer appear in the " **Model select** " menu.68 **Detail program description - Base setup model** 

# Base setup model

Model-specifi c base settings for winged aircraft models Before programming specifi c parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory. Select the **"Base setup model"** menu with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

Model type Suppress models Base setup model

Servo adjustment

Control adjust Stick mode

**Model name**

Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND 1 n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a

BD2 BD1 RF transmit OFF

Change to the next screen page by pressing the **SET** button briefl y. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model's name. A maximum of 9 characters can be used to specify a model name.
!"#$%&’()+,–./012 3456789:;

Mod Name GRAU B FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@A B CDE Select the desired characters with the arrow keys of the left touch pad. Move to select the next character position by pressing the  arrow key of the right touch pad or its center **SET**button. Simultaneously pressing the  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR)** will place a space character at the position. Positioning to any character position within the entry fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad. A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished by pressing the center **ESC** button in the left touch pad. After entering the model name it will appear in the base screen of the " **Model select** " menu and in the sub-menu for the **"Copy /Erase"** menu item.
**Stick mode**

**"MODE 2"** (throttle left)

**"MODE 3"** (throttle right) **"MODE 4"** (throttle left) **"MODE 1"** (throttle left)

Stick forward

Stick backRudder leftRudder right Motor full throttle

Motor idleAileron leftAileron right Motor full throttleRudder leftRudder right

Motor idle Stick forward

Stick backAileron leftAileron right

Stick forward

Stick backAileron leftAileron right Motor full throttle

Motor idleRudder leftRudder right Motor full throttle

Motor idleAileron leftAileron right Stick forward

Stick backRudder leftRudder right

There are four fundamental options for assigning the four control functions (aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle/brake fl ap) for a winged aircraft model to the two joysticks. Just which of these options is chosen depends on the individual preferences of the individual model pilot. Select the "Stick mode" line with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. The option fi eld will be enclosed in a frame.

1

SEL GRAUBELE Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a RF transmit OFF

Press the **SET**button. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the arrow keys of the right touch pad to select from among options 1 through 4. Pressing simultaneously on the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will return the option selection back to stick mode "1". Pressing the **SET**button again will deactivate option selection so that you can change to another line.

**Bound receiver** Graupner HoTT receivers must be "instructed" to communicate exclusively with one particular model (memory) in a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done

once for every new receiver/model memory location combination (and can be repeated anytime). **Important notice: During the binding procedure be sure the**  **transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side,**  **keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise you run the risk of a faulty connection to the return**  **channel and malfunctions will result.**69 **Detail program description - Base setup model "RF bind " of transmitter and receiver**  Use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to move to the screen's "RF bind" line" then select the desired binding channel. For an example like that shown in the figure below, choose "BD2" because the binding channel designated as "BD1" in the screen's bottom line is already used by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set.

1 bind

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map n/a

If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red LED on the receiver will blink. Press and hold the **SET**button on the receiver while the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then after about another 3 seconds begins to blink red/green. You can now release the **SET**button As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode. Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called "receiver binding" process for the receiver to the currently active model memory by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button of the right touch pad. At this time the screen's display will begin to indicate the duration of the

**"** bond **". "Binding" multiple receivers per model**  Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, whereby respective mx-20 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing a maximum of two receivers directly and for dividing up the 12 control channels (max) available on these two receivers as desired under menu control. Refer to additional details further down in this section. Binding two receivers is begun by fi rst binding the individual receivers as described below. **In subsequent operation of the model only one of these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to**  **the transmitter; the one which was activated in the "Tel. RCV" line of the "Telemetry" menu. For**  **example:**

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV BIND. 1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line

. The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. 1

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 bind R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map n/a Finding ...

If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfully completed. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display "bind" (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached). For example:

1

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 R08 bind R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map bind

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. **Binding other receivers** The binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding channel. After initiating the RF bind process, instead of displaying "BINDING", the message shown below appears.70 **Detail program description - Base setup model** 1

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 R08 bind R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map bind RF must be OFF OK

Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module as described on the page in section "RF module". Afterward, return again to the "RF BIND" line and restart the process to dissolve bond as described on the previous page. Alternatively you can briefl y switch off the transmitter then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears ...

RF on/off? OFF ON Please select

... with "OFF" ...

RF on/off? ON Please select

OFF
... then confi rm the selection by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. From the base screen jump again into the "RF BIND" line of the "Basic settings, model" menu and restart the binding process. **Dissolving a bond** Proceed as described above to initiate the binding process but WITHOUT fi rst putting a receiver in binding readiness. **Receiver change map**

1

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 R08 bind R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map bind

As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding receivers" section, the mx-20 HoTT offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control channels within a receiver and the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 12 control channels across two receivers . This redistribution is subsequently referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. **Channel mapping within a receiver** Analogous to the channel correlation function in the "Telemetry" menu on page **212** , described as "Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to freely distribute the 12 control channels (inputs) to the outputs (servo connections) of the bound receiver specifi ed by column BD1.

RECEIVER CH – BIND1 In Ch 1 Out Ch 1 In Ch 2 Out Ch 2 In Ch 3 Out Ch 3 In Ch 4 Out Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding input fi eld will be framed. Press briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting is displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel (= transmitter output, see page 206) with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.

Notice: The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver.
**BUT CAUTION:** If, for example, you have already specifi ed "2AIL" in the "Aile/fl aps" line of the " **Model type**  " menu then the transmitter will have allocated control function 2 ( ailerons) for left and right ailerons to control channels 2 & 5. The corresponding inputs (to the receiver) in this case would be channels 2 & 5 and these should be assigned accordingly, refer to the example below. Examples: You would like to control each aileron of a large • model with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo connections) to one and the same input(control channel). In the aforementioned case, to the giveninputof one of the two default aileron control channels (2 & 5) appropriate for the left or right wing. You would like to control the rudder of a large model • with two or more servos. Assign each of the appropriate outputs (servo connections) to one and the same input(control channel). In this case, the default rudder channel (4), see fi gure bottom right.71 **Detail program description - Base setup model Important notice:**  By using the mx-20 HoTT transmitter's "Tx. output swap " option the transmitter's 12 control functions can be freely swapped in a similar manner or multiple outputs can be assigned to the same control function. To avoid confusion, it is strongly recommended that only one of these two options is used.
**Channel assignment on the second receiver** As already mentioned, the "Receiver channel mapping" option can be used to freely distribute the mx-20 HoTT transmitter's 12 control channels across two receivers, whereby the numbering sequence of outputs (servo connections) begun in the "BD1" column for bound "receiver 1" will be continued. For example, if "receiver 1" has enough connectors for 12 servos then the numbering of outputs in the "BD2" column (for the second bound receiver) will begin with 13.

RECEIVER CH – BIND2 In Ch12 Out Ch13 In Ch12 Out Ch14 In Ch12 Out Ch15 In Ch12 Out Ch16

After selection of the desired output with the arrow keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding input fi eld will be framed. Press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad The current setting is displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example, suitable to the above rudder example. RECEIVER CH – BIND2 Input 4 Out Ch13 Input 4 Out Ch14 Input 4 Out Ch15 Out Ch16 Input 4

Notice: The number of lines available (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be connected to receiver 2 and their numbering is dependent on the maximum number of servos which can be connected to receiver 1.

**RF transmit** This menu line provides an option for manually switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off to specifi c models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. **If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the**  **transmitter is switched on.** If necessary, use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF transmit" line then activate the option with by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad

SEL R12 R08 1

OFF bind Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map bind

RF transmit

The right arrow keys can now be used to choose between **OFF**and **ON** . Again pressing the center **SET** button in the right touch pad will complete the entry. **Range test** The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a function test can be carried out even within a distance of up to about 50 m. Perform the range test on the Graupner HoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test. Preferably the receiver already bound to the 1. transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position. Switch remote control on and wait for the receiver's 2. green LED to light up. Now servo movements can be observed. Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3. low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this. Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some distance 4. from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented vertically during the test. If necessary, use the 5.  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF Range Test" line in the menu then start range test mode by pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.72 **Detail program description - Base setup model** SEL RF Range Test 99sec R12 R08 OFF bind RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map bind

RF transmit

When the range test is activated, the transmitter's output power will be signifi cantly reduced and the blue LED on the antenna's socket will begin to blink. At the same time, the timer display in the transmitter's screen will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound.

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «normal »

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT TEST 76s

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a three-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test's 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power and the blue LED will again illuminate constantly. Move away from the model while manipulating 6. the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction. If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary 7. to switch it on to further check noise immunity. Continue moving away from the model until perfect 8. control is no longer possible. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9. period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area's Graupner GmbH & Co. KG service partner. Perform the range test before each fl ight and, in 10. doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during fl ight. The range must always be at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model operation.

**Attention: Never start the range test on the transmitter during**  **normal operation of the model.**
**DSC output** If necessary, use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "DSC output" line of the menu then activate this menu item by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

SEL 99sec DSC output PPM10 RF Range Test R12 R08 OFF BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL Rcv Ch Map RF transmit

Now you can use the right arrow keys to choose between three types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM18" and "PPM24". Pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad again will complete the entry. This choice primarily infl uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. This maximum is control channels 1 ... 5 if "PPM10" is selected, control channels 1 ... 9 for "PPM18" and control channels 1 ... 12 for "PPM24".
**Cut-off** Depending on the "idle forward or back" choice made in the "Motor at C1" line of the " **Model type** " menu, this motor "cut off" option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down a speed controller or to move a servo on the carburetor of a motor to the OFF (or idle) position. The motor OFF position (or idle setting) will then be preset by the left column directly over the " **SEL** " fi eld. The appropriate value for this entry fi eld is to be established through trial and error A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on this preset position when a certain servo position or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column, directly over the " **STO** " fi eld then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right column. If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is greater than the current servo position, i. e. the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position. If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is less than the current servo position, i. e. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo's position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its73 **Detail program description - Base setup model** ON position. The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond the preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick control. The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of +150 % servo position setting in the middle column.

SEL 99sec PPM10

––– cut off +150% –100% STO DSC Output RF Range Test OFF BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL RF transmit

**Programming** To change the preset "cut-off" position of the throttle servo, press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off". If a combustion motor is involved, be sure the throttle servo does not perform mechanical runout, e. g. -125 %.

SEL OFF 99sec PPM10

––– +150%

STO –125% cut off DSC output RF Range Test BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL RF transmit

The – upper – preset value in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column. However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed controller with closed switch to switch into the cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel from +150 % by placing the throttle servo or speed controller into the desired position with the throttle/brake joystick then press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

SEL 99sec PPM10

––– STO –125% +100% cut off DSC output RF Range Test BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL RF transmit OFF

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switch with which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold.

SEL 99sec PPM10 8 STO –125% +100% cut off DSC output RF Range Test BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL RF transmit OFF

Notices: Be sure the throttle servo does not run out • mechanically when the cut-off function is activated. A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily • increasing the travel for servo 1 in the " **Servo adjustment**  " menu to over 100 % then, after storing the threshold, change servo travel back to the original value.74 **Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter** Before programming specifi c parameters, there are some basic settings to be made which effect the currently active model memory. Select the "Base setup model **"** menu with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

Helicopter type Suppress models Base setup model

Servo adjustment

Control adjust Stick mode.

**Model name**

Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND 1 n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a

BD2 BD1 RF transmit OFF

Change to the next screen page by briefl y pressing the **SET**button in the right touch pad. This will open a screen of characters for entry of the model's name. A maximum of 9 characters can be used to specify a model name.
!"#$%&’()+,–./012 3456789:;

Mod Name STAR L FGHIJK L MNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@ABCDE Select the desired characters with the arrow keys of the left touch pad. Move to select the next character position by pressing the  arrow key of the right touch pad or its center **SET**button Simultaneously pressing on the 

or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR)** will place a space character at the position. Positioning to any character position within the entry fi eld can be done with the  keys of the right touch pad. A return to the previous menu screen is accomplished by pressing the center **ESC** button in the left touch pad. A model name entered in this manner will appear in the base screen of the " **Model select** " menu and in the submenus of the " **Copy / Erase** " menu item.
**Stick mode**

**"MODE 2"** (throttle left)

**"MODE 3"** (throttle right) **"MODE 4"** (throttle left) **"MODE 1"** (throttle left)

TS-NickTail

NickTail Motor/PitchRollRoll Motor/PitchTailTail

Motor/Pitch Motor/Pitch Nick

NickRollRoll

Nick

NickRollRoll Motor/Pitch

Motor/PitchTailTail Motor/Pitch

Motor/PitchRollRoll Nick

NickTailTail

Basically there are four different ways to assign the four helicopter control functions, roll, nick, tail rotor and throttle/pitch to the two joysticks. Just which of these is used depends on the preferences of the individual model pilot. Use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to select the "Stick mode" line. The option fi eld will be framed. 1

SEL STARLET Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

n/a RF transmit OFF

Press the **SET**button. The currently displayed stick mode will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the arrow keys of the right touch pad to select from among options 1 through 4. Pressing simultaneously on the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will return the option selection back to stick mode "1". Pressing the **SET**button again will deactivate option selection so that you can change to another line.

**Bound receiver** Graupner -HoTT receivers must be "instructed " to communicate exclusively with one particular model (memory) in a Graupner -HoTT transmitter. This procedure is known as "binding" and must only be done

once for every new receiver/model memory location combination (and can be repeated anytime). **Important notice: During the binding procedure be sure the**  **transmitter's antenna is always far enough away from the receiver's antenna. To be on the safe side,**  **keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise you run the risk of a faulty connection to the return**  **channel and malfunctions will result.**
**"Binding" multiple receivers per model** Multiple receivers per model can be bound if desired, 

# Base setup model

Model-specifi c base settings for helicopter models75 **Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter** whereby respective mx-20 HoTT programs offer the potential for managing a maximum of two receivers directly and for dividing up the 12 control channels (max) available on these two receivers as desired under menu control. Refer to additional details further down in this section. Binding two receivers is begun by fi rst binding the individual receivers as described below. **In subsequent operation of the model only one of these receivers will establish a telemetry bond to**  **the transmitter; the one which was activated in the "Tel. RCV" line of the "Telemetry" menu. For**  **example:**

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV BIND. 1

Any telemetry sensors which may be built into the model should therefore be connected to this receiver because the transmitter only receives and evaluates data from the return channel of the receiver activated on this line. The second, and all other receivers, operate in parallel but are fully independent in slave mode. **"Binding" the transmitter and receiver** Use arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad to move to the screen's "RF bind" line then select the desired binding channel. For an example like that shown in the figure below, choose "BD2" because the binding channel designated as "BD1" in the screen's bottom line is already used by default for the receiver which was delivered with the set.

1 bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 R12 n/a Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map

If not already off, now switch the receiver on. The red LED on the receiver will blink. Press and hold the **SET**button on the receiver while the LED continues to blink red for about 3 seconds then after about another 3 seconds begins to blink red/green. You can now release the **SET**button As long as this LED blinks red/green, the receiver is in bind mode. Now, within this 3 second period, start the so-called "receiver binding" process for the receiver to the currently active model memory by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button of the right touch pad. At this time the screen's display will begin to indicate the duration of the

**"** bond **"**

. 1 bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 R12 n/a Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND n/a BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map Finding ...

If the receiver's LED, again blinking red, changes within about 10 seconds to continuous illumination in green, the binding process has been successfully completed. Your model-memory to receiver combination is now operationally ready. At this time the screen will now display "bind" (bound) instead of "n/a" (not attached). For example:

1 bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 R08 bind R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map

On the other hand, should the LED on the receiver blink red for longer than about 10 seconds, the binding process has failed. In this case the screen will continue to show the status as "n/a". If this should happen, try changing the position of antennas then repeat the entire procedure. **Binding other receivers** The binding channel you have chosen is already bound (as indicated by the "bind" status). with another binding channel. If, after initiating the RF bind process, the message shown below appears in the screen instead of displaying "BINDING"76 **Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter** 1 bind

BD1 STARLET

BD2 R08 bind R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map RF must be OFF OK

Drop down two lines in the screen and switch off the RF module as described on the page in section "RF module". Afterward, return again to the "RF BIND" line and restart the process to dissolve bond as described on the previous page. Alternatively you can briefl y switch off the transmitter then, after switching it back on again, respond to the message window that appears ...

RF on/off? OFF ON Please select

... with "OFF" ...

RF on/off? ON Please select

OFF
... then confi rm the selection by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. From the base screen jump again into the "RF BIND" line of the "Basic settings, model" menu and restart the binding process. **Dissolving a bond** Proceed as described above to initiate the binding process but WITHOUT fi rst putting a receiver in binding readiness. **Receiver change map**

1

BD1 STARLET

BD2 bind R08 bind R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map

As mentioned in the introduction to the "Binding receivers" section, the mx-20 HoTT offers both the opportunity to freely divide up the transmitter's control channels within a receiver as well as the opportunity to distribute the transmitter's 12 control channels across two receivers . This redistribution is subsequently referred to as "mapping" or "channel mapping" (channel correlation). Select the receiver to be "mapped" with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad then briefl y press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. **Channel mapping within a receiver** Analogous to the channel correlation function in the " Telemetry " menu on page **212** , described as "Channel Mapping", it is very simple to use this menu item to freely distribute the 12 control channels (inputs) to the outputs (servo connections) of the bound receiver specifi ed by column BD1.

RECEIVER CH – BIND1 In Ch 1 Out Ch 1 In Ch 2 Out Ch 2 In Ch 3 Out Ch 3 In Ch 4 Out Ch 4

After selection of the desired output with the arrow keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding input fi eld will be framed. Press briefl y on the center **SET** button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel (= transmitter output, see page 206) with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad.

Notice: The number of lines available in the list (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be attached to the given receiver.
**BUT CAUTION:** If you wish to operate two servos with one control function, for example such as transmitter control function 2 (roll) which is divided up into control channels 1 & 2 for left and right roll servos by "3Sv(2Roll)" in the " in the " **Heli Type** " menu; then "map" transmitter outputs 1 & 2 (= inputs to the receiver) accordingly. **Important notice:** By using the mx-20 HoTT transmitter's " Tx. output swap" option, the transmitter's 12 control functions can be freely swapped in a similar manner or multiple outputs can be assigned to the same control function. To avoid confusion, it is strongly recommended that only one of these two options is used.
**Channel assignment on the second receiver** As already mentioned, the "Receiver channel mapping" option can be used to freely distribute the mx-20 HoTT transmitter's 12 control channels across two receivers , whereby the numbering sequence of outputs (servo connections) begun in the "BD1" column for bound "receiver 1" will be continued. For example, if "receiver 1" has enough connectors for 12 servos then the numbering of outputs in the "BD2" column (for the77 **Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter** second bound receiver) will begin with 13.

RECEIVER CH – BIND2 In Ch12 Out Ch13 In Ch12 Out Ch14 In Ch12 Out Ch15 In Ch12 Out Ch16

After selection of the desired output with the arrow keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding input fi eld will be framed. Press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired input channel with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example, appropriate for the above example with roll servos:

In Ch 2 Out Ch14 In Ch12 Out Ch15 In Ch12 Out Ch16 RECEIVER CH – BIND1 In Ch 1 Out Ch13

Notice: The number of lines available (outputs) corresponds to the maximum number of servos which can be connected to receiver 2 and their numbering is dependent on the maximum number of servos which can be connected to receiver 1.

**RF transmit** This menu line provides an option for manually switching the transmitter's RF transmission on and off to specifi c models while the transmitter is in operation. For example, to save power while a model is being programmed. **If this line option was set to OFF, it will be canceled (i.e. set to ON) the next time the**  **transmitter is switched on.** If necessary, use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF transmit " line then activate the option by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

SEL R12 R08 1

OFF bind Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map bind

RF transmit

The right arrow keys can now be used to choose between **OFF** and **ON** . Again pressing the center **SET** button in the right touch pad will complete the entry. **Range test** The built-in range test reduces transmission power to an extent that a function test can be carried out even within a distance of up to about 50 m. Perform the range test on the Graupner HoTT system according to the following instructions. If necessary, have someone assist you in carrying out the range test. Preferably the receiver already bound to the 1. transmitter should be installed into the model in its intended position. Switch remote control on and wait for the receiver's 2. green LED to light up. Now servo movements can be observed. Place the model on a level surface (pavement, 3. low-cut grass or bare ground) such that receiver antennas are at least 15 cm above ground level. It may be necessary to put something under the model to raise it up enough for this. Hold the transmitter at hip level and at some distance 4. from one's body. Do not point the antenna directly at the model but rather turn and/or kink the antenna's end so that it is oriented vertically during the test. If necessary, use the 5.  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "RF Range Test" line in the menu then start range test mode by pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

SEL RF Range Test 99sec R12 R08 OFF bind RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map bind

RF transmit

When the range test is activated, the transmitter's output power will be signifi cantly reduced and the blue LED on the antenna's socket will begin to blink. At the same time, the timer display in the transmitter's screen will start counting down and every 5 seconds a two-frequency tone will sound.

STARLET #02

2:22h Stop Flt «normal »

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT TEST 76s

Five seconds prior to the end of the range test a three-frequency tone will sound once every second. After expiration of the range test's 99th second the transmitter will again be switched to full output power78 **Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter** SEL 99sec DSC output PPM10 RF Range Test R12 R08 OFF BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL Rcv Ch Map RF transmit

Now you can use the right arrow keys to choose between three types of modulation "PPM10", "PPM18" and "PPM24". Pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad again will complete the entry. This choice primarily infl uences the maximum number of control channels which can be attached to the DSC (direct servo control) socket, and thus also available to a fl ight simulator or teacher/pupil system. This maximum is control channels 1 ... 5 if "PPM10" is selected, control channels 1 ... 9 for "PPM18" and control channels 1 ... 12 for "PPM24".

**Autorotation** Autorotation is that state of descending fl ight in which the pitch of main rotor blades are set such that the rotor's speed matches the natural forces of air fl owing through, like a windmill. This built-up energy can be used for "recovery" lift to brake a descent by appropriate blade pitch adjustment. Autorotation is a means by which real and model helicopters are able to land safely in emergency situations, e. g. in the event of a motor failure. However, the prerequisite for this is a well-trained pilot familiar with the helicopter's characteristics. Quick reaction and good perceptiveness are necessary because the rotor's inertia can only be used once to generate recovery lift. When this technique is evaluated during competitions, the motor must be switched off for autorotation. For training purposes it is better to keep the motor running at idle during autorotation. The Autorotation switch causes a switchover to the autorotation fl ight phase in which control of "throttle" and "pitch" are separate and all mixers which have an effect on the throttle servo are switched off. Corresponding parameter settings are made in the " **Helicopter mixer** " menu (see page 178); refer also to the "Principle of the Auto. C1 Pos." topic which follows. The "Autorotation" name is permanently assigned to phase 1 and it is included in the base screen of all fl ight phase dependent menus. This name can NOT be changed. It is only possible to assign a switch to this option, as described on page 52. **If a switch is assigned, it will have absolute priority over all other**  **fl ight-phase switches.** 

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% –100% C1

Normal Thr Curve off

More about fl ight-phase programming can be found in the text beginning on page 164 in the **"Helicopter mixer"**  section.
**Auto.C1 Pos.** (Autorotation C1 position) The autorotation fl ight-phase can alternatively be activated by a threshold point for the C1 throttle/pitch joystick. To set such a threshold, use the  arrow keys of the left or right key pad to reach the "Auto.C1 Pos." line. and the blue LED will again illuminate constantly. Move away from the model while manipulating 6. the joysticks during this timespan. If you notice an interruption anytime while still within a distance of about 50 m, try to reproduce this malfunction. If there is a motor in the model, it may be necessary 7. to switch it on to further check noise immunity. Continue moving away from the model until perfect 8. control is no longer possible. Wait at this distance for the remainder of the test 9. period with the still-operationally-ready model to expire. After the range test is ended it should again respond correctly to all RC controls. If this is not 100 % the case, do not use the system. Contact your area's Graupner GmbH Co. KG service partner. Perform the range test before each fl ight and, in 10. doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during fl ight. The range must always be at 50 m on the ground in order to assure safe model operation.

**Attention: Never start the range test on the transmitter during**  **normal operation of the model.**
**DSC output** If necessary, use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the "DSC output" line then activate this menu item by pressing the center **SET**button of the right touch pad.79 **Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter** As soon as this line has been selected, the value fi eld in its column directly above **STO** on the screen's bottom line will be framed.

99sec PPM10

–––

––– Auto.C1 Pos. 0% STO DSC Output Autorotation BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL RF Range Test

Move the C1 joystick into the desired threshold switchover position then press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current value will be displayed, e. g.:

99sec PPM10

–––

––– -55% STO Auto.C1 Pos. DSC Output Autorotation BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL RF Range Test

After this has been done, use the arrow keys to move into the column above the switch symbol then assign a switch to this fi eld, as described on page 52 in section "Switches, controls and control switches". Preferably the selection will be one of the two self-resetting switches, SW 1 or 9.

99sec PPM10

––– -55% STO 9 Auto.C1 Pos. DSC Output Autorotation BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL RF Range Test Once this activation switch is closed, the fi rst occurrence of a threshold underrun will cause the program to switch over to "Autorotation" and then remain independent of C1 position in this fl ight phase until the activating switch, in this example SW 9, is again "OFF"."Auto. C1 Pos." has precedence over all other fl ightphase switches. Corresponding parameter settings for ... pitch servos • throttle servo • tail rotor servo • swashplate rotation, if available • gyro setting • ... are made in the " **Helicopter mixer** " menu, see page 64.
**Cut-off** Within the framework of autorotation settings for the mx-20 HoTT transmitter's helicopter program, there are parameters for an emergency "cut off" of the throttle servo or motor actuator, refer to the programming proposal on page 286. However, this option is not available if an idle position is specifi ed in the "Thr setting AR" line of the " **Helicopter mixer** " menu instead of an (emergency) OFF position; for example, to avoid restarting the motor after every landing during autorotation practice. In this case it is better to use this option as a "cut off" rather than as an emergency OFF solution. Depending on the "forw./back" choice made for the "Pitch min" line of the " **Heli Type** " menu, this motor "cut off" option can be coupled to a switch for throttling down a carburetor servo to the cut-off (or idle) position. This cut-off (or idle) position is specifi ed by the left column over the " **SEL** " fi eld and its value is to be established through trial and error. A speed controller or throttle servo will only take on this preset position when a certain servo position or threshold is underrun and a switch is activated. This is done by setting the desired servo position (threshold value) into the middle column, directly over the " **STO** " fi eld then selecting the appropriate ON/OFF switch function in the right column. If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is greater than the current servo position, i. e. the current servo position lies below the threshold, the switchover will occur as soon as the switch is put into its ON position. If the percentage value specifi ed for the middle • column is less than the current servo position, i. e. the current servo position is above the threshold, the speed controller will initially reduce motor speed or close the carburetor's throttle servo only to the extent dictated by the value in the left column as soon as the servo's position once underruns the threshold (max. +150 %) after the switch is changed over to its ON position. The speed controller or throttle servo will remain in this cut-off position only until the selected switch is again changed over followed by a one-time throttle servo or speed controller movement beyond the preset threshold with the throttle/brake joystick control. The factory setting for the left column is -100 % for the throttle servo "cut-off" position and a threshold of +150 % servo position setting in the middle column.80 **Detail program description - Base setup model | Helicopter** PPM10

––– -55% 9

SEL ––– cut off +150% –100% STO Auto.C1 Pos. DSC Output Autorotation BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

**Programming** To change the preset "cut-off" position of the throttle servo, press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to set a value at which the motor is reliably "off" without a startup of the throttle servo. For example -125 %:

PPM10

––– -55% 9

SEL ––– +150%

STO –125% cut off Auto.C1 Pos. DSC Output Autorotation BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

The – upper – preset value in the middle column ensures the motor can be stopped, throughout the maximum possible positioning range of the servo or speed controller, alone by the switch to be assigned in the right column. However, if you wish to set a lower threshold, by which an underrun will cause the throttle servo or speed controller with closed switch to switch into the cut-off position, reduce the preset servo travel and - if applicable, the throttle limiter - by placing the throttle/ pitch joystick into the desired position then press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. PPM10

––– -55% 9

SEL ––– +100%

STO –125% cut off Auto.C1 Pos. DSC Output Autorotation BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Finally, use the column at the right to specify a switch with which you can cut off the motor directly (emergency) or which will be activated by the threshold.

PPM10

––– -55% 9

SEL +100% STO –125% 1 cut off Auto.C1 Pos. DSC Output Autorotation BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Notices: Be sure the throttle servo does not run out • mechanically when the cut-off function is activated. A threshold over +100 % is reached by temporarily • increasing the travel for servo 1 in the " **Servo adjustment**  " menu to over 100 % then, after storing the threshold, change servo travel back to the original value.81 **Your notes**82 **Detail program description - Model type** This "Model type" menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in preparation for subsequent programming of the specifi ed model type.
Suppress model Base setup model

Servo adjustment

Control adjust Model type

Stick mode.

Press briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.
**Motor at C1** After selecting the "Motor at C1" line with the  arrow keys of the left and right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL
Press briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now use the arrow keys of the right touch pad to select from among the following four options: "none" For operation of a model without a propulsion. The warning "Throttle too high", see page 36, is deaktivated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the " **Wing mixers**  " menu (beginning page 146) is available without any restrictions. "back": The idle position for the throttle/brake fl aps control stick (C1) is to the rear, i. e. toward the pilot. The warnings "Throttle too high", see page 36, as well as the "cut off" option in the " **Basic settings, model** " menu, see page 72, are activated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the " **Wing mixers**  ", beginning page 146, will be available if the entry in the "Motor" column of the " **Phase settings** " menu, page 128 for the currently active fl ight phase contains "none". "forw.": The idle position for the throttle/brake fl aps control stick (C1) is at the front, i. e. away from the pilot. The warnings "Throttle too high", see page 36, as well as the "cut off" option in the " **Basic settings, model** ", see page 72, are activated and the "Brake settings" sub-menu of the " **Wing mixers**  ", beginning page 146, will be available if the entry in the "Motor" column of the " **Phase settings** " menu, page 128 for the currently active fl ight phase is "none". Notice: **Be sure to pay attention during the programming •**  **procedures that motors do not start up unintentionally. Disconnect the fuel supply or**  **battery terminals to motors before programming.** C1 trimming will operate according to your choice • between "normal" or only "back" or "fwd.", that is, either over the control's entire travel path or only in the respective idle direction. Pay attention to the " • cut off trim" function described on page **54**

. **Tail type** After selecting the "Tail type" line with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

+100% SEL Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1

Press briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the type applicable to your model with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. "normal": Elevators and rudder are each operated by a single servo. "V-tail": Elevator and rudder control is affected by way of two separate, articulated, V-shaped rudders. The coupling function for rudder and elevator control will be automatically taken over by the program. The relationship of rudder-to-elevator proportion is set in the " **Dual Rate / Expo**  " menu, page 108 and servo travel in the " **Servo adjust** " menu, page 90. If differentiated rudder throw is also desired then the V-tail should be 

# Model type

Establishing winged aircraft model type83 **Detail program description - Model type** controlled instead by way of the " **Dual mixer**  " menu, page 194. In this case however, the tail type entry specifi ed here must be "normal". "Delta/fl ": Aileron and elevator control is operated by one or two servos per wing half. However, elevator trimming is also affected by selecting the "QR 2WK" option – see below – but only on servos 2 & 3. "2HRSv3+8": This option is intended for models with two elevator servos. The servo connected to output 8 will operate in parallel with servo 3 to actuate elevators. Elevator trimming affects both servos. Notice about the "2HRSv3+8" option: One control, which assigns input 8 by way of the **"Control adjust"** menu, is then disconnected from servo "8" by software for reasons of safety i. e. it is made ineffective.
**Aileron/Flaps** After selecting the "Aile/fl aps" line with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

+100% SEL Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1

Press briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse **Brake offset** This function not only has potential for gliders and electric models but also for models with combustion motors and landing fl aps. The mixers described in the "Brake settings" line of the " **Wing mixers** " menu can be operated by the C1 control stick ("input 1") or another transmitter operating element which has been assigned to input 7, 8 or 9 in the " **Control adjust** " menu. In this latter case, retain the "GL" default setting for the "Type" column in the

" **Control adjust** " menu so the selected control can operate independent of fl ight phase. In the majority of cases the default setting for "input 1" will remain as it is and the brake will be operated by way of the non-neutralizing C1 joystick. However, use of input 7, 8 or 9 makes it possible to operate the brake in an alternative manner, even by way of a supplementary control, if the C1 stick is to be used for something else. The neutral point (offset) can be set to any desired position. This is done by placing the control for input 1, 7, 8 o 9 into the position at which the landing fl aps are to be in their neutral position then fi xing this "Offset" point there with **STO**

.

+90% SEL STO Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1

If the offset point is not set at the far end of control element travel, the remainder of travel to the end point will be "free travel", i. e. this "free travel" will no longer video. Now use the arrow keys of the right touch pad to select the number of wing servos to be programmed for the model.
Available Control channel used

1QR 2 1QR 1WK 2 | 6

2QR 2 + 5 2QR 1WK 2 + 5 | 6 2QR 2WK 2 + 5 | 6 + 7 2QR 4WK 2 + 5 | 6 + 7 / 9 + 10 4QR 2WK 2 + 5 / 11 + 12 | 6 + 7 4QR 4WK 2 + 5 / 11 + 12 | 6 + 7 / 9 + 10 Depending on the option selected here, the given mixers needed and their settings will be activated in the **"Wing mixers",**  menu beginning page 146. Tips: Settings for all wing fl ap pairs (QR and QR2, WK and • WK2) can be trimmed on a fl ight-phase basis in both the " **Phase trim** " menu and in the " **Wing mixers** " menu, page 146. The functionality of all wing fl ap pairs (QR and QR2, • WK and WK2) can also be operated by way of the "Throttle/brake-fl ap stick" if this stick has not been assigned to other use, e. g. for certain brake settings, see " **Wing mixers** " menu, page 146. To confi gure this it is only necessary to assign "Control 1" to input 6 in the " **Control adjust** " menu, page 96. (If you would rather operate fl aps with switches, one of the transmitter's two or three position switches are good for this purpose.)84 **Detail program description - Model type** infl uence any mixer available for "Brake settings" in the " **Wing mixers** " menu. This free travel ensures that, even if the brake fl ap control is not quite positioned to its full end of travel, it will still stop all brake settings at "neutral". At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %. Tip: Preferably, the servo intended for operating any airbrake fl aps that may be on the model should be connected to the receiver output operated by the brake input channel, e. g. connect airbrake servo onto (free) receiver output 8 if input 8 has been chosen for the "brake", etc. A second airbrake servo is most conveniently operated by way of a free mixer.85 **Your notes**86 **Detail program description - Helicopter type** 

# Helicopter type

Establishing helicopter model type This "Model type" menu is used to establish the type of model to be programmed. This also activates all characteristic mixers, coupling functions, etc. in preparation for subsequent programming of the specifi ed model type.
Suppress models Base setup model

Servo adjustment

Control adjust Helicopter type

Stick mode

Press briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. **Swashplate type** Control of the swashplate will require an appropriate program variant which corresponds to the number of servos operating pitch control. After selecting the **"** Swashplate **"** line with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

Linear. swashpl. Swashplate

no 1 Servo

Rotor direct right HELI TYPE

Pitch min. back SEL
Press briefl y on the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting for number of pitch servos will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. "1 Servo": The swashplate will be tipped with one servo each for roll and nick. Pitch control will be affected by a separate servo. (Since helicopter models operated with only 1 pitch servo will be operated WITHOUT the transmitter's mixer functions for pitch, nick and roll, the **"Swashplate mixer"** menu item in the Multifunction menu will be hidden.) "2 Servos": Two roll servos will displace the swashplate axially to affect pitch control; nick control will be decoupled by a mechanical compensation rocker. "3Sv (2Roll)": Symmetrical three-point control of the swashplate is affected at three articulation points, each radially offset from the others by 120°, which are connected to one nick servo (at the front or rear) and two roll servos (located laterally at the left and right). All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control. "3Sv (140)": Asymmetrical three-point control of the swashplate is affected at three articulation points connected to one nick servo (rear) and two roll servos (front left and right). All three servos push the swashplate axially to affect pitch control. "3Sv (2Nick)": Symmetrical three-point control as described above but radially offset by 90°, one lateral roll servo and two nick servos, front and rear. "4Sv (90°)": Four-point swashplate control affected by two roll servos and two nick servos. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will set the option back to "1 Servo". **Swashplate type: 1 Servo**

2 **Swashplate type: 2 Servos**

2

1 **Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Roll)**

3

1 2

**Swashplate type: 3 Servos (140°)**

3

1 287 **Detail program description - Helicopter type Swashplate type: 3 Servos (2 Nick)** 

3

2 1

**Swashplate type: 4 Servos (90°) 2 Nick / 2 Roll**

2 5

1 3

Notice: Except for the "1 Servo" choice, swashplate mixer proportions must also be set in the **"Swashplate mixer** " menu, page 196.
**Swashplate linearizing** After selecting the **"** Linear. swashpl. **"** line with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate

no Rotor direct right HELI TYPE

Pitch min. back

The "yes" entry will prevent undesired side effects such as pitch change due to a roll function or tension between swashplate servo rods. This type of tension can arise when effected servos strain for different displacement positions due to travel which deviates from one another. Linearizing will require a bit of familiarization on the part of the pilot because, in order to linearize the entire rotation travel for the servo arm, servo travel can be appropriately reduced for small control movements – similar to a substantial Expo setting – .

**Rotor rotation** After selecting the **"** Rotor direct **"** line (rotor direction) with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate

no Rotor direct right HELI TYPE

Pitch min. back

Once the choice for main rotor rotation direction is made with the arrow keys, it is set by pressing the center **SET** button in the right touch pad. "right": The main rotor turns clockwise when viewed from above. "left": The main rotor turns counter-clockwise when viewed from above. Simultaneously pressing the   or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will set the option to "right". right-hand rotation left-hand rotation This entry is necessary for correct operational orientation of the torque and power compensation mixer settings made in the **"Helicopter mixer"** menu: Pitch, C1  throttle, C1  tail rotor, Tail rotor  throttle, Roll  throttle, Roll  tail rotor, Pitch  throttle, Nick  throttle, Nick  tail rotor.

**Pitch min** After selecting the **"** Pitch min **"** (pitch minimum) line with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate

no Rotor direct right HELI TYPE

Pitch min. back88 **Detail program description - Helicopter type** The "Pitch min" line is used to adapt the direction of operation for the throttle/pitch control stick to your control preferences. All other helicopter program options which involve throttle and pitch functions, e. g. throttle curve, idle trimming, tail rotor mixer, etc., are dependent on this setting. Press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The operating direction of the throttle/pitch joystick will be displayed in inverse video. Now choose the variant needed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.

Pitch

These mean: "fwrd.": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick (C1) is "forward", i.e. away from the pilot. "back": minimum pitch setting when the pitch joystick (C1) is "back", i.e. toward the pilot. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will set this option to "rear".

Notices: C1 trimming affects only the throttle servo. • The so-called "throttle limiter" is set by default, see text • beginning page 104, such that the throttle limiter for full throttle can be set independently of the pitch servo via input **"Th.L.12"** in the **"Control adjust"** menu. Since your models will typically be operated with the • same pitch-min direction, this specifi cation can be conveniently preselected in the "transmitter-specifi c"

" **Basic Settings** " menu, page 224. This specifi cation will be adopted automatically when a new model memory is created in the "Helicopter type" menu but, if desired, can be adapted on a model-specifi c basis as described. **Expo throttle limit** After selecting the **"** Expo thro lim. **"** line with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed.

Expo thro lim. 0% SEL Linear. swashpl. no Rotor direct right HELI TYPE

Pitch min. back

The "Throttle limit" function, described in the text for the

" **Control adjust** " menu on page 104, can be assigned an exponential characteristic curve. A pitch progression rate value between -100 % and +100 % can be set with the arrow keys. For example, this is meaningful when the throttle limiter is to be regulated in parallel with the idle setting. Further details about the throttle limiter can be found in the text for the " **Control adjust** " menu on page 100. An example of two Expo throttle limit curve characteristics for 100 % servo travel. continuous line: negative expo values; dashed line: positive expo values             89 **Your notes**90 **Detail program description - Servo adjustment Column 3 "midpoint"**  The servo midpoint setting is intended for adapting a non-standard servo (a servo whose midpoint position does not correspond to a pulse length of 1.5 ms, i.e. 1500 μs), as well as for minor adjustments, e. g. for the fi ne tuning of the neutral position of model rudders. Independent of trim levers and any mixer settings, the neutral point can be set in a range of -125 % to +125 % within a maximum servo travel scope of ±150 %. Independent of all other trim and mixer settings, this setting is always based directly on the respective servo. Note that extreme adjustments of the neutral point can lead to one-sided restrictions of servo motion because both the electronic and the mechanical aspects limit total travel to ±150 %. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys in the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry fi eld displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value. **Column 4 "- Weg +"** This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is 0 ... 150 % of normal servo travel. The values set are based on the settings that have been made for the "midpoint" column. To create a symmetrictravel path, i. e. controlside independent travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional rotary control or switch) is to be put into the position which covers travel to both sides of the marked pad to complete the entry. Simultaneously 6. pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will set any setting which has been made back to the given default value. Important: Servo designation numerals are based on the respective receiver outputs to which they are connected, provided that no swapping of transmitter and/or receiver outputs has been specifi ed. This means that even a change of stick mode will not effect the numbering of servos.

**Column 2 "rev"** The direction in which a servo turns is adapted to the practical reality of the given model so that the assembly of control rods and joints do not need to accommodate a specifi c servo rotation direction. Rotation direction is symbolized by the "=>" and "<=" character combinations. Servo rotation direction must be specifi ed before making settings for the options which follow below. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the rotation direction to "=>".

normal reversed normal

reversed This menu is used to set the direction, neutralization, travel and limit parameters for a given selected servo exclusively.
Suppress models Base setup model

Control adjust Model type Servo adjustment Stick mode

Briefl y press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

Begin setting servo parameters in the left column. **Basic procedure steps:** Select the desired servo, S1 ... S12, with the 1.  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. If necessary, use the 2.  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to reach the desired column then, if desired, move the respective control out of its midpoint to make an asymmetric setting. Briefl y press the center 3. **SET**button in the right touch pad. The respective entry fi eld will be displayed in inverse video. Use the 4. arrow keys of the right touch pad to set the desired value. Briefl y press the center 5. **SET**button in the right touch 

# Servo adjustment

Servo direction, midpoint, travel and limit

Se rvo t r a v el

- 1 2 5 %

C e n t r e a dj u s t m e n t + 1 2 5 %91 **Detail program description - Servo adjustment** frame.

Notice: It may be necessary to fi rst assign a control to a servo attached to one of the 5 ... 12 control channels. If necessary, this is to be done in the " **Control adjust** " menu, see page 96 or 100.
To create an asymmetric travel path, the respective control (joystick, proportional rotary control or switch) is to be moved to the side to be set such that it covers only the marked frame. The value setting is activated by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The value fi eld will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be changed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. Pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad will complete the entry. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys in the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the changed parameter in the entry fi eld back to 100 %. Important: In contrast to settings made with the **"Control adjust"** menu, all settings made in this menu affect exclusively the respective servo, independent of how the control signal for this servo is produced, i.e. directly by a control stick or by way of any mixer functions. The adjacent fi gure shows and example of a side-dependent servo setting, -50 % and +150 %. Transmitter control travelServo travel

**Column 5 "limit"** The "- lim +" column is reached by pushing the marked frame with the  arrow key of the left or right touch pad, analogous to the pointers at the bottom of the screen, to the right beyond the "- trv +" column.

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + lim 0% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 150% 0% 0% 150% 150% 150% 150% S4 S5

To create a symmetric, i. e. control-side independent limit, the respective control (joystick, proportional rotary control or switch) is to be put into the position in which the marked frame covers both sides of the travel setting. To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (joystick, proportional rotary control or switch) is to be moved to the side on which the marked frame only includes the value to be changed. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys in the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry fi eld displayed in inverse video back to its "0 %" value. Example: A servo is controlled separately by two controls over a mixer and but, for model-specifi c reasons, must only be operated over a servo travel path of 100 % because, for example, the rudder would mechanically collide with the elevator if moved more than 100 %. As long as only one control is used at a time, this is no problem. But this does become a problem when the signals of both controls (e. g. aileron and rudder) combine to form an overall travel in excess of 100 %. The linkage and servos could be strained excessively ... To prevent this, the travel should certainly be limited by way of an individual travel limit. In the case of the rudder used in the example, this would be a value slightly less than 100 % – because it is assumed the rudder would collide at 100 % – .92 **Detail program description - Joystick setting** Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. With each brief push (one "click") on a joystick it will change its neutral position by one increment. Holding the stick longer will cause trimming to run in the corresponding direction at increasing speed. The current position is shown on the screen and adjustment is also made "audible" by various high frequency tones. This makes fi nding the mid-point during fl ight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted. Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake joystick, commonly referred to as control function "C1" (channel 1) – digital trimming is effective within a model memory location selectively as either a global parameter (i. e. consistent in all fl ight phases) or as a fl ight-phase specifi c parameter. This specifi cation as "global" or "phase" is made in the "Joystick setting" menu described here, whereas C1 trimming is always made "globally", i. e. independent of fl ight phases. This setting is visualized in the base screen by a "shadow" on trim bars: shadow present = global, • no shadow = fl ight phase dependent. • The following fi gure shows elevator trim – in the right column with standard Mode 1 – as being fl ight-phase dependent. 

# Joystick setting

Setting stick mode 1 through 4

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Normal » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT

Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to the " **Stick mode** " menu item of the multifunction menu.
Servo adjustment

Dual Rate / Expo Stick mode

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust

Open this menu item by pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

Ch.1 Aile Elev

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Rudd 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL GL

St This menu, adapted for winged models, permits the trim effects of the four digital trim levers to be established and control functions 1 through 4 to be selectively "decelerated". The desired line can be reached by using the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate function fi eld has been selected and then the center **SET**button in the right touch pad is pressed briefl y, the fi eld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting can be made with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
**Column "Tr"** (trim) Except for "channel 1", this column can be used to switchover trim effect from "GL(obal)" to "PH(ase)" and vice versa. For example:

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL

GL

St PH Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

"GL": The position of the respective trim lever is effective for the given model "globally", i.e. across any fl ight phases which may be programmed for it, page126. "PH": The position of the respective trim lever is effective on a phase-specifi c basis and will be automatically stored upon change of fl ight phase so that the setting is again available following a return to this fl ight phase. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) switches the entry back to "GL".
**Column "St"** (trim steps) The four digital trim levers push the neutral point of the respective joystick by one increment for each press ("click"). This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel. After selecting column "St" (Steps) and then the desired trim control with the  arrow keys of the left or right93 **Detail program description - Joystick setting** touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed. For example:

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL GL

St Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

Briefl y press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10, with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example:

Tr + 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL GL

St 8 Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

Simultaneously pressing the  or  arrow keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the change made in the active fi eld back to "4".
**Column "time"** The "time" column entries infl uence joystick acceleration speed/s – if applicable, for each movement direction for the four control sticks, 1 through 4, separately – . This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control function and therefore also any servos controlled by this function. The time can be programmed symmetrically for both sides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In the case of side-separate settings, the joystick is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video fi eld will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made, – for example, even to ensure gentle rev-up of the propulsion motor despite a (too) fast motion of the C1 stick.

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL GL

St 1.1s Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

On the other hand, for reasons of safety, the motor cutoff should always be "immediate". Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the change made to the active fi eld back to "0.0 s".94 **Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopter model** Both joysticks are equipped for digital trimming. With each brief push (one "click") on a joystick it will change its neutral position by one increment. Holding the stick longer will cause trimming to run in the corresponding direction at increasing speed. The current position is shown on the screen and adjustment is also made "audible" by various high frequency tones. This makes fi nding the mid-point during fl ight easy, without looking at the screen. If the mid-point is overrun, a brief motion pause will be inserted. Current trim values are automatically stored when a model memory change is made. Furthermore – except for trimming the throttle/brake joystick – digital trimming is effective selectively either as a global parameter, i. e. consistent in all fl ight phases, or as a fl ight-phase specifi c parameter. This specifi cation as "global" or "phase" is made in the "Joystick setting" menu described here, whereas throttle trimming is always made "global" by software, i. e. independent of fl ight phases. This setting is visualized in the base screen by a "shadow" on trim bars: shadow present = global, • no shadow = fl ight phase dependent. • In the following fi gure nick trimming is used as an example of fl ight-phase dependence – presented in its default Mode 1 at the left – .

STARLET #02

2:22h Stop Flt «Normal » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT 

# Joystick setting

Setting stick mode 1 through 4 Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to the **" Stick mode "** menu item of the multifunction menu.

Suppress models Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress menus

Open this menu item by pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

Model select

Base setup model Model type Copy / Erase Suppress models

Suppress: TOG

This menu, adapted for helicopter models, permits the trim effects of the four digital trim levers to be established and control functions 1 through 4 to be selectively "decelerated". The desired line can be reached by using the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. Once the appropriate function fi eld has been selected and then the center **SET**button in the right touch pad is pressed briefl y, the fi eld will appear in inverse video and the desired setting can be made with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
**Column "Tr"** (trim) These setting variations are confi gured to accommodate the needs of helicopter models, which is why the following alternative options are available for the "Thr." line: Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL

GL

St PH Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd

"TL": "throttle limit" C1 trimming operates as idle trimming when the "throttle limit" function regulates the motor for starting, see " **Control adjust** " menu, page 104. "AR": "autorotation throttle" C1 trim operates as idle trim exclusively in the "Autorot" fl ight phase. This makes it possible to assign a principle (fi xed) preset AR throttle position in the

" **Helicopter mixer** " menu, page 164, e. g. for use during autorotation practice, which can be "varied" with the idle trim lever. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will switch this option back to "TL". On the other hand, the trim effects of respective digital trimming controls for the lines "Roll", "Nick" and "Tail rotor" can be switched over from "GL" to "PH" and vice versa. Example:

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL

St PH Thr. Roll Nick

time Tail TL95 **Detail program description - Joystick setting | Helicopter model** "GL": The position of the respective trim lever is effective for the given model "globally", i.e. across any fl ight phases which may be programmed for it, page 126. "PH": The position of the respective trim lever is effective on a phase-specifi c basis and will be automatically stored upon change of fl ight phase so that the setting is again available following a return to this fl ight phase. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will switch the entry back to "GL".
**Column "St"** (trim steps) The four digital trim levers push the neutral point of the respective joystick by one increment for each press ("click"). This is where the increment size (step) can be adjusted for a given direction, whereby maximum trim travel, independent of the selected number of trim steps, is always about ±30 % of control travel. After selecting column "St" (Steps) and then the desired trim control with the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, the corresponding entry fi eld will be framed. Example:

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL PH

St Thr. Roll Nick

time Tail TL

Briefl y press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The current setting will be displayed in inverse video. Now select the desired value, between 1 and 10, with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. For example:

Tr + 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL PH

St 8 Thr. Roll Nick

time Tail TL

Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any change made to the active fi eld back to "4".
**Column "time"** The "time" column entries infl uence joystick acceleration speed/s – if applicable, for each movement direction for the four control sticks, 1 through 4, separately – . This means that respective servos will then follow rapid control position changes only at an accordingly delayed rate. This time delay has a direct effect on the control signal and therefore also commensurately on any servos controlled by the effected controls. The time can be programmed symmetrically for both sides or separate for each control direction. This setting has a programmable range of 0 s to 9.9 s. In this latter case, the given stick control is to be moved to the respective side so that the inverse video fi eld will switch between sides to the one for which the change is to be made. Example: All three servos are to be actuated for swashplate pitch control, e g. a "Pitch" control movement for a "3Sv (2Roll)" swashplate. However, travel for the middle servo is greater than that of the other two servos on the shorter lever. A rash "Pitch" control movement would not operate the nick servo in the middle as quickly as it would the two roll servos on the shorter lever. This would cause a momentary control motion in the "nick" direction. However, if response time for the "pitch" control function were to be reduced by at least the positioning time for the servo in the middle then all three servos would reach their proper positions at the same time. The necessary delay times typically amount to only a few tenths of a second. For example:

Tr + 4 4 8 0.0s

4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

0.0s TA GL GL PH

St 0.0s 0.2s 0.2s Thr. Roll Nick

time Tail

Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any change made to the active fi eld back to "0.0 s".96 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Control adjust

Fundamental operating steps for control and switch assignments Servo adjustment

Dual Rate / Expo Stick mode

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust

Briefl y press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal

Aside from the two joysticks which operate control functions 1 through 4, a standard mx-20 HoTT transmitter is also equipped with other operating elements: two 3 position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and SW • 6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu as "Ct9" and "C10". three proportional rotary controls: CTRL 6, 7 and 8. • Respectively designated "Ct6", "Ct7" and "Ct8" in the

menu. three 2 position switches: SW 2, 3 and 8. • Respectively displayed in the menu as "2", "3" and "8" in combination with a switch symbol indicating the switching direction. two pushbutton switches: SW 1 and SW 9. Analogous • to the aforementioned switches; designated as "1" and "9" and displayed in combination with a symbol indicating switching direction. In contrast to the two joysticks which, when initialized for a new model memory as a "Winged aircraft" model type will already be confi gured to operate the servos connected to receiver outputs 1 ... 4, these "other" operating elements initially remain inactive. Thus, at least in the system's delivered state, – as already mentioned on page 20 – or even after the initialization of a new model memory with the "Winged aircraft" model type and its "binding" to the intended receiver, only those servos connected to the two joysticks by way of receiver outputs 1 ... 4 are able to be operated; any servos which may be connected to the receiver's outputs 5 ... 12 will initially remain inactive in their middle positions. Even though this may seem inconvenient at fi rst glance, it is indeed just this state which offers full freedom to select and assign these "other" operating elements as desired and leaves any unused operating elements harmlessly dormant without taking any action to deactivate them. This has the advantage that: **An unused operating element will have no infl uence**  **on your model's operation even if inadvertently operated; it will be inactive and therefore have no**  **assigned function.** These "other" operating elements can be freely assigned to meet your needs and the features of your model. They can be assigned to any function input in the " **Control adjust** " menu, see page 50. But this also means that each of these operating elements can also be assigned to multiple functions at the same time. For example, one and the same toggle switch, SW X, assigned in this menu to an input, can at the same time be assigned to a "timer" as an On/Off switch in the **"Timers (general)"** menu... Furthermore, all inputs can be selectively made global or fl ight-phase specifi c (providing that fl ight phases have been defi ned in the menus " **Phase settings** ", page 128, and " **Phase assignment** ", page 134). The respective names for the given fl ight phases will then appear in the bottom screen line, e. g. "normal". **Basic procedure steps** Select the desired input, E5 ... 12 with the 1.  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. If necessary, use the 2.  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to change to the desired column. Briefl y 3. press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The respective entry fi eld will be displayed in inverse video. Actuate the desired operating element or use the 4. arrow keys of the right touch pad to set the desired value. Briefl y 5. press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad to complete the entry. Simultaneously 6. pressing the  or  arrow keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset any setting change back to its default value.97 **Detail program description - Control adjust Column 2 "typ"**  Analogous to the " **Stick mode** " menu already described, this column can be used to select whether other settings are to be made for the given input, e. g. "GL(obal)" or "PH(ase specifi c)" and vice versa.
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal

"GL": The given input's settings will be "globally" effective for the respective model memory across any fl ight phases which may be programmed. "PH": The settings for this input will be effective on a fl ight-phase basis and must therefore be explicitly set in each fl ight-phase where it is to be effective.

Notice: More about fl ight phases on page 126.
**Column 3 "Control or switch assignment"**
Use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to select one of the inputs, 5 through 12. Briefl y press the center **SET**button in the right touch pad to activate the assignment. Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Eing. 6 Eing. 7 Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Move desired switch or control adj.

Normal

Now activate the desired control (CTRL 6 through 10) or selected switch (SW 1 through 3, or 8 or 9) - whereby a proportional rotary control will only be detected after some "detenting" action has taken place and so may have to be activated a bit longer. If adjustment travel is insuffi cient, activate the control in the other direction. Two position switches can only switch back and forth between their fi xed end states, e. g. motor ON or OFF. On the other hand, the 3 position switches, SW 4/5 or 6/7, that can be incorporated in this **"Control adjust"** menu as "Ct9" or "C10", also offer a middle position. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) for an active control or switch assignment – see fi gure above – will reset the input back to its "free" state. Tips: When assigning switches, pay attention to the • desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free" (if applicable, across all fl ight phases). This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions. The travel setting described below allows the • appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch. For example, the screen will now show either the control's number or – in conjunction with a switch symbol indicating the switching direction – the switch's number .
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct6 3

Normal

**Column 4 "offset"** The control midpoint for the given control, i. e. its zero point, can be changed in this column. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct6 3

Normal

Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys in the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the entry fi eld displayed in inverse video back to "0 %".
**Column 5 "-travel+"** This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ±125 % of normal servo travel. Use the  arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to select one of the inputs, 5 through 12. To set symmetric travel, i. e. control-side independent travel, the respective operating element (proportional rotary control or switch) is to be put into a position which98 **Detail program description - Control adjust** covers travel to both sides of the marked frame.
Input 5

–travel+ +100% +100% +100% +100% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 +100% +100% +100% +100% Normal

To set asymmetric travel, the respective control (proportional rotary control or switch) is to be moved to the side on which the marked frame only includes the value to be changed.
Input 5

–travel+ +100% +100% +100% +100% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 +100% +100% +100% +100% Normal

The value setting is activated by briefl y pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad. The value fi eld will be displayed in inverse video. Values can be changed with the arrow keys of the right touch pad.
Input 5

–travel+ +100% +100%

+100% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 +100% +100%

+100% +111% +111%

Normal Input 5

–travel+ +100% +100%

+100% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 +100% +100%

+100% +88% +111%

Normal

Another brief press of the center **SET**button in the right touch pad will complete the entry. Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or effect. Simultaneously pressing the  or  keys in the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the changes parameter in the inverse video entry fi eld back to +100 %. Important: In contrast to the servo travel setting, control travel setting effects all derived mixer and coupling functions, i. e. infl uences all servos which can be actuated by way of the respective control.

**Column 6 "time"** A symmetric or asymmetric time delay between 0 and 9.9 s can be applied to each of the 5 ... 12 function inputs. Use the  arrow keys in the left or right touch pad to push the marker frame to the right, beyond the "-travel+" column. To set a symmetric, (i. e. control-side independent) time delay, the respective operating element (proportional rotary control or switch) must be put into a position which covers time to both sides of the marked frame. Input 5

– time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Normal

To set an asymmetric time delay, the respective control (proportional rotary control or switch) is to be moved to the side on which the marked frame only includes the value to be changed.
Input 5

– time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Normal

Notice: Further suggestions for structuring timed fl ows can be found in the section "Control of timed fl ows" on page 266.99 **Detail program description - Control adjust**100 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Control adjust

Basic procedure for transmitter control and switch assignment Servo adjustment

Dual Rate / Expo Stick mode

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% Throt Gyro Input 8

––– ––– ––– 6 7

Input 9 Input10 Input11 Th.L.12 ––– ––– –––

Ct6 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

––– GL

GL GL

GL GL

GL GL

GL

typ

In addition to the two dual axis sticks for control functions 1 to 4, the mx-20 HoTT transmitter is equipped with other controls as standard: Two 3-stage switches: SW 4/5 and CTRL 9, plus SW • 6/7 and CTRL 10. On this menu, these are assigned as "Ct9" and "Ct10". Three proportional rotary controls: CTRL 6, 7 and 8. • Named as "Ct6", "Ct7" and "Ct8" on this menu. Three 2-stage switches: SW 2, 3 and 8. Labeled • accordingly as "2", "3" and "8" on the menu. A switch icon indicating the switch direction is also shown. Two push-button switches: SW 1 and SW 9. • Displayed as with the preceding switches, "1" and "9" with a switch icon indicating the switch direction. Even with a newly-initialized model memory for the "Helicopter" model type, the two dual axis sticks will – in the absence of further confi guration – infl uence only those servos connected to receiver outputs 1 ... 4 and 6. Unlike these, the "additional" transmitter controls mentioned above are theoretically inactive at fi rst. (The exception here is the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control (throttle limiter), which also affects servo 6.) One of the effects of this is that (as mentioned back on page 20 ) with a factory-fresh unit, only the servos connected to receiver outputs 1 ... 4 and –depending on the position of the throttle limiter– servo 6 can be moved using the two joysticks. (This also applies following the initialization of a new model memory with the "Helicopter" model type and its "binding" to the receivers to be installed in the model.) The servos connected to slots 5, 7 and 8, on the other hand, will simply stay "stuck" at their center points. While this may appear more than a little awkward at fi rst glance ... this is the only way to ensure that you can select any of the "additional" transmitter controls as you wish and, in addition, do not need to waste time "disabling" control elements you do not require. This is because **the only way to ensure an unwanted control element has no effect on your model, even if operated by**  **accident, is to make it inactive, i.e. unassigned to a function.**  You can therefore use this " **Control adjust** " menu exactly as you wish, to assign the "additional" control elements as you want to any required function input; for further details, see page 50. Equally, this also means that you can assign individual transmitter controls to multiple functions at the same time, if required. As an example: the exact same rocker switch SW X that you assign to an input on this menu can simultaneously be assigned to "Timers" on the **"Timers (general)"** menu as an "On/Off" switch, etc.

Note: As a rule, input 6 must kept "free" for a helicopter model. On this, see "Throttle" on the next double page. Furthermore, if fl ight phases have been defi ned on the " Phase settings" menu (page 128 ) and " **Phase assignment**  " menu (page 134), then **all** inputs must be set either as global or fl ight phase-specifi c. The names assigned to each of these fl ight phases are then shown in the bottom line of the screen display, e. g. "Normal". **Basic procedure** Using the arrow keys 1.  on the left or right touch pad, select the input you want: Input 5, Throt 6, Gyro 7, Input 8 ... 11 or Th.L.12. If necessary, use the arrow keys 2.  on the left or right touch pad to select the column you want. Briefl y tap the center 3. **SET**key on the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted. Activate your chosen transmitter control or use 4. the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set your chosen value. Briefl y tap the center 5. **SET**key on the right touch pad to complete data entry. If you 6. tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this will reset any settings made back to their respective default values. **Column 2, "typ"** Similarly to the " **Stick mode** " menu described previously, this column can be used to defi ne whether further settings for the input in question are to have a101 **Detail program description - Control adjust Column 4, "offset"**  In this column, you change the control center, i. e. the zero point, for the transmitter control in question. The adjustment range lies between -125 % and +125 %.
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Throt Gyro Input 8 ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Normal 6 7 Ct7 3

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset the value in the highlighted fi eld back to 0%. **Column 5, "–travel+"** This column is used to set servo travel symmetrically or asymmetrically for each side. The setting range is ± 125 % of normal servo travel. Using the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad, select an input: Input 5, Throt 6, Gyro 7, Input 8 ... 11 or Th.L.12. To confi gure symmetrical travel, i. e. one independent of the control side, move the affected transmitter control (proportional rotary control or switch) to a position at which the marker frame encloses both sides of the travel adjustment region:

–travel+ +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% Normal Input 5 Throt Gyro Input 8 6 7 "GL(obal)" or a "PH(ase-specifi c)" effect, as follows:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Throt Gyro Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Normal 6 7

"GL": The settings for the input in question affect all fl ight phases programmed (if any) and thus act "globally" on the model memory in question. "PH": The settings for this input take effect per fl ight phase and must therefore be confi gured separately for each fl ight phase.

Note: See page 128 for more information on fl ight phases.
**Column 3, "Transmitter control/switch assignment"** Using the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad, select an input: Input 5, Throt 6, Gyro 7, Input 8 ... 11 or Th.L.12. Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to activate the assignment option:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Gas Gyro Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Normal 6 7 Move desired switch or control adj.

Now move your chosen transmitter control (CTRL 6 to 10) or selected switch (SW 1 to 3, 8 and 9). Note, however, that the proportional rotary controls are only identifi ed after a few "turns": this means you need to move them for slightly longer. If the control does not have enough travel, move the control in the opposite direction as required. Once assigned, the 2-stage switches can be switchedback and forth only between their respective endpoints, e. g. headlights ON/OFF. In contrast, the 3-stage switches SW 4/5 and 6/7 also permit a center control position; these are confi gured as "Ct9" or "Ct10" on the **"Control adjust"** menu. If a switch has been assigned, then tapping the 

or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) bei aktivierter Schalterzuordnung – see screen image above – will reset the input back to "free". Tips: When assigning switches, pay attention to the • desired switching direction and also that all unused inputs remain "free" or are again reset to "free" (if applicable, across all fl ight phases). This is necessary to ensure that inadvertent actuations of these unused controls cannot cause malfunctions. The travel setting described below allows the • appropriate end state to be established for an assigned switch. The screen now shows either the control number or – alongside a switch icon that shows the switch direction – the switch number, e. g.:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Throt Gyro Input 8 ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Normal 6 7 Ct7 3102 **Detail program description - Control adjust** To confi gure asymmetric travel, move the affected transmitter control (proportional rotary control or switch) to the side on which you wish to confi gure it, so the marker frame encloses only the value you want to adjust:

–travel+ +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% Normal Input 5 Throt Gyro Input 8 6 7

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to activate value confi guration: The value fi eld is shown highlighted. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to change the values:

–travel+ +100% +100%

+100% +100% +100%

+100% +111% +111%

Normal Input 5 Throt Gyro Input 8 6 7

–travel+ +100% +100%

+100% +100% +100%

+100% +88% +111%

Normal Input 5 Throt Gyro Input 8 6 7

Complete the confi guration by tapping the center **SET** key on the right touch pad. Negative and positive parameter values are possible in order to appropriately adapt the control's direction or effect. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset parameters changed in the highlighted fi eld back to +100%. Important: In contrast to altering servo travel, changing the control travel setting affects all "downstream" mixer and coupling inputs, i. e. any and all servos that could be actuated by the transmitter controls concerned.
**Column 6, "– time +"** Each of the function inputs 5 ... 12 can be assigned a symmetrical or asymmetric time delay of between 0 and 9.9. s. Using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame over the "– travel +" column and to the right. To confi gure a symmetrical time delay, i. e. one independent of the control side, move the affected transmitter control (proportional rotary control or switch) as necessary to a position at which the marker frame encloses both sides of the time adjustment region:

– time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Normal Input 5 Throt Gyro Input 8 6 7

To confi gure an asymmetric time delay, move the affected transmitter control (proportional rotary control or switch) as required to the side on which you wish to confi gure it, so the marker frame encloses only the value you want to adjust: – time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Normal Input 5 Throt Gyro Input 8 6 7

Note: Other suggestions for designing timed sequences can be found under "Controlling timed sequences" on page 266.103 **Detail program description - Control adjust "Throt 6"** 

Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Throt Gyro Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Normal 6 7

In the helicopter program, it is also theoretically possible to assign any transmitter control (rotary proportional controls and switches) to individual inputs. However, please note here that some of the inputs available on this menu are already assigned to helicopter-specifi c functions, and therefore cannot be re-assigned in this way. If we consult the receiver assignment table on page 59, for example, we see that the throttle servo (or speed controller of an electrically-powered helicopter) must be connected to receiver output "6", since control channel "6" is reserved for motor power control. Unlike a fi xed-wing model aircraft, however, the throttle servo or speed controller is not directly controlled by the throttle stick or other transmitter control, but by a complex mixer system – see the **"Helicopter mixers"** menu (from page 164). Furthermore, the "Throttle limit function" described on the next page also infl uences this mixer system. Assigning a transmitter control or switch on the "Throttle" line, or to its supplementary control signal, would unnecessarily "confuse" this complex mixer system. **For this reason the "Throttle" input MUST be left "free".**  **" Gyro 7"**

Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Throt Gyro Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Normal 6 7

Most of the latest gyro systems not only feature infi nitely variable proportional gyro gain setting, but also offer a choice of two separate types of gain mode on the transmitter. If the gyro you are using also has this feature, then this menu option gives you the opportunity to specify both "normal" gyro gain and, as appropriate, to specify "heading-lock mode" in the "Offset" column in the range of ±125%, plus a particular gain type within this pre-selection, so as to be able to exploit maximum stabilization for normal, slow fl ight, but to reduce gyro gain for fast circuits and aerobatics. To proceed as described above, use fl ight phase switching to enter different settings on the "Gyro" line. From the starting-point of these predefi ned – static – fl ight phase-specifi c settings, you can then use a transmitter control assigned to the "Gyro 7" line, e. g. one of the rotary potentiometers CTRL 7 or 8, to vary the gyro gain around the respective "offset point": The center point of the control corresponds to the setting specifi ed by the offset. If the transmitter control is moved from this center point in the direction of full travel, gyro gain increases proportionally; it diminishes when moved in the opposite direction. This provides a fast and straightforward method of adjusting gyro gain even in flight – e. g. to suit changing weather conditions – or to test-fl y optimum settings. In software terms you can even limit the gyro gain range in both directions by adjusting transmitter control travel. **In this context, ensure that you comply with the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you**  **risk making adjustments that render your heli impossible to fl**  **y. Adjusting the gyro sensor**  To achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis, observe the following: The controls should have as little friction and "play" • as possible. There should be no "spring" in the control linkage. • Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo. • When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response – a corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro gain adjustor can be moved without causing the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made – either by using the default value under "Gyro" or the associated transmitter control – to eliminate the oscillation. If the model is fl ying forward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical fi n combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, you should make use of the option to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter104 **Detail program description - Control adjust** control using either the CTRL 7 or 8 proportional rotary control. **"Thr.l 12"** As standard, the "Thr.l 12" input is assigned to the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control mounted on the top left of the transmitter.
Input 9

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input Input Th.L.12 Ct6 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Normal 10 11

This pre-assignment makes it unnecessary to program the two fl ight phases that may be familiar to you from using other remote control systems – namely "with idle-up" and "without idle-up"" – ,since the mx-20 HoTT program offers a much more fl exible approach to fi ne-tuning and optimizing increases to system rotational speed below the hover point than "idle-up". If younonetheless prefer to program your helicopter "with idleup", then deactivate the "throttle limit" function described below by setting input "Thr.l 12" to "free". **Meaning and application of "throttle limit"** As already mentioned under "Throttle", and in contrast to fi xed-wing models, the power output of a helicopter's drive system is not controlled directly using the C1 joystick, but only indirectly via the throttle curve settings on the **"Helicopter mixers"** menu or – if your model features a speed governor – by using this mechanism.

Note: For separate fl ight phases, you can of course use fl ight phase programming to set specifi c throttle curves. Nevertheless, both methods of output control de facto result in the helicopter carburetor never approaching 

## Throttle limit function

anything near its idle speed under "normal" fl ight conditions, and that the motor can therefore neither be started or stopped cleanly without some other means of intervention. The "throttle limit" feature resolves this problem elegantly by using a separate transmitter control – by default the CTRL 6 proportional control mounted on the top left of the transmitter – to limit the throttle servo or the output level of the speed controller. In this way, it is possible to use the throttle limit control to "throttle back" as you wish as far as the idle setting – at which point the trim lever on the throttle/collective pitch stick takes over – or to cut out an electrical drive system directly. Conversely, the throttle servo or speed controller can only open up to its full-throttle position if the throttle limit control has also released the full servo travel path. The value set on the (right-hand) plus side of the "travel" column must therefore always be set to high enough to ensure that the maximum setting of the throttle limit control never restricts the full-throttle position that can be obtained using throttle curve settings – which typically means setting a value in the range +100% to 125%.

–travel+ +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% Normal Input 9 Input10 Input Th.L.12 +125% 11

The value on the (left-hand) minus side of the "travel" column should be set so that the throttle limit control can be used to safely cut out an electrical drive system or close a carburetor down far enough that the glow motor can also be cut out in conjunction with the105 **Detail program description - Control adjust** the – digital – C1 trim. You should thus (initially) leave this value at +100%. Furthermore, this variable "limiting" of throttle travel not only gives you a convenient method for starting and stopping the motor, but may also prove to have added a not inconsiderable increase in safety! For example, just imagine what could happen if you were carrying the helicopter to the take-off site with the motor running and you accidentally moved the C1 stick ... Accordingly, if the carburetor or speed controller is open too far, an audible warning is heard as soon as you turn on the transmitter, and the message below is shown on the basic display:

Throttle too high !

Tip: You can use the **"Servo display"** menu to observe the infl uence of the throttle limit slider. This menu can be accessed from almost any other menu by simultaneously pressing the  keys on the left touch pad. Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mx-20 HoTT!
**Basic idle setting** Start by turning the throttle limiter – by default the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control on the top left of the transmitter – clockwise as far as it will go. Set the throttle/ collective pitch stick to the maximum pitch position and also check the submenu "C1  Thr" on the menu ... **"Helicopter mixers"** (pages 164 ... 179) ... to ensure you have an active standard throttle curve. If, for example, the standard throttle curve has already been changed following the initialization of a model memory, then this must be reset at least temporarily to the values "Point 1 = -100%", "Point 3 = 0%" and "Point 5 = +100%":

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% –100% C1

Normal Thr Curve off

Note: As the throttle trim lever has no effect if the throttle limiter is open, its position here is unimportant. Now – without starting the glow motor – adjust the throttle servo, preferably mechanically and optionally using the servo 6 travel adjustment option in the

" **Servo adjustments** " menu, so that the carburetor is completely open. Now, close the throttle limiter completely by turning the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control in an anti-clockwise direction as far as it will go. Use the trim lever on the throttle/collective pitch stick to move the trim position marker to the "Motor OFF" position – see the fi gure in the next column.

Note: In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, the position of the throttle/collective pitch stick is meaningless. It can therefore remain at the maximum collective pitch position so that, when adjusting carburetor linkages, the throttle limiter alone can be used to switch between full throttle (throttle limiter open) and "Motor OFF" (throttle limiter closed). Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the carburetor linkages so that the carburetor is (just) completely closed. Take extreme care to ensure that the throttle servo cannot travel mechanically to either of the two extreme positions (full thr./Motor OFF). To complete this basic confi guration, the idle trim adjustment range must now be matched against point "L" on the throttle curve. To do so, set point "L" for the mixer "C1  Thr" on the " **Helicopter mixers** " menu from about -65% to -70%:

Input Output Point L 0% 0% C1

Normal Thr Curve off

–66%

To confi gure a smooth transition from the idle trim to the throttle curve exactly , the collective pitch stick should be moved to and fro slightly at its minimum position with the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully open. The throttle servo must not move as well! Any further adjustments to the throttle curve must of course be made later in fl ight. The motor is always started with the throttle limiter fully closed, whereby idle is set exclusively by using the trim lever of the throttle/collective pitch stick. **Throttle limit in conjunction with digital trim** In conjunction with the CTRL 6 throttle limit rotary control, the C1 trim sets a marker ( ) in the motor's confi gured idle position, from which the motor can be switched off via the trim. If, on the other hand, a further106 **Detail program description - Control adjust** marker is located at the end-point (see the partial display screenshot shown below), then you can simply click once to restore the original idle confi guration (see also page 54). This switch-off trim functions as an idle trim only in the left half of the throttle limit rotary control's path. That is: only within this range is the marker line set and also stored.

GRAUBELE #01

3:33h stop flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

RX0.0V 5.2V Last idle position

**2.4** M

motor OFF position **CTRL 6** Throttle limit control Current trim position

Trim at

For this reason, the marker is hidden and may even be erased while the throttle limit rotary control points to the right of its center position:

GRAUBELE #01

3:33h Stop Flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

RX0.0V 5.2V M **2.4 CTRL 6**  Throttle limit control

Notes: Since this trim function only takes effect in the • "Motor OFF" direction, the screen image shown above changes appropriately if you alter the control direction for the pitch minimum position of the C1 stick from "back" (as shown in the above image) to "forward" in the "min. pitch" line on the menu **" Base**  **setup model "** . The effects as shown also swap to the other side if you swap pitch right (as shown in the above screen images) to pitch left in the "Stick mode" line on the " **Base setup model** " menu (see page 74). You can use the • **"Servo display"** menu to observe the infl uence of the throttle limit slider. This menu can be accessed from almost any other menu by simultaneously pressing the  keys on the left touch pad. Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle servo on the mx-20 HoTT! A servo connected to output 12 can be used • independently of this for other purposes by means of mixers, provided that you separate the servo from the transmitter control at function input 12 on the "**MIX only channel**  " menu; see page 193. The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter • is shown as a horizontal bar in the throttle curve diagram on the second display page of the "Channel 1  Throttle" option on the " **Helicopter mixers** " menu (see page 168). The output signal for the throttle servo cannot be higher than the level set by the horizontal bar:

Input Output Point 2 0% 0% 0% C1

Normal Thr Curve off

Throttle limiter position The above diagram shows precisely this scenario: in the above example, the throttle limit control is set to -60% and thus restricts the movement of the throttle servo to -60% of full travel. **Time delay for the throttle limiter** To safely avoid the carburetor opening too rapidly, you should assign throttle limiter input 12 a time delay that takes effect only in the direction of full throttle. This applies especially if you are controlling the throttle limiter using a switch and not the default CTRL 6 proportional rotary control. To set a delay time, proceed as follows: turn the throttle limit control as far to the right as it will go or move the relevant switch to the full-throttle position; then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to select the "–time+" column:

– time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Normal Input 9 Input10 Input Th.L.12 11

After briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to select your desired time delay, e. g. 5 seconds:107 **Detail program description - Control adjust** – time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Normal Input 9 Input10 Input Th.L.12 11 5.0

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad or the **ESC** key on the left touch pad to complete the setup procedure. As already explained on page 94, selecting "Thr AR" in the "Thr." line on the menu ...
**"Stick mode"** (page 94)

Thr. Roll Nick

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Tail 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL

St TA

... makes the digital trim of the throttle/collective pitch stick active only in the "Autorot" fl ight phase. As a result, in "normal" fl ight phases, the C1 trim lever can be used neither to control the motor's idling nor to stop the motor. To ensure you still retain suffi cient adjustment options, we recommend using "Expo throttle limit" here. This sub-menu for this is found on the menu ... **"Helicopter type"** (page 86)

Expo thro lim. 0% SEL Linear. swashpl. no Rotor direct right HELI TYPE

Pitch min. back

... and the exponential curve characteristic it confi gures can adjust the control characteristics of the throttle limit control so that the latter provides suffi ciently fi ne control of the idle setting and can also stop the motor. In this case you should turn the throttle limiter fully to the left – unlike the previously described setting on the "Control adjust" menu – and adjust the "–" side of the "–travel+" column in the "Th.L.12" line so the throttle 

## Throttle limit in conjunction with "Thr AR" on the " **Stick mode** " menu

limiter fully closes the carburetor, i.e. the motor is safely switched off at this control position. Following this, move the throttle limit control to its center point and change the % value of the "Expo thro lim." line in the " **Helicopter type** " menu (see page 86) until the carburetor is in a position suitable for starting the motor. Now start the motor, and adjust the value if necessary until the motor idles reliably in this throttle limit control position. For the plus side of the "–travel+" column, increase thevalue to +125% as described before, so that the fullthrottle position of the throttle servo is also released reliably by the throttle limiter. Finally, set an asymmetrical time delay of, say, 4.0 seconds, so that the motor also picks up speed gradually even if you move the proportional rotary control too quickly to the right. Select the time preset to correlate to how far the carburetor opens up at the minimum collective pitch position. The value you set will need fi ne-tuning by practical testing.108 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Dual Rate / Expo

Confi gurable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Dual Rate / Expo** " in the multifunction list:
Servo adjustment Stick mode.

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust. Dual Rate / Expo

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL
The Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or controlling of control travels and characteristics for aileron (Ail), elevator (Ele) and rudder (Rud) (control functions 2 ... 4); it is switch-driven and fl ight-phase independent. The " **Channel 1 curve** " menu (see p. 116f.) can be used to set an individual curve characteristic for control function 1 (throttle/brake), featuring up to 6 separately programmable points. As with transmitter control travel adjustment on the **"Control adjust"** menu, **Dual Rate** affects the relevant control function directly, whether it controls a single servo or multiple servos – via mixer and coupling functions of arbitrary complexity. The control travels for each switch position can be set to between 0% and 125% of the normal full travel. **Expo** , on the other hand, enables fi ner-grained control of the model for values larger than 0% around the center position of the primary control function (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting full movement at the end-points of joystick travel. For values less than 0%, the reverse is true: control increases around the neutral position and diminishes towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" can therefore be set within a total range of -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to the normal, linear control characteristics. Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actual control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually decreases – depending on the position of the linkage point on the output disc. You can counteract this effect with Expo values greater than 0%, so that angular travel increases over proportionately as stick travel increases. The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling functions. For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages – particularly for very high-speed models. The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted vertical line follows the movement of the respective joystick, so you can clearly see the dependency of the curve value on the transmitter control. **Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo settings**  If you have set up fl ight phases in the " **Phase settings** " and " **Phase assignment** " menus and assigned each of these a name – e. g. "normal" – the name in question is displayed at the bottom left. In this scenario, you can operate the corresponding switch to switch between fl ight phases. **Basic procedure** Switch to the desired fl ight phase and then use 1. the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select your chosen menu line, i.e. "Ail", "Ele" or "Rud". Using the arrow keys 2.  on the left or right touch pad, select the right column or the as-yet invisible column for Expo values (see page 27). Tap the center 3. **SET**key on the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted. Use 4. the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set your chosen value. Tap the center 5. **SET**key on the right touch pad to complete data entry. If you tap the 6.  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this will reset any settings made back to their respective default values.

**Dual Rate function** If you want to be able to switch between two variants, assign a switch in the column marked with the switch icon at the lower edge of the display, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and109 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 111% Ail Ele Rud

100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 88% Ail Ele Rud

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this will reset a value changed in the highlighted fi eld back to 100%.
Caution: For safety reasons, you should not set Dual Rate values lower than 20%.
Some examples of Dual Rate values:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

**Exponential function** If you want to be able to switch between two variants, use the  key on the left or right touch pad to move to the right beyond the Dual Rate value column, until control switches" (page 52):

100%

100% 100% Ail HR SR DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET )

The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction. With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu, the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the switch itself. However, this kind of control switch must be defi ned appropriately beforehand on the " **Control switches**  " menu (see page 123). Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

If you select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with **SEL** and activate the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to alter the Dual Rate value shown in the highlighted fi eld separately for each of the two switch positions: the word "DUAL" (shown roughly in the middle of the display) changes to "EXPO":

0%

0% 0%

EXPO –––

–––

–––

SEL Ail Ele Rud

If you want to be able to switch between two variants, assign a switch in the column marked with the switch icon at the lower edge of the display, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52):

0%

100% 100% Ail Ele SR DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET )

The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective switching direction. With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu, the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the switch itself. However, the control switch in question must be defi ned appropriately beforehand on the

" **Control switches** " menu (see page 123). Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.110 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 0%

0% 0% Ail Ele Rud EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

If you select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with **SEL** and activate the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to alter the Expo value shown in the highlighted fi eld separately for each of the two switch positions: Now, for example, you have the opportunity to fl y with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switching direction:

33%

0% 0% Ail Ele Rud EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this will reset a value changed in the highlighted fi eld back to 0%. Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100%.
**Combining Dual Rate and Expo** If you have entered values for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effect from on function is superimposed on the other, as shown in these examples:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

**Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo** To make an asymmetric setting, i. e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective joystick, fi rst access the " **Control switches** " menu and assign one of the C1 ... C4 control switches – "C3", for example – your chosen transmitter control, e. g. control 3 for the elevator function. Leave the switching point at the joystick's neutral position (0%), however. Now return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the corresponding control function ("Elevator" in this example). Activate "Switch assignment" and tap the center **SET**key briefl y on the right touch pad to switch to the expanded switches. Here, use the arrow keys to continue switching to the control switch "G3" that you defi ned previously:

100%

100% 100% Ail HR SR DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL normal

Control / fix sw C1 C2 C3 C4 FX FXi C1i C2i C3i C4i

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to confi rm the assignment of this switch:

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal

Now use one of the arrow keys to move to the right column and then move the elevator joystick to the appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e. g. for "Up elevator" ...

100%

100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal 77%

... and "Down elevator":111 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 100%

100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal 111%

Set the Expo values in the same way.112 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Dual Rate / Expo

Confi gurable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Dual Rate / Expo** " in the multifunction list:
Servo adjustment Stick mode.

Channel 1 curve Switch display Control adjust. Dual Rate / Expo

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

100%

100% 100% Roll Nick Tail DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL
The Dual Rate / Expo function permits switching or controlling of control travels and characteristics for the control functions roll, pitch-axis, tail rotor, i. e. control functions 2 ... 4; it is switch-driven and fl ight-phase independent. An individual curve characteristic for control function 1 (motor/collective pitch), featuring up to 6 separately programmable points, can be set either on the " **Channel 1 curve**  " menu (page 119) or separately for throttle and collective pitch on the " **Helicopter mixers** " menu (see p. 165f.). As with transmitter control travel adjustment on the **"Control adjust"** menu, **Dual Rate** affects the relevant control function directly, whether it controls a single servo or multiple servos – via mixer and coupling functions of arbitrary complexity. The control travels for each switch position can be set to between 0% and 125% of the normal full travel. **Expo** , on the other hand, enables fi ner-grained control of the model for values larger than 0% around the center position of the primary control function (roll, pitch-axis,tail rotor), without forfeiting full movement at the endpoints of joystick travel. For values less than 0%, the reverse is true: control increases around the neutral position and diminishes towards the end-points. The degree of "progression" can therefore be set within a total range of -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to the normal, linear control characteristics. Rotary-output servos, now generally commonplace, offer another application. This is because the actual control surface movement is not linear: as the rotational angle of the output disc or lever increases, the control surface rate of travel over the control linkage continually decreases – depending on the position of the linkage point on the output disc. You can counteract this effect with Expo values greater than 0%, so that angular travel increases overproportionately as stick travel increases. The Expo setting also affects the relevant control function directly, whether this controls a single servo or multiple servos – via any number of mixer and coupling functions. For both Dual Rate and Expo functions, switch assignment can be set up in any way desired, which therefore permits the triggering of multiple functions using one and the same switch. This, in turn, offers the opportunity to link the triggering of Dual Rate and Expo functions to a single switch: this offers many advantages – particularly for very high-speed models. The graphic screen displays the curve characteristics directly. Once you select a menu line, the dotted vertical line follows the movement of the respective joystick, so you can clearly see the dependency of the curve value on the transmitter control. **Flight phase-dependent Dual Rate and Expo settings**  If you have set up fl ight phases in the " **Phase settings** " and " **Phase assignment** " menus and assigned each of these a name – e. g. "normal" – the name in question is displayed at the bottom left. In this scenario, you can operate the corresponding switch to switch between fl ight phases. **Basic procedure** Switch to the desired fl ight phase and then use the 1. arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select your chosen menu line, i.e. "Roll", "Nick" or "Tail". Using the arrow keys 2.  on the left or right touch pad, select the right column or the as-yet invisible column for Expo values (see page 27 ). Tap the center 3. **SET**key on the right touch pad. The corresponding input fi eld is shown highlighted. Use 4. the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set your chosen value. Tap the center 5. **SET**key on the right touch pad to complete data entry. If you tap the 6.  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this will reset any settings made back to their respective default values.

**Dual Rate function** If you want to be able to switch between two variants, assign a switch in the column marked with the switch113 **Detail program description - Control adjust** use the  key on the left or right touch pad to move to the right beyond the Dual Rate value column, until the word "DUAL" (shown roughly in the middle of the display) changes to "EXPO":

0%

0% 0%

EXPO –––

–––

–––

SEL Roll Nick Tail

If you want to be able to switch between two variants, assign a switch in the column marked with the switch icon at the lower edge of the display, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52):

0%

100% 100% Roll Nick SR DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET )

The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective switching direction. With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu, the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the switch itself. However, the control switch in question must be defi ned appropriately beforehand on the

" **Control switches "** menu (see page 123). Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved. icon at the lower edge of the display, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52 ):

100%

100% 100% Roll Nick SR DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL normal Move desired switch to ON position (ext. switch: SET )

The switch so assigned appears on the display, together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's switching direction. With "G" switches from the "expanded switches" menu, the joystick or another transmitter control acts as the switch itself. However, this kind of control switch must be defi ned appropriately beforehand on the " **Control switches**  " menu (see page 123). Whichever switch has been assigned ... the respective switch appears on the display together with a switch icon that indicates the switch's respective direction when moved.

100%

100% 100% Roll Nick Tail DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal

If you select the right-hand column at the lower edge of the display marked with **SEL** and activate the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to alter the Dual Rate value shown in the highlighted fi eld separately for each of the two switch positions:

100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 111% Roll Nick Tail

100% 100%

DUAL 3

–––

–––

SEL normal 88% Roll Nick Tail

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset a value changed in the highlighted fi eld back to 100%.
Caution: For safety reasons, you should not set Dual Rate values lower than 20%.
Some examples of Dual Rate values:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

**Exponential function** If you want to be able to switch between two variants,114 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 0%

0% 0%

EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail

If you select the right-handcolumn at the lower edge of the display marked with **SEL** and activate the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to alter the Expo value shown in the highlighted fi eld separately for each of the two switch positions: Now, for example, you have the opportunity to fl y with a linear curve characteristic with the switch in one direction, and to pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switching direction:

33%

0% 0%

EXPO 3

–––

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset a value changed in the highlighted fi eld back to 0%. Some examples of Expo values:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In each of these examples, the Dual Rate value equals 100%.
**Combining Dual Rate and Expo** If you have entered values for both the Dual Rate and the Expo function, the effect from on function is superimposed on the other, as shown in these examples:Servo travelServo travelServo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

**Asymmetric setting of Dual Rate and Expo** To make an asymmetric setting, i. e. a Dual Rate or Expo setting dependent on the direction of the respective joystick, fi rst access the " **Control switches** " menu and assign one of the C1 ... C4 control switches – "C3", for example – your chosen transmitter control, e. g. control 3 for the pitch-axis function. Leave the switching point at the joystick's neutral position (0%), however. Now return to the "Dual Rate / Expo" menu and select the corresponding control function ("Nick" in this example). Activate "Switch assignment" and tap the center **SET**key briefl y on the right touch pad to switch to the expanded switches. Here, use the arrow keys to continue switching to the control switch "G3" that you defi ned previously:

100%

100% 100% Roll HR SR DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL normal

Control / fix sw C1 C2 C3 C4 FX FXi C1i C2i C3i C4i

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to confi rm the assignment of this switch:

100%

100% 100%

DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail

Now use one of the arrow keys to move to the right column and then move the pitch-axis joystick to the appropriate end-point in order to enter a separate Dual Rate value for each direction, e. g. for "Pitch-axis up" ...

100%

100% DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail 77%

and "Pitch-axis down":115 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 100%

100% DUAL ––– C3

–––

SEL normal Roll Nick Tail 111%

Set the Expo values in the same way.116 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Channel 1 curve

Control characteristics for throttle/spoiler joystick Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Channel 1 curve** " in the multifunction list:
Servo adjustment Stick mode

Switch display Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Open this menu item by pressing the center **SET**button in the right touch pad.

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% C1

normal Curve Curve off

Since the carburetor response or the effect of the airbrakes or spoilers is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables you to change the control characteristics of the throttle / airbrake joystick

, regardless of whether this control function affects the servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers. If you have used the " **Phase settings** " and " **Phase assignment**  " menus (see pages 128 and 134) to specify fl ight phases, this option can be adjusted per fl ight phase. The fl ight phase name – e. g. "normal" – is always shown at the bottom left of the screen. The control curve can be defi ned by up to 6 points (termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simplifi es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with. In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points – namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick travel ("L", low = -100% travel) and the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100% travel) – defi ne a linear characteristic curve. First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, if necessary. **Setting reference points** By moving the transmitter control (throttle/airbrake joystick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on the "Input" line (-100% to +100%). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125% to +125%. The control signal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the joystick is at 0% of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0%, since the characteristic curve is linear. Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25%. If necessary, use the left or right arrow key  to drag the marker frame downwards, until it is at the "Point" line: ? 0% 0% 0% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in the frame, then you can set the next reference point by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point number is highlighted:

1 +50% +50% +50% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered. **Deleting reference points** To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), you can activate the value fi eld on the "Point" line to highlight it by simultaneously tapping the  or  keys on117 **Detail program description - Control adjust** the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) and then delete the value. Complete the operation by briefl y tapping the center key **ESC** on the left touch pad. **Changing reference point values** Move the joystick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 ... 4 or "H" (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. Activate the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. The point value fi eld is now highlighted and can be set within the range -125% to +125%, and without infl uencing the neighboring reference points. Example:

2 +50% –75% –75% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has been set to -75%.

Note: If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position.
**Trim point function** Alternatively, assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position:

2 +50% –75% –75% Trim point

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve

Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center key **ESC** on the left touch pad.

**Trim offset function** Assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can not only use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set and change their values, but you can also use the  keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an existing curve within the range ± 25%:

1 0% +50% +50% Trim offset

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve 1 0% 0% 0% Trim offset

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve

You can also exit from this function by tapping the center key **ESC** on the left touch pad.

**Trim x-axis function** This function is activated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) arrow key on the right touch pad with an active (i. e. highlighted) value fi eld. You can then use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.

? 0% –33% 0% Trim X-axis

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve

Notes: If you reposition the point horizontally further away • from the current control position than approx. ±25%, a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position. Please note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point.118 **Detail program description - Control adjust Smoothing the Channel 1 curve**  In the example below, sample reference points have been set: Reference point 1 to 0% Reference point 2 to +25% Reference point 3 to -75% as described in the last section.

1 –50% 0% 0% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. First – assuming a situation is confi gured as presented above – tap the center **ESC** button on the left touch pad to deactivate the value fi eld. Then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame in an upwards direction to the "Curve" line. Now briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to activate the value fi eld on the "Curve" line:

1 –50% 0% 0% off

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the curve value from "off" to "on" and complete this setup procedure by briefl y tapping the center SET the center **SET**key on the right touch pad or the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad:

1 –50% 0% 0% on

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

Note: The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle/ airbrake curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples from page 242 onwards.119 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Channel 1 curve

Control characteristics for throttle/collective pitch stick Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Channel 1 curve** " in the multifunction list:
Servo adjustment Stick mode

Switch display Control adjust Dual Rate / Expo Channel 1 curve

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% C1

normal Curve Curve off

Since the carburetor response or the effect of collective pitch is often non-linear, you can make compensatory adjustments to these in this menu. The menu therefore enables you to change the control characteristics of the motor/collective pitch stick

, regardless of whether this control function affects the servo connected to control channel 1 directly or affects multiple servos via various mixers. If you have used the " **Phase settings** " and " **Phase assignment**  " menus (see pages 128 and 134 ) to specify fl ight phases, this option can be adjusted per fl ight phase. The fl ight phase name – e. g. "normal" – is always shown at the bottom left of the screen. The control curve can be defi ned by up to 6 points (termed "reference points" below) placed anywhere along the path of joystick travel. While the on-screen graph considerably simplifi es the process of setting and adjusting the reference points, we recommend that you set fewer reference points to begin with. Please note that the curve characteristic you set here acts as the input signal for specifi c mixers in the

" **Helicopter mixers** " menu (see page 164):

" **Helicopter mixers** "**Collec tive pitch** 

**stick Collective pitch** 

**C1**  **Thr**
**C1**  **Tail rotor C1** 

**curve**

In the basic software set-up, 2 reference points – namely the end-points at the bottom end of joystick travel ("L", low = -100% travel) and the top end of joystick travel ("H", high = +100% travel) – defi ne a linear characteristic curve. First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, if necessary. **Setting reference points** By moving the transmitter control (motor/collective pitch stick), you can reposition the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "L" and "H". The current joystick position is also displayed in numerical form on the "Input" line (-100% to +100%). The point at which this line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the reference points within the range -125% to +125%. The control signal altered in this way will then affect all subsequent mixer and coupling functions. In the example above, the joystick is at 0% of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0%, since the characteristic curve is linear. Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25%. If necessary, use the left or right arrow key  to drag the marker frame downwards, until it is at the "Point" line:

? 0% 0% 0% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

Move the joystick. If a question mark can be seen in the frame, then you can set the next reference point by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by a number and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point number is highlighted:

1 +50% +50% +50% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered.120 **Detail program description - Control adjust Deleting reference points**  To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), you can activate the value fi eld on the "Point" line to highlight it by simultaneously tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) and then delete the value. Complete the operation by briefl y tapping the center key **ESC** on the left touch pad. **Changing reference point values** Move the joystick into the range of the reference point that is to be changed: "L" (low), 1 ... 4 or "H" (high). The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. Activate the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. The point value fi eld is now highlighted and can be set within the range -125% to +125%, and without infl uencing the neighboring reference points. Example:

2 +50% –75% –75% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

In this sample screen image, reference point "2" has been set to -75%.

Note: If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position.
**Trim point function** Alternatively, assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position:

2 +50% –75% –75% Trim point

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve

Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad.

**Trim offset function** Assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can not only use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set and change their values, but you can also use the  keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an existing curve within the range ± 25%: 1 0% +50% +50% Trim offset

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve

1 0% 0% 0% Trim offset

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve

You can also exit from this function by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad.

**Trim x-axis function** This function is activated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) arrow key n the right touch pad with an active (i. e. highlighted) value fi eld. You can then use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.

? 0% –33% 0% Trim X-axis

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve

Notes: If you reposition the point horizontally further away • from the current control position than approx. ±25%, a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark121 **Detail program description - Control adjust** does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position. Please note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. **Smoothing the Channel 1 curve** In the example below, sample reference points have been set: Reference point 1 to 0% Reference point 2 to +25% Reference point 3 to -75% as described in the last section.

1 –50% 0% 0% Normal off Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. First – assuming a situation is confi gured as presented above – tap the center **ESC** button on the left touch pad to deactivate the value fi eld. Then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame in an upwards direction to the "Curve" line. Now briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to activate the value fi eld on the "Curve" line: 1 –50% 0% 0% off

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the curve value from "off" to "on" and complete this setup procedure by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad or the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad:

1 –50% 0% 0% on

Normal Input Output Point

C1 Curve Curve

Note: The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real throttle/ airbrake curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples on pages 242 and 285.122 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Switch display

Displaying switch positions Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Switch display** " in the multifunction list:

Switch display Control switch Channel 1 curve

Phase settings Phase assignment Phase trim

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

Switch

Control Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

C1 C2 C3 C4

This feature is used to check the functions and give an overview of SW switches 1 ... 9 and the programmable control switches. If a switch is pressed, the switch number is revealed by one of the display items changing from an OFF to an ON symbol (or vice versa). To improve the legibility of this screen, a closed switch fi eld is also shown highlighted (i. e. it is shown on a dark background). For control switches C1 ... C4, activation of the corresponding transmitter control – which must have been previously assigned on the " **Control switch** " menu – will reveal the control switch number and direction.

Note: The switch numbering 1 to 9 as shown here corresponds to the labeling of the switches on the transmitter housing. The numbering of the switches has no effect on the programming of the transmitter, however.123 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Control switches

Programming the control switches Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Control switch** " in the multifunction list:

Switch display Channel 1 curve

Phase settings Phase assignment Phase trim Control switch

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH Gb1 Gb1 0%

STO ––– ––– –––

With many functions, it makes sense not to trigger their actuation by using one of the normal switches, but to trigger them automatically by the specifi c, freely programmable position of a transmitter control or joystick. Typical applications: Activation or deactivation of an onboard glowplug • heating system depending on carburetor setting or motor speed (in this case, the switch for glowplug heating is controlled on the transmitter by a mixer) Switching a stopwatch on or off to measure the • simple running time of electric motors Automated switch-off of a combi "aileron •  rudder" mixer when extending the airbrakes, e. g. so as to match the bank attitude of the model to the ground slope when landing on a ridge, without the direction of fl ight also being affected by the rudder (if the mixer were active). Lowering landing fl aps, adjusting elevator trim and/ • or executing specifi c Dual Rate, Exponential and Differential switchings when coming in to land, as soon as the throttle joystick is moved beyond the switching point. If required, a control switch can be overridden using a separately assigned switch in the 5th column. The mx-20 HoTT program is equipped with a total of 4 of these control switches ("C1" to "G4"). Accordingly, anywhere where switches can be assigned you have the option not only of using the 9 possible transmitter switches, but also of choosing and assigning one of the "C1" ... "C4" control switches from the list of expanded switches – as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 52. Furthermore, combining a control switch with an additional switch (as described later) also permits more complex switching permutations. **Basic procedure:** If no transmitter control is assigned, the 1. corresponding input fi eld in the column above the left switch icon will be displayed empty. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, 2. select the line for the control switch you want (1 to 4). Briefl y tap the center 3. **SET**key on the right touch pad. Move your selected transmitter control. 4. The associated transmitter control number appears in the input fi eld of the column above the left switch icon. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, 5. move to the right and the column above **STO**

. Move the transmitter control to the desired switching 6. point and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to save the switching point. Complete the remaining settings such as switching 7. direction, etc. Exit from the menu by using the center 8. **ESC** key on the left touch pad. **Assigning a transmitter control to a control switch** Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, select your chosen line (1 to 4). After completing the activation of transmitter control assignment by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, the following message is shown:

SEL +75% 0% 0% G1 G2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH Gb1 Gb1 –75%

STO ––– ––– ––– Move desired control adj.

As an example, the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control on the upper left is now to be assigned to the "C3" control switch. Accordingly, turn the dial of this control in any direction you want. As soon as this is detected, the control name appears on the display:124 **Detail program description - Control adjust** SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH 0%

STO ––– ––– ––– Ct6

**Resetting a control switch back to "free"** To reset a control switch back to "free", make sure the display is as below ...

SEL +75% 0% 0% G1 G2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH Gb1 Gb1 –75%

STO ––– ––– ––– Move desired control adj.

... and then press the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) briefl y to erase the transmitter control assignment.

**Defi ning the switching point**  Using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame into the **STO** (i.e. the STOre) column. Move the selected transmitter control to the position at which the switching point – i. e. the switch between OFF/ ON – should trigger and briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. The current position is displayed, for example "+85%": SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH +85%

STO ––– ––– ––– Ct6

The switching point can be altered at any time by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad again.

Note: Do not, however, set a switching point at a transmitter control's travel end-point, since this makes reliable switching impossible. Where a 3-stage switch (CTRL 9 and 10) is used to operate a control switch you should therefore program the switching point beforehand using one of the proportional rotary controls (CTRL 6 to 8): First, assign the corresponding proportional control in the 2nd column and set the switching point in such a way that will ensure the subsequent confi guration for the 3-stage switch will reliably exceed this value. If you do not, the switching function will be unreliable, since the control switch triggers only if a value unambiguously fails to meet or exceeds the value set! To complete the procedure, de-assign the transmitter control and then assign the 3-stage switch.
**Setting the switching direction** The switching direction of the control switch is changed as required in the 4th column. Using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame into the **SEL** (i.e. the SELect) column. After briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to set the switching direction from "normal" to "reversed" and vice versa:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH +85%

STO ––– ––– ––– Ct6

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH +85%

STO ––– ––– ––– Ct6

Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the switching direction to "=>". The current switch position of the control switch is displayed in the leftmost column by the switch icon next to the number of the control switch.

Notes: In this example, control switch "C1" remains open • while transmitter control 6 (the throttle limiter for a heli) is at less than +85% of full travel. It closes once the switching point is exceeded, i.e. by a value between +85% and the upper travel end-point. In the above example with the switching direction • reversed, control switch "C1" remains closed while the transmitter control is at less than +85% of full travel. As soon as the switching point is exceeded – in this example, by a value between +85% and the upper travel end-point – "C3" opens.125 **Detail program description - Control adjust** FIf a control switch – e. g. "C1" – has multiple • assignments, you should bear in mind that the switching direction set here applies to all C3 switches. The switch state can also be inverted by reversing • the control on the " **Control adjust** " menu. **Combining a control switch with one of the SW 1 ... 9 switches**  The control switch can be overridden by a further switch, so that e. g. in certain fl ight situations the function to be triggered can be activated independently of the control position and thus the position of the control switch. Switch to the value fi eld in the 5th column, the column above the right switch icon. In the simplest case, select one of the switches SW 1 ... 9 as described under "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 52. The number of this switch, e. g. "2", appears on the display screen in the rightmost column, together with a switch icon that indicates the current state of the switch:

SEL 05% 05%

0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH Ct6 +85%

STO 2

–––

–––

While this switch is open, the "C1" control switch is active, i. e. it triggers at the switching point; if the switch is closed, the control switch now remains permanently closed as well, independently of the control position and switching direction: SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH –75%

STO 2

–––

––– Ct6

**Combining two control switches** For more complex applications, however, it can prove necessary to override this control switch with a second control switch. Example: Instead of being assigned the CTRL 6 control as before, the "C1" control switch is now assigned control function 3 (transmitter control 3). The switching point is at its center point, i.e. at 0%. The switch chosen in the rightmost column is "C2", from the list of expanded switches. We now assign one of the two center proportional rotary controls to this control switch "C2", on its own line – e. g. the right CTRL 8, whose switching point lies at +50%:

SEL 0%

0% +50% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH

STO –––

––– Ct3 C2 Ct8

0%

Reading the switching directions given in the 4th column of the display, control switch "C3" remains closed while the joystick (K3) and/or "transmitter control 9" is/are beyond the switching point. This diversity of switching options certainly offers you enough scope for specialized applications to suit any type of model.126 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# How do I program a fl **ight phase?** The concept of fl ight phase programming

**General information on fl ight phase programming**  During a fl ight, you will often want to apply different settings – e.g. fl ap or trim settings for a fi xed-wing aircraft or collective pitch and throttle servo settings fora helicopter – at particular times in the fl ight (e. g. takeoff, approach, hover, auto-rotate, etc.). With mx-20 HoTT, you can access such presets automatically using switches or control switches. Flight phases are also of great utility during fl ight testing. You can confi gure various set-ups and then switch between them during the fl ight: this enables you to identify the most appropriate program set-up for your model quickly and easily. **The basic programming procedure is a three-stage process**  First, you have to set up the different fl ight phases, 1. i. e. you assign names to phases 1 ... max. 7. Each name is then shown in all phase-specifi c menus and also on the basic display. To avoid abrupt transitions when switching between the various phases, you can also program a period of time during which a "soft" transition to the next phase takes place. For fi xed-wing aircraft programs, these settings are made in the " **Phase settings** " menu. For heli programs, you either start with the " **Base setup model**  " menu if you wish to set up autorotation or, if not, you also start programming with the " **Phase settings**  " menu. In the second stage, you use the " 2. **Phase assignment**  " menu to set up the required "phase switches". Once these are set, you can then move to the fl ight 3. phase-dependent menus (see the tables below) to start programming the settings for the individual fl ight phases.

**List of fl ight phase-relevant menus for fi**  **xed-wing programs:**  **Menu Page**

" **Control adjust** " 96

" **Dual Rate / Expo** " 108

" **Channel 1 curve** " 116

" **Phase settings** " 128

" **Phase assignment** " 134

" **Phase trim** " 136

" **Non-delayed channels** " 137

" **Fl. phase timers** " 142

" **Wing mixers** " 146

" **MIX active/phase** " 192

**List of fl ight phase-relevant menus for helicopter**  **programs:**
**Menu Page**

" **Control adjust** " 100

" **Dual Rate / Expo** " 112

" **Channel 1 curve** " 119

" **Phase settings** " 132

" **Phase assignment**" 134

" **Non-delayed channels** " 137

" **Fl. phase timers** " 142 " **Helicopter mixers** " 164

" **MIX active/phase** " 192 All other menus are model-specifi c and thus cannot be programmed separately for each fl ight phase. Accordingly, changes you make in all other menus apply uniformly to all fl ight phases for that specifi c model. In some cases you may wish to use the " **Suppress**

**menus** " menu (see page 67) to remove the non-specifi c menus from the multi-function list when programming fl ight phases. A practical example of fl ight phase programming can be found on page 256).127 **Detail program description - Control adjust**128 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Phase settings

Setting up fl ight phases **Setting up fl ight phases**  When you set up fl ight phases for fi xed-wing aircraft models, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that – depending on your model and your settings – switch times much longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up several phases with names and transition times even if you don't currently have a use for them, since the decision as to which of the "occupied" phases you activate is made only on the " **Phase assignment** " menu, (page 134) when setting "phase switches". The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which one of the phases 1 ... 7 has already been assigned to a switch, plus the current status of that switch:

**Symbol Meaning** – No switch assigned
+ Phase can be accessed via switch
 Indicates the phase currently active

Note: The "Copy fl ight phase" option on the " **Copy / Erase** " menu is a useful aid when programming the various fl ight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a specifi c fl ight phase; these are then copied to the next fl ight phase, where they can then be modifi ed as appropriate. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Phase settings** " in the multifunction list:

Phase settings Phase assignment Phase trim Control switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open this menu. Within one model memory, the mc-20 HoTT lets you program up to 7 discrete groups of settings for various conditions met during the fl ight. The grouped settings are typically termed "fl ight phases" and are programmed in the corresponding menus. Depending on the setting "Throttle min. forward/back" or "None" in the "Motor on C1" line of the " **Model type** " menu, your transmitter's display will look as follows after accessing the "Phase settings" menu ...

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

... either the columns "Motor" and "Sw. time" (switch time) to the right of the column "ph. Tim." (fl . phase timers) or only the column "Sw. time" will be available for your settings. **"Name" column** Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad and use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to assign the phases your require – phase 1 to max. phase 7 – appropriate names from the selection list. The order in which phases 1 to max. 7 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", the "Normal phase", which is always active if ... no phase switch is set on the " • **Phase assignment** " menu or if no phase has been assigned to specifi c combinations • of switches. The defi nition of the phase name "Normal" could therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". The names themselves have absolutely no technical signifi cance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all fl ight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter's basic display. **"ph. Tim." column**
In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available, whose settings are confi gured on the " **Fl. phase timers** " menu (page 142). **Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2** The fl ight phase timers "Clk 1 ... 3" plus "Time1" and "Time2" run only in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/ start switch then has no effect. The lap counter, once started, continues to run through129 **Detail program description - Control adjust** changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad. While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" and a switch (SW), the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" have the following meaning: **Time1** Only the times are measured at which the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap timer/ timer" line of the " **Fl. phase timers** " menu (see page 142) is "closed". The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the basic display. This counter fi eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened", i. e. the timer is stopped:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Speed » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V 0:00.0 M Lap 00

If required, you can then use the arrow keys to access and read the times at which switches were made. Application: Measurement of e. g. motor switch-on times, if the same switch also actuates the motor.
**Time2** "Time2" stores both the "Off" and the "On" times for the associated switch, i. e. each actuation of the switch restarts the time count again and the counter is incremented by "1". Each time count can be stopped by using the center **ESC** key on the right touch pad, without activating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the "Time2" timer. In order to read out the time memory by using the arrow keys, the "Time2" timer must fi rst be stopped by using the **ESC** key on the right touch pad. Application: In addition to the motor runtimes, for example, the unpowered glide times between these could also be recorded. Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display of stopped timers on the basic display.

**"Motor" column**

Note: This column is only available if "Forward/back" is entered on the line "Motor on C1" on the " **Model type** "

menu.

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name motor Pha4 Pha5 

+
+ Normal Launch Dist.

–

– yes yes yes yes yes

"Yes" The motor connected to receiver output 1 will be controlled by the C1 joystick (throttle/brake stick). The brake system to be set up on the " **Wing mixers**  " menu is deactivated: BRAKE SETTINGS

normal Normal off

"No" The motor connected to receiver output 1 is decoupled from the C1 joystick (throttle/ brake stick) and is held in its OFF position – as specifi ed by the setting "Throttle min. forward / back" – automatically. The brake system to be set up on the " **Wing mixers**  " menu is activated and is actuated by the C1 joystick.

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

WK WK2 Normal

Note: The settings available depend on the number of controlsurface servos selected on the line "Ailerons/Camberchanging fl aps in the " **Model type** " menu.

**"Sw. time" column** When you switch between fl ight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly, there is also the option of specifying different times for different switches – e. g. from a phase into Phase 3 and the same phase into Phase 1.130 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame over the "ph. Tim." column – and "Motor" column, if applicable – to the right.

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 

+
+ Normal Launch Dist.

–

– 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s

0.1s 0.1s

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to highlight the value fi eld. You can then select switch times between 0 and 9.9 s in this fi eld. Example:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Pha4 Pha5 

+
+

–

– 3.0s 2.0s 4.0s

0.1s 0.1s Sw.time Normal Launch Dist.

The switch time is set to 4.0 s when switching from any phase to Phase 1 "Normal". When switching from e. g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the switch time is set to 2.0 s and to 3.0 s when switching from Phase 1 or 3 to Phase 2 "Launch". Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when (e. g.) switching between highly contrasting fl ight phases, such as e. g. between aerobatics and normal fl ight. Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the time to 0.1 in the active value fi eld. Note: The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all settings that are specifi c to fl ight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the " **Wing mixers** " menu (see page 146). Accordingly, the transition between fl ight phase-specifi c mixers does not occur abruptly. If you want individual servos to be switched without a delay, however, defi ne these accordingly in the " **Non-delayed channels**  " menu (see page 137).131 **Detail program description - Control adjust**132 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Phase settings** " in the multifunction list:

Phase settings Phase assignment Control switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan

Fl. phase timers

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

Auto Pha1 Pha2

Name ph.Tim. Pha3

–

– – –

Pha4  Autorot

Within one model memory, the mx-20 HoTT lets you program up to 6 discrete groups of settings for various conditions met during the fl ight. These are in addition to the auto-rotation fl ight phase that can be set up in the

" **Base setup model** " menu. The grouped settings are typically termed "fl ight phases" and are programmed in the corresponding menus. **Setting up fl ight phases**  When you set up fl ight phases for helicopter models, you start with this menu. You assign individual phases a name and also assign a period of time for a (soft) transition into each phase. Note that – depending on your model and your settings – switch times much longer than the default 0.1 s have proven useful. You can also set up several phases with names and transition times 

# Phase settings

Setting up fl ight phases even if you don't currently have a use for them, since the decision as to which of the "occupied" phases you activate is made only on the " **Phase assignment** " menu (page 134) when setting "phase switches". The "Status" column, second from the left, shows which one of the phases 1 ... 6 has already been assigned to a switch, plus the current status of that switch:

**Symbol Meaning** – No switch assigned
+ Phase can be accessed via switch
 Indicates the phase currently active

Note: The "Copy fl ight phase" option on the " **Copy / Erase** " menu is a useful aid when programming the various fl ight phases. First, you need to determine the parameters for a specifi c fl ight phase; these are then copied to the next fl ight phase, where they can then be modifi ed as appropriate.

**"Name" column** The fi rst line, and thus the fl ight phase with top priority, is reserved for auto-rotation fl ight – see the " **Base setup model**  " menu. Accordingly, the predefi ned name cannot be changed. Use the arrow keys to move to the line "Pha1". Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad and use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to assign each of the phases your require – phase 1 to max. phase 6 – an appropriate name from the selection list. The order in which phases 1 to max. 6 are assigned is entirely irrelevant and you can leave gaps as you wish. Nonetheless, you should always start with "Phase 1", the "Normal phase", which is always active if ... no phase switch is set on the " • **Phase assignment** " menu or if no phase has been assigned to specifi c combinations • of switches. The defi nition of the phase name "Normal" could therefore be a useful one to adopt for "Phase 1". The names themselves have absolutely no technical signifi cance for programming; their only purpose is to help you to identify which phase is active at any time and are thus displayed in all fl ight phase-dependent menus and also on the transmitter's basic display. **"ph. Tim." column**
In addition to the standard timers on the basic screen display, other timers are also available, whose settings are confi gured on the " **Fl. phase timers** " menu (page142). **Clk 1, Clk 2, Clk 3, Lap, Time1, Time2** The fl ight phase timers "Clk 1 ... 3" plus "Time1" and "Time2" run only in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned in this menu. During other fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/ start switch then has no effect. The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase, however, although it can be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad. While you can obviously record lap times using "Lap" and a switch (SW), the two timers "Time1" and "Time2" have the following meaning: **Time1** Only the times are measured at which the switch or control switch assigned in the "Lap timer/ timer" line of the " **Fl. phase timers** " menu (see133 **Detail program description - Control adjust** page 142) is "closed". The frequency at which the switch is activated is shown on the basic display. This counter fi eld is highlighted as soon as the switch for the "Time1" timer is "opened", i. e. the timer is stopped:

STARLET #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Speed » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V 0:00.0 M Lap 00

If required, you can then use the arrow keys to access and read the times at which switches were made. Application: Measurement of (e. g.) fl ight phases with increased motor speed, if the same switch is used to actuate fl ight phase switching.
**Time2** "Time2" stores both the "Off" and the "On" times for the associated switch, i. e. each actuation of the switch restarts the time count again and the counter is incremented by "1". Each time count can be stopped by using the center **ESC** key on the right touch pad, without activating the switch itself. Activating the switch, in turn, increments the counter by 1 and restarts the "Time2" timer. In order to read out the time memory by using the arrow keys, the "Time2" timer must fi rst be stopped by using the **ESC** key on the right touch pad. Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the display of stopped timers on the basic display.
**"Sw. time" column** When you switch between fl ight phases, it is advisable to use this column to program a switch time for a "soft" transition INTO (!) the respective phase. Accordingly, there is also the option of specifying different times for different switches – e. g. from a phase into Phase 3 and the same phase into Phase 1.For safety reasons, however, the transition to the autorotation fl ight phase **ALWAYS** occurs without any time delay. The angled bracket ">" in the "Sw. time" column at the end of the "Auto" line indicates that a delay can be set when transitioning FROM (!) auto-rotation INTO (!) another phase. Using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame over the "ph. Tim." column to the right.

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 

+
+ Normal Hover

–

– 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s

0.1s 0.1s Speed Autorot Auto

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to highlight the value fi eld. You can then select switch times between 0 and 9.9 s in this fi eld. Example:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 

+
+ Normal Hover

–

– 3.0s 2.0s 5.5s

4.0s 0.1s Speed Autorot Auto

A delay of 5.5 s applies when switching FROM autorotation into any other phase. A delay of 0.0 s always applies when switching TO auto-rotation. The switch time is 3.0 s when switching from any other phase to Phase 1 "Normal". When switching from e. g. Phase 1 to Phase 3, the switch time is set to 4.0 s. Such asymmetric transition times can be useful when (e. g.) switching between highly contrasting fl ight phases, such as e. g. between aerobatics and normal fl ight. Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the time to 0.1 in the active value fi eld.
Note: The "switch time" set here applies uniformly to all settings that are specifi c to fl ight phases, and thus to all mixers activated in the " **Wing mixers** " menu (see page 146). Accordingly, the transition between fl ight phase-specifi c mixers does not occur abruptly. If you want individual servos to be switched without a delay, however, defi ne these accordingly in the " **Non-delayed channels**  " menu (see page 137).134 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Phase assignment

Setting up fl ight phases Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Phase assignment** " in the multifunction list:

Phase settings

Phase trim Control switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan Phase assignment

Fl. phase timers Phase settings Control switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan Phase assignment

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior. A B C D E F

1 normal combi

Note: A phase name appears to the right of the phase number at the bottom right of the display only if you have assigned the name beforehand on the " **Phase settings** "

menu. On the " **Phase settings** " menu – described above separately for fi xed-wing and helicopter models – you will have set up names for your phases. On this menu – which is identical for both model types – you must now specify the switches or switch combinations that you want to use to trigger each phase. One exception for heli menu: one of the two auto-rotation switches must be set on the menu " **Base setup model** ". **Please note the following priorities:** If you have not yet assigned • any fl ight phase switches to any phase names, you will always fi nd yourself in fl ight phase "1". Accordingly, by the time you start programming fl ight phases, you should therefore have already given this fl ight phase the phase name "Normal". Independently of the switch positions of phases • assigned to switches using **this menu** , the autorotation phase – applicable only to the "Helicopter" model type and whose switch is assigned on the

" **Base setup model** " menu – always (!) takesprecedence. Accordingly, as soon as the autorotation switch in question is activated, the following warning appears:

A B C D E F

1 normal PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior. combi Autorot

Phase switch "A" is given priority over all subsequent • switch positions, from "B" to "F" Phase switch "B" is given priority over all subsequent • switch positions, from "C" to "F" The two 3-stage switches, SW 4/5 and 6/7, should • always be assigned from the center point position. For this reason, use switch "A" and/or switch "B" only if you wish to change from any other fl ight phase – apart from the heli's auto-rotation phase – directly into the phase that is assigned to this switch. **Programming fl ight phase switches**  Once you have confi gured your desired switch position, "A" to "F", using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, a switch (whether a "normal" switch or an expanded switch) is then assigned as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52). The order in which assignment is made is irrelevant: • you must ensure only that you assign what are, for you, the "correct" switches. (In the heli program, for example, you should also take care to ensure you do not use this menu to re-assign any auto-rotation switch already assigned on the " **Base setup model"** menu. **)** Example: 4 fl ight phases with phase priority

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 6 7 PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior. combi

**Assigning fl ight phases to switch positions**  You have now assigned names to the fl ight phases (1 ... max. 7) on the " **Phase settings** " menu and also programmed switches on this menu, but ... at the bottom right of the display screen, you only see "<1 normal >" – regardless of the positions the switches are in!?135 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame down and to the right and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad:

A B C D E F 2 6 7

1 Normal PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior. combi

Now close one (or more, as required) of the switches that you have assigned, and assign one of the fl ight phase names from the list you selected beforehand on the " **Phase settings** " menu to this switch position or combination. Here, for example, we assign the "Launch" phase to the closed ("I") priority switch "A" ...

A B C D E F 2 6 7

2 Launch PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior. combi

... if, for example, we wish to switch to this phase regardless of the "C" ... "F" switch positions, because the same switch activates an electric motor, etc. Use the same approach to set the other switches or combinations of switches. Theoretically – for the situation where all three are closed – you could use the three single switches shown in the example to defi ne an additional fi fth fl ight phase on the " **Phase settings** " menu. However, since this example assumes just four fl ight phases, you can leave the default phase name as "1 Normal" for this switch position. You can leave this menu in the familiar way by pressing the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad. Tips: If you have named more phases than you currently • have switches defi ned for then this is not really problematic. You can repeat and change your switch assignment as you wish at any point in time. And you can also name additional phases at any time and then assign switches to them. When assigning switches, check whether the • switches are already otherwise assigned to ensure that you avoid duplicate assignments. **Important notice: Before a phase switch is assigned, the model**  **settings confi gured are now to be found in the fl**  **ight phase "1 Normal", i. e. all fl**  **ight phase-dependent menus are reset to the standard confi**  **gurations for all other fl**  **ight phases. To avoid having to start from scratch in every fl**  **ight phase, you can copy over these standard settings**  **by using the command "Copy fl ight phase" on the**  **"Copy / Erase" menu to replace them with fl ight**  **data obtained from the "Normal" fl ight phase. You**  **then need only to make further fl ight phase-specifi**  **c changes to the settings.** 136 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Phase trim

Flap settings specifi c to fl ight phases Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Phase trim** " in the multi-function list:

Phase settings Phase assignment Control switch

Timers (general) Non-delayed chan Phase trim

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

Normal  0%

ELEV normal
Depending on the settings made on the "Aile/fl aps" line from the " **Model type** " menu (page 82) and on the

" **Phase settings** " menu, this menu makes available a set of control functions – 1 for EL ...

Normal  0%

ELEV Normal
... and up to 4 for EL, RU, AI and AI2 – for the confi guration of trim settings that are specifi c to fl ight phases. The setting of the fl ight phase switches – to be defi ned beforehand on the " **Phase assignment** " menu – determines the line that is chosen. An asterisk marks the fl ight phase currently active. At the same time, the name of the respective fl ight phase is also shown at the bottom left of the screen. You can enter settings only for the currently active fl ight phase, e. g.:

Normal
 0%

ELEV Launch 0%

AILE Launch Thermal Dist. 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

" **ELEV** " column In this column, you can store a phasespecifi c elevator trim setting. **Important notice:** Settings made in this column have an immediate effect on elevator trim and, accordingly, the trim setting display. In turn, the elevator trim lever affects the values of this column either "globally" or "phase-specifi cally", depending on the "global/phase" setting made on the "Elev" line of the " **Stick mode** " menu.

" **AILE** ", " **FLAP** ", " **FLAP2** " The values in these columns (max. 3) are identical to those in the "Fl.pos" (fl ap position) line on the "Multi-fl ap menu" within the " **Wing mixers** " menu. For this reason, any changes made always affect the other menu directly – and vice versa.  0%

FLAP 0%

FLAP2 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% Normal

Launch Launch Thermal Dist.

Note: If present, you can access the "FLAP" and "FLAP2" columns by using the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to go beyond the right edge of the screen and back, as appropriate. After selecting the appropriate column, by using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad and then briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can then use the arrow keys to set the values independently of one another, within a range of ±150%. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the highlighted value fi eld back to 0%.137 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Non-delayed channels

Channel-dependent delays to switching Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Phase trim** " in the multi-function list:

Phase settings

Phase trim Control switch

Timers (general) Phase assignment

Non-delayed chan

Phase settings Control switch

Timers (general) Fl. phase timers Phase assignment Non-delayed chan

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

NONDELAYED CHANNELS
non-delay normal

Normal 123 4 5 6

On the " **Phase settings** " menu, you will have set the necessary switch times for fl ight phase transitions. In this menu, you can now deactivate the transition delay set previously, per fl ight phase and for individual control channels – e. g. for the motor channel for electric models or heading-lock systems for heli gyros, etc. Switch over to the corresponding fl ight phase. This is shown at the bottom left of the display. Use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the "  " onto the corresponding channel and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. The switch icon changes from "normal" to "non-delay" and vice versa. For example:

NONDELAYED CHANNELS
non-delay normal

Normal 789 10 11 12

Note: To access channels 7 ... 12, follow the description on page 27: use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to go beyond the right edge of the screen and back, as appropriate.138 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Timers (general)

Timers on the basic display The default transmitter display shows a total of three timers. These are: the transmitter operating time on the left of the display, plus a "Top" and a "Centr" timer on the right of the display:

GRAUBELE #01

0:00h Stop Flt

**K78** 0:00 0:00

0.0V 5.9V M HoTT

A further, fl ight-phase specifi c timer can also be confi gured, depending on your settings in the two menus

" **Fl. phase timers** " (page 142) and " **Phase settings** " (pages 128 and 132). This optional fl ight phase timer – such as the lap time timer – appears underneath the "Centr" (fl ight time) timer:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Speed » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V 0:00.0 M Lap 00

To confi gure the "Top" and/or "Centr" timer, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to access the menu option " **Timers (general)** " in the multi-function list:
Non-delayed chan Timers (general) Fl. phase timers Wing mixers Free mixers MIX active/phase Non-delayed chan Timers (general) Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase

Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the menu shown below:

Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h 0:00 0:00

**" Model time"** This timer shows the currently recorded total access time to the currently active model memory. If necessary, you can also infl uence the automated time recording using a switch assigned at the right of the display, and use this switch to activate and deactivate the "Model time" timer as required. This switch is assigned (and erased again as required) as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 52. Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the time to "0:00h".

**" Batt. time"** This operating hours timer records the transmitter's total switch-on time since the last time the battery was charged, thus monitoring the transmitter battery. A switch cannot be assigned to this function. This timer is automatically reset to "0:00h" when the transmitter detects that the voltage of the battery is signifi cantly higher than the last time it was switched on, e. g. as a result of a charge process or the installation of a replacement battery. Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will also reset the time here to "0:00h". **"Top" and "Centr"** These two timers are located at the top right of the basic display (see the screen image immediately to the left) and can be assigned a different name; their function and mode of operation varies according to the name you give them. Independently of the name each is given, the "Top" and "Centr" timer can be programmed to run any length of time forwards or backwards – see further below. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, select the line for the "Top" or "Centr" timer. Tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad briefl y to activate the selection of a timer type:

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h 0:00 0:00 Stop

SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Now use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to select your desired timer and complete your selection by once again tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad:139 **Detail program description - Control adjust "Stop**  (watch) **"** or**"Motor** (runtime) **"** Both of these two timer variants can be started and stopped using any of the available switches. The timer defi ned as "Stopwatch" or "Motor runtime" sums the "ON" times continually, so that once your aircraft has landed, you can read off the sum of all switch "ON" times since the timer was last reset. **"Flight** (time) **"** This timer is designed for measuring the fl ight time: it can be started with an assigned switch and stopped (once the switch has been re-opened) on the basic display by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad. Once in a stopped state, it can be reset to its starting value by tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ). If you wish to assign a control switch, you must fi rst defi ne the switch on the " **Control switch** " menu and specify the switching point along the travel of the transmitter control. As an example, the timer can then be started by "opening the throttle" or by opening the throttle limiter for heli models.

Note: The combination of the fl ight time timer and stopwatch means that you can glance at the display at any time and see how long you have been fl ying since the timers were started, plus the total motor runtime within this particular period of fl ight time.

**"Frame** (time) **"** The timeframe timer is intended primarily for use by competition pilots, who are frequently given a timeframe within which they must complete certain tasks. The timer is started in precisely the same way as the fl ight time timer. To stop the timer, fi rst ensure the timer switch is at its OFF position. Then, press and hold the arrow keys 

, and then press the center **ESC** key. **Switch assignment** Using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame next to the triangle as shown in the screen image shown below to the rightmost column of the relevant line:

Alarm ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0s 0s –––

–––

SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

Here, you assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52). Typical application: The "stop watch" and "fl ight timer" are both to be startedsimultaneously using the C1 stick as soon as a userdefi ned switching point is exceeded. For this purpose, you will defi ne e.g. "C1" on the **"Control switch"** menu (page 123 ). To complete the procedure, you select this from the expanded switches (see the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 52) and assign it to both these lines: Alarm ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0s 0s C1

SEL C1 Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

The stopwatch will now stop when the stick is below the switching point and resume running above the switching point. The same is not true for the fl ight time timer, however, which also starts the fi rst time the switching point is exceeded. It can be stopped (by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad) only once the stopwatch is stopped; it can then be reset to its starting value by tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ).140 **Detail program description - Control adjust Switching between "forwards" and "backwards"**  **Timer runs forwards (stopwatch function)** Following switch assignment, if the stopwatch shown on the basic display is started with the initial value of "0:00", then it will run forwards for max. 180 min and 59 s and then restart from 0:00. **Timer runs backwards (countdown function)** In the – left – minutes fi eld, select a start time between 0 and 180 min ...

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0:00 180 :00

SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

... and in the – right – seconds fi eld, select a start time between 0 and 59 s (or any combination of these):

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h 180: 59 0:00

SEL Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

**Procedure** Select the desired input fi eld using the arrow keys 1.  on the left or right touch pad. Now tap 2. **SET**in the center of the right touch pad. Make your time selection in the highlighted minutes 3. or seconds fi eld, using the arrow keys on the right touch pad. Complete your input by tapping the center 4. **SET**key. If you tap the 5.  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this will reset any settings made back to "0" or "00". After switching back to the basic display (by tapping 6. the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad as many times as required), make sure the stopwatch is stopped and then tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) so that the stopwatch switches over to the "timer" function. Look to the top right in the following screen image:

GRAUBELE #01

0:00h Stop Flt

**K78** 10:01 0:00

0.0V 5.9V M HoTT

After the assigned switch is activated, the stopwatch starts at the initial value set and runs backwards ("countdown function"). Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop, but continues to run to enable you to read off the time elapsed after it reached 0:00. To make this absolutely clear, the timer is shown highlighted.

**"Alarm" timer** The "Alarm" column is accessed by using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame over the "Timer column to the right. In the "Alarm" column, you can defi ne a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) before zero is reached: at this point an audible signal will be emitted, which eliminates the need for you to check the screen continually during the fl ight. Alarm ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0s –––

–––

SEL 0s Model time Batt. time Top : Centr: Stop Flight

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this will reset any settings made back to "0 s". **Audible signal sequence** 30 s before zero: Triple beep Single beep every two seconds 20 s before zero: Double beep Single beep every two seconds 10 s before zero: Single beep Single beep every second 5 s before zero: Single, higher-frequency beep every second Zero: Extended audible signal and screen switches to highlighted display **Resetting timers when stopped**  Tapping the  keys on the right touch pad at the same time (CLEAR) **will reset the display of previously**  stopped timers on the basic display.

Notes: Timers that are running backwards are shown on the • basic display with a fl ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fi elds. A typical application, "Timer activation via the C1 • joystick", can be found on page 252).141 **Detail program description - Control adjust** If you change timer functionality, these changes are • made active by pausing the timer(s) and then tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) to reset them. Remember that the timer switches also remain active • during programming. On the basic display, simultaneously tapping the •  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the previously stopped timer to its programmed initial value – see the "Alarm" timer section.142 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Fl. phase timers

Selecting and setting The discussion of the " **Phase settings** " menu on page 134 has already described how timers can be assigned to a fl ight phase. The same section has also described the properties of "Time1" and "Time2". This section now proceeds to describe "Clk 1, 2 and 3", plus the "lap counter/timetable" timer. The additional, fl ight phase-specifi c timer selected is displayed on the basic display underneath the "center" timer, as shown below:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Speed » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V HoTT M Clk1 0:00

In this menu ...
Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Wing mixers Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers

Non-delayed chan Timers (general)

Helicopter mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers

... you can now program "Clks 1 ... 3" as stopwatches (i. e. timers that run forward) or as countdown/alarm timers (i. e. timers that run backwards). You can assign any switch to these timers, and the same is true of the "lap counter/timetable" timer:

Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/tim tab

SEL ––– 0:00 0:00 0:00

Lap Display 0s 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– SEL
The fl ight phase timers "Clks 1 ... 3" and the "Time1"/"Time2" timers (described in the " **Phase settings**  " section, pp. 128 and 132) run only in the fl ight phase to which they have been assigned. They are also shown as appropriate on the basic display. During other fl ight phases they are stopped (and hidden) and the assigned stop/start switch then has no effect. The lap counter, once started, continues to run through changes of phase (as discussed further below), however, although it can be stopped during any fl ight phase via the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad. **Clks 1, 2 and 3** These timers are started and stopped via a switch or control switch. To do so, fi rst use the arrow keys to select the appropriate column via the switch icon at the bottom right. Then set the switch that you want by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (p. 52). Here, too, a control switch offers you the option of activating the timer via one of the joysticks or proportional rotary controls. The switching point along the transmitter control travel is set on the " **Control switch** " menu (page 123). Remember that the timer switches also remain active in programming mode. **Switching between "forwards" and "backwards" Stopwatch mode (timer runs forwards)**  In this mode, the timer starts at the initial value "0:00" (min:sec) when you operate the assigned switch. If it reaches the maximum time of 180 min. and 59 s, it will re-start at "0:00". **"Countdown" (timer runs backwards)** Following the activation of the corresponding value fi elds (by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad), if a time in minutes (maximum 180 min) and/or a time in seconds (maximum 59 s, right fi eld) is set, then the timers will run backwards from this initial value following the activation of the assigned switch (see section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" on page 52), i.e. a "countdown" function will apply. Once the timer reaches zero it does not stop, however, but continues to run (highlighted) so you can read off the time elapsed after reaching zero.

Note: Timers that are running backwards are shown on the basic display with a fl ashing colon (:) between the minutes and the seconds fi elds. Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the values entered in the currently active fi eld to zero.143 **Detail program description - Control adjust Alarm timer** 

SEL ––– 0:00 0:00 0:00 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– SEL 0s Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/tim tab Lap Display

The input fi eld in the "Alarm" column is activated by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. In this fi eld, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to defi ne a time between 5 and 90 seconds (in 5-second increments) before zero is reached: at this point an audible signal will be emitted, which eliminates the need for you to check the screen continually during the fl ight. **Audible signal sequence**

30 s before zero: Triple beep Single beep every two seconds 20 s before zero: Double beep Single beep every two seconds 10 s before zero: Single beep| Single beep every second 5 s before zero: Single, higher-frequency beep every second Zero: Extended audible signal and screen switches to highlighted display Tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the values entered in the currently active fi eld to "0s".

Note: If timer functionality has been changed at any point, then the new changes to settings are made active only after the timer(s) have been stopped on the basic display and by then tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) to reset them. Like the two standard timers positioned above it, this third, phase-specifi c timer is reset to its starting value by simultaneously tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ). It is stopped in all fl ight phases at the same time, even if it has not been stopped separately in the other fl ight phases. **Lap counter/timetable**

SEL ––– 0:00 0:00 0:00 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– SEL 0s Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/tim tab Lap Display

On the "Lap time/tim tab" line, assign a switch only as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52). Preferably, you should make use of one of the two momentary switches (SW 1 or 9) at this point: in this way, the lap count is incremented each time by one lap while simultaneously (and automatically) the lap time elapsed during this lap is stopped (and recorded). This momentary switch simultaneously starts the stopwatch for the next lap. As the timer is triggered, the lap or switch impulse counter is shown highlighted. GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Speed » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V 0:00.0 M Lap 2:33.4 11

"Time1" and "Time2" operate in the same manner; for more details please read the section on the " **Phase settings**  " menu option. Up to 99 lap times can be recorded and accessed, each with a maximum duration of 99 minutes and 59.9 seconds. To stop the timer in question, tap the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad on the basic display after the fl ight is over. The lap or switch impulse counter is now shown in "normal" mode:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Speed » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V 0:00.0 M Lap 4:33.2 22

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), this resets the counter to "00" **and deletes the stored times** . However, the timers must have been stopped before this.

Notes: If you have selected a normal switch to operate the • lap counter, take care to ensure that this switch is set to "OFF" before you press the center **ESC** button on the left touch pad.144 **Detail program description - Control adjust** If you should forget to switch off the lap counter in a • phase which is now not currently active, simply press the center **ESC** button on the left touch pad. To swap between the basic display and the "Lap Display" ...

01 02 03 04

SEL 01:23.4 02:34.5 03:45.6

05 SEL 04:56.7 05:67.8 07 08 09 10 00:00.0 00:00.0 00:00.0

11 12 00:00.0 00:00.0 00:00.0 06 06:78.9
... go to the line ... **Lap Display**

SEL ––– 0:00 0:00 0:00 0s 0s –––

–––

–––

––– SEL 0s Timer1 Timer2 Timer3 Lap time/tim tab Lap Display

... and use the switch assigned. You assign this switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52).145 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# What is a mixer? Basic functionality

With many models, a mix of the model's functions is often desirable, i. e. coupling aileron to rudder or coupling two servos together, in cases where rudder control surfaces with the same functionality are to be controlled together using a single servo. In all cases, the signal fl ow at the "output" of the control function on the transmitter control side "branches" – i. e. also "after" transmitter control options such as e. g. " **Dual Rate / Expo**  ", " **Control adjust** ", " **Channel 1 curve** ", etc. – in order for the signal to have its predefi ned effect on the "input" of a different control channel and thus on a further receiver output. Example: V-tail mixer

3 3

4Servo4,8 V**C 577**Best.-Nr. 4101Servo4,8 V**C 577**Best.-Nr. 4101 4 V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs) Elevator stick

Rudder stick Right rudder / elevator Left rudder / elevator Rudder Elevator Elevator
Rudder Rudder Elevator

The mx-20 HoTT transmitter software contains a large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as standard, which are designed to mix together two (or more) control channels. Accordingly, the mixer named in the example just above can be activated in the "Tail" line of the **"Model type"** menu by selecting "V-tail". In addition, for each model memory in the fi xed-wing and heli programs, the software makes available a total of eight freely programmable linear mixers, four freely programmable curve mixers and four dual mixers. Also ensure you read the general remarks on "free mixers" in this handbook (p. 180).146 **Detail program description - Control adjust** " **MIX-only channel** " (see page 193) and use it for another purpose with the help of a "free mixer" (see page 190). If you set "2AIL" on the " • **Model type** " menu (page 82), then the fl ight phase-dependent fl ap functionality can be achieved by making appropriate offset settings for input 5 on the " **Control adjust** " menu (page 96). For almost any menu option, you have the option • of checking your settings by switching to the servo display screen, which is accessed by simultaneously tapping the arrow keys  on the left touch pad. **Caution:** The vertical lines on the " **Servo display** " move in the same direction for ailerons and in the opposite direction for fl aps. Note that if two fl ap servos have been selected, • any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the fl aps. The same applies to input 10 and the selection "2AIL 4FL". A range of options are available for positioning fl aps. • You can ... a) ... simply accept one position per fl ight phase, by setting only the corresponding trim values. b) ... vary the fl aps positioned as at a) by using any transmitter control, assigned to "Input 6" on the

" **Control adjust** " menu (page 96) – possibly also made fl ight phase-dependent by selecting "PH" in the "Type" column. Preferably, this should be one of the CTRL 6 ... 8 proportional rotary controls. The selected transmitter control directly controls the two fl ap servos located on receiver outputs 6 and 7 and, as required, also the two FL2 servos then the fl ight phase name, e. g. "Normal", will appear on the lower edge of the display:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL AI 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal
All options can then also be programmed specifi c to a fl ight phase.
Comments: Using the menu " • **Model type** " (page 82), control of the airbrake mixers can be reprogrammed from control input 1 to 7 or 8 to 9, and the associated offset point can also be set. If you wish to set up a "butterfl y" system, with the • ailerons raised and the fl aps (if present) lowered, this is achieved by entering the appropriate settings on the "Butterfl y" line on the "Brake settings" sub-menu. If you would like to alternate between the C1 stick • controlling an electric drive system and a butterfl y system, then you can use the options in the "Motor" column on the " **Phase settings** " menu – see the example on page 248. You can also use the opportunity to set switch times • for a "soft" transition from fl ight phase to fl ight phase on the " **Phase settings** " menu (see page 128). If your model features multiple wing fl aps and a • "crow / butterfl y system" (see below), but without additional airbrakes, then you can separate output 1 (usually freed up by the above system) from control function input 1 (throttle/brake stick) on the 

# Wing mixers

Calibrating the wing fl ap system Within the menu tree of the menu ...

Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Wing mixers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer

... the sub-menus and options available depend entirely on the number of aileron and fl ap servos set up on the

" **Model type** " menu (page 82) ...

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 2AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off 1 In +100% SEL
... which means that the only settings listed are the ones that can actually be confi gured. This not only makes the menu more compact but also avoids potential programming errors. With a preset of e. g. "2AIL" (no fl aps), the " **Wing mixers**  " menu will be shown as follows:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL AI 0% 0% –––

––– RU

normal
If you have confi gured several fl ight phases on the menus " **Phase settings** " (page 128) and " **Phase assignment**  " (page 134), and assigned these names,147 **Detail program description - Control adjust** connected to outputs 9 and 10 – assuming that corresponding fl aps have been specifi ed on the "Aile/fl aps" line on the **" Model type**  **"** menu. This transmitter control indirectly controls the fl ap position of the ailerons via the percentage value entered in the "Ail" (and "Ail2") column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-fl ap menu. To be able to provide more fi ne-grained control of fl ap positions, however, you should reduce travel to about 25% on the "Input 6" line of the " **Control adjust**  " menu. c) ... alternatively, you can also leave the default entry of "0%" in the "Ail" (and "Ail2") column on the "FLAP" line of the multi-fl ap menu, and use the " **Control adjust** " menu to assign both input 6 and input 5 to the same transmitter control. You can then set the degree to which both fl ap pairsare affected – optionally making this fl ight phasedependent by selecting "PH" in the "Type" column – with the respective travel adjustment. **Basic programming procedure** Select the desired line by using the arrow keys 1.  on the left or right touch pad. Depending on the line selected, the bottom line of the display will either show the "Next page" icon ( ) or a switch icon. Depending on the line selected, you will either switch 2. to the next page – on which you carry out the same procedure as below – or the desired value fi eld is activated by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. Use the arrow keys to set the mixer ratio or degree of 3. differential. Accordingly, specify the input 1, 7, 8 or 9 and the offset corresponding to your customary piloting in the "Brake offset" line on the " **Model type** " menu – see page 82. When selecting "input 1", please note also that you may need to specify your desired "Throttle min" position "forward/back" before establishing the offset point in the "Motor at C1" line.

Note: If the offset is not set right at the end of the transmitter travel, the rest of the travel is a "dead zone", i. e. the transmitter control does not infl uence any mixers on the "Brake settings" sub-menu. Otherwise, the mixer travel is expanded back to 100% automatically.
All other mixers on the " **Wing mixers** " menu have their neutral point with the control at its center, i. e. they have no effect at this control position. The value set is mixed in at full travel. To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move the transmitter control or joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To confi gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter control/joystick to the corresponding side. Negative and positive parameter values are possible, in order to be able to adjust the respective function to the direction of servo rotation or fl ap orientation. Tapping the 4.  or  keys on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the values entered in the currently active (highlighted) fi eld to the default value. Complete your input by tapping the center 5. **ESC** key on the left touch pad or the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. **Assigning switches** The wing mixers "AI  RU" and "FL  EL" can be optionally switched on and off by using a switch or an expanded switch. Accordingly, when selecting the respective line, the familiar switch icon ( ) appears on the lower edge of the screen. **Switching delays** The delay time or switch time confi gured on the menu

" **Phase settings** " (page 128) for the respective fl ight phase also affects all wing mixers and thus avoids abrupt changes to fl ap confi gurations when switching between the fl ight phases. **Mixer neutral points** (offset) For all mixers on the "Brake settings" submenu, the "brake offset" to be set on the " **Model type** " menu is to be confi gured to the transmitter control position at which the airbrakes are retracted.148 **Detail program description - Control adjust** defl ection also generates drag and therefore further reduces the aircraft's effi ciency. If, on the other hand, a differential is applied to the aileron orientations, by giving the aileron oriented downwards a smaller defl ection than the aileron oriented upwards, the (undesirable) adverse yaw can be reduced – and possibly entirely negated. However, the basic precondition for this is that each aileron must have its own servo present, which can therefore also be embedded straight into the aerofoils. In addition, the shorter linkage paths produce an additional benefi t: reproducible aileron confi gurations that also exhibit less "play".

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (split)

Unlike mechanical solutions, which not only commonly need to be designed and built in when constructing the model but also produce a slightly increased "play" in the control system for strong differentials, the transmitter-based differential typically used today offers considerable benefi ts. The degree of differential can be changed at any time, for example, and, in extreme circumstances, the downward defl ection of an aileron – in what is termed a "split" position – can be suppressed entirely. This approach not only reduces or even suppresses "adverse yaw", but can, in certain circumstances, even generate a positive yaw: in such cases, an aileron command will generate a yaw about the vertical axis in the direction of the turn. For large glider models in particular, this approach lets such aircraft fl y "clean" turns using just the ailerons, which is not otherwise possible unaided. The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While "0%" corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no differential, "-100%" or "+100%" represents the "split" function. For aerobatic fl ying, low absolute values are required to ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50% or +50%) are typical for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100%, +100%) is popular with slope fl yers, where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.

Note: Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly. **Mixer functions** The individual options on the " **Wing mixers** " menuoption are discussed below, separately for single-, dualand multi-fl ap models. Before we start, a number of remarks on the differentials for ailerons and fl aps:

**Aile. diff.** or**Diff.** ( Aileron differential)

0% 0% 0% –––

––– Normal 0% Aile.diff. Brake settings

AI WING MIXERS

EL AI RU

0% fl.pos

AILE Normal Diff. AiI-tr AI +100% +100% 0%

For aerodynamic reasons, the drag generated on an aileron oriented downwards is greater than that generated by the same aileron when it is oriented upwards by the same amount. One effect of this unequal distribution of drag produces is a yawing motion around the vertical axis and, accordingly, a "turning away" from the intended direction of fl ight, which is why this undesirable side effect is also termed "adverse yaw". This effect is naturally greater on the comparably long aerofoils possessed by model gliders, compared to e. g. powered aircraft models, which generally have relatively short moment arms. For the former, it must normally be compensated for by making a simultaneous rudder defl ection in the opposite direction. However, this rudder149 **Detail program description - Control adjust Diff.**  (camber-changing fl ap differential)

0% fl.pos

FLAP Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI 0% 0% 0%

0%

FLAP2 0% 0% 0% fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

In the "  AI  " line on the multi-fl ap menu, you can set the extent to which the fl aps act as ailerons and follow the aileron joystick; the value is entered as a percentage. The fl aps differential – to be set on the line "Diff." (two lines below) – works in a similar way to the aileron differential, i.e. where an aileron command acts on the fl aps, the respective defl ection downwards can be reduced. The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set a differential appropriate for each side, regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos. A value of 0% is equal to normal linkage, i. e. the servo travel downwards is the same as the travel upwards. A value of -100% to +100% means that travel downwards will be reduced to zero for aileron commands affecting the fl aps ("split" mode). If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.
Note: Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly. exception of a "pointer" to the "Elevat curve" sub-menu. Accordingly, we proceed immediately further from here by once again tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad:

Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake

normal Ele Curve off

Normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point. For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to menu option " **Channel 1 curve** " (page 116 onwards).

**Aileron**  **Rudder**

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

–––

RU

Normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ±150% lets you set the **Model type: "1AIL"** If you have entered "1AIL" for the "Aile/fl aps" line on the

" **Model type** " menu (page 82 ), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

–––

RU

Normal
From the fi rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad ... **Brake settings**

Note: The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the currently active fl ight phase in the "Motor" column of the

" **Phase settings** " menu (see page 128). Switch the fl ight phase if required:

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

normal Normal

Since you cannot set up a butterfl y or aileron differential in a model with only a single aileron servo, this menu offers no further confi guration options with the150 **Detail program description - Control adjust Model type: "1AIL 1FL"**  If you have entered "1AIL 1FL" for the "Aile/fl aps" line on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal FL EL 0% 0%

–––

From the fi rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad ... **Brake settings**

Note: The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the currently active fl ight phase in the "Motor" column of the

" **Phase settings** " menu (see page 128). Switch the fl ight phase if required:

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS Crow

Normal 0%

FLAP
Appropriate to the model type selected, you can now enter a suitable value in the "Crow" line to lower the fl ap when you activate the brake control – which is typically the C1 joystick. To confi gure the setting, fi rst position the brake control in the brake position at full travel (i.e. its end-point). Then, briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad and enter a suitable value using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad. To ensure a suffi ciently strong braking effect, note that you should try to lower the fl ap as low as is mechanically possible. From the second line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu "Elevat curve" by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad:

Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake

normal Ele Curve off

Normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point. For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to menu option " **Channel 1 curve** " (page 116 onwards).

**Aileron**  **Rudder**

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal FL EL 0% 0%

––– direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 ... 8) or a control switch. This means you can then also control the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of around 50% is usually highly appropriate. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.151 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150% lets you set the direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 ... 8) or a control switch. This means you can then also control the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of around 50% is usually highly appropriate. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.

**Elevator**  **fl aps** 

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal FL EL 0% 0%

–––

To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the fl ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 ... 8) or a control switch. To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move the elevator joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To confi gure asymmetric values, move the joystick to the corresponding side. Values in the range -150% to +150 are possible, so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of fl ap defl ection. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.The "typical" values confi gured for this mixer are singledigit or low two-digit values. **Flaps**  **elevator**

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal FL EL 0% 0%

–––

This mixer is used to set elevator (pitch-trim) compensation when a fl ap command is given. This typically enables you to adjust the model's airspeed automatically when fl aps are lowered. If you have used the " **Control adjust** " menu (page 96) to assign input 6 a transmitter control or switch – possibly fl ight phase-dependent – then this also affects this mixer. Depending on the position of the fl ap control, either a symmetrical or asymmetric setting within the range ±150% is possible. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%. If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by assigning a switch in the right column. The values confi gured for this mixer are typically in the single-digit range.152 **Detail program description - Control adjust Model type: "2AIL"**  If you have entered "2AIL" for the "Aile/fl aps" line on the

" **Model type** " menu (page 82), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL AI 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal
From the fi rst line on this display screen, you can switch to the sub-menu by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad ... **Brake settings**

Note: The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the currently active fl ight phase in the "Motor" column of the

" **Phase settings** " menu (see page 128). Switch the fl ight phase if required:

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

WK WK2 Normal

Depending on the model type selected, you will now have appropriate confi guration options available in the lines " **Crow** " and " **D** (ifferential) **red** (uction)" for the " **AILE** " column. You should utilize these options by ... ... moving the transmitter control for "Brake" • (see description for " **Model type** " menu on page 82 – typically the C1 joystick – to its braking end-point. Then switch to the "Crow" line, briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad and use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to set a value that moves the aileron upwards as far as possible to brake the model, or – if you are using airbrakes as the main braking system – the aileron should be set to elevate only minimally to provide an extra braking effect.

Note: To reliably prevent the servos mechanically striking their end-stops – which draws a heavy current – you can set an appropriate limit value in the "– lim +" column of the " **Servo adjustments** " menu (page 90). ... then, fi nally, moving to the "D. red" line and setting • a % value that is greater than or equal to the "Aile. diff." value that you set (or have yet to set) on the display page "before" this one. In this way, you can suppress the aileron differential when braking, thus ensuring that you can count on suffi cient aileron response despite your ailerons being defl ected upwards. From the lowest line, "Elevat. curve", you can switch to setting the "Elevat. curve" mixer by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad: Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake

normal Ele Curve off

Normal
If required, i. e. if you have the feeling that you will need to set pitch trim compensation when the airbrakes are extended, you can program an appropriate automatic mixer affecting the elevator at this point. For detailed instructions on setting a curve mixer, please refer to menu option " **Channel 1 curve** " (page 116 onwards).

**Aileron differential**

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL AI 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal
The adjustment range of ±100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential, regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. While "0%" corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no differential on the transmitter, "-100%" or "+100%" represents the "split" function. For aerobatic fl ying, low absolute values are required to ensure the model rotates exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron command is given. Values near to the center (-50% or +50%) are typical for facilitating turns in thermals. The split setting (-100%, +100%) is153 **Detail program description - Control adjust** popular with slope fl yers, where ailerons alone are often used for turning the model.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (split)

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.

Note: Negative values are not usually necessary if channels are assigned properly.

**Aileron**  **rudder**

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL AI 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The adjustment range of ± 150% lets you set the direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 ... 8) or a control switch. This means you can then also control the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required. Typically, this mixer is set so that the rudder is defl ected to the same side as the upward-oriented aileron, and you will fi nd that setting a value of around 50% is usually highly appropriate. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.

**Elevator**  **aileron**

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL AI 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Normal
To provide support for the elevator for tight turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the aileron function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 ... 8) or a control switch. To confi gure symmetrical mixer values, move the elevator joystick to its center position, so that the marker frame surrounds both value fi elds. To confi gure asymmetric values, move the transmitter control to the corresponding side. Values in the range -150% to +150 are possible, so as to adjust the function to the direction of servo rotation or direction of aileron defl ection. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%. The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit range.154 **Detail program description - Control adjust Model type: "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL"**  If you have entered "2AIL 1FL" for the "Aile/fl aps" line on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will match the following screen image:

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

FL EL 0% 0% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

Normal If, on the other hand, you have entered "2/4AIL 1/2/4FL" for the "Aile/fl aps" line on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82), then the "Wing mixers menu" on your transmitter will show the following:

0% 0% 0% –––

––– Brake settings AI WING MIXERS

FL EL RU Multi-flap menu

Normal
Regardless of the combination of aileron and fl ap servos you choose, all of the parameters available can be adjusted separately for each fl ight phase.

Note: For almost any menu option, you have the option of checking your settings by switching to the servo display screen, which is accessed by simultaneously tapping the arrow keys  on the left touch pad. If you do, note however that the vertical lines on the " **Servo display** " move in the same direction for ailerons and in the opposite direction for fl aps.
Before we address the details of this menu we would like to provide a brief explanation of the different display modes for the multi-flap menu: **Model type: "2 AIL 1 FL"** If you connect the servos to the receiver as described on page 57 and select them appropriately on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI" and "FL" refer to the following fl aps:

AI left FL FL AI right

Since the options available on the wing mixer menu and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82), the list contains only the set-up options that are possible for your model configuration.

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE Normal

Accordingly, with values preset to "2AIL 1FL", the options to set aileron functions for fl aps will be hidden and it will be possible to move only one column to the right, into the column "FLAP": FL +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP Normal 0%

In addition, the settings for "Aile(ron) diff(erential)" are not found on the "multi-fl ap menu", as with "2AIL 2/4FL", but one level higher in the "Wing mixers" menu – see the screen-shot at top left. **Model type: "2AIL 2FL"** If you connect the servos to the receiver as described on page 57 and select them appropriately on the " **Model type**  menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI" and "FL" refer to the following fl aps:

AI left FL left FL right AI right

Since the options available on the "wing mixer menu" and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82), the list contains only the set-up options that are possible for your model configuration. This means that if values are preset to "2AIL 2FL", then all confi guration options for the aileron pair ...155 **Detail program description - Control adjust** FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE Normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

... are shown, and – one "step" to the right – all options for the fl ap pair as well:

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

Moving one further column to the right, however – to the "FLAP2" column – is not possible. **Model type: "2AIL 4FL"** If you connect the servos to the receiver as described on page 57 and select them appropriately on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI", "FL" and "FL2" refer to the following fl aps: AI left FL left FL2 left FL2 right FL right AI right

Since the options available on the "wing mixer menu" and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82 ), the list contains only the set-up options that are possible for your model configuration. This means that if values are preset to "2AIL 4FL", then all confi guration options for the aileron pair ...

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE Normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

... are shown, and – one "step" to the right – all options for the fi rst fl ap pair ...

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI ... are shown, and – one further "step" to the right – all options for the second fl ap pair as well:

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 0% 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

**Model type: "4AIL 2FL"** If you connect the servos to the receiver as described on page 57 and select them appropriately on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI", "AI2" and "FL" refer to the following fl aps:

AI left AI2 left FL left FL right AI2 right AI right

Since the options available on the "wing mixer menu" and its sub-menus vary according to the number of fl ap servos specifi ed on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82 ), the list contains only the set-up options that are possible for your model configuration. This means that if values are preset to "4AIL 2FL", then all confi guration options for the fi rst aileron pair ...156 **Detail program description - Control adjust** FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE Normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

... are shown, and – one "step" to the right – all options for the second aileron pair ...

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILE2 0% +100% +100%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

... are shown, and – one further "step" to the right – all options for the fl ap pair as well:

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

**Model type: "4AIL 4FL"** If you connect the servos to the receiver as described on page 57 and select them appropriately on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), then the abbreviations "AI", "AI2", "FL" and "FL2" refer to the following fl aps:

AI left AI2 left FL left FL2 left FL2 right FL right AI2 right AI right

Since selecting "4AIL 4FL" means choosing the maximum number of control surface servos, the columns "AILE" ...

FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE Normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

... and "AILE2" ...

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILE2 0% +100% +100%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

... are supplemented by the columns "FLAP" ... 0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

... and "FLAP2":

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 0% 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

**Delta/fl ying wing type models with more than two**  **wing fl aps**  If you have selected the "Delta/fl " tail type and selected the number of wing fl aps in the "Aile/fl aps" line on the

" **Model type** " menu (following the instructions given in that section), then the two ailerons will normally not move when you move the elevator joystick – and the same will be true for the inner fl aps (FL) and FL2 (if present). The reason for this is the default mixer ratio of 0% for all wing fl aps, set for the "EL  FL" mixer that is to be found on the multi-fl ap menu:157 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILE 0% +100% +100%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

Accordingly, you must fi rst specify your desired elevator control on the "EL  FL" line. Take care to ensure that up/down activation occurs in the right sequence.

Note: The "Brake settings" sub-menu (see next double page) is also suitable for setting up the butterfl y (crow) function with delta and fl ying wing models. In fi ne-tuning the defl ection of the fl ap pairs AIL, FL and (if present) FL2, however, ensure that the moments created by one pair of fl aps compensate the moments created by the other pair of fl aps in each case. For example: the "up" effect of ailerons when defl ected up should be compensated by a "down" effect from fl aps when they are lowered.

**Multi-fl ap menu**  **Important notice:** Depending on the fl ap pairs specifi ed in the " **Model type**  " menu, this menu will present the column "AILE2" and/or the columns "FLAP" and "FLAP2" in addition to the "AILE" column. Since both the columns "AILE" and "AILE2" and the columns "FLAP" and "FLAP2" are identical except for the label shown at the bottom right, further display of the columns "AILE2" and "FLAP2" is avoided below for reasons of saving space. **AI**  (Aileron  fl aps) (Not shown for "2AIL 1FL".)

0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

In the line "  AI  " you can set the percentage extent to which the wing fl ap pair "FLAP" (and, if present, "FL2") follow when an aileron command is given (the value can be entered separately for each fl ight phase). (In the "AILE" column it is also possible to adjust the defl ection of the aileron pair, if required.) Normally, however, the fl aps should follow the ailerons with less of a defl ection, i. e. the mixer ratio should be smaller than 100%. The adjustment range of -150% to +150% means the direction of defl ection can be adjusted, depending on the direction of rotation of the servos, to suit the ailerons. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to the default value (see screen image).

**Ail-tr.** (aileron trim) (Not shown for "2AIL 1FL".) 0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

In this line, you specify the percentage rate with which aileron trim is to affect "AILE", "FLAP" and – if present – "FLAP2". The available range of values is -150% to +150%, relative to the adjustment range of the trim lever. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to the default value (see screen image).

**Diff.** (Differential for aileron function) (With "2AIL 1FL", found one level higher on the " **Wing mixers**  " menu – see screen image on previous double page.)158 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

On this line, you set the aileron differential, plus the differential for the FLAP and FLAP2 wing fl aps – if the latter are being activated as ailerons.

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (split) AI FL FL2 FL2 FL AI

If you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 148. The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap servos. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to the default value (see screen image).

**fl .pos**  (wing fl ap position)

0%

AILE

0% +100% +100%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

0%

FLAP 0% 0% 0%

fl.pos Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

Here, you set the fl ight phase-specifi c wing fl ap positions for all of the fl aps present on the model in question. In this way, you can specify the fl ap positions that apply to each fl ight phase. The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of travel regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap servos. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to the default value (see screen images).  **FL**  (Effects of fl ap controls) In this line, you specify the percentage rate with which the settings for input 6 (as made on the " **Control adjust**  " menu, page96, and potentially dependent on fl ight phase) will affect the wing fl ap positions of the aileron and camber-changing fl aps.

0% 0% 0%

AILE 0% +100%

FL fl.pos

Normal Diff. Ail-tr

0% +100% +100%

FLAP 0% 0%

FL fl.pos

Normal Diff. Ail-tr

For each fl ap pair, you can defi ne either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side. If you leave (or have left) each travel adjustment at +100% on the " **Control adjust** " menu (page 96), then values between 5% and 20% should generally be suffi cient. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to the default value (see screen images).

Note: By default, NO transmitter control is assigned to input 6159 **Detail program description - Control adjust** on the " **Control adjust** " menu. However, you can assign a transmitter control or switch to this input at any time – also in a fl ight phase-dependent way – thus enabling different fl ap settings within a fl ight phase; see also example 2 on page 260.

**EL**  **FL** (Elevator  fl aps) To provide support for the elevator for tights turns and aerobatics, this mixer can be used to make the fl ap function follow controls sent to the elevator. The mixer direction chosen must ensure that the fl aps are defl ected downwards when the elevator is oriented upwards and vice versa for a downward-oriented elevator – i.e. in opposite directions. For each fl ap pair, you can defi ne either a symmetrical or an asymmetric effect. Position the transmitter control accordingly – either centrally or to the relevant side. Values in the range -150% to +150% are possible:

0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

AILE 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff.

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff.

If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to the default value (see screen images). The "usual" values for this mixer are in the low two-digit range. **Important general notice: Do not let control surfaces and servos strike their**  **mechanical end-stops when large defl ections**  **are set! This is especially relevant in relation to the functions "**   **AI**  **", "**  **FL**  **" and possibly**

**"**  **FL2**  **". Use the "- lim +" option (travel limit) available on the "Servo adjustments" menu**  **(page 90), as required.**
**Brake settings**

Notes: The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if you • entered "Motor on C1 forward / back" on the " **Model type**  " menu (see page 82), and entered "Yes" for the currently active fl ight phase in the "Motor" column of the " **Phase settings** " menu (see page 128). Switch the fl ight phase if required: The "brake mixers" described below can also – • and should also – be confi gured to be specifi c to individual fl ight phases.
**Crow**

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

FLAP FLAP2 Normal

The "Crow" mixer function is actuated by control function 1, 7, 8 or 9, depending on the input that you have assigned on the "Brake Off" line on the " **Model type** " menu (see page 82).

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake off +90% SEL STO In 1

Note: On the " **Model type** " menu (see page 82), you should also defi ne the offset, i. e. the direction of operation. The offset should be set to about +90% of stick travel (if the C1 stick is used, this is generally located at the forward position of the stick). To extend the fl aps, the stick must therefore be moved back towards the pilot. The remaining joystick travel of around 10% then has no effect, although it is not "lost", since the control travel is automatically expanded back to 100%. Use the select fi elds for the AILE, FLAP and – if present – FL2 columns to defi ne the extent and direction to which the corresponding pairs of fl aps are to follow when the airbrake control (control function 1, 7, 8 or 9) is operated. If the model does not feature separate airbrakes, leave the corresponding receiver output free or use the " **MIX-only channel** " menu to set this to "MIXonly", to be able to use it elsewhere. Values in the range -150% to +150% are possible. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to the default value (see screen image).160 **Detail program description - Control adjust** AI
FL

FL2

FL2

FL

AI

If the airbrake mixers are set as described above, then a special fl ap combination – also referred to as the "crow position" or "butterfl y " – can be confi gured: With this airbrake setting, both ailerons move moderately upwards while the fl aps move as far as possible downwards

. A further mixer – see below, under the section "Elevat curve" – is then used to trim the elevator in such a way that the model's airspeed changes very little compared to the normal fl ight position. Otherwise, there is a danger that the model loses too much speed and then, after the braking system is retracted (e. g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example), pancakes or even stalls. A tip for "seeing" the effect of brakes: lift the fl aps and look over and under the surface from the front. The larger the surface projected by the lifted fl ap, the greater the braking effect achieved.
Tips for activating airbrakes: If you have installed a servo for operating • conventional wing-mounted airbrakes in addition to the aileron and fl ap servos, the simplest method of controlling it is to connect it to the receiver output whose input you have selected for the brake function, i. e. either 1, 7, 8 or 9 – assuming it it is free. If this is not possible, then as an alternative you can set a free mixer, which connects up the brake control channel you have selected with the airbrake servo channel. To activate two airbrake servos, the best approach • is to leave one servo on output 1 and to connect the second servo to a free output of your choice – for example, output 8. You then also assign this output to transmitter control 1 (as standard) on the " **Control adjust**  " menu (page 96) – see screen image:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal Ct1

As you do, leave the settings for offset, travel, etc. at their default values. Also leave the default value at "GL" in the "typ" column, since the second airbrake, like the fi rst, should be active in the same way across all fl ight phases.

AI
FL

FL

AI Servo 1

Servo 9

You can assure yourself that this works as stated by accessing the " **Servo display** " menu, which you can access from almost any menu level by briefl y pressing the  keys on the left touch pad at the same time (see page 230): **"AILE" column •**  When braking the model as it comes in to land, neither of the two aileron fl aps should ever be defl ected more than half of the possible travel upwards, to ensure that enough travel is available to control the model along its longitudinal axis (aileron function).

AI
FL
FL2

FL2

FL

AI
**"FLAP" (and "FLAP2") column •**  As the model is braked on the landing approach, both pairs of fl aps can be set to defl ect by different amounts, e. g.:

AI
FL
FL2

FL2

FL

AI
AI
FL
FL2

FL2

FL

AI **Combining AILE and FLAP for "Crow" •** 161 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 1 3 5 7



### + 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8



### + 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0%

0% +100%

+100%

If this relatively simply variant should prove impossible for whichever reasons, then the alternative is a solution with two free mixers – and potentially involving the **"MIX-only channel"** menu (see page 193). In either case, however, the airbrake travels must then be fi ne-tuned on the " **Servo adjustment** " menu (see page 90).

**D.red.** (Differential reduction)

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

FLAP FLAP2
Earlier, we discussed the problems with the butterfl y (crow) confi guration. Namely: that with the use of aileron differential, the aileron effect can be strongly (negatively) affected by the aileron elevation. This is fi rstly because further defl ection of the one aileron upwards is (almost) no longer possible and secondly because the downward-defl ected aileron – depending on the elevation and degree of differential confi gured – is often unable to achieve even its "normal" position. To be able to restore the effect of the aileron altered in this way as far as possible, you should ensure that you make use of the automated "Differential reduction" feature. This feature continuously reduces the degree of aileron differential as the airbrake system is extended. The feature is confi gurable and can even be set to suppress differential entirely. A value of 0% means that the "aileron differential" set at the transmitter remains fully in force. An entry that equals the % value set for aileron differential means the differential is fully eliminated once the butterfl y function is at maximum travel, i. e. with fl aps fully extended. Setting a reduction value greater than the aileron differential confi gured will eliminate the latter even before the full travel of the airbrake joystick. Values can be set in the range 0 to150%. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.

**Elevat curve** (Brake  elevator)

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

If the airbrake control – to be set to 1, 7, 8 or 9 on the "Brake Off" line of the " **Model type** " menu (page 83) – is used to extend the fl aps as described previously for the "Brake settings" menu, this will often have a negative effect on the aircraft model's airspeed. This mixer can be used to compensate this type of effect by applying a corrective value to the elevator. By briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, you can switch to the display screen as shown below:

Input Output Point ? –100% 0% 0% Brake

normal Ele Curve off

Normal

**Confi guration notes for "Elevat curve" (brake**   **EL)** The offset that you have confi gured on the " **Model type** " menu (page 82) affects this mixer: The vertical line on the display that indicates the position of the airbrake control only moves from the edge of the graph when the confi gured offset is exceeded. Simultaneously, the airbrake control travel is automatically expanded back to 100%, as described for the " **Model type** " menu. Accordingly, the mixer's neutral point always lies on the left edge, independently of the offset confi gured. Now adjust the elevator curve in the direction of the opposite end-point in accordance with the requirements. Note that the approach taken to confi guring this 5-point curve mixer follows the same principles as already described (within the scope of the "Channel 1 curve" menu, page **116** ) as applicable to the curve mixers, i. e.:

Input Output Point 1 –19% –6% –7% Brake

Normal EL Curve on162 **Detail program description - Control adjust** In each case, you should test the setting selected at the appropriate altitude and re-adjust as required. As you do, however, ensure that your model does not slow down excessively with the braking system extended! Otherwise, you run the risk that, after the braking system is retracted, e. g. to extend a landing approach that was too short, for example, your model pancakes or even stalls.

**Aileron differential** (Only for "2AIL 1FL". If "2AIL 2/4 FL" is selected, included on the multi-fl ap menu, see page 157.)

Aile.diff Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

–––

RU Multi-flap menu

Normal
On this line you can set the aileron differential for the two aileron servos. If you are unsure about the meaning of differential travel, please read the appropriate explanation at the start of this section on page 148. The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it possible to set the correct direction of differential regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap servos. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%. **Aileron**  **rudder**

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

FL EL 0% 0% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

Normal
Here, you can set the degree to which the rudder follows commands acting on ailerons. This is used in particular in connection with aileron differential to suppress adverse yaw and thus make it easier to fl y "clean" curves. You can of course still issue separate commands to the rudder. The mixer direction is typically chosen to ensure that the rudder moves in the direction of the aileron that is defl ected upwards. Settings are always made symmetrically relative to the neutral point of the aileron joystick. The adjustment range of ± 150% lets you set the direction of defl ection as appropriate. Optionally, this mixer can be activated and deactivated by using one of the switches that do not reset themselves (SW 2 ... 8) or a control switch. This means you can then also control the model using only the ailerons or rudder, as required. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%. A value of around 50% is generally an excellent starting point. **Flap**  **elevator**

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

FL EL 0% 0% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

Normal
When setting camber-changing fl aps, one side-effect can be to generate moments causing movement around the transverse axis. Equally, however, it may also be desirable that e. g. your aircraft model opts for a more pacey fl ight style with the fl aps slightly raised. This mixer can be used to achieve both results. With this mixer, the extension of the fl aps – depending on the value confi gured – automatically ensures the elevator position follows suit. Symmetrical or asymmetrical settings relative to the neutral point of the fl ap control are possible. If required, the mixer can be switched on or off by assigning a switch in the right column. Values can be set in the range ±150%. The "typical" values confi gured for this mixer are single-digit or low two-digit values. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%.

Note: If you have used the " Control adjust" menu to assign a transmitter control or switch, as described under ▲ " on page **159** , then the latter will also affect this mixer.163 **Detail program description - Control adjust**164 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Helicopter mixers

Flight phase-specifi c setting of collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor On this menu

...

Free mixers MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

MIX-only channel Dual mixer
... all of the fl ight phase-specifi c helicopter mixers aredescribed, with the exception of the mixers for autorotation fl ight (discussed from page 178 onwards.) These mixers are used for the basic set-up of a model helicopter. For fl ight phase programming, see the menus:

" • **Base setup model** ", page 74

" • **Phase settings** ", page 132

" • **Phase assignment** ", page 134 When you actuate a switch for a specifi c fl ight phase, then the associated fl ight phase, e. g. "Normal", is displayed at the lower left edge of the display screen:

C1 C1 Pitch Throttle Tail Tail 0% Roll 0% Throttle

Roll Throttle Tail Nick Nick Throttle Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter 0% 0% 0%

0° OFF Normal Gyro suppress 0%

In each of these fl ight phases – with the exception of the auto-rotation phase – the typical helicopter mixing and coupling functions shown in the screen-shot above are available for setting up the model helicopter. These functions are described in the fi rst part of this comprehensive chapter. **General information on mixers, (see also pages 145 and 180)** 
An arrow "  " indicates a mixer. A mixer "branches off" the signal fl ow of a control function at a particular point, in order to use this fl ow to cause a predetermined effect on a further control channel and, ultimately, the receiver output. The "Nick  Tail" mixer, for example, means that the tail rotor servo will be confi gured to follow commands from the pitch-axis joystick. **Basic programming procedure:** Select the mixer by using the arrow keys on the left 1. or right touch pad. Depending on the mixer, the lower line of the display will show **SEL** or the " " icon, which indicates that you need to move to a second page. The linear mixer ratios can be set directly by briefl y 2. tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad: Use the arrow keys to confi gure the mixer ratio. Otherwise you will need to switch to the second screen page where you can set up the appropriate curve mixer. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%. Complete the confi guration by tapping the center 3. **SET**key on the right touch pad again. You can page back by tapping the center 4. **ESC** key on the left touch pad. **Description of helicopter mixers** To confi gure collective pitch curve settings and the two mixers "Channel 1  Throttle" and "Channel 1  Tail rotor", curve mixers are available in all fl ight phases. Accordingly, these mixers also permit the programming of non-linear mixing ratios along the path of joystick travel, if required. Switch to the display screen for curve settings by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad – see discussion below. The curve is set up basically in the same way as the Channel 1 curve for helicopters, but we will describe it again here in detail using pitch confi guration as an example, to save you having to leaf through the manual. In the remaining lines, fi rst activate the value fi eld and then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to set a mixer value in the value fi eld (now highlighted). The settings available are rounded off with the "swash limiter" option: These option can be confi gured to limit the maximum defl ection of the swashplate servo. Together, these settings confi gure the basic set-up of the helicopter model. In the "Autorotation" fl ight phase as described on page 178, however, the mixers "C1  Throttle" and "C1  Tail" are not needed and therefore switched to a confi gurable default value. If you want to reset any changed parameters to their default values, you can do so at any time by simultaneously tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ). **Collective pitch** (Collective pitch curve (C1  Pitch)) If necessary, use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to move to the "Pitch" line. Now briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad:165 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Pitch

Normal Curve off

Unlike the " **Channel 1 curve** " menu, however, this display relates only to the control curve of the pitch servos: the "Channel 1 curve", on the other hand, affects all servos controlled via the throttle/collective pitch stick. **Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option thus functions as an input signal for the**  **collective pitch curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the**  **throttle/collective pitch stick and therefore follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.**  The control curve can be defi ned (separately per fl ight phase) by up to 6 points, termed "reference points", placed at any point along the joystick travel. Initially, however, fewer reference points are adequate for setting up the collective pitch curve. We recommend beginning with three reference points to start with. These three points – namely the two end-points "Pitch low (L)" (= -100% control travel) and "Pitch high (H)" (= +100% control travel) plus a point at the center of control travel still to be set – defi ne an initial linear profi le for the collective pitch curve. **Programming details** First, switch to your chosen fl ight phase, e. g. "Normal". The throttle/collective pitch stick is used to move the vertical line in the graph between the two end-points "Point L" (minimum pitch at -100%) and "Point H" (maximum pitch at +100% control travel): at the same time, the current joystick position is shown numerically on the "Input" line (-100% to +100%). The point at which the vertical line crosses the curve is termed the "Output", and can be varied at the maximum of 6 reference points within the range -125% to +125%. A control signal modifi ed in this way affects only the collective pitch servos. In the example to the left, the joystick is at exactly 0% of control travel and also generates an output signal of 0%, since the characteristic curve is linear. Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25%. **Setting reference points** If necessary, use the left or right arrow key  to drag the marker frame downwards, until it is at the "Point" line:

? 0% 0% 0% Pitch

Input Output Point Normal Curve off

Move the joystick. If the display shows a framed question mark, then you can set the next reference point by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. Simultaneously, the "?" is replaced by its number and the value fi eld to the right of the reference point number is highlighted: 1 0% 0% Pitch

0% Input Output Point Normal Curve off

The order in which you generate the (maximum) 4 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered.
**Confi guring reference points**  To confi gure a point, use the joystick to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change. The number and current curve value of this point are displayed on the left side of the display, on the "Point" line. Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to change the current curve value shown in the highlighted fi eld. The possible range is -125% to +125% and changes do not affect neighboring reference points.

+75% +75% Input Output Point 1 0% Pitch

Normal Curve off

In this sample screen image, reference point "1" has been set to +75%. If you wish, however, other points can also be set. At -50%, for example ...166 **Detail program description - Control adjust** –50% –12% Input Output Point 1 Pitch

Normal Curve off

–12%

... and/or a further point at +50%:

+50% +88% 3 Pitch

+88% Input Output Point Normal Curve off

To do so, use the joystick to move to the corresponding area. As soon as a "?" appears in the frame on the "Point" line, the respective point can be set by pressing the arrow keys on the right touch pad. Just as with other points, this can be confi gured ...

+50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch

Input Output Point Normal Curve off

... or, by tapping the arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), can be deleted once again. The "L" and "H" points, on the other hand, CANNOT be deleted. **Trim point function** Alternatively, assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position:

2 +50% –75% Pitch

–75% Trim point Input Output Point Normal
Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad.

**Trim offset function** Assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can not only use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set and change their values, but you can also use the  keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an existing curve within the range ± 25%:

1 0% +50% Pitch

+50% Trim offset Input Output Point Normal 1 0% 0% Pitch

0% Trim offset Input Output Point Normal
You can also exit from this function by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad.

**Trim x-axis function** This function is activated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) arrow key on the right touch pad with an active (i. e. highlighted) value fi eld. You can then use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.

? 0% –33% Pitch

0% Trim X-axis Input Output Point Normal

Notes: If you reposition the point horizontally further away • from the current control position than approx. ±25%, a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position. Please note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point.167 **Detail program description - Control adjust Deleting reference points**  To delete one of the reference points (1 to max. 4), use the joystick to move the vertical line into the vicinity of the reference point in question. As soon as the reference point number and its associated value is shown on the "Point" line (see screen image above), you can activate the value fi eld on the "Point" line to highlight it by simultaneously tapping the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) and then delete the value. Complete the operation by briefl y tapping the center key **ESC** on the left touch pad. **Smoothing the collective pitch curve** In the example below, sample reference points have been set ... Reference point 1 to +50% Reference point 2 to +75% Reference point 3 to -50% ... as described in the last section.

+50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch

Input Output Point Normal Curve off

This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. First – assuming a situation is confi gured as presented above – tap the center **ESC** button on the left touch pad to deactivate the value fi eld. Then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame in an upwards direction to the "Curve" line. Now briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to activate the value fi eld on the "Curve" line:

+50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch off Input Output Point Normal Curve

Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the value fi eld from "off" to "on" and complete this setup procedure by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad or the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad:

+50% –50% –50% 3 Pitch

on Input Output Point Normal Curve

Notes: If the joystick does not coincide with the exact • reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. As with the other screen images on these pages, the • following screen shot shows a control curve created purely for the purposes of illustration. Please note, therefore, that the curve characteristics displayed do not in any way represent real-life collective pitch

curves. 0% –50% –50% 2 Pitch

Input Output Point Normal Curve off

Sample collective pitch curves for various fl ight phases:

**+100% +100% +100%**

**-100% -100%**  **-100% Output** **Output Output** 

**2 34 5 1**  **2 34 5 1**  **2 34 5 1**  **Control travel Control travel Control travel**

**Hover Aerobatics 3D** 
**C1**  **Throttle** (Throttle curve)

0% 0% 0% C1 Throttle

? Input Output Point Normal Curve off

Unlike the " **Channel 1 curve** " menu, however, this display relates only to the control curve of the throttle servo: the "Channel 1 curve", on the other hand, affects all servos controlled via the throttle/collective pitch stick. **Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" menu thus functions as an input signal for**  **the throttle curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/**  **collective pitch stick and therefore follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic.**  The throttle curve can also be defi ned (separately168 **Detail program description - Control adjust** per fl ight phase) by up to 6 points, termed "reference points", placed at any point along the joystick travel. The reference points are defi ned, adjusted and erased in the usual way, as explained in the previous section on the collective pitch curve. Start by defi ning the throttle curve with three points, namely the points "L" and "H" at the extremes, plus the Point "1" still to be set in the control center in order to match the motor power curve to the collective pitch curve. **Helicopter with carburetor or electric drive system with speed CONTROLLER**  This setting relates only to the control curve of the throttle servo or the speed controller

. Setting the throttle curve to suit a helicopter equipped with a speed governor is discussed in the following section. As with the confi guration of the collective pitch curve (see previous page), the throttle curve can also be defi ned by up to 6 points. In each case, set the control curve so that when the • throttle/collective pitch stick is in its end position, the carburetor is fully open or the controller of an electrically-powered helicopter is set to maximum (except for auto-rotation fl ight, see page 178). For the hover point, which is normally at the control • center, the carburetor setting or power control for the speed controller must be matched to the collective pitch curve so that the correct system rotational speed is obtained. At the minimum position of the throttle/collective • pitch stick, the throttle curve must fi rst be confi gured so that a glow motor runs at a speed considerably higher than idle speed and the clutch is fi rmly engaged. **The starting and stopping of the motor – whether glow or electric – always takes place using the**  **throttle limiter (see below) within the respective fl**  **ight phase.** This makes it unnecessary to program the two fl ight phases that may be familiar to you from using other remote control systems – namely "with idle-up" and "without idle-up", and with the associated "waste" of a fl ight phase for this purpose – since the mx-20 HoTT program offers a much more fl exible approach to fi netuning and optimizing increases to system rotational speed below the hover point than the "idle-up" approach taken by older mc radio control units. Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before you start the carburetor motor, i. e. so that the carburetor can be adjusted within the idle range only by using the idle trim. Ensure that you follow the safety instructions on page 177 at all times. If the throttle is set too high when switching on the transmitter, you will receive audible and visible warnings!

STARLET #02

2:22h Stop Flug

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V 99% «Normal »

M Throttle too high!

The following three graphs show (typical) 3-point throttle curves for various fl ight phases, such as hovering aerobatics and 3D fl ight. Sample throttle curves for various fl ight phases:

**+100% +100% +100%**

**-100% -100%**  **-100% Output** **Output Output** 

**2 34 5 1**  **2 34 5 1**  **2 34 5 1**  **Control travel Control travel Control travel**

**Hover Aerobatics 3D**  Notes on using the "throttle limit" function: You should make use of the throttle limit function as • a general rule (menu **" Control adjust**  **"** , page 104). This will fully isolate the throttle servo from the throttle curve with the throttle limit proportional rotary169 **Detail program description - Control adjust** control turned fully to the left; the motor will be idling and respond only to C1 trim. This option permits you to start and also stop the motor from within any fl ight phase. Once the motor has started, turn the throttle limiter slowly in the direction of the opposite end-point, so you can once again activate the throttle servo fully using the throttle/collective pitch stick. To stop thethrottle limiter limiting the throttle servo at its top endpoint, you should access the "Th.L.12" line on the

**" Control adjust**  **"** menu and set the control travel to +125% on the plus side of the "travel" column. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases. For a more fi nely-tuned control travel curve for the throttle limit control, you can also use the "Expo throttle limiter" (page 107). This gives you the option of defi ning the idle setting at the throttle limit control's center position, as readily determined both visually and audibly. Set the throttle limiter to its center position and adjust the "EXPO thro lim." value as far as is needed until the motor is idling smoothly with the proportional rotary control set at its center point. In this position, the motor will then start without any problems. To switch off, you will turn the throttle limit control – thus without also using C1 switch-off trim – to its rearmost end-point. As you do, ensure that the affected servo cannot hit an end-stop mechanically. The throttle restriction set by the throttle limiter is made visible as a horizontal bar in the diagram: 0% 0% 0% C1 Throttle

? Input Output Point Normal Curve off

The output signal for the throttle servo can never be higher than that set by the horizontal bar. In this example, it is thus max. ~50%. Since electric drive systems have no need for an • idle setting, the basic confi guration of settings for an electrically-powered helicopter merely involves making sure that the control range of the throttle limiter is both higher and lower than the adjustment range of the speed controller (usually -100% to +100%) by a safe margin. If necessary, therefore, adjust the "travel" setting of the throttle limiter as appropriate on the "Th.L.12" line of the " **Control adjust**  " menu. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases. Fine-tuning of the throttle curve itself, however, must take place in fl ight – as with a glow-powered heli.If you wish to record the fl ight time of a (glow• powered) heli, you can assign a control switch to the throttle limit slider, and then use this to switch a timer on and off; see page 123. **For auto-rotation fl ight, an automatic switch-over**  **is made from this mixer to a confi gurable default**  **value; see page 178. Helicopter with speed GOVERNOR**  Unlike speed controllers , which merely adjust the output level – in a way similar to a carburetor – a speed governor keeps the speed of the system it is controlling constant by regulating the output provided autonomously. For glow-powered helis, the governor therefore controls the throttle servo itself as appropriate – or the speed controller of an electric heli in a comparable way. Accordingly, speed governors do not therefore require a traditional throttle curve but a speed setting. A deviation from the preset speed will therefore only take place if the level of output required exceeds the maximum level available. Usually, receiver output 8 is reserved for connecting a speed governor ; see the receiver assignments on page 59. If this connection is in use, however, then the throttle limiter function is unavailable, since this exclusively affects the then unoccupied output 6, via the mixer "C1  Throttle". To still make use of the comfort- and safety-related features of the throttle limiter, you should ignore the general connection advice and connect the speed governor to receiver output 6. You then need only adjust the throttle curve appropriately, so this can take over the role of the "usual" transmitter control. Since in this case the "throttle curve" only regulates the target speed of the motor controller and this target motor speed should typically remain constant over the entire collective pitch adjustment range, the "C1  Throttle" mixer must be used to set a horizontal line – i.e. every (pitch) input value will result in the same ("throttle") output value – whose "height" is defi ned by the target motor speed. First, therefore, the reference points "1" to "4" – if170 **Detail program description - Control adjust C1**   **Tail** (Static torque compensation)

0% 0% 0% Tail C1

? Input Output Point Normal Curve off

The default approach here is to preset a torque compensation curve with a linear mixer ratio of a uniform 0%, as is required for a gyro sensor working in "heading lock mode" – see the screen image above. **Important notice: In this context, ensure that you comply with the**  **instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not, you risk making adjustments that render your heli**  **impossible to fl y.**  If, on the other hand, you use your gyro sensor in the "normal" operating mode, or if it only has what is termed "normal mode", then confi gure the mixer as follows: As with the confi guration of the collective pitch curve (see page 165), the control curve of the tail rotor can also be defi ned by up to 6 points. If required, therefore, you can modify the mixer at any time and preset both symmetrical and asymmetric mixer ratios both above and below the hover point. Before you do, however, ensure you have entered the correct direction of rotation for the main rotor on the **"Helicopter type"** menu. present and set – are erased. Following this, the reference points "L" (input = -100%) and "H" (input = +100%) are then each set to the same value, for example:

–100% +30% +30% C1 Throttle

L Input Output Point Normal Curve off

The value to be set depends both on the speed governor used and on the target motor speed that is desired, and can, of course, be varied according to the fl ight phase. **For auto-rotation fl ight, an automatic switch-over**  **is made from this mixer to a confi gurable default**  **value; see page 178.** +100% +30% Tail C1

H +30% Input Output Point Normal Curve off

Starting with values of -30% for point "L" and +30% for point "H", the mixer is to be confi gured in such a way that the helicopter, even during prolonged vertically ascending or descending fl ights, does not deviate from the yaw axis as a result of the main rotor's altered torque while hovering. For hovering, trim should take place only via the (digital) tail rotor trim lever. For a reliable torque compensation setting, it is essential that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set up correctly, i.e. that the rotor speed remains constant over the collective pitch's full adjustment range. This third curve mixer applies only to the control curve of the tail rotor servo when the throttle/collective pitch stick is moved, whereas the "Channel 1 curve" (see page 119) acts on all servos that are affected by the throttle/collective pitch stick. Note that the output signal of the "Channel 1 curve" option also functions as an input signal for the tail rotor curve programmed here: In the graph, the vertical line is synchronized with the throttle/collective pitch stick and follows the current Channel 1 curve characteristic from the " **Channel 1**

**curve** " menu. **In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is**  **automatically switched off.**171 **Detail program description - Control adjust** rotor defl ection. Set the mixer value so that there is no fall-off in system rotational speed.

**Roll**  **Throttle and Nick**  **Throttle**

C1 Tail Tail 0% Roll 0% Throttle Throttle

SEL Roll Tail Nick Throttle 0% 0% Normal
Increasing collective pitch is not the only change that requires the throttle to follow suit: major cyclic control movements also require this, i. e. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. The mx-20 HoTT program lets you adjust the degree of throttle follow separately for roll and pitch-axis controls. This offers particular advantages in aerobatic fl ying, e. g. when fl ying a roll: here, with moderate collective pitch values and the carburetor only about half-open, cyclic control travels are nonetheless executed that require much higher performance from the motor. The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100%. The correct mixer direction is automatically taken into account. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%. **In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is**  **automatically switched off. Tail rotor**   **throttle**

C1 C1 Pitch Throttle Tail Tail 0% Roll 0% Throttle Throttle SEL Normal
While the tail rotor normally compensates for the effect of main rotor torque on the fuselage, it is also used to control the helicopter around the vertical axis. Increasing tail rotor thrust requires a corresponding adjustment to motor power, however, to avoid a fall-off in system rotational speed. This mixer sets the extent to which the throttle follows the tail rotor. The throttle will follow on one side only, to the side on which the tail rotor thrust is increased. Values in the range 0% to +100% are therefore possible. The direction depends on the main rotor's direction of rotation (left or right), and this must fi rst be set correctly on the " **Helicopter type** " menu. For left-hand rotation systems, the throttle follows the tail rotor when the tail rotor joystick is moved to the left, and vice versa for right-hand rotation systems. If you tap the  or  keys on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) at the same time, this will reset values changed in the active (highlighted) fi eld back to 0%. **In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is**  **automatically switched off.** Set-up notes: To set the mixer value accurately you should either fi rst fl y several high-speed pirouettes against the direction of main rotor rotation or, if a strong wind is blowing, hover at right angles to the wind with a suffi ciently large tail **Roll**  **Tail and Nick**  **Tail**

0% Roll

0% Throttle

SEL Roll Tail Nick Throttle 0% 0% 0%

Nick Tail Gyro suppress Normal
Increasing pitch is not the only change that requires a corresponding torque compensation via the tail rotor: major cyclic control movements also require this, e.g. if the swashplate is tilted in any direction. Here, too, the mx-20 HoTT program lets you confi gure settings for both types of tilt movement (roll and pitch-axis) separately. For advanced aerobatics in particular, which involve very large control defl ections in the pitch-axis controls, e. g. the "Bo-turn" (vertical pull-up followed by tipping over around the pitch-axis) and tight loops, the uncompensated torque present in these fl ights causes the model to turn to a greater or lesser degree around the yaw axis. This spoils the appearance of the

maneuver. These two mixers permit static torque compensation to be activated by the swashplate tilting in any direction. The mixers work by always increasing tail rotor thrust, starting from the center point of the roll and pitch-axis sticks, i.e. they always generate a tail rotor defl ection in the same direction regardless of the direction of the command. The mixer value can be varied within the range 0 to +100%. The mixer direction is determined automatically by your defi nition of the direction of main rotor rotation on the172 **Detail program description - Control adjust** " **Helicopter type** " menu, page 86. **In the auto-rotation fl ight phase this mixer is**  **automatically switched off. Gyro suppression** 

0% 0%

SEL Nick Throttle

0% 0° Nick Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter OFF Normal Gyro suppress

**Important: in normal situations, this function should not be used if your model is fi**  **tted with a modern gyro system.**  **In this context, ensure that you comply with the instructions on adjusting your gyro: if not,**  **you risk making adjustments that render your heli impossible to fl**  **y.** This menu has nonetheless been retained in order to cater to a full range of requirements and fl ying habits. With this option, the effect of the gyro sensor ("gyro") can be varied according to the tail rotor joystick position; this assumes the use of a gyro system whose gyro gain can be controlled from the transmitter via an auxiliary channel. This channel will be channel 7 for Graupner radio control systems. The gyro suppression function reduces gyro gain in a linear progression as the pilot increases the tail rotor defl ection. Without gyro suppression – i.e. when set to 0% – the gyro effect is constant, regardless of the joystick position. With a transmitter control assigned on the "Gyro 7" line on the " **Control adjust** " menu (page 103), however, e. g. one of the CTRL 7 or 8 proportional rotary controls, the gyro gain can also be infi nitely varied (optionally according to the fl ight phase) between minimum and maximum gain. In this case, gyro gain is maximum at fulldefl ection of the slider, and zero at the opposite endpoint. Of course, the software lets you limit the gyro gain range on both sides by altering the transmitter control travel. Depending on the transmitter control position, the gyro gain at full travel on the tail rotor joystick is: **"current control position minus**  **gyro suppression value".** Accordingly, if the transmitter control is at the neutral point, and gyro suppression is set to 100%, the gyro gain is reduced to zero as the tail rotor defl ection increases. For values between 100% and the maximum value of 199%, the gyro can be fully suppressed – depending on the transmitter control position – well before full defl ection of the tail rotor; see the diagram on the next page. For the Graupner/JR gyro NEJ-120 BB, order no. **3277**

, both the upper and the lower values are set via rotary controls: control 1 sets the minimum gyro gain at the bottom position of the slider; control 2 sets the maximum gain at the top end-point of the slider; the transition between these two values occurs roughly in the middle of the slider travel. In contrast, the PIEZO 900, PIEZO 2000 and PIEZO 3000 gyro systems feature proportional, infi nitely variable adjustment of gyro gain; see below for typical diagrams.As an example, the option to confi gure fl ight phasespecifi c – and static – gyro gain gives you the opportunity to exploit maximum stabilization for normal, slow fl ying, but to reduce gyro gain for fast circuits and aerobatics. Samples of various gyro settings and confi guration notes Linear gyro suppression: 0% to 199%. • With the tail rotor joystick in the center position, the resulting gyro effect is set using the selected transmitter control. Using a proportional rotary control, the effect is infi nitely variable between zero ("min") and maximum ("max"), provided transmitter control travel is not restricted. With full tail rotor defl ection, the effective gyro gain is as follows: **"current control position minus**  **gyro suppression value".** Accordingly: at 0% gyro suppression, gyro gain is constant for tail rotor joystick movement; at 50% suppression, gyro gain is reduced to half if the assigned transmitter control is moved to the +50% position (as shown here); and only at >150% suppression is gain reduced to zero with the slider at this position, well before full tail rotor defl ection.

Exemple: +50 %ÍGyro gainÎ

left Stick deflection tail rotor centre rightRange oftransmittercontrol 7

Linear gyro suppression with reduced control travel, • e. g. -50% to +80% of full travel. Gyro gain is infi nitely variable within these transmitter173 **Detail program description - Control adjust** control limits. Here too, for purposes of illustration, we plot gyro gain values in relation to tail rotor defl ection for various parameter values of gyro suppression.

Exemple: +80 %ÍGyro gainÎ

left Stick deflection tail rotor centre rightRange oftransmittercontrol 7

**Adjusting the gyro sensor** To achieve the maximum possible level of stabilization for the helicopter with the gyro along the vertical axis, observe the following: The controls should have as little friction and "play" • as possible. There should be no "spring" in the control linkage. • Use a strong and – in particular – a fast servo • When the gyro sensor detects a model rotation, the faster its response – a corresponding corrective change to tail rotor thrust – takes effect, the further the gyro gain adjustor can be moved without causing the tail of the model to start oscillating, and the better the model's stability about its vertical axis. If the response is slower, there is a risk that the model's tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain settings. Here, further reductions to gyro gain will need to be made to eliminate the oscillation. If the model is fl ying forward at high speed or hovering in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilizing effect of the vertical fi n combined with the gyro may also lead to an overreaction that once again manifests itself through tail oscillation. To achieve optimum gyro stabilization under all conditions, you can make use of the option to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter using a transmitter control assigned to input "7", in connection with gyro suppression and/or the two settings on the Gyro NEJ-120 BB. Further notes on gyros with confi gurable multilevel gyro gain (e. g. NEJ-120 BB) Since you cannot specify the gyro gain from the transmitter proportionally via the transmitter control, the gyro's own control 1 must be used to set the (weaker) gyro gain (e. g. for aerobatics) and control 2 the stronger gyro gain (e. g. for hovering ). Even though a proportional rotary control is used for control function 7, only a switch-over between these two values takes place and the setting is therefore not proportional. You should therefore advance control 2 to the point where the model is on the brink of oscillating when hovering in calm conditions, and advance control 1 to the point where the model does not oscillate with its tail even when fl ying at maximum speed into a strong headwind. Depending on the state of the weather and the fl ight program planned, you can also switch over the gyro gain from the transmitter – also with gyro suppression dependent on tail rotor defl ection if required. **Swashplate rotation**

0% 0%

SEL

0% 0° Nick Throttle Nick Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter OFF Normal Gyro suppress

Some rotor head control systems make it necessary to incline the swashplate in a different direction from the intended inclination of the rotor plane when a cyclic control command is given. If your model features a four-bladed main rotor, for example, you may need to use this menu to set up a software-driven 45° rotation of the control linkage to the right, so that the pushrods from the swashplate to the rotor head can be set exactly vertical, ensuring that the blade control system works correctly, without unwanted differential effects. This eliminates the need to make mechanical changes to the control linkages. Negative angles equate to a virtual rotation of the rotor head to the left; positive angles a virtual rotation to the right. **Swashplate limiting**

0% 0%

SEL

0% 0° Nick Throttle Nick Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter OFF Normal Gyro suppress

This function works like a circular mechanical surround acting upon the stick which controls the swashplate, restricting the normally square stick travel to a circular range. In fact, if the helicopter is set up in such a way174 **Detail program description - Control adjust** that the defl ections for roll and/or pitch-axis exploit the maximum travel mechanically possible, e. g. for 3D helis, then the total tilt applied to the swashplate if full roll and pitch-axis commands are applied simultaneously will be considerably greater (141% in numerical terms).The swashplate mechanism may then strike its endstops and in the worst case the ball-links could even be disengaged. The mx-20 HoTT transmitter contains a confi gurable software function for limiting the total swashplate travel, i.e. it restricts the tilt angle of the swashplate from 100% (the travel is limited to the value obtainable either with roll or pitch-axis alone) to 149% (no effective limit). In addition, the function can be set to "Off" and hence completely deactivated. The swash limiter can also be confi gured per model and per fl ight phase. This software solution is therefore much more fl exible than a physical circular surround attached to the stick unit: the latter can, in any case, only be used if the roll and pitch-axis functions are controlled by a common stick unit. The sketch shown alongside illustrates the effect when set to 100%: the cross-hatched area of travel is curtailed and appears as a "dead zone". If this function is used, "Dual Rate" should be set to 100% and Dual Rate values above 100% should also not be used. If not, and you set a swashplate limit of 100%, for example, then swashplate movement will be restricted even if roll and pitch-axis commands are given separately. Adjustment range: 100 ... 149% and "Off".175 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Fine-tuning the throttle and collective pitch curve Practical approach

Although the throttle and collective pitch control systems are based on separate servos, they are always operated together by the throttle/collective pitch stick (except during auto-rotation fl ight). This coupling is performed by the helicopter program automatically. In the mx-20 HoTT program, the trim lever of control function 1 acts principally only on the throttle servo. However, in the " **Stick mode** " menu (see page 94) you can determine whether this should be used for idle trimming as part of the throttle limit function, or for idle trimming during the auto-rotation phase ("throttle AR"). The process of fi ne-tuning throttle and collective pitch, i. e. setting the motor power curve to match the collective blade pitch setting, is the most important aspect of setting up a model helicopter. The mx-20 HoTT software provides for independent confi guration of the throttle, collective pitch and torque compensation curves, in addition to the C1 control curve (" **Channel 1**

**curve** " menu, page 119). While these curves can be modeled using up to six points, fewer points are generally suffi cient. We recommend starting with three-point curves to begin with. This involves setting individual values for the center point and other (optional) reference points, and for the two end-points ("L", "low", and "H", "high") of the throttle/ collective pitch stick: together, these defi ne the control

curves. Before setting the throttle and collective pitch function, however, you should accurately calibrate the mechanical linkages for all the servos, following the set-up instructions for the helicopter in question.

**Note: The hover point should normally be set to the center**  **position of the throttle / collective pitch stick. For some special cases, however, e. g. for "3D" fl**  **ight, you may wish to program hover points that deviate**  **from this standard. For example: one point for normal fl**  **ight attitude above the center and one point for inverted fl**  **ight attitude below the center.**
**Idle setting and throttle curve**

Note: Since electric drive systems have no need for an idle setting, motor idling does not need to be calibrated. Fine-tuning of the throttle and collective pitch curve(s), however, must take place as for glow-powered helis. The idle setting described in detail on pages 105 to 107 always takes place with the throttle limiter closed – normally with the trim lever of the C1 function and only in special cases is the throttle limiter itself also utilized (as standard, the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control). The programming of a corresponding value for the "L" point of the throttle curve acts to set the descent speed of the motor, without infl uencing the hover confi guration. Here, for example, you can use fl ight phase programming in order to confi gure a range of throttle curves. This increased system rotational speed below the hover point proves to be useful in certain circumstances, for example for fast, steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective pitch, and for aerobatics.

The screen image depicts a curve with a slightly changeable throttle setting below the hover point at the control center. Control travelOUTPUT Different throttle curves are programmed for each fl ight phase, so that you can use the optimum set-up for both hovering and aerobatics: Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle • control response and low noise when hovering Higher rotor speed for aerobatics with motor power • set close to the maximum. In this case, the throttle curve must also be adjusted in the hover range. **Basic set-up procedure**
While the mx-20 HoTT transmitter permits the electronic confi guration of collective pitch curve and throttle curves to a large degree, fi rst ensure that you have correctly set all of the model's mechanical linkages as specifi ed by the helicopter manual. Experienced helicopter pilots will be glad to help you with this basic set-up. The carburetor linkage must be set so that the throttle is just past the fully open setting with collective pitch set to maximum or, for electric helis, with the speed controller set to full. When the throttle limiter is closed, however, it must be possible to just close off the carburetor using the C1 trim lever (rapid throttle setting of the "digital trim", see page 54), without the servo mechanically striking its end-stop. For electric helis, it must be possible to cut the electric motor's speed controller safely with the throttle limiter closed. Take great care when confi guring these settings, by adjusting the control linkage as required and/or altering the linkage point on the servo or carburetor lever. Only then should you optimize throttle servo fi ne-tuning electronically.
**Caution: Inform yourself thoroughly about the dangers and** 176 **Detail program description - Control adjust** pitch setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch setting (point "H") now provides you with a simple method of achieving constant system rotational speed from hovering right through to maximum climb. First, perform a prolonged, vertical climb by moving the collective pitch stick to its end-point. Compared to the hover confi guration, motor speed should remain unchanged. If motor speed falls off in the climb, even with the drive system working at full power and therefore no further power increase is possible, then reduce maximum blade pitch angle at full defl ection of the collective pitch stick, i.e. the value of point "H". Conversely, you should increase the angle of attack if the motor speed increases during the climb. On the "Pitch" graph page, you should therefore use the collective pitch stick to move the vertical line to point "H" and change its value accordingly, using the arrow keys  on the right touch pad.

This diagram shows only the changes when setting the maximum collective pitch value. **+100%**

**-100% OUTPUT** 

**2 34 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point

Then bring the model back to hover, which should, in turn, be achieved with the C1 stick at its center point. If the hover point is now achieved only by moving the collective pitch stick from the center point towards "higher" values, then you should compensate for this hover deviation by slightly increasing collective pitch for hover – i.e. for point "1" – until the model once again hovers with stick at its center. Conversely, if the model **safety precautions applicable to handling motors and helicopters before starting the motor for the**  **fi rst time!**  With this basic set-up complete, the motor should be started in accordance with the motor operating instructions: idling can then be confi gured using the trim lever of the throttle/collective pitch stick. The idle position that you set is displayed on the transmitter's basic display by a horizontal bar alongside the display of the C1 trim lever position. Refer to the description of digital trim on page 54 of this manual. The model should lift off the ground with the collective pitch stick roughly at its center point and hover roughly at the expected rotational speed. If this is not the case, proceed as follows:

**1. The model does not lift off until the collective pitch stick is above the center point.**  a) Rotational speed is too low Remedy: On the graph page of the "C1  throttle", increase the value for point "1". **+100%**

**-100% OUTPUT** 

**2 34 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point

b) Rotational speed istoo high Remedy: Increase the blade angle of attack pitch by increasing the value of point "1" on the " Pitch" graph page. **+100%**

**-100% OUTPUT** 

**2 34 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point **2. The model lifts off before the center point is reached.**  a) Rotational speed is too high Remedy: Decrease the carburetor opening by reducing the value of point "1" on the graph page of the "C1  throttle"

. **+100%**

**-100% OUTPUT** 

**2 34 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point

b) Rotational speed is too low Remedy: Decrease the blade angle of attack pitch by reducing the value of point "1" on the " Pitch" graph page. **+100%**

**-100% OUTPUT** 

**2 34 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point

Important: These settings must be reconfi gured until the model hovers at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/ collective pitch stick at its center point. The confi guration of all other model parameters depends on these settings being made correctly!
**Standard set-up** Standard set-up is completed on the basis of the basic set-up described above, whereby the model hovers in normal fl ight at the correct rotational speed with the throttle/collective pitch stick set to its center point: This means a set-up with which your model is capable of hovering and fl ying circuits in all phases while maintaining a constant rotational speed

. **Climb settings** The combination of throttle hover setting, collective177 **Detail program description - Control adjust** blades spinning wildly. **Always make sure that nobody else is standing near the helicopter**  **where they could be injured.** In addition, you must never switch abruptly from idle to the fl ight setting by suddenly increasing system rotational speed. This will cause the rotor to accelerate very quickly, resulting in premature wear to the clutch and gear train. Since the main rotor blades are generally mounted on a freewheeling unit, they will be unable to keep pace with such rapid acceleration; they will respond by swinging far out of their normal position and may even cause a boom strike. After starting the motor, you should therefore use the throttle limiter to increase the system rotational speed **slowly** . If you have assigned a switch to the throttle limiter, always ensure that you use the " **Control adjust** " menu (page 100) to program a time constant of about 5 seconds for running up the system rotational speed (opening the throttle limiter). Do not, however, program a delay for closing the throttle limiter. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phase Once the model can fl y this maneuver properly, set the value for "Throttle min" – the value for point "L" on the graph page for "C1  throttle" – so that the rotational speed neither increases nor decreases. This completes the set-up procedure for throttle and collective pitch. **Some important closing remarks** Before starting the motor, ensure that the throttle limiter is fully closed: this ensures that the carburetor now responds only to the C1 trim lever. If the carburetor is open too far when you switch on the transmitter, you will receive a visual and audible warning. Otherwise, if the carburetor or speed controller is open too far when the motor starts, there is a danger that the motor will run up to speed immediately after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will engage immediately. Accordingly, you should **always hold the rotor head fi**  **rmly when starting.** However, if you should accidentally start the motor with the carburetor too far open, the golden rule is this: **Don't panic! Keep hold of the rotor head !**  **Don't let go!** Instead, close the throttle limiter immediately, even if this risks damaging the drive system (in the worst case scenario). **YOU are responsible for ensuring that the helicopter never fl**  **ies off in an uncontrolled manner.**  The costs of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the motor itself are negligible, if you compare these to the injuries and damage that an uncontrolled model helicopter can cause if it is allowed to fl y around with its hovers below the mid-point, correct this by reducing the angle of attack appropriately. You may also fi nd that it is necessary to correct the carburetor opening for the hover point (point "1") at "C1  throttle".

This diagram shows only the change to the hover point, i. e. collective pitch minimum and maximum are both left at -100% or +100%. **+100%**

**-100% OUTPUT** 

**2 34 5 1**  **Control travel** Continue adjusting these settings until you really do achieve a constant rotational speed over the full control range between hover and climb. **Descent setting** The descent setting should now be confi gured by placing the model in a steady descent from forward fl ight at a considerable altitude by fully reducing collective pitch; adjust the collective pitch minimum value (point "L") so that the model descends at an angle of 60° ... 70°. On the "Pitch" graph page, you should therefore use the collective pitch stick to move the vertical line to point "L" and change its value accordingly, using the arrow keys on the right touch pad.

This diagram shows only the changes when setting the minimum collective pitch value. **+100%**

**-100% OUTPUT** 

**2 34 5 1**  **Control travel** Hover point178 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Auto-rotation permits both full-size and model helicopters to land safely in a crisis, e. g. if the motor should fail. Moreover, if the tail rotor should fail, cutting the motor and landing using auto-rotation is also the only possible way to avoid a high-speed, uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis and a resultingcatastrophic crash. Accordingly, switchover TO the autorotation phase takes place immediately. When the switchover to the auto-rotation phase is made, the Helicopter mixer menu screen changes as follows:

Pitch Thr setting AR Tailoffset AR Gyro suppress 0% Swash rotation 0° OFF Autorot –90% 0%

Swash limiter

During auto-rotation fl ight, the main rotor is no longer driven by the motor, but only by its own momentum and the the airfl ow through the rotor disc caused by the rapid descent. Since the energy stored by a rotor kept spinning in this way is rapidly consumed if the helicopter fl ares, pilots must not only have experience in handling helicopter models but must also consider carefully how the relevant functions should be confi gured.The advanced pilot should therefore practice autorotation landings at regular intervals. Not only to be able to demonstrate mastery of the maneuver at competitions, but also to ensure the pilot can can land the helicopter undamaged from a great height if the motor should fail. For this purpose, the program provides a range of adjustment options designed to help the pilot fl y a motorized model in its unpowered state. Note 

# Helicopter mixers Auto-rotation settings

that the auto-rotation settings comprise a complete seventh fl ight phase, which provides access to all the fl ight phase- specifi c confi guration options, and to trims, collective pitch curve settings, etc., in particular. The following functions have special features not present in the powered fl ight phases: **Collective pitch** (Collective pitch curve (C1  Pitch)) In powered fl ight, the maximum blade pitch angle is limited by available motor power. In auto-rotation, however, it is limited only by the point at which airfl ow ceases over the main rotor blades. Greater maximum collective pitch must therefore be set to ensure suffi cient thrust when fl aring the helicopter even as rotational speed is falling off. To do so, briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad to switch to the "Pitch" graph page and then use the joystick to move the vertical line to point "H". Start by setting a value that is about 10% to 20% larger than your "normal" maximum value for collective pitch. Initially, however, do NOT set a value that is considerably greater than for normal fl ight, since if you do so, the behavior of the collective pitch controls may then be very unfamiliar following the switchover. Indeed, there is a danger that the pilot will oversteer during the fl are and the model will balloon: this will case the rotor speed to collapse at a considerable altitude and the model will then crash to the ground. You can always re-adjust the value later after fl ying some test auto-rotations. The minimum value for collective pitch can differ from that set for normal fl ight. This depends on the pilot's usual style for normal fl ight. For auto-rotation, however, you must always set a suffi ciently generous minimum value for collective pitch at point "L" to ensure your model can be brought out of forward fl ight at moderate speed into a descent at an angle of around 60–70° when collective pitch is reduced to a minimum. If, like most heli pilots, you have confi gured this kind of setting for normal fl ight anyway, then you can simply copy this value across. If, however, you normally let your model "fall" at a shallower angle, then you should increase the value at point "L", and vice versa.

Approach angle forvarious wind conditions Approach angle

in moderate wind

no wind

45° 60° 75° in strong

wind

As a rule, the collective pitch stick itself is not positioned right at the bottom of its travel for auto-rotation. Instead, it is typically between the hover position and the bottom end-point, offering the pilot the option of further adjusting pitch inclination using the pitch-axis controls. You can shorten the approach by pulling back on the pitch-axis stick and gently reducing collective pitch, orextend the approach by pushing forward on the pitchaxis stick and gently increasing collective pitch. **Throttle setting AR** Although pilots will be expected to cut the glow motor completely during competitions, this is rather less advisable during training sessions, since you would thenneed to restart the motor following each practice autorotation landing. During the training phase, you should therefore set the179 **Detail program description - Control adjust** value on this line so that a glow motor is held at a safe idle during the auto-rotation phase without the clutch engaging; electric drive systems should be set safely to "Off".

Note: You may wish to make use of the "Motor Stop" option on the " **Base setup model** " menu as an alternative "Emergency STOP" function.

**Tail rotor AR** In normal fl ight, the tail rotor is set so that it compensates for motor torque while the model is hovering. It therefore generates some a certain amount of thrust even in its normal position. The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control system, and also by the various mixers which provide all manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim is also used to compensate for varying weather conditions, fl uctuations in system rotational speed and other infl uences. For auto-rotation, however, the main rotor is not driven by the motor, but by the "windmill" principle. Since this, in turn, does not generate any torque for which the tail rotor must compensate, all corresponding mixers are switched off automatically. Since the absence of torque in auto-rotation also means the above-mentioned thrust is superfl uous, however, a different tail rotor confi guration is also required: Cut the motor and place the helicopter on the ground in a level attitude. With the transmitter and receiving system switched on, select the fl ight phase "Auto-rotation" and then fold the tail rotor blades down. Now change the value on the "Tail rotor" line until the tail rotor blade angle of attack is zero degrees. Viewed from the tail, the tail rotor blades should be parallel to one another. Depending on the friction and running resistance of the gearbox, the fuselage may still yaw slightly, however. This relatively slight torque must then be corrected if necessary by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle. This value will always be a fi gure between zero degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the pitch angle in normal fl ight.180 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# General notes on freely programmable mixers

The previous pages have described a wealth of readyto-use built-in coupling functions, in the context of the two menus **"Wing mixers"** and **"Helicopter mixers"**

. The fundamental signifi cance of mixers and the principle by which they work are described on page 145. The following section presents you with information relating to "free mixers". In addition to the pre-programmed mixers previously mentioned, the mx-20 HoTT offers a number of freely programmable mixers in every model memory, whose inputs, outputs and mixer ratios can be confi gured to suit your exact requirements: 8 linear mixers, numbered M1 to M8 • 4 curve mixers, numbered K9 to K12 • These 12 mixers are certainly adequate for most applications and are invariably suffi cient when you incorporate the pre-programmed coupling functions offered. On the " **Mix active/phase** " menu (see page 192), you are also free to specify which of these 12 mixers is activated or deactivated separately for each fl ight phase. For the "free mixers", the signal present at any control function (1 to 12) can be assigned as the input signal

. For the "switch channel" (see further below), the signal from any switch can be utilized. The signal that is present at the control channel and passed to the mixer input is always infl uenced by its own transmitter control and by any control characteristic that may have been set, e. g. those specifi ed by the " **Dual Rate / Expo** ",

" **Channel 1 curve** " and " **Control adjust** " menus. The mixer output acts on a control channel (1 to 12, depending on receiver type) that can also be assigned freely . Before this channel routes the signal to the servo, it can be infl uenced only by the "Servo adjustments" menu, i.e. by the the servo reverse, neutral point offset, servo travel and servo travel limit functions, and also possibly by " Tx. output swap ". One control function can be used for any number of mix inputs simultaneously: if, for example, several mixers should be switched to act in parallel. Conversely, it is possible for any number of mixers to affect one and the same control channel. Particularly in the latter case, however, it is very important to ensure that the servo concerned does not strike its mechanical end-stops when several mixer signals accumulate to an excessive extent. For safety's sake it may be worth setting an appropriate travel limit on the " **Servo adjustments**  " menu in such cases. For more complex applications, mixers can be switched in sequence. In this case, it is not the (transmitter) signal at the "output" of a control function which forms the input signal of the "series-wired" mixer, but the (mixed) signal "further back" at the "input" of a control channel. The following description of the free mixers includes several examples of this type. In the software, one "free mixer" is always initially activated. If you wish, however, the mixer can also be assigned an ON/OFF switch. Since there are so many functions to which switches can be assigned, you must be careful to avoid undesirable multiple assignments. **The two key mixer parameters are:**

... • **the mixer ratio** , which defi nes the extent to which the input signal acts on the output of the control channel connected to the mixer output. If you are using linear mixers, the mixer ratio can be set as symmetrical or asymmetric. Curve mixers can also be confi gured with up to 6 points to suit your application, enabling the implementation of highly non-linear curves.

... • **the neutral point** of a mixer, which is also referred to as the "offset". The offset is the specifi c point along the travel of a transmitter control (joystick, CTRL 6 ... 8 proportional controls or switches 1 ... 9) at which the mixer no longer infl uences the control channel connected to its output. Normally, the neutral point is the center point of the transmitter control. However, the offset can also be set at any other point along the control travel. Since there are no restrictions on the design of the curve mixers, setting a mixer neutral point only makes sense for the 8 linear mixers. **Switch channel "S" as a mixer input** Occasionally, however, only a constant control signal is required at the mixer input. A typical application wouldbe a slightly increased "up-elevator" trim when the aerotow release is closed – fully independently of its normal trim setting. In this case a switch is assigned both to the aero-tow release and the mixer; it is then used not only to open and close the release, but also to pass the desired trim signal to the elevator via the mixer ratio. To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input control function in the program is designated "S" for "Switch channel". In addition, if the corresponding "target channel" should now no longer be infl uenced by its "normal" transmitter control, then you should isolate the latter from the function input of the affected control channel on the **"MIX-only channel"** menu (page 193). In the menu description that follows, an example is also given to illustrate this function. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page181 **Detail program description - Control adjust Basic programming procedure**  Select the mixer you want by using the arrow keys 1.  on the left or right touch pad. Tap the center 2. **SET**key on the right touch pad. The input fi eld on the line marked "fr" at the lower edge of the screen is now shown highlighted. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to select 3. the "fr" mixer input. Tap the center 4. **SET**key on the right touch pad; using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, switch to the column marked "to" on the lower edge of the screen and then tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad once again. The input fi eld "to" is shown highlighted. Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to select 5. the "to" mixer output. Tap the center 6. **SET**key on the right touch pad. Optionally, use the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad to switch to the column marked "ty" on the lower edge of the screen, in order to include the trim of the respective joystick in the mixer input signal ("Tr" for trim) and/or to add series switching for mixers ... ... and/or use the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad to switch to the column marked with the switch icon on the lower edge of the screen. Here, tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad once again and assign a switch, following the description given in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52). Using the arrow key 7.  on the left or right touch pad, switch to the column and then tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad. to the menu option ...

MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Wing mixers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers

MIX active/phase Fl. phase timers Helicopter mixer

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers

... on the multi-function list. Briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad to open this menu option. 

# Free mixers

Freely-programmable linear and curve mixers Regardless of the model type you have selected, each of the 24 model memory slots will offer you eight linear mixers (M1 ... M8) ...

Typ fr zu M1 M2 M3 ?? ?? ?? ??

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

... and 4 curve mixers (K9 ... K12), which also offer you the option of setting non-linear control characteristics:

Typ fr zu M8 C9 C10 ?? ?? ?? ??

C11 C12 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

In addition, the " **MIX active/phase** " menu (page 192) enables you to enable and disable particular mixers separately for specifi c fl ight phases. **On the "Free mixers" menu, the blocked mixers are then**  **suppressed in the corresponding fl ight phase. If**  **you are hunting for a mixer that is not shown, you should therefore switch to the appropriate fl**  **ight phase!**  In this fi rst section, however, we will concentrate on how to program the fi rst screen page of the "free mixers". We will then move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, both for linear mixers and curve mixers, as found on the second screen page of this menu.182 **Detail program description - Control adjust** the previous page. After assigning a control function or the "S" switch channel in the "fr" column, the following is also displayed

... **" to"** ... on the lower edge of the screen. You use the input fi eld in this column to route the destination of the mixer, i. e. the mixer output, to one of the control channels . At the same time, additional fi elds also appear on the bottom line of the screen :

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2

In this example, four mixers have already been defi ned. The second mixer is already familiar to us in principle as "Elevat curve" from the "Brake settings" sub-menu on the

" **Wing mixers** " menu, and the third is familiar from the "Tail" line ("2ELSv3+8") on the " **Model type** " menu. As a general rule, however, you should fi rst make use of the pre-programmed mixers. However, if you need asymmetric mixer ratios, want to go as far as programming non-linear curves or need to offset the mixer neutral point, then you should set or leave the pre-programmed mixers at "0%" and replace their use with free mixers. **Erasing mixers** If you need to erase a previously-defi ned mixer, select the appropriate line with the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad, switch to the "fr" column if you need to with the arrow keys  and then briefl y tap the center **SET**button on the right touch pad:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 8 S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2 3

The fi eld in the **"** fr **"** column for the mixer you want to delete will now be shown highlighted: tap both of the arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ):

Typ fr zu M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 ?? S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2 ??

**Mixer switches** In the sample screen image shown above, switches "4" and "2" have been assigned to linear mixers 1 and 4 and to mixer 2 of the control switch "G4". The switch symbol to the right of the switch number shows the current switch state. **Any mixers that have not been assigned any switch, as shown in the line on the bottom of the screen**  **marked with a switch icon , are on by default!** 
A switch must be assigned to the fourth mixer if you wish to switch between two fi xed mixer values (still to be set) that correspond to the two end-points of a (proportional) transmitter control. Accordingly, the "switch channel" mixer cannot also be switched "on" or "off" as with the other mixers. Defi ne the mixer ratios on the second screen page. 8. Return to the fi rst page by using the center 9. **ESC** key on the left touch pad.

**" fr"** After selecting a mixer line and then tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to highlight the value fi eld, use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to select one of the control functions : 1 ... 12 or S. For the sake of legibility, control functions 1 ... 4 are marked as follows when setting wing mixers:
C1 Throttle/airbrake stick
AI Aileron stick
EL Elevator stick
RU Rudder stick
... and, for the heli program: 1 Throttle/collective pitch stick
2 Roll stick
3 Pitch-axis stick
4 Tail rotor stick

Note: If you select control functions 5 ... 12 for fi xed-wing models or 5, 7 ... 12 for heli models, do not forget to assign a transmitter control in each case on the **"Control adjust"** menu!

**"S" as switch channel** Selecting "S" (switch channel) in the " **fr** " column has the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer input, e. g. in order to add a little more "up-elevator" trim when the aero-tow release is closed, as mentioned on183 **Detail program description - Control adjust Trim Effect on mixer output** 
AR (throttle limit) Linear, over full trim lever travel

GA(throttle autorotation) Only effective at minimum position of the assigned throttle limit control (CTRL 6 proportional rotary control as standard)
**Switching mixers in series** As already explained on page 180, you can also switch mixers in series: Where mixers are switched in "sequence", the "input signal" of a control channel already on its way to the servo "branches off" and is directed to a further channel. In the "ty" column, select the right angle bracket " " – or "Tr ", if the trim should also act simultaneously on the mixer input:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 7 7 8

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

Example: Two mixers (MIX 6  7 and 7  8): a) WITHOUT series switching:

6 6

7Servo4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101Servo4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101 7

8Servo4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101 MIX 1

MIX 2 If you intend to assign a control switch (G1 ... G4) as a switch, then please note that you must defi ne this appropriately BEFOREHAND on the " **Control switch** " menu. If you do not, you will assign an undefi ned control switch and therefore one that functions as a fi xed switch. **" Ty"**
**Including the trim** For control functions 1 ... 4, you can also confi gure things so that the trim generated by the digital trim lever of the respective joystick affects the mixer input. In this case, briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad and then use the arrow keys to select "Tr" in the highlighted fi eld:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? C4 4

2 Tr

The effect of the C1 trim lever on the mixer output will depend on the function assigned to it on the " **Model type**  " menu (page 82), in the "Motor on C1" column for fi xed-wing models ... **Trim Effect on mixer output** None Linear, over full trim lever travel Forward Only effective if C1 stick is forward Back Only effective if C1 stick is back

... or on the "Pitch" line of the " **Stick mode** " menu for helicopter models: b) The same mixers WITH series switching:

6 6

7Servo4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101Servo4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101 7

8Servo4,8 VC 577Best.-Nr. 4101 MIX 1

MIX 2

In this highly simplifi ed example, if mixer 2 is switched in series, then it does not "take over" solely the transmitter signal of control function 7 – as shown under a) – but, instead, the entire (mixed) signal present at the servo side of control channel 7, as shown under b). It then directs this in accordance with its confi gured mixer ratio forwards to control channel 8. In this case, the effect of transmitter control "6" extends as far as output "8". This kind of serial linkage can be extended as far as you wish. For example, another mixer "8  12" can be used to route the control signal from "6" as far as output "12", taking into consideration the associated mixer ratios. Of course, even with an active serial link, each separate mixer can still be controlled via the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input. Fixed-wing and helicopter mixers also work in the same way, when set up to switch "in sequence". **Including phase trim** If you wish to apply the trim values of the FLAP channel ("6") or the FLAP2 channel ("9") as stored on the

" **Phase trim** " menu – and dependent on fl ight phase – then fi rst tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad and use its arrow keys to select "P":184 **Detail program description - Control adjust** * N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated) ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 11

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? P ?? ??

Depending on the mixer value confi gured, a mixer can, as shown in the example above, route the signal from a fl ap control present (e.g.) on input 6 to control channel 11, while also applying the FLAP trim value set on the

" **Phase trim** " menu (page 136) for the respective fl ight phase. **Other special features of free mixers Mixer input = mixer output**  If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its output, e.g. "C1  C1", you can achieve some very special effects in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer on and off in any way you like. Typical examples for this feature can be found at the end of this section as example 2 on page 190, plus others in the section "Controlling timed sequences" on page 266.
Tip: If you separate a control function, e.g. "9", from control channel 9" using the " **MIX-only channel** " menu (see page 193), then the servo response is defi ned only by the mixer ratio (yet to be specifi ed) of the mixer programmed on the same channel. This enables you to set up linear curves using mixers M1 ... 8 or 6-point control curves using curve mixers K9 ... 12 for any transmitter control, as described in the " **Channel 1**

**curve** " menu, and also include them in fl ight phase switching if required. This method of "linking" is then not only also switchable, but can even be subject to a delay, by assigning an appropriate delay in the "– time +" column of the " **Control adjust** " menu. For more information, see the programming example entitled "Controlling timed sequences" on page 266.
**Mixer output affecting default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing fl**  **ap or collective pitch**

**servos** Before we start specifying the mixer ratio, we must fi rst give some thought to what happens if we permit a mixer to affect the default software coupling of aileron, camber-changing fl ap or collective pitch servos: **Fixed-wing models: •**  Depending on the number of wing servos set on the **"Aile/fl aps"**  line of the **"Model type"** menu, control channels are connected together via special mixers as follows: channels 2 and 5 for the "Aileron" function; channels 6 and 7 for the "Flap" function; and channels 9 and 10 for the FLAP2 servos (if present). If mixer outputs are programmed to affect these kinds of couplings, then their effect on the respective fl ap pair derived from the "receiving" control channel must be accounted for:
**Mixer Effect**
N.N.*  2 The servo pair 2 + 5 responds with an aileron function
N.N.*  5 The servo pair 2 + 5 responds with a fl ap function
N.N.*  6 The servo pair 6 + 7 responds with a fl ap function N.N.*  7 The servo pair 6 + 7 responds with an aileron function
N.N.*  9 The servo pair 9 + 10 responds with a fl ap function
N.N.*  10 The servo pair 9 + 10 responds with an aileron function
N.N.*  11 The servo pair 11 + 12 responds with a fl ap function
N.N.*  12 The servo pair 11 + 12 responds with an aileron function **Model helicopters: •**  With heli mixers, collective pitch control may be provided by up to 4 servos connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3 and 5, depending on helicopter type. The software links these together to control collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis. Elsewhere than the **"Helicopter mixers"** menu, it is **not** advisable to mix a free mixer into these channels, since some extremely complex interactions can result from such attempts. One of the few exceptions is "Collective pitch trim using a separate transmitter control" – see example 3 on page 190. **Important notices: With serial links in particular, remember that**  **• that the travels of the individual mixers are**  **cumulative if multiple stick commands are made simultaneously: there is a risk that the servo(s)**  **may strike a mechanical end-stop. If necessary, reduce "servo travel" to avoid this; alternatively,**  **set "Travel limit" on the "Servo adjustments" menu and/or reduce mixer values.** 185 **Detail program description - Control adjust Use the option available to you at any time of**  **• switching to the "Servo display"**   **menu (see page 230). This menu is reached from almost any**  **menu option on the transmitter's basic display by briefl**  **y tapping the keys on the left touch pad at the same time. This menu gives you the**  **opportunity to check the effects of all of your settings on a single screen.**  **Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point** Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of the mixer functions, the following section describes how to program linear and non-linear mixer curves. For each of the 12 available mixers, the mixer curves are programmed on a second page of the screen display. Use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the desired mixer line. If necessary, use the touch pad's arrow keys to move to the right column ( ), and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad in order to access the graph page

**. Mixers M1 ... 8: Setting linear mixer values**  As a practical example, we will now defi ne a linear mixer curve to resolve the following problem: For our motorized aircraft model, the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 – defi ned on the "Aile/fl aps" line of the **"Model type"** menu as "... 2FL" – are to be deployed to activate landing fl aps. That is: when a transmitter control is moved, they must defl ect downwards only. This requires a simultaneous elevator trim, however. First, use the **"Control adjust"** menu to assign a control such as the CTRL 6 proportional rotary control to input 6. Comment: in this case, a transmitter control on input 6 will control the two servos connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 as fl aps, by default – as you can see by consulting the above table. Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases – as is the case for the free mixer. **"Control adjust"** menu
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 –––

––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal Ct6

Note: Note that if two fl ap servos have been selected, any transmitter control assigned to input 7 will be decoupled in the software in order to avoid errors in operating the fl aps. However, in the interests of safety, you should make a habit of leaving all inputs not currently required to "free", or of resetting these back to "free"!Start by moving this transmitter control to its left endpoint and adjust the landing fl aps so that they are retracted or closed in this position. If you now move the dial to the right, the fl aps should move downwards; if not, you will need to adjust the direction of servo rotation. We now turn our attention to the fi rst mixer shown in the screen image on page 182 ("6  EL"), to which switch 4 was assigned: ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2 ?? ??

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open the second screen page:

OFF L.MIX 1 6 EL

If this screen appears, the mixer has not yet been activated using the assigned toggle switch – "4", in this example. If so, operate the switch:

L.MIX 1

0% 0%

0% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

The solid vertical line represents the current position of the transmitter control on input 6. (In the above diagram, located at the left edge, since the CTRL 7 transmitter control assigned to input 6 in this example (see previous page) is turned fully to the left.) The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the mixer neutral point – see under "Offset", below. The solid horizontal line shows the mixer ratio, which currently has186 **Detail program description - Control adjust** the value zero over the entire stick travel; accordingly, the elevator will not yet follow the movement of the fl aps. First, the ...
**Offset** (mixer neutral point) ... should be defi ned. To do so, use the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad to move to the line under "Offset":

L.MIX 1

0% 0%

0% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

The dotted vertical line in the middle of the diagram indicates the position of the mixer neutral point ("Offset"), i.e. the specifi c point along the control travel at which the mixer does NOT infl uence the control channel connected to its output. The default position for this point is at the control center. However, since in our example the fl aps should be closed or retracted with the proportional rotary control turned fully to the left, and since the elevator should also not be further infl uenced in this position, we must relocate the mixer neutral point to precisely this point. To do so, turn the transmitter control used (in this example, CTRL 7) fully to the left if you have not already done so, and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. The dotted vertical line moves across to this point, the new mixer neutral point, which by defi nition always retains the "initial" value of zero. **However, to illustrate our example better we now wish to set this "Offset" value to only -75%.**  L.MIX 1

0% 0%

–75% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

Notes: By selecting • **SET** with the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad and then tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad ...

L.MIX 1

0% 0% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

–75%

... you can then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to set or readjust the offset value manually in increments of 1%. By selecting • **SET** and then activating the value fi eld by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad – – see screen image shown above – – you can then reset the mixer neutral point back to the control center automatically by simultaneously tapping the two arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ). **Symmetrical mixer ratios**
The next task is to defi ne the mixer values above and below the mixer neutral point – – – starting from its current position. Move to the value fi eld on the line beneath the "Mix input" line, using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad if necessary: If required, use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the **SYM** fi eld, so as to confi gure the mixer value symmetrically with the offset point just set. After briefl y tapping the center **SET** key on the right touch pad, you can then use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set a value from -150% to +150% in the two highlighted fi elds. Note that the mixer value set always refers to the input signal of the respective transmitter control (control signal)! Negative mixer values reverse the direction of the mixer. Simultaneously tapping the two arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will erase the mixer ratio in the highlighted fi eld. The "optimum" value in our example will certainly need fl ight-testing.

L.MIX 1

–75% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

+20% +20%

Earlier, we set the mixer neutral point at -75% of control travel: as a result, the elevator ("EL") will exhibit a (slight) down-elevator effect even at the neutral point of the landing fl aps and this is naturally undesirable. Accordingly, you should reposition the mixer neutral point to -100% of control travel, as described earlier.187 **Detail program description - Control adjust** L.MIX 1

+20% +20%

–100% Offset

SET

STO 6 EL Mix input

If you were now to reset the offset currently set at -100% back as far as 0% of control travel – by selecting the SET fi eld with the arrow key on the left or right touch pad, activating the value fi eld and then tapping the two arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ), then you will receive the following screen:

L.MIX 1

+20% +20%

0% Offset

STO 6 EL Mix input

SET

**Asymmetric mixer ratios** In many cases, however, we require different mixer values on each side of the mixer neutral point. First, reset the offset of the mixer used in the example "6  EL" to 0%, if required (see screen image above). Using the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad, select the **ASY**fi eld and then tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. If you now move the proportional rotary control assigned to input 6 – in this example, CTRL 7 – in each of the corresponding directions, you can use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to confi gure the mixer ratios for each of the two control directions, i.e. left and right of the confi gured offset point:
* N.N. = Nomen Nominandum (the name to be stated) L.MIX 1

0% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

+55% +20%

Note: If you are using a switch channel mixer of the "S  N.N.*" type, then you need to actuate the assigned switch. The vertical then jumps between the left and right side.
**Setting the curve mixers K9 ... K12** These four curve mixers enable you to defi ne extremely non-linear mixer curves by placing up to 4 freely positionable points between the two endpoints "L" (low = -100% control travel) and "H" (high = +100% control travel) along the control travel. If you have already read the description of the " **Channel 1 curve**  " menu, or the method of programming 6-point curves on the " **Helicopter mixers** " menu, you can safely skip the following description. **Programming details** The control curve is defi ned by up to 6 points, known as "reference points". In the default software confi guration, 2 reference points are already defi ned, namely only the two end-points, "L" and "H"; see the next screen image. The following section applies to "any" mixer to which we wish to assign a non-linear curve characteristic. **The examples shown in the following section are merely illustrative, however, and they do not**  **represent real-life mixer curves.** –45% 0% 0% Input Output Point ? C.MIX 9

normal Curve off 8 10

**Setting reference points** When you move the transmitter control assigned to the mixer input – here control function 8 – a vertical line in the graph follows the movement between the two end-points. The current control position is also shown numerically on the "Input" line. The point at which this line intersects with the curve in question is named the "Output" and can be varied between -125% and +125% by setting reference points; see further below. This control signal acts on the mixer output. In the above example, the transmitter control is on input 8 at -45% of control travel. The output signal continue to show 0%, however, since no value has yet been entered. Up to 4 additional reference points can be set between the two end-points "L" and "H", although the distance between neighboring reference points must not be less than approx. 25%. If necessary, use the left or right arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to drag the marker frame downwards, until it is on the "Point" line:188 **Detail program description - Control adjust** –45% 0% 0% Input Output Point ? C.MIX 9

normal Curve off 8 10

When you now briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, the "?" is replaced by a point number and the value fi eld to the right is activated:

–45% 0% 1 8 10

0% Input Output Point C.MIX 9 Curve off

Using the arrow keys on the right touch pad you can now change the point value within the range of ±125%, e. g.:

–45% +50% 1 normal 8 10

+50% Input Output Point C.MIX 9 Curve off

Note: If the joystick does not coincide with the exact reference point, please note that the percentage value on the "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position. Continue in this way to set other reference points. Note that the order in which you generate the (maximum) 4 reference points between the end-points "L" and "H" is irrelevant, since the reference points are continuously renumbered automatically from left to right as they are entered.

+35% –55% 2 normal 8 10

–55% Input Output Point C.MIX 9 Curve off

**Erasing reference points** To erase one of the reference points between "L" and "H", use the transmitter control in question to move the vertical line onto or into the vicinity of the reference point in question. The reference point number and associated reference point value are shown on the "Point" line. The value fi eld is highlighted, see screen image above. If necessary, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame onto the "Pitch" line. Now briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. The value fi eld is shown highlighted. Now tap the two arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ). The selected reference point is erased, and the numbering of the remaining reference points is updated as required. Briefl y tap the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad to complete the procedure. Note that the reference points "L" and "H" cannot be erased. **Changing reference point values** To change reference point values, use the associated transmitter control to move the vertical line onto the point you wish to change: "L", 1 ... 4 or "H". The number and current curve value of this point are displayed. After activating the value fi eld on the "Point" line by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key, use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to change the current curve value shown in the highlighted fi eld. The possible range is -125% to +125% and changes do not affect neighboring reference points. Briefl y tap the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad to complete the procedure. **Trim point function** Alternatively, assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set. In this case, a triangle is shown on the graph to indicate each point jumped to. The arrow keys on the right touch pad can then be used to change the reference point jumped to as described above, entirely independently of the control position:

+35% –55% 2 normal Kurve 8 10

–55% Trim point Input Output Point C.MIX 9

Exit from trim point function setting by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad.

**Trim offset function** Assuming the value fi eld is active, i. e. highlighted, you can not only use the up or down arrow keys  on the left touch pad to jump to reference points already set and change their values, but you can also use the  keys on the left touch pad to vertically reposition an existing curve within the range ± 25%:189 **Detail program description - Control adjust** +35% –30% 2 normal Kurve 8 10

–30% Trim offset Input Output Point C.MIX 9

+35% –80% 2 normal Kurve 8 10

–80% Trim offset Input Output Point C.MIX 9

You can also exit from this function by tapping the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad.

**Trim x-axis function** This function is activated by tapping the left (  ) or right (  ) arrow key on the right touch pad with an active (i. e. highlighted) value fi eld. You can then use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to reposition the active point horizontally or vertically as you wish.

0% –55% ? normal Kurve aus 8 10

–55% Trim X-axis Input Output Point C.MIX 9

Notes: If you reposition the point horizontally further away • from the current control position than approx. ±25%, a "?" sign re-appears in the line. This question mark does not refer to the repositioned point, however: instead, it signifi es that a further point can be set at the current control position. Please note that the percentage value on the • "Output" line always relates to the current joystick position and not to the position of the point. **Smoothing the curve** This "jagged" curve profi le can be smoothed automatically simply by pressing a button. Then use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame in an upwards direction to the "Curve" line, as required. Now briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad to activate the value fi eld on the "Curve" line:

0% –12%

normal 8 10

0% Input Output Point C.MIX 9 Curve off

Use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the curve value from "off" to "on" and complete this setup procedure by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad or the center **ESC** key on the left touch pad:

0% –12% ? normal 8 10

0% Input Output Point C.MIX 9 Curve on Note: The curves shown here are for demonstration purposes only and are not at all representative of real mixer curves. For real-world application examples, see the programming examples on pages 242 and 285.
**Examples:** To open and close an aero-tow, the switch SW 2 has 1. already been assigned to control channel 8 on the **"Control adjust"** menu:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal 2

Subsequent aero-tow fl ying has proven that you always have to fl y with the up-elevator held slightly in during the tow. The solution will be to set up a mixer that applies slight up-elevator trim to the elevatorservo connected to receiver output 3 when the aerotow release is closed. The screen-shot will be familiar from page 182: here, the fourth linear mixer has been set up for this function, with the switch channel "S" as mixer input: Move the selected switch to the OFF position and then switch ...

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2190 **Detail program description - Control adjust** ... to the mixer confi guration page. On this page, use the arrow key  on the left or right touch pad to select the line under "Offset" and then tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. Depending on the travel adjustment selected on the **"Control adjust"** menu and the switch position, the offset value jumps to +X% or -X%, e. g.:

L.MIX 4

0% 0%

+100% Offset

SET

STO S EL Mix input

Now use the arrow  key on the left or right touch pad to move to the line under "Mix input" and then tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. The value fi elds are now highlighted. After you have moved the selected switch to the mixer ON position, use the arrow keys on the right touch pad to set the required symmetrical mixer ratio.

L.MIX 1

+100% Offset

ASY SYM 6 EL Mix input

+10% +10%

If you have a multi- fl ap wing featuring a "crow or 2. butterfl y system" with (additional) airbrakes, and you wish to test the effect of this braking system with and without airbrakes, then you should simply set channel 1 to "MIX-only" ... MIX ONLY CHANNEL

only normal 123 4 5 6

... and follow this by programming a free mixer "C1  C1", so as to restore your ability to control the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please. The fi nal example applies to model helicopters: 3. In the helicopter program, if you wish to assign collective pitch trim via one of the CTRL 6 ... 8 proportional rotary controls, use the **"Control adjust"**  menu to assign one of these transmitter controls to (e.g.) "Input 9". (Leave the default value of "GL" in the "Type" column alone, however, to confi gure this setting globally for all fl ight phases – as will be the case for the free mixer yet to be programmed. Finally, you then simply defi ne a free mixer "9  11" with a symmetrical mixer ratio of e. g. 25%. Due to the internal coupling, this transmitter control then acts equally on all of the model's collective pitch servos without affecting the throttle

servo.

L.MIX 1

0% Offset

ASY SYM 9 1 Mix input

+25% +25% Decouple the assigned transmitter control from control channel 9 on the " **MIX-only channel** " menu, however, to ensure that any servo connected to receiver output 9 can no longer be operated by this transmitter control; see also page 193.191 **Detail program description - Control adjust**192 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# MIX active/phase

Selecting mixers for fl ight phases Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option ...
Fl. phase timers Wing mixers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase

Helicopter mixer Fl. phase timers

MIX-only channel Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase

... on the multi-function list. Briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad to open this menu option.

LinearM1 LinearM2 LinearM3 6 EL C1 EL

LinearM4 3 8 S EL yes

SEL yes yes yes MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE

normal
The "free mixers" on the previous menu can be enabled and disabled for specifi c fl ight phases. You therefore have complete freedom in assigning specifi c mixers only to specifi c fl ight phases. Switch to your chosen fl ight phase and use the arrow keys to page through this menu. The mixers on the

" **Free mixers** " menu are displayed in the center column. Following the activation of the value fi eld by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, if the respective mixer is set to "--" by using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, then this mixer is deactivated in the fl ight phase shown at the bottom of the display and, simultaneously, removed from the list on the " **Free mixers**  " menu:

LinearM1 LinearM2 LinearM3 6

LinearM4 3 8 S SEL Speed ––– EL C1 EL

EL yes

yes yes MIX ACTIVE IN PHASE

If you "lose" a mixer in this way from the " **Free mixers** "

menu ...

ty fr to M1 M3 6 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? 4

2

M6 ?? ??

... then you should either switch through the fl ight phases until it appears again ... or, alternatively, switch to this menu and temporarily reactivate the mixer you are looking for:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 6 EL C1 EL

M4 M5 3 8 S EL ?? ?? Tr C4 4

2193 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# MIX-only channel

Separating control functions from control channels for all fl ight phases Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option ...
Fl. phase timer Wing mixers

Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

Fl. phase timer Helicopter mixer

Dual mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel

... on the multi-function list. Briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad to open this menu option.

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

only normal 123 4 5 6

On this menu, you can interrupt the normal signal fl ow between the control function on the input side and the control channel on the output side: the "traditional" transmitter control/servo connection no longer applies. One particular use of the options offered by this fl ight phase-independent menu might to reliably keep one of the control channels "free" in all fl ight phases, as these control channels can be assigned a transmitter control or switch for specifi c fl ight phases on the " Control adjust " menu. Conversely, a joystick, transmitter control (CTRL 6 ... 10) or switch (SW 1 ... 3, 8 and 9) "robbed" of its servo in this way can of course be used anywhere else as a transmitter control – even in a fl ight phase-specifi c way. See the programming examples to the right and on pages 255 and 266. A joystick, transmitter control (CTRL 6 ... 10) or switch (SW 1 ... 3, 8 and 9) robbed of its servo by setting the channel to "MIX only" will then namely affect mixer inputs only ... ... and the servo connected to a channel set to "MIX only" is then also only accessible from the mixers programmed to its control channel, i.e. "(with) MIX(ers) only". Accordingly, for any channel set to "MIX only", you can utilize both its control function and its control channel entirely independently of one another for any special functions you need; see the examples at the end of this section. Use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to select the desired channel from 1 to 12 (  ) and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, so as to switch as you please between "normal" ( ) and "only" mode ( ):

normal 789 10 11 12 MIX ONLY CHANNEL

only Examples: For model glider aircraft without airbrakes, the • butterfl y function (page 160) is generally used as a landing aid. Just as with "normal" airbrakes, this is generally controlled using the C1 stick. While the (airbrakes) servo typically connected to channel 1 is then generally absent as a rule, receiver output 1 is still not "free", since the control signal of the brake stick is still present at this location. Its control signal – – which in this example is not required – can be decoupled from control channel "1", and thus "free up" this channel from the C1 stick signal, by setting channel 1 to "MIX only" on the

" **MIX-only channel** " menu. This makes it possible to use control channel "1", together with receiver connection "1", at any time for other purposes, via freely-programmable mixers – e. g. to connect up a speed controller. If your model has built-in airbrakes, however, and • you would like to perhaps test the performance of a butterfl y system with and without airbrakes, simply set channel 1 to "MIX only" and program a free mixer "C1  C1", so as to restore your ability to control the airbrakes via servo 1. If you also assign a switch to this mixer, then you will be able to switch this mixer on and off as you please.194 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Dual mixers

Same-sense/opposite-sense mixing of two control channels Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option ...
Fl. phase timers Wing mixers Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel Dual mixer

Helicopter mixer Fl. phase timers

Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel Dual mixer
... on the multi-function list. Briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad to open this menu option.

Typ Diff. zu DUAL MIXER Mixer1 Mixer2 ?? ??

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% 0%

Similarly to a V-tail mixer, the four fl ight phaseindependent dual mixers couple ... 3 3

4Servo4,8 V**C 577**Best.-Nr. 4101Servo4,8 V**C 577**Best.-Nr. 4101 4 V-tail mixerControl function inputsControl channels(receiver outputs) Elevator stick

Rudder stick Right rudder / elevat o Left rudder / elevato r Rudder Elevator Elevator
Rudder Rudder Elevator

... a same-sense "   " and an opposite-sense " 

 " control function, although they permit any channel to be used and offer differential travel for the opposing function.

Note: The symbols "   " and "   " indicate that the corresponding inputs act upon the two servos coupled by the mixer in the same and opposed directions respectively – they do not indicate the servos' direction of rotation! Accordingly, if wing fl aps are defl ected in the wrong direction, simply swap the two inputs around or use the servo reverse function from the " **Servo adjustments**  " menu; see page 90. In the software, the V-tail mixer already mentioned is supplemented by other "dual mixers" for the two aileron servos at receiver outputs 2 and 5 and for the fl ap pairs at outputs 6 and 7 (and 9 and 10 plus 11 and 12, if present). These are activated via the aileron stick and the transmitter control that has been assigned to input "6" on the " **Control adjust** " menu. In the same way, the four freely-programmable dual mixers on this menu can be used to couple two further control functions, a feature that would otherwise only be possible with time-consuming programming of free mixers. Here, we will use a "V-tail with rudder differential" as our example to explain the programming of a dual mixer (see also the example on page 255):

Typ Diff. zu Mixer1 Mixer2 EL

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% RU +25% DUAL MIXER

Depending on activation, both servos operate either as elevators or rudders. Differential travel is effective only when a rudder command is given, in accordance with dual mixer assignment. In this case, both associated trim levers are effective. No additional free mixers are required for this arrangement. **When using this mixer, however, the tail type MUST be entered as "normal"**  **on the "Model type" menu.** Example: Model with two rudders, with differential travel and outward movement (e. g. swept-back fl ying wing):

Typ Diff. zu Mixer1 Mixer2 8

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% RU +75% DUAL MIXER

When a rudder command is given, the second servo connected to output 8 follows suit. (With this type of programming, differential travel can be confi gured for the rudders.) In this case, too, trim from the rudder stick195 **Detail program description - Control adjust** affects both servos. If the rudders are also required to defl ect outwards when the airbrakes are activated, then you should assign the C1 stick (transmitter control 1) to input 8 on the " **Control adjust** " menu. Finally, move to the "Offset" column and adjust the offset value until both rudders return to the neutral position. You may also need to "play" a little with the offset and travel adjustment settings.
Tip: You can use the " **Servoanzeige** " menu to check all of the settings made in this way. This menu can be accessed from almost any other menu by simultaneously pressing the  keys on the left touch pad.196 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option ...
Helicopter mixer Free mixers MIX active/phase MIX-only channel Dual mixer Swaschplate mixer
... on the multi-function list. Briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad to open this menu option:

SWASH MIXER Pitch Roll Nick +61% +61% +61%

SEL

Note: If "1 servo" is selected on the "Swashplate" line on the

" **Helicopter type** " menu, this option is not shown on the multi-function list. On the "Swashplate" line on the **"Helicopter type"** menu, you have already defi ned the number of servos that are installed in your helicopter for collective pitch control; see page 86. This information is used to automatically couple together the functions for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch, so that you do not need to defi ne any other mixers yourself. If you have a model helicopter which only has a single collective pitch servo , this "Swashplate mixer" menu option is of course superfl uous, since the software will control the three swashplate servos for collective 

# Swashplate mixer

Collective pitch, roll, pitch-axis mixer pitch, pitch-axis and roll independently of one other, i.e. without a mixer. In this scenario, this menu option is therefore no longer available to you from the multi-function list. With all other swashplate linkages employing 2 ... 4 collective pitch servos, the mixer ratios and directions are set up by default, as can be seen above. The preset is +61% in each case, but the value can be varied from -100% to +100% if required, by briefl y tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad and using the arrow keys. Simultaneously tapping the two arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) will reset the mixer ratio in the highlighted fi eld back to its default value of +61%. If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis) does not respond to the joysticks properly, you should alter the mixer directions ("+" or "-") before trying to correct the directions of servo rotation.

Note: Ensure that changed mixer values do not result in the servos mechanically striking their end-stops. Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option ...

Dual mixer

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap Telemetry Basic settings Fail-safe adjust

Swashplate mixer

Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap Telemetry Basic settings Fail-safe adjust

... on the multi-function list. By briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, this menu item opens:

FAIL SAFE

Pos hold 123 4 5 6 DELAY : 0.25s STO
The higher level of operating safety exhibited by the HoTT system when compared to traditional PPM technology results from the fact that the microprocessor built into the HoTT receiver not only exclusively processes the signals of "its" transmitter, but can also clean up "dirty" control signals that it receives. Only when these signals become too error-prone or garbled due to outside interference does the processor automatically replace the disrupted signals with the 

# Fail-safe197 **Detail program description - Control adjust** last received correct signal, temporarily stored in the receiver. This feature is confi gured by the settings as described below. This feature also suppresses brief interference caused by e. g. local drops in fi eld strength, which otherwise result in the familiar "glitches". In this case, the red LED lights up on the receiver. If you have selected a PCM transmission mode for the active model memory but have not yet carried out the fail-safe programming, you will see a warning message on the screen when you switch on the transmitter:

Fail Safe setup t.b.d.

**Programming procedure** The "Fail Safe" function determines the behavior of the receiver if communication between the transmitter and the receiver is disrupted. Receiver outputs 1 ... 12 can optionally ... preserve the current position ("hold"): 1. if communication is disrupted, all servos programmed to "hold" mode remain at the positions judged to be the last valid positions by the receiver until the receiver picks up another valid control signal, or move to a freely selectable position ("Pos") if 2. interference should occur, following the expiry of the "time delay". Use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the desired servo connection from 1 to 12 (  ) and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad, so as to switch as you please between the "hold" ( ) and "Pos" mode ( ): 123 4 5 6 STO FAIL SAFE

Pos hold

DELAY : 0.25s
Following this, use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the "DELAY" option shown at the bottom of the display ...

789 10 11 12 STO

FAIL SAFE

Pos hold

DELAY : 0.25s
... and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. Now use the touch pad's arrow keys to make your choice from the four possible time delays (0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s and 1 s) offered. Simultaneously tapping the arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) ) will reset the highlighted fi eld back to its default value of 0.25 s. Following this, use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the **STO** fi eld at the bottom right of the screen. Then, use the associated transmitter controls to move the servos, which you have switched to position mode, into the desired positions SIMULTANEOUSLY. Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to store these positions as the fail-safe setting for the receiver, so that it can revert back to them if interference is experienced. Successful storage of the positions is confi rmed briefl y on the screen:

789 10 11 12 STO Position stored FAIL SAFE

Pos hold

DELAY : 0.25s

**Caution: Ensure you make use of this safety net by at least**  **programming the following for a fail-safe incident: for glow-powered models, set the motor throttle**  **position to idle; for electric models, set the motor function to stop, or "Hold" for heli models. If**  **interference should occur, the model is then less likely to fl**  **y off on its own and cause damage to property or even personal injury. Consider asking an**  **experienced pilot for advice.**198 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Teacher/pupil

Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode with a trainer lead Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Teacher/pupil** " on the multi-function list:

Dual mixer

Tx. output swap Telemetry Basic settings Fail-Safe adjust Teacher / pupil

Swaschplate mixer

Tx. output swap Telemetry Basic settings Fail-Safe adjust Teacher / pupil

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open this menu option:
TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 n/a 6

The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released by the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned ("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image). **Teacher-pupil settings** Up to twelve control functions of the teacher transmitter "Teach" can be transferred to the pupil transmitter "Pupil", either individually or in any combination. The lower display line, named "Teach", therefore refers to the **transmitter controls** permanently connected to inputs 1 ... 4 (dual axis stick functions for fi xed-wing and heli model) and the CTRL 6 to 10 controls that are assigned or can be assigned to inputs 5 ... 12 (optionally fl ight phase-specifi c) on the **"Control adjust"** menu.
Note: The assignment of transmitter controls on the " **Control adjust**  " menu is possible only when the trainer mode connection is inactive. Use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the transmitter controls from 1 to 12 (  ) to transfer to the pupil and then briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad in each case, so as to switch between "Teach" (Teacher)" ( ) and "Pupil" ( ):

2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 6 TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach

n/a
To be able to carry out the transfer, you must then assign a trainer mode switch on the left of the display. To do so, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker to the bottom left, to the right of "SW:" Here, assign a switch as described on page 52. Preferably, you should utilize one of the two momentary switches, SW 1 or SW 9, so as to be able to revert control back to the teacher transmitter at any time.

8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9 11 12 TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach

n/a No pupil signal

Since at this early stage of programming a trainer system it is unlikely that an operational pupil transmitter is connected to the teacher transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closed during the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:

8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9  11 12 TRAINER /Teach

Pupil Teach

n/a

Note: The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this

menu. **The header line therefore also switches from "TRAINER /Pupil" to "TRAINER /Teach" once a**  **switch has been assigned.** The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely – i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions – in one of199 **Detail program description - Control adjust** the model memories of the mx-20 HoTT teacher transmitter. The HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be "bound" to the teacher transmitter, since the latter ultimately controls the model, even in pupil mode. **ALWAYS ENSURE YOU SWITCH ON THE** mx-20 **HoTT teacher transmitter FIRST BEFORE PLUGGING THE CONNECTION CABLE INTO THIS UNIT. If you do**  **not, the RF module will not be enabled.** The mx-20 HoTT teacher transmitter can be connected to any suitable pupil transmitter, even transmitters using the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range.If the pupil-side connection does NOT utilize a twopole DSC socket, however, but a three-pole trainer socket from the Graupner range (for example), then the **fundamental precondition for a correct connection to a pupil transmitter is that the modulation type**  **PPM (18 or 24) must ALWAYS be confi gured in the**  **pupil transmitter, regardless of the modulation type used in the teacher transmitter.**  **Pupil transmitter set-up** The model to be controlled by the pupil must be programmed completely – i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions – in one of the model memories of the teacher transmitter. If present, the HoTT receiver of the model in question must also be "bound" to the teacher transmitter. In principle, however, an mx-20 HoTT pupil transmitter can also be connected to a teacher transmitter from the "traditional" 35/40 MHz range. Almost any transmitter with at least 4 control functions from previous and current Graupner series can be used as a pupil transmitter. More detailed information can be found in the RC main catalog and on the www.graupner. de website. If required, the pupil transmitter should be fi tted with the connection module for pupil transmitters. This is to be connected to the transmitter board in accordance with the supplied installation instructions. Information on the pupil modules required in each case can be found in Graupner's RC main catalog and on the www.graupner.de website. The connection to the teacher transmitter is made using the appropriate lead; see the following double page. **The control functions of the pupil transmitter MUST act directly on the control channels, i. e. the receiver**  **outputs, without intermediary mixers.** If you are using an " mc " or " mx " series transmitter, it is best to activate a free model memory with the required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode 1 ... 4) and "Throttle min. forward/back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All other settings are left at their default values, however. If you have selected the "Helicopter" model type, you must also set the throttle/ collective pitch direction and idle trim on the pupil transmitter. All other settings, including mixer and coupling functions, are confi gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model. With " **D** " and " **FM** " type transmitters, you must also check the direction of servo rotation and stick mode, and adjust as necessary by swapping the corresponding leads. All mixers must also be switched off or set to "zero". When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed:
**Channel Function** 1 Motor throttle/collective pitch 2 Aileron/roll 3 Elevator/pitch-axis
4 Rudder/tail rotor
If you wish to transfer other control functions to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual axis sticks (1 ... 4), access the **"Control adjust"** menu on the pupil transmitter and assign transmitter controls to the inputs that correspond to the control numbers **5 ... 12** released on the teacher transmitter's " Teacher/pupil" menu. **Important: If you should forget to assign a transmitter**  **• control on the pupil side, then the affected servo**  **or servos will remain in the center position when the transfer is made to the pupil transmitter.**  **The pupil transmitter must always be operated in •**  **PPM mode, regardless of the RF connection type used between the teacher transmitter and the model.**  **If the transmitter is connected using a DSC •**  **socket on the pupil side, ALWAYS**  **leave the pupil transmitter's On/Off switch in the**  " **OFF** " **position: this is the only way to guarantee that no RF signal is sent from the pupil transmitter's**  **transmitter module , even after the DSC lead has been plugged in.**  **Trainer mode operations** Both transmitters are connected to one another using a suitable lead (see summary on next page): The plug marked " **M** " (master) must be inserted into the socket on the teacher transmitter, and the plug marked " **S** " (student) into the pupil transmitter's socket. (Note that not all leads may have such "M" and "S" labeling.)200 **Detail program description - Control adjust Important notices:**  **Check that the model aircraft is operational •**  **and check that all functions issue the correct commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.**  **The ends of the trainer lead, usually marked as •**  **either "S" or "M", terminate in a three-pole TRS jack. Do not insert these jacks into a DSC system**  **socket, as it is not suitable for this application. The DSC socket is exclusively designed for a**  **trainer lead with 2-pole TRS jacks. Checking functionality**  Activate the assigned trainer mode switch: The trainer mode system is working properly if the • display now changes from "  Teach" to "  Pupil". If the center LED rapidly fl ashes blue/red, however, • and the unit beeps at the same time, then the pupilteacher transmitter connection has been lost. The basic display also displays the following warning notice ...

No pupil signal
... and the left side of the screen display on the

" **Teacher/pupil** " menu changes to show "-Pupil". In this case, all control functions are retained by the teacher transmitter automatically, regardless of switch position: this ensures the model is always under control.
**Possible faults:** Pupil transmitter not ready • Interface in pupil transmitter not correctly connected • in place of the RF module Cables connected wrongly: see right for cable • connections Pupil transmitter not switched over to PPM (10, 18, • 24) mode **Other possible faults:** Teacher transmitter not properly "bound" to HoTT • receiver in training model

**Trainer leads**
**4179.1** For trainer mode operation between any two Graupner transmitters equipped with a DSC socket (identifi able by the two-pole TRS jacks at each end of the lead) **3290.7**Trainer lead for connecting a teacher transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-20 HoTT) or a transmitter retrofi tted with the optional DSC module, order no. **3290.24** ) ) to a Graupner pupil transmitter with an optoelectronic pupil socket (identifi able by the label " **S** " on the end with the three-pole TRS jack). **3290.8** Trainer lead for connecting a pupil transmitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-20 HoTT) or a transmitter retrofi tted with the optional DSC module, order no. **3290.24** ) to a Graupner teacher transmitter with an optoelectronic teacher socket (identifi able by the label " **M** " on the end with the three-pole TRS jack). For further details about the cables and modules for teacher and pupil transmitters mentioned in this section, please consult the respective transmitter handbook, the Graupner RC main catalog or the www.graupner.de website.201 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

## Trainer mode with the mx-20 transmitter Due to the continuous improvements made to the product range, please consult our website at www.graupner.de for the latest info rmation

Teacher transmitter

with DSC socket Teacher transmitter with teacher module order no. **3290.2**

, **3290.19**

, **3290.22** Trainer lead order no. **4179.1** Trainer lead order no. **3290.8**


## M Pupil transmitter mx-20 HoTT

mx-12 HoTT, mx-16 HoTT, mx-20 HoTT mc-19 (s, iFS + HoTT) up to mc-24

, mx-22 (iFS), mx-24 s Pupil transmitter with DSC socket Pupil transmitter with pupil module order no. **3290.3**

, **3290.10**

, **3290.33** Trainer lead order no. **4179.1** Trainer lead order no. **3290.7**

D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014, mc-10

... mc-24

, mx22 (iFS), mx-24s 

## S Teacher transmitter mx-20 HoTT

mx-12 (s)HoTT, mx-16s / iFS/HoTT, mx-20 HoTT, mx-22 (iFS), mx-24s and, if equipped with DSC socket order

no. **3290.24**

, mc-19 (s + iFS), mc-22 (s + iFS) and mc-24

Note: The lists present the possible transmitters/transmitter combinations at the time of going to press. Ho TT TT202 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

## Wireless HoTT system

The mx-20 HoTT trainer mode system can also be operated wirelessly. To do so, the teacher transmitter must be "connected" to a pupil transmitter as described below. Prior to this, however, the training model's receiver must be bound to the PUPIL transmitter. This confi guration is possible between transmitters that have the "BIND:" option available on the " **Teacher/pupil** "

menu. **Preparing for training mode**

**Teacher transmitter** The training model must be programmed completely – i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer functions – in one of the model memories of the HoTT teacher transmitter. **The model to be used for training must therefore be under the complete control of the**  **teacher transmitter. The fi nal step in preparation,**  **however, is to bind the training model to the pupil transmitter. For a detailed description of the bind**  **procedure, please consult pages 69 and 74. Pupil transmitter**  If you are using an " mc " or " mx " series transmitter, it is best to activate a free model memory with the required model type ("Fixed-wing" or "Heli"). Assign the model name "Pupil" and set up the stick mode (mode 1 ... 4) and "Throttle (or collective pitch) min. forward/ back" to suit the pupil's preferences. All other options are left at their default values. All other settings, including all mixer and coupling functions, are confi gured exclusively on the teacher transmitter, which in turn transmits them to the model. When assigning control functions, the usual conventions must be observed: **Channel Function** 1 Motor throttle/collective pitch
2 Aileron/roll 3 Elevator/pitch-axis
4 Rudder/tail rotor
If you wish to transfer other control functions to the pupil transmitter in addition to the functions of the two dual axis sticks (1 ... 4), access the **"Control adjust"** menu on the pupil transmitter and assign transmitter controls to the inputs that correspond to the control numbers **5 ... 12** released on the teacher transmitter's " Teacher/pupil" menu. **Important: If you should forget to assign a transmitter control**  **on the pupil side, then the affected servo or servos will remain in the center position when the transfer**  **is made to the pupil transmitter.**
**Preparing the teacher and pupil transmitters** Once you have bound the training model to the pupil transmitter, now switch on the teacher transmitter. On both transmitters, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the " **Teacher/pupil** " menu option on the multi-function list:

Dual mixer

Tx. output swap Telemetry Basic settings Fail-Safe adjust Teacher / pupil Swaschplate mixer

Tx. output swap Telemetry Basic settings Fail-Safe adjust Teacher / pupil

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open this menu option:
TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach 2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 n/a 6

The screen image shown above shows the menu in its initial state: No transmitter controls have been released to the pupil ( ) and no switch is assigned ("SW: ---" bottom left in the screen image).
**Pupil transmitter** Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, move the marker frame to the "BIND" input fi eld. If you can see a switch to the right of "SW:", then this MUST fi rst be erased, see screen image:

2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 6 TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach

n/a203 **Detail program description - Control adjust Teacher transmitter**  Up to twelve control functions of the teacher transmitter "Teach" can be transferred to the pupil transmitter "Pupil", either individually or in any combination. The lower display line, named "Teach", therefore refers to the **transmitter controls** permanently connected to inputs 1 ... 4 (dual axis stick functions for fi xed-wing and heli model) and the CTRL 6 to 10 controls that are assigned or can be assigned to inputs 5 ... 12 (optionally fl ight phase-specifi c) **on the** "Control adjust" menu. Use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the transmitter controls from 1 to 12 (  ) to transfer to the pupil and then briefl y tap the center **SET** key on the right touch pad in each case, so as to switch between "Teach" (Teacher)" ( ) and "Pupil" ( ):

2 3 4 5 BIND: SW: ––– 1 6 TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach

n/a
To be able to carry out the transfer, you must now assign a trainer mode switch. To do so, use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to move the marker frame to the bottom left, to the right of "SW:" now assign a switch as described in the section "Assigning transmitter controls, switches and control switches" (page 52). Preferably, you should utilize one of the two momentary switches, SW 1 or SW 9, so as to be able to revert control back to the teacher transmitter at any time: 8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9 11 12 TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach

n/a No pupil signal

Since at this stage of programming the wireless trainer system no connection yet exists to a pupil transmitter, the transmitter responds immediately to the switches closed during the switch assignment process with appropriate visual and audible warning notices. You should therefore re-open the switch you have just assigned:

8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9  11 12 TRAINER /Teach

Pupil Teach

n/a

Note: The switch assignment just described also determines the transmitter used to issue the teacher and pupil functions, respectively. For this reason, a pupil transmitter must NEVER be assigned a switch on this

menu. **The header line therefore also switches from "TRAINER /Pupil" to "TRAINER /Teach" once a**  **switch has been assigned.** Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, now move the marker frame to the right, to "BIND: n/a": 8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9  11 12 TRAINER /Teach

Pupil Teach

n/a

**Binding the pupil transmitter to the teacher transmitter** 

Note: During the bind process, the two transmitters should not be very far apart. You may fi nd you need to change the positions of the transmitters and then start the bind process again. Initiate the "BINDING" process from the pupil transmitter by tapping the center **SET**key on the right touch pad ...

8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9 

Binding –

11 12 TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach

... and repeat this immediately on the teacher transmitter:

8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9 

Binding 11 12 TRAINER /Teach

Pupil Teach

As soon as this process is complete, both screens will204 **Detail program description - Control adjust** show "ON" instead of the fl ashing "BINDING":

8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9 

ON –

11 12 TRAINER /Pupil

Pupil Teach

8 9 10 BIND: SW: 7 9 

ON 11 12 TRAINER /Teach

Pupil Teach

You can return to the basic display on both screens and start the training session after carefully checking all of the relevant functions. If neither transmitter or only one transmitter displays

" **ON** ", this means the binding process has failed: try changing the positions of both transmitters and then repeat the entire procedure. **Important notice: Check that the model aircraft is operational and**  **check that all functions issue the correct commands BEFORE setting up trainer mode.**  During the ... **Training session** ... the teacher and pupil can maintain a more "relaxed" distance from one another. The "reach of signal" (max. 50 m) should not be exceeded under any circumstances, however, nor should anyone else be standing between the teacher and the pupil, since these persons could reduce the connection range of the return channel used by the two transmitters. Furthermore, you should remember that the return channel assigned for wireless trainer mode functionality is normally used for telemetry connections: accordingly, it will not be possible to transmit any model telemetry data. In this operating mode, the basic display of the teacher transmitter is as shown below ...

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «Normal » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V P HoTT RF –Teach

... and the pupil transmitter's display will look something like this:

PUPIL #01

3:33h Stop Flt «normal » **K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 4.9 V HoTT RF –Pupil

If, however, the connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters should be lost during the training session, then the teacher transmitter will automatically assume control of the model. If the trainer mode switch is in the "Pupil" position when connectivity is lost, then the center LED on the teacher transmitter will fl ash blue/red while the signal is lost and audible warning signals will also be given. The basic display also displays the following warning notice: No pupil signal
If only the character string "HF –" starts fl ashing on the transmitter's basic display, however, and (quieter) audible warning signals are given, the pupil signal has still been lost, but the trainer mode switch is set to the "Teacher" position. In both cases, your fi rst step should be to reduce the distance between the two transmitters. If this does not help, then you should land immediately and establish the cause. If both transmitters are operational and the receiver system is switched off, then the teacher transmitter's basic display will show the "familiar" instead of the two icons . The antenna icon will also fl ash and an audible warning signal will sound twice per second. **Resuming trainer mode** If you switch off one or both transmitters during the session – for whatever reason – then the basic display of the transmitter(s) shows the following question after being switched back on:

Please select trainer link? ACT INH
If you either confi rm " **INH** " by tapping the center **SET** key on the right touch pad, or alternatively wait for approx. two seconds until the message disappears, then you will reset the transmitter in question back toits "normal" operating mode. You will then have to reestablish a connection between the teacher and pupil transmitters.205 **Detail program description - Control adjust** If, on the other hand, you use the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad to select " **ACT** " ...

Please selcet trainer link? ACT INH
... and confi rm this selection by tapping the center **SET** key on the right touch pad, then the existing teacher connection is restored. The same approach is used if the transmitter is confi gured as a pupil transmitter.206 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Using the arrow keys on the left or right touch pad, page to the menu option " **Tx. output swap** " on the multifunction list:

Dual mixer

Telemetry Basic settings Fail-safe adjust Teacher / Pupil Tx. output swap

Swashplate mixer

Telemetry Basic settings Fail-safe adjust Teacher / Pupil Tx. output swap

Briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad to open this menu option. **Tx. output swap** To achieve maximum fl exibility regarding receiver socket assignment, the mx-20 HoTT program offers you the option of swapping servo outputs 1 to 12 as you please. This option lets you distribute the transmitter's 12

" control channels" to any of the transmitter outputs 1 ... 12. If you do, you must remember that the **"Servo display"**  screen – accessible from almost any menu option by simultaneously tapping the  and  keys on the left touch pad – refers exclusively to the "control channels " as preset by the receiver socket assignment: it therefore does NOT take any output swaps into account. 

# Tx. output swap

Swapping the outputs on the transmitter

Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 Output Output Output Output TRANSMITTER OUTPUT

SEL
Use the arrow keys  on the left or right touch pad to select the channel/output combination that you wish to change and then briefl y tap the center **SET**key on the right touch pad. You can now use the right arrow keys to assign your selected (control) channel to the desired output, confi rming this with the **SET**key ...

2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SEL

6 Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch Tx Ch Output Output Output Output TRANSMITTER OUTPUT

... or, by tapping the arrow keys  or  on the right touch pad at the same time ( **CLEAR** ), you can restore the original assignment. Any subsequent changes, such as servo travel adjustments, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers etc., **must always be performed in accordance with the original**  **receiver socket assignment!** Example: In the mx-20 HoTT helicopter program, the outputs for a collective pitch servo and the throttle servo are swapped around, compared to some older GRAUPNER/ JR mc units. The throttle servo now occupies transmitter output "6" and the collective pitch servo output "1". Perhaps, however, you wish to retain the previous confi guration? In this case, you will swap over channels 1 and 6 as appropriate, so that (control) channel 6 is located on output 1 and vice versa – as shown above:

Note: The "Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) function integrated into the telemetry menu on the mx-20HoTT receiver can also be used to distribute up to 12 control channels from the transmitter to multiple receivers. The function can also be used to map the exact same control function to multiple receiver outputs: this can be used to confi gure two servo controls per aileron surface instead of just the one, for example, etc. To keep controls manageable, however, we strongly recommend using only one of the options at a time.207 **Detail program description - Control adjust**208 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Telemetry

The transmitter and receiver data as well as the data for optional telemetric sensors (see Appendix) can be viewed and programmed in the " **Telemetry** " menu. The receiver data is transmitted to the transmitter through the return channel integrated in the HoTT receiver. One telemetry sensor can be connected through the telemetry input to each of the receivers GR-12S HoTT (Order No. **33505** ), GR-12 HoTT (Order. No. **33506** ), GR-16 (Order. No. **33508** ) and GR-24 HoTT (Order. No. **33512** ). The corresponding " **Telemetry** " menus always keep these and future receivers up to date with the latest version and ensures enhancement with future functions or languages.

Note: After registering your product at https://www.graupner. de/de/service/produktregistrierung you are automatically informed of new updates.
**Important information:** This manual depicts the available functions at the • time of printing. As already indicated in the section "Connection • of multiple receivers" on page 69 and 74, multiple receivers can be connected as necessary for each model. **During the later operation, however, only the receiver which was activated in the line "TEL.**  **EMPF." of the "Telemetry" menu, is capable of establishing a telemetric connection to the**  **transmitter!** However, that also means the inverse, that only this receiver can be addressed through the Telemetry menu! If necessary, therefore, the selection must be changed before settings can be made on a specifi c receiver:

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV BIND. 1

**When adjusting the settings of the remote •**  **control, make absolutely sure that the transmitter antenna is always far enough away from the**  **receiver antennae! To be on the safe side, keep them at least one meter apart. Otherwise you**  **run the risk of a faulty connection for the return channel and malfunction as a result.**  Since the telemetric data between transmitter and • receiver is only exchanged after the fourth data package, the data transmission requires a certain amount of time for technical reasons, so the reaction to the operating keys and changes to settings take place with a delay. Therefore, the delay is not due to

an error. Programming on the model or on sensors may only • take place if the model is on the ground. Only carry out the settings with the motor switched off and the battery disconnected! Otherwise, undesired programming cannot be ruled out. For example, a servo test initiated accidentally could cause the model to crash and cause personal injury and/or property damage. Observe the safety instructions on pages 4-7 of this manual and the individual respective manuals. All settings (such as fail-safe, servo direction • reversal, servo travel, mixer and curve settings, etc.) made through the " **Telemetry** " menu are only saved in the receiver and, therefore, are adopted along with it in the course of the conversion of a receiver to a different model, if applicable. Therefore, to be on the safe side, re-initialize your HoTT receiver if you want to use the receiver in a different model; see "Reset" on page 43. Only program the servo direction reversal, servo • travel, mixer and curve settings through the mx-20

- specifi c standard menus " **Servo adjustment** " page 90, " **Dual Rate / Expo** " page 108 and 112, " **Channel 1 curve**  " page 116 and 119, etc. Otherwise, the settings superimpose one another, which can lead to complexity or even problems in the later operation. With the channel assignment function of the • Telemetrymenu integrated in themx-20 HoTT, control functions can also be assigned with distribution to multiple receivers or multiple receiver outputs can even be assigned with the same control function, such as the ability to activate two servos per aileron instead of only one individual servo, etc. **We also recommend exercising extreme during the**  **programming.**209 **Detail program description - Control adjust Telemetry**  The menus comprised under the heading " **Telemetry** " can be called up from the default display of the transmitter mx-20 HoTT by pressing the central **ESC** key of the left touch pad for approx. one second. The same menus can, like other menus of the transmitter, also be opened in the multifunction list by pressing the central **SET** key on the right touch pad:

Dual mixer

Basic settings Fail-safe adjust Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap Telemetry

Swashplate mixer

Basic settings Fail-safe adjust Teacher / pupil Tx. output swap Telemetry

**Basic operation** The operation of the " **Telemetry"** is essentially the same as that of the other menus of the transmitter mx-20 HoTT. The few differences are described in the following: You can switch between the individual pages of the Telemetry menu with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad. The corresponding directional indications can be found at top right of each display page in the form of angled brackets (<>); see the following fi gures. If only one angled bracket is visible, you are on either the fi rst or last respective page. In this case, changing pages is only possible in the indicated direction. Menu lines in which parameters can be changed are identifi ed with the aforementioned angled bracket (>). By pressing the arrow keys of the  of the left or right tough pad, the ">" pointer jumps one line forward or one line back. Lines which you cannot jump to cannot be changed. In order to change a parameter, briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad (the parameter is represented inversely), change the value within the permissible adjustment range with the arrow keys of the right touch pad and adopt the value by pressing the **SET** key again. By briefl y pressing the central **ESC** key of the left4-way pad, you return to the starting position. Now select the desired submenu with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad. However, if the message ...

CAN‘T RECEIVE

DATA

OK
... appears instead of the desired submenu after pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, no connection has been established to the receiver. Therefore, switch on your receiver system or, if applicable reconnect the addressed receiver as described on page 68 and 74 or activate it as described under "Important Notices" on the previous page. On the fi rst display page of the submenu overwritten with ...

**RX DATAVIEW**

... TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV rcv ch1

... no settings can be made. This page is only provided for information:

RX DATAVIEW

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C L PACK TIME 00010msec R-VOLT :05.0V L.R-VOLT:04.5V S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C
**Value Explanation** S-QUA Signal quality in % S-dBm Reception power in dBm S-STR Signal strength in % R-TEM. Receiver temperature in °C
L PACK TIME Indicates the time in ms in which the longest data package is lost during the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver R-VOLT Current operating voltage of the receiver in volts 

## SETTINGS/DISPLAYS210 **Detail program description - Control adjust** L.R-VOLT Lowest operating voltage of the receiver since it was last turned on, in volts SENSOR1 Indicates the values of the optional telemetric sensor 1 in volts and °C SENSOR2 Indicates the values of the optional telemetric sensor 2 in volts and °C **Signal quality (S-QUA)** The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent "live" over the return channel of the receiver to the transmitter and indicates the signal strength in %. **Reception power (S-dbm)** The reception power (S-dbm) is indicated with negative values, which means a value of zero is the maximum value (= best reception) and the lower the values are, the poorer the reception power! The range test before operation, among other things, is important for this.

Note: With negative numbers the evaluation of a number is reversed: The higher the number following the minus symbol, the lower the value is. Therefore, a reception power of -80 dBm, for example , is poorer than one with -70 dBm. Perform the range test as described on page 71 and 77 before each fl ight and, in doing so, simulate all servo movements which also take place during the fl ight. The range must be at least 50 m on the ground with the range test activated. At this distance, the value shown under "S-dBm" in the " **RX DATAVIEW** " display may not be greater than -80 dBm in order to guarantee safe operation. Your should never be operated with a lower value (e. g. -85 dBm). Check the installation of the receiver system and the position of the antenna. The reception power should not drop below -90 dBm during operation. Otherwise, reduce the distance of the model. Normally, however, the acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is triggered before this value is reached in order to guarantee safe operation. **Signal strength (S-STR)** The signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %. In general, an acoustic range warning (peep tone interval 1 s) is issued as soon as the receiver signal becomes too week in the return channel. However, since the transmitter has a signifi cantly higher transmission power than the receiver, the model can still be safely operated. For the sake of safety, the distance to the model should be reduced until the warning tone goes silent again. **Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)** Make sure that your receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all fl ight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C). The receiver temperature limit at which a warning is issued can be adjusted in the submenu " **RX SERVO TEST**  " under "ALARM TEMP+" (50 ... 80 °C and "ALARM TEMP" (-20 ... +10 °C). When the value is undercut or exceeded, an acoustic signal follows (continuous peep tone) and " **TEMP.E** " appears at the top right of all "RX" receiver submenus. In addition, the parameter " **R-TEM** " is shown inversely on the " **RX DATAVIEW**  " display page. **Data packages (L PACK TIME)** Indicates the longest time span in ms in which data packages are lost in the transmission from the transmitter to the receiver. In practice, that is the longest time span in which the remove control system has entered into fail-safe mode. **Receiver operating voltage (R-VOLT)** Always check the operating voltage of the receiver. Never operate or even start your model if the operating voltage is too low. The receiver low voltage warning can be adjusted between 3.0 and 6.0 volts in the submenu " **RX SERVO TEST**  " under "ALARM VOLT". If this range is undercut, an acoustic signal is issued (repeating double peep tone (long/short)) and " **VOLT.E** " appears at the top right of all " **RX** " receiver submenus.| In addition, the parameter

" **R-VOLT** " is shown inversely in the " **RX DATAVIEW** " submenu. The current receiver battery voltage is also displayed in the default display, see page 24. **Minimum receiver operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)** "L.R-VOLT" indicates the minimum operating voltage of the receiver since the last time it was switched on. If this voltage should deviate signifi cantly from the current "R-VOLT" operating voltage, the receiver battery may be too heavily encumbered by the servos. The consequence is voltage drops. In this case, use a more powerful voltage supply in order to achieve maximum operational safety.
**Sensor 1 + 2** Indicates the values of the optional telemetric sensors 1 and 2 in volts and °C, if applicable. A description of these sensors can be found in the appendix.211 **Detail program description - Control adjust RX SERVO** 

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF CENTER : 1500 μ sec TRIM : –000 μ sec LIMIT– : 150% OUTPUT CH: 01

LIMIT+ : 150% PERIOD : 20msec Before any programming on this display page, observance of the notices on page 208 is mandatory. **Value Explanation Possible**  **settings** OUTPUT CH Channel selection 1 ... depending on receiver
REVERSE Servo reversal OFF / ON CENTER Servo center in μs if active (inverse), dependent on control position TRIM Trim position in μs deviating from the CENTER position -120 ... +120 μs

LIMIT– Travel limit for % servo travel 30 ... 150 %

LIMIT+ Travel limit for % servo travel 30 ... 150 %

PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 or 20 ms
**OUTPUT CH (channel selection)** If applicable, select the line "OUTPUT CH" with the arrow keys. Press the **SET**key of the right touch pad. The value fi eld is shown inversely. Now set the desired channel (e. g. 01) with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. **The following parameters are always based on the channel set here.**  **Reverse (servo reversal)** Set the rotational direction of the servo connected to the selected servo channel: ON / OFF **CENTER (servo center)** The active value fi eld (inverse representation) in the "CENTER" line shows the current impulse time of the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line in μs. The displayed value depends on the current position of the control infl uencing this control channel and, if applicable, the position of its trimming. A channel impulse time of 1500 μs corresponds to the standard center position and thus the conventional servo center. In order to change this value, select the "CENTER" line and press the **SET**key. Now move the corresponding control, joystick and/or trim lever to the desired position and save the current control position by pressing the **SET**key again. This position is saved as the new neutral position. **TRIM (trim position)** In the "TRIM" line" you can carry out the fi ne adjustment of the neutral position of a servo connected to the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line using the arrow keys of the right touch pad in 1 μs increments. The value in the "CENTER" line can be adjusted by the TRIM value set here in a range of ±120 μs. Factory setting: 0 μs. **LIMIT–/+ (travel limit -/+)**This option is provided for the adjustment of a sidedependent limit (limiting) of the servo travel (rudder throw) of the servo connected to the control channel selected in the "OUTPUT CH" line. The setting for both directions takes place in a range of 30 ... 150 %. Factory setting: 150 % each. **PERIOD (cycle time)** In this line you determine the time interval of the individual channel impulse. This setting is adopted for all control channels. With the use of only digital servos, a cycle time of 10 ms can be set.. In mixed operation or with use of only analog servos, 20 ms should absolutely be set, because the latter can otherwise be "overstrained" and react with "shaking" or "quivering" as a result.
**RX FAIL SAFE**

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : HOLD F.S.POS. : 1500 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 01

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO POSITION : 1500 μ sec The description of this menus necessitates a few words of warning in advance: "Do nothing" is the absolute worst thing to be done in this regard. "HOLD" is prescribed in the base setup model of the HoTT receiver. In the event of a failure, in the best case scenario the model fl ies straight ahead for an indefi nite amount of time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without causing signifi cant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the212 **Detail program description - Control adjust** model may become uncontrollable and "tear" across the fl ight fi eld completely out of control, putting the pilot and spectators at risk. Therefore, it would obviously be benefi cial to program the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to prevent such risks. If necessary, seek the advice of an experienced pilot in order to fi ne a "logical" setting for your model. And then another brief notice regarding the three possible versions of the mx-20 HoTT transmitter for the setting of Fail Safe: The easiest, and recommended, way to fail-safe settings is the use of the " **Fail Safe** " menu, which can be reached from the multifunction list, see page 196. Similarly, in order to achieve the same result somewhat more laboriously, the "FAIL SAFE ALL" option described on the following pages is also available. In addition, there are the relatively elaborate methods of the of the individual adjustment using the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY". The description of these variants begins with the "MODE" option further below. **Value Explanation Possible**  **settings** OUTPUT CH Output channel (servo connection of the receiver) 1 ... depending on receiver

INPUT CH Input channel (channel coming from the transmitter) 1 ... 12 MODE Fail-Safe mode HOLD FAIL SAFE OFF F.S.POS. Fail-safe position 1000 ... 2000 μs
DELAY Reaction time (delay) 0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.00 s
FAIL SAFE ALL Save of the Failsafe Positions of all control channels NO / SAVE

POSITION Display of the saved Fail-safe position Between approx 1000 and 2000 μs

**OUTPUT CH (servo connection)** In this line you select the respective OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) to be set. **INPUT CH ( selection of the input channel)** As already mentioned on page 208, the control functions of the mx-20 HoTT transmitter can be arbitrarily distributed to multiple receivers, if necessary, or even assigned to multiple receiver outputs with the same control function. For example, this might be used in order to be able to control two servers for each aileron fl ap or an oversized rudder with linked servos instead of an individual servo. Distribution to multiple HoTT receivers, in turn, offers the advantage of not having to use a long servo cable, e. g. for large models. In this case, bear in mind that only the receiver selected in the line "TEL.EMPF." through the

" **Telemetry** " menu can be addressed! The 12 control channels (INPUT CH) of the mx-20 HoTT can be appropriately managed through so-called "Channel Mapping" (channel assignment) whereby a different control channel is assigned to the servo connection selected in the OUTPUT CH line for the receiver in the INPUT CH line. ATTENTION: If, for example, you have specifi ed "2AIL" for the transmitter side in the line "Aile/fl aps" in the " **Base setup model** " menu, the Control function 2 ( Aileron) is already distributed to the Control channels 2 and 5 for the left and right aileron . The corresponding INPUT CH of the receiver, which must also be mapped, would be the channels 02 and 05 in this case; see the following example. Examples: You would like to control each aileron fl ap with two or • more servos for a large model: You would like to control each aileron fl ap with two or • more servos for a large model: Assign one of the two standard aileron control channels 2 or 5 as INPUT CH to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections) depending on the left or right bearing surface. You would like to control the rudder with two or more • servos for a large model: Assign the same INPUT CH (control channel) to the corresponding OUTPUT CH (servo connections). In this case, this is the standard rudder channel 4.
**MODE** The settings of the options "MODE", "F.S.Pos." and "DELAY" determine the behavior of the receiver in the event of a failure in the transmission from transmitter to receiver. The setting programmed under "MODE" is always based213 **Detail program description - Control adjust** on the channel set in the OUTPUT CH line. The factory setting for all servos is "HOLD". For each selected OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver) you can choose between: FAI(L) SAFE • With this selection, in the event of a failure the corresponding servo moves to the position shown in the "POSITION" line for the remainder of the failure until the "Delay time" set in the "DELAY" line has lapsed. HOLD • With a setting of "HOLD", in the event of a failure the servo maintains the last correctly received servo position for the duration of the failure. OFF • With a setting of "OFF", in the event of a failure the receiver discontinues the retransmission of (temporarily stored) control impulses for the respective servo output for the duration of the failure. In other words, the receiver switches the impulse line "off". ATTENTION: Analog servos and even some digital servos no longer put up any resistance against the previous control pressure during the failure of the control impulse and are more or less pushed out of their position as a result. **F.S.POS. (Fail-Safe position)** For each OUTPUT CH (servo connection of the receiver), set the respective servo position, which the servo should assume in the event of a failure in "FAI(L) SAFE" mode, in the line "F.S.POS." after activation of the value fi eld (inverse representation) by pressing the **SET**key in the right touch pad and with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. The adjustment takes place in 10-μs increments. Factory setting: 1500 μs (servo center). **Important notice:** The function "F.S.POS." has an additional meaning in all three modes, "OFF", "HOLD" and "FAI(L) SAFE" in the event that the receiver is switched on, but (still) does not receive a valid signal. The servo immediately travels to the fail-safe position predefi ned in the "Position" line. In doing so, the landing gear, for example , is is prevented from retracting of the receiver is accidentally switched on while the transmitter is switched off. In normal model mode, on the other hand, the corresponding servo behaves in accordance with the set "MODE" in the event of a failure.
**DELAY (fail-safe reaction time or delay)** Here you adjust the delay time after which the servos should move to their predetermined positions in the event of a signal interruption. This setting is adopted for all channels and only pertains to the servos programmed to the "FAI(L) SAFE" mode. Factory setting: 0.75 s. **FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)** This submenu allows you to determine the fail-safe positions of Servos with a "push of a button" in a similar manner to the "Fail Safe" described on page **196**

. Switch to the line "FAIL SAFE ALL" and activate the value fi eld by pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. " **NO** " is represented inversely. Then adjust the parameter to " **SAVE** " with one of the arrow keys of the right touch pad. Now, using the operating elementsof the transmitter, move all servos to the desired failsafe position you assigned or want to assign in the line "MODE" "FAI(L) SAFE". The current position of the control for the channel which was just set is shown in the bottom "Position" line:

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1500 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670 μ sec FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE

After pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the display switches back from " **SAVE** " to " **NO** ". The saved the positions of all servos affected by this measure and adopted them in parallel to the line "F.S.Pos." and the display then immediately shows the following for the current OUTPUT CH (servo connection):

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1670 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670 μ sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

Switch off the transmitter and check the fail-safe positions based on the servo throws. **"Fail Safe" in combination with "Channel Mapping"** In order to ensure that the mapped servos – that is to say servos which are controlled from a common control channel (INPUT CH) – react the same way even in the event of a failure, the corresponding settings of the INPUT CH determine the behavior of the mapped servos!!!214 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Therefore, the servo connections 6, 7 and 8 of a receiver are mapped with one another, whereby the OUTPUT CH (servo connections) 06, 07 and 08 are assigned as INPUT CH of the same respective control channel "04"...

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : OFF F.S.POS. : 1670 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 06

POSITION : 1670 μ sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : OFF F.S.POS. : 1230 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 07

POSITION : 1670 μ sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : HOLD F.S.POS. : 1770 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 08

POSITION : 1670 μ sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

... the INPUT CH 04 determines the fail-safe behavior of these three servos connected to the control channel 4 completely independently of the individual settings of the respective OUTPUT CH: RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1500 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1500 μ sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

This is also the case, for example, if this is mapped with INPUT CH 01:

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01 MODE : FAI-SAFE F.S.POS. : 1500 μ sec DELAY : 0.75sec OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1500 μ sec FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

In this case, the servo connection 04 would, in turn, react according to the fail-safe settings of CH 01. The reaction or delay time set in the "DELAY" line, on the other hand, always applies uniformly for all channels set to "FAI(L) SAFE".

**RX FREE MIXER**

RX FREE MIXER

MASTER CH: 00 SLAVE CH : 00 S–TRAVEL–: 100 S–TRAVEL+: 100 MIXER : 1

RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE: NORMAL
**Value Explanation Possible settings** MIXER Mixer selection 1, 2 or 3 **Value Explanation Possible settings** MASTER CH Signal source or source channel 0, 1 ... depending on receiver SLAVE CH Target channel 0, 1 ... depending on receiver S-TRAVEL– Admix negative 0 ... 100 % S-TRAVEL+ Admix positive 0 ... 100 %
RX WING MIXER Tail unit type (TAIL TYPE) NORMAL, V-TAIL (V-LW) ELEVON (vertical/horizontal mixer for delta and fl ying wing)

**MIXER** Up to three mixers can be programmed simultaneously. Switch between Mixer 1, Mixer 2 and Mixer 3 through "MIXER". The following settings in this display always for just the mixer selected in the "MIXER" line. **Important notice: If you have already programmed mixer functions**  **in the "Wing mixer" or "Free mixer" menu, make absolutely sure that these mixers do not overlap**  **with those in the menu "RX FREE MIXER"!**
**MASTER CH ("from")** According to the same principles described in the section "Free mixer" on page 180, the signal applied at the MASTER CH (signal source or source channel) is mixed to a variable extent to the SLAVE CH (target channel). Select "00" if no mixer should be set.215 **Detail program description - Control adjust SLAVE CH ("to")**  The signal of the MASTER CH (source channel) is mixed proportionally to the SLAVE CH (target channel). The degree of mixture is determined by the percentages entered in the lines "TRAVEL–" and "TRAVEL +". Select "00" if no mixer should be set. **TRAVEL–/+ (proportion of the admix in %)** With the settings of these two lines the percentage of the admix is specifi ed in relation to the MASTER signal separately for each direction. **RX WING MIXER TAIL TYPE (tail unit type)** The following model types are also available in the "Tail" line of the " **Model type** " menu, page 82 and should, preferentially, be pre-set there. In this case, always leave the TAIL TYPE set to NORMAL. However, if you would prefer to use the mixer integrated in the receiver, you can select the already preadjusted mixer functions for the corresponding model type: **NORMAL •**  This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft type with rear tail unit and separate rudder and elevator. No mixing function is necessary for this model type. **V-TAIL (V-tail unit) •**  With this model type the elevator and rudder control functions are connected, so that each of the two tail unit fl aps – each controlled with a separate servo – assume both the elevator and rudder function. The servos are normally connected at the receiver as follows: OUTPUT CH 3: Left V-tail servo OUTPUT CH 4: Right V-tail servo If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 57. **ELEVON (delta/fl ying wing models)**  **•** The servos connect at the outputs 2 and 3 assume the aileron and elevator function. The servos are normally connected to the receiver as follows: OUTPUT CH 2: Left horizontal/vertical OUTPUT CH 3: Right horizontal/vertical If the servo's direction of rotation is incorrect, please observe the notices on page 57.
**RX CURVE**

RX CURVE

TYPE : B CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : B CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04

**Value Explanation Possible settings** CURVE1, 2 or 3 CH Channel assignment of the respective curve setting 1 ... depending on receiver

TYPE Curve type A, B, C see fi gure Expo = +100%–100%+100%0

–100% +100% 0 Expo = –100%

TYPE **A**–100%+100%0

–100% +100%

0 linear–100%+100%0

–100% +100% 0 TYPE **B** TYPE **C**

DR = 125% DR = 70%Servo travel

Control travelServo travel

Control travelServo travel

Control travel Normally a non-linear control function, if applicable, is used for the aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder (channel 4). These channel defaults also correspond to the factory settings. ATTENTION: This assignment only applies if "2HRSv3+8" is not specifi ed in the line "Tail Unit" in the " **Basic Settings** " menu and "2AIL" or 2AIL 2FL" is not specifi ed in the line "Ail./Flap"! Otherwise the control function 3 (elevator) which is already in the transmitter is split to the control channels 3 + 8 or the control function 2 ( aileron) is split to the control channels 2 + 5 for left and right aileron

. The corresponding control channels (INPUT CH) of the receiver in these two cases would be the channels 03 + 08 or 02 + 05. Therefore, if you have specifi ed "2AIL", for example, on the transmitter side and would like to utilize the option RX CURVE to be addressed here instead of the individually adjustable menu " **Dual Rate / Expo** ", page 108, of the transmitter mx-20 HoTT, two curves must be set:216 **Detail program description - Control adjust** RX CURVE

TYPE : A CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A CURVE2 CH : 05

TYPE : B CURVE3 CH : 04

Otherwise, the left and right ailerons have different control characteristics. With the RX CURVE function you can manage the control characteristics for up to three servos: **CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH •**  Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) of the fi rst servo. The following setting in TYPE only pertains to the channel selected here. **TYPE** Select the servo curve: **A** : EXPO = -100 % and DUAL RATE = 125 % The servo reacts strongly to movements of the joystick around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes fl atter. **B** : Linear setting. The servo follows the joystick movement linearly. **C** : EXPO = +100 % and DUAL RATE = 70 % The servo reacts weakly to the joystick movements around the neutral position. As the rudder throw increases, the curve becomes steeper.

Notice: The control characteristics programmed here also affect the mapped receiver outputs. **RX SERVO TEST**

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V TEST : STOP

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE
**Value Explanation Possible settings**
ALL-MAX Servo travel on the "+" side for all servo outputs for the servo test 1500 ... 2000 μs

ALL-MIN Servo travel on the "-" side for all servo outputs for the servo test 1500 ... 1000 μs

TEST Test procedure START / STOP
ALARM VOLT Alarm threshold of the receiver undervoltage warning 3,0 ... 6,0 V factory setting: 3.8 V

ALARM TEMP+ Alarm threshold for excessively high temperature of the receiver 50 ... 80 °C Factory setting: 70 °C

ALARM TEMP– Alarm threshold for excessively low temperature of the receiver -20 ... +10 °C Factory setting: -10 °C

CH OUTPUT TYPE Channel sequence ONCE, SAME, SUMI, SUMO **ALL-MAX (servo travel on the "+" side)** In this line you set the maximum servo travel on the plus side of the control travel for the servo test. 2000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs corresponds to the neutral position. Make sure that the servos do not overrun mechanically during the test routine. **ALL-MIN (servo travel on the "-" side)** You adjust the maximum servo travel on the minus side of the control path for the servo test in this line. 1000 μs corresponds to the full throw; 1500 μs corresponds to the neutral position.
**TEST** You start and stop the servo test integrated in the receivers in this line. By pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, you activate the input fi eld:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE TEST : STOP

With one of the arrow keys of the right touch pad, you now select **START** :

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE TEST : START217 **Detail program description - Control adjust** By pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad, you now start the test run. The input fi eld is shown as "normal" again:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUT TYPE:ONCE TEST : START

To stop the servo test, reactivate the input fi eld as described above, select **STOP** and confi rm this selection with the **SET**key of the right touch pad. **ALARM VOLT (receiver undervoltage warning)** The receiver voltage is monitored through ALARM VOLT. The interval can be adjusted between 3.0 and 6.0 Volt. If the set alarm threshold is undercut, an acoustic signal is issued (interval peep tone long/ short) and " **VOLT.E** " blinks in the top right of all " **RX ...** " displays:

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF CENTER : 1500 μ sec TRIM : –000 μ sec TRAVEL– : 150% OUTPUT CH: 01

TRAVEL+ : 150% PERIOD : 20msec VOLT.E

The parameter " **R-VOLT** " is also represented inversely in the " **RX DATAVIEW** " display: S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C L PACK TIME 00010msec

L.R-VOLT:03.5V S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C R-VOLT : 03.7 V

RX DATAVIEW VOLT.E

**ALARM TEMP +/- (recommended temperature monitoring)**  These two options monitor the receiver temperature. A lower threshold "ALARM TEMP-" (-20 ... +10 °C) and an upper threshold "ALARM TEMP+" (50 ... 80 °C) can be programmed. When these specifi cations are exceeded or undercut, an acoustic signal (continuous peep tone) sounds and " **TEMP.E** " appears in the top right of all receiver displays. In addition, the parameter " **R-TEM** " is shown inversely on the " **RX DATAVIEW** " display page. Make sure that your receiver remains within the permissible temperature range during all fl ight conditions (ideally between -10 and 55 °C). **CH OUTPUT TYPE (connection type)** Here you select how the receiver outputs are controlled. **ONCE •** 

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: ONCE
The servo connections of the receiver are controlled successively. This is recommended for analog servos. With this setting the servos are automatically operated in a cycle of 20 ms – with a 12-channel receiver (Order No. **33512** ) 30 ms – regardless of what is set or displayed in the "PERIOD" line in the

" **RX SERVO** " display! **SAME •** 

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SAME
The servo connections of the receiver are controlled in parallel in blocks of four. That means the channels 1 to 4, 5 to 8 and 9 to 12 each receive the control signals simultaneously. This is recommended for digital servos when multiple servos are used for one function (e.g. aileron), so that the servos can run absolutely synchronized. When only using digital servos, we recommend setting the "PERIOD" line of the " **RX SERVO** " to 10 ms in order to be able to utilize the fast reaction of digital servos. With the use of analog servos or in mixer mode, "20 ms" must be selected! **With this setting, pay particular attention to the suffi**  **cient dimensioning of the receiver current supply.**  Since up to four servos can always operate simultaneously, the requirement is higher. **SUMO (sum signal OUT) •** 218 **Detail program description - Control adjust** RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C TEST : START

CH OUTPUT TYPE: SUMO A HoTT receiver confi gured as SUMO permanently generates a so-called sum signal from the control signals of all of its control channels and provides this by default to the accompanying GR-24 receiver at servo connection 8. On receivers whose display shows "SUMO" at the top right, an additional two-digit number appears ...

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMO 08 ... the active fi eld changes after confi rmation of "SUMO" by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad for the channel selection. With this selection you specify the highest of the transmitter channels contained in the SUMO signal:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE:SUMO 08 You can confi rm the default by pressing the **SET**key of the right touch pad again or by selecting one of the other channels between 04 and 06 with the arrow keys and confi rming with **SET**

. The receiver outputs are controlled successively in a cycle of 20 ms (30 ms with the receiver GR-24, Order No. **33512,** ), even if 10 ms is set in the "PERIOD" line of the the " **RX SERVO** " display page. Primarily intended for the "Satellite mode" of two HoTT receivers, as described in the following, the generated sum signal defi ned by the receiver as SUMO can be used for the control of fl ight simulators; this is also the case for the control of fl yable systems, insofar as they have the corresponding input or the adapter cable with Order No. **33310**

. In ...
**Satellite mode** ... two HoTT receivers are connected to one another through a three-wire connecting cable (Order No. **33700.1** (300 mm) or **33700.2** (100 mm)) at receivertype-specifi c servo connections. Receivers of the type GR-16 and GR-24, for example, are to be connected with one another at servo output 8. More detailed information can be found on the internet at www.graupner.de. Through this connection, all channels of the HoTT receiver which was confi gured as SUMO and identifi ed as a satellite receiver are transmitted to the second HoTT receiver, the main receiver, which is to be programmed as ... **SUMI (sum signal IN) •**  Therefore, the signal always goes toward SUMI: RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000 μ sec ALL–MAX : 2000 μ sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C ALARM TEMP+: 70°C TEST : START

CH OUT TYPE: SUMI The receiver defi ned as SUMI, however, only uses the sum signal coming from SUMO in the event of a failure of receipt if at least one channel in SUMI is programmed to fail-safe. If the receiver programmed as SUMO satellite receiver has a failure of receipt, the servos connected to this receiver assume the fail-safe positions programmed in the satellite receiver completely independently of the main receiver. On the other hand, if a failure of receipt takes place with two receivers simultaneously, the receiver software current at the time of the printing of this manual falls back on the fail-safe settings of SUMO. In the individual case, however, interactions cannot be ruled out, **which is why we urgently recommend performing an appropriate test**  **BEFORE commissioning a model.** This receiver combination is recommended, if, for example , one of the two receivers is installed in the model at an unfavorable position for receiving or as a result of nozzles, carbon fi ber material or the like, there is the danger that the receipt signal is weakened due to the fl ight position, so that interruptions of the range must be taken into account. Therefore, make sure to connect the most important control functions to the main receiver programmed as SUMI, so that, in the event of a failure, the model219 **Detail program description - Control adjust** remains controllable when the SUMO satellite receiver no longer receives a signal. Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the onboard electricity supply, on the other hand, is only sent to the transmitter by the satellite receiver confi gured as SUMO. Therefore, telemetry sensors are to be connected to the satellite receiver (SUMO). Each receiver should be connected with its own supply line from the common voltage supply. With receivers with a high current load, it may even be benefi cial to connect them with two supply lines to the same current supply. On the other hand, if each of the two receivers should be supplied from its own voltage source, the center cable must be removed from one ofthe two plugs of the satellite cable; see fi gure. red

1

2 3

If you would like to carry out additional programming,such as fail-safe settings, disconnect the threepole satellite connection between the two receivers and switch on only the relevant receiver. It may be necessary to also change the connection sequence.220 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

## SENSOR SELECT

After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV rcv ch1

... and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the selected submenu opens:

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODUL ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

Here, after selection of the desired line with the arrow keys  of the left of right touch pad and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, activate ( ) or deactivate ( )the data output of the sensor connected to a receiver with active telemetry connection. It is only possible to select one sensor, e. g.:

SENSOR SELECT

RECEIVER GENERAL MODULE

VARIO MODUL ELECTRIC AIR.MOD

GPS

This selection is required to show the sensor in the " **VOICE TRIGGER**  " submenu and for the display of the telemetry data in the corresponding graphic displays, page 32.221 **Detail program description - Control adjust** After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV rcv ch1

... and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the selected submenu opens. This provides a visualization of the quality of the connection of transmitter and receiver:

R100%

SD 40

E 10 RD 51 4.8VC S 90%

4.8VM 0123456789ABCDE Top row: Reception power of the channels 1 ... 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the receiver to the transmitter. Bottom row: Reception power of the channels 1 ... 75 of the 2.4 GHz band in dBm coming from the transmitter to the receiver.

Comments: Since the reception power is measured and • represented in dBm, the reception power is increasingly worse the higher the bar is and vice versa; for this purpose, see also "Reception power (S-dBm)" on page 224. Mark the points above the columns with the poorest • 

## RF STATUS VIEW

reception power since switching on the transmitter or the resetting of the display by simultaneously pressing the keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR).** Additional fi gures are shown to the left of the graphic representation of the reception power. These mean: **Value Explanation** E Signal quality in % of the signal received from the receiver S Signal quality in % of the signal received by the receiver SL Reception power in dBm P Number of lost data packages of the receiver RL Reception power in dBM of the signal received by the receiver RS Current operating voltage of the receiver in volts RM Lowest receiver operating voltage since last startup, in volts222 **Detail program description - Control adjust** After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad ...

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW SENSOR SELECT RF STATUS VIEW VOICE TRIGGER TEL.RCV rcv ch1

... and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the selected submenu opens:

**REPEAT**

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 1SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER –––

––– VARIO

–––

In order to be able to start the voice output through the headphone connection, at the very least the "REPEAT" line must be assigned to a switch. The takes place as described in the section "Switch and control switch assignments" on page 52:

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 1SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER –––

––– VARIO

––– Move desired switch to ON position 

## VOICE TRIGGER

––– 3

––– VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER VARIO

With this switch you can have the last respective voice trigger repeated for the duration of the time set to the left of the switch, as long as the assigned switch is closed:
**TRIG** With a switch assigned to this line, preferably one of the two pushbuttons SW 1 or SW 9, switch to the next voice output in the rotation selected in the options "TRANSMITTER", "RECEIVER" and "SENSOR" as described in the following.

1 3

––– VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER VARIO

**VARIO** If you activate the "VARIO MODULE" line( ) in the

" **SENSOR SELECT"** submenu, described on page 220, you can use the headphone connection to activate a switch assigned to this line completely independently of the other voice triggers, in other words voice triggers triggered by changes in altitude, such as "Slow climb/ descent", etc. 1 3

8

SENSOR VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER VARIO

**TRANSMITTER**
After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad...

1 3

8

SENSOR VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER VARIO

... and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the selected submenu opens:

TX VOLT: MODEL TIME: BATTERIETIME:

TIMER(GE:)CENTER: TIMER(GE.)TOP:

TIME:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the data output of the selected voice trigger:223 **Detail program description - Control adjust** TX VOLT: MODEL TIME: BATTERIETIME:

TIMER(GE:)CENTER: TIMER(GE.)TOP:

TIME:

**RECEIVER**
After selection of the desired menu line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad ...

1 3

8

SENSOR VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER VARIO

... and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the selected submenu opens:

TEMP: STRENGHT: RX VOLT: LOWVOLT:

Here, after selection of the desired line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the selected voice trigger.
**SENSOR** This line only appears if a sensor was fi rst activated in the " **SENSOR SELECT** " submenu:

1 3

SENSOR 8 VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 5SEC TRIG

TRANSFER RECEIVER VARIO

If, for example, the " **VARIO** " sensor was selected, after selection of the "SENSOR" line and then pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the following display appears:

ALTITUDE: MAXALT: MINALT: VOLT MINIMUM:

As described in the left column, you can also activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the voice trigger of the desired line after pressing the central SET key of the right touch pad.

Notice: The selection made here is completely independent of the "VARIO" voice triggers.224 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Using the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll to the " **Basic Settings** " menu item of the multifunction

menu: Telemetry

info display Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock

By briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, this menu item opens:

Batterie type Batterie warning

Touch Sense Contrast

Ni-MH Display light

Region Voice volume 2 4.7V

0

Euro 3 unlim.

Beep volume 3 BASIC SETTINGS Own Stick mode 1 DSC Output PPM10 Pitch min back

Power-on beep yes

Power on warn. unlim

General basic settings are entered in this menu ... specifi c to the transmitter, such as the owner's name and defaults for new model memories. The settings saved in this menu in the lines ... "Stick mode", • "DSC Output", • "Pitch min" • ... have no infl uence whatsoever on already existing model memories; they are only defaults , which are automatically adopted to newly initialized model memories and can be changed there on an individually basis at any time in the " **Basic model settings** " and " **Helicopter type** " menus. A change to the "specifi cations" in this menu, therefore, only infl uences model memories created at a later time

. Notice: Settings in this menu are only assigned once for transmitters. After opening this menu in another model memory, therefore, the last valid settings always appear. Select the appropriate line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad and then press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. In the inverse value fi eld you can now change the respective specifi ed value with the arrow keys of the right touch pad and complete your entry by pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad or the **ESC** key of the left touch pad. **Own(er)**

H.J.Sandbrunner 1 PPM10 BASIC SETTINGS Own Stick mode DSC Output Pitch min back

Up to 15 characters can be used to specify the owner's name. Change to the next screen page ( ) by pressing the SET key of the right touch pad: !"#$%&’()+,–./012 3456789:;

Owner H-J Sand b FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`a b cdefghijk ?@ABCDE

Select the desired characters with the arrow keys of the left touch pad. Switch to the next position by briefl y pressing the arrow key  of the right touch pad of the **SET**key to be able to select the next character. A blank space can be entered by simultaneously pressing the keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR)**

. You can reach any arbitrary character position within the input fi eld with the  keys of the right touch pad. You return to the previous menu page by briefl y pressing the central **ESC** key of the left touch pad. **Stick mode (specifi cation)**  As a basic principle, there are four different ways to assign the four control functions, aileron, elevator, rudder and throttle or brake fl aps for winged models as well as rolling, pitching, tail rotor and throttle/pitch for helicopter models to the two joysticks. The model pilot determines which way to do so according to individual preferences. With the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad, select the **"** Stick mode **"** line. The selection fi eld is shown in a box: 

# General settings

Basic transmitter settings225 **Detail program description - Control adjust** H-J Sandbrunner 1 PPM10

SEL BASIC SETTINGS Own Stick mode DSC Output Pitch min back

Briefl y press the **SET**key. The current stick mode is shown inversely. Now, using the arrow keys of the right touch pad, select the alternative you use most frequently, from 1 to 4. In the future this will be used for newly initialized model memories, but can be changed on an individual basis for up to 24 model memories. After simultaneously pressing the keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ), the display returns to stick mode "1" By pressing the **SET**key again, you deactivate the selection fi eld in order to switch lines. **Winged model stick mode**

“ **MODE 2** ” (Throttle at left stick)

**“MODE 3”** (Throttle at right stick) **“MODE 4”** (Throttle at left stick) **“MODE 1”** (Throttle at right stick)

elev. down

elev. upleft rudderright rudder full throttle

idleleft aileronright aileron full throttleleft rudderright rudder

idle elev. down

elev. upleft aileronright aileron

elev. down

elev. upleft aileronright aileron Motor Vollgas

idleleft rudderright rudder full throttle

idleleft aileronright aileron elev. down

elev. upleft rudderright rudder **Helicopter model stick mode**

**“MODE 2”** (Throttle at left stick)

**“MODE 3”** (Throttle at right stick) **“MODE 4”** (Throttle at left stick) **“MODE 1”** (Throttle at right stick)

pitch axistail rotor

pitch axistail rotor throttlerollroll throttletail rotortail rotor

throttle throttle pitch axis

pitch axisrollroll

pitch axis

pitch axisrollroll Motor/Pitch

throttletail rotortail rotor throttle

throttlerollroll pitch axis

pitch axistail rotortail rotor

**DSC Output (specifi cation)** 
In the line with the same name in the " **Base setup model**  " menu you can determine which of the three available modulation types should be provided for the DSC socket separately for each model memory. This selection primarily infl uences the number of maximum control channels available at the DSC socket and thus for a fl ight simulator or LS system connected at this socket. With the selection of "PPM10", this is the channels 1 ... 5, with "PPM18" the channels 1 ... 9 and with "PPM24" the control channels 1 ... 12.

SEL 99sec DSC output PPM10 RF Range Test R12 R08 OFF BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL Rcv Ch Map RF transmit

In this "General settings" menu, you can determine which of the three possible "Modulation types" should be adopted as the default to a newly initialized model memory in the line "DSC Output" the same way as with "Stick mode". If necessary, using the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad, switch to the "DSC Output" line and, by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, activate the value window:

H-J Sandbrunner 1

SEL BASIC SETTINGS Own Stick mode DSC Output Pitch min back PPM10

Now you case choose between the three possible modulation types "PPM10", "PPM18" and "PPM24" using the arrow keys of the right touch pad. By pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad again, you complete the entry. Simultaneously pressing the keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) returns to "PPM10". **(Default) Pitch min** (only relevant for helicopter models) Enter your preferred actuation direction for the throttle/ pitch joystick analogously to the "Stick mode" and "DSC Output" options described above, in order to be able to fi nd it for newly initialized model memories in the future. The functions of all other options of the helicopter program depend on this setting, insofar as they pertain to the throttle and pitch function, in other words the throttle curve, idle trim, Channel 1  tail rotor mixer, etc. The following meanings apply:

" **front** ": minimum front pitch setting, the pitch joystick (C1) points away from the pilot.226 **Detail program description - Control adjust** " **rear** ": minimum rear pitch setting, the pitch joystick (C1) points towards the pilot. Simultaneously pressing the keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) switches to "rear"

Notice: The stick mode of the C1 joystick in the winged model program for "Throttle min front/rear" can be individual changed in the " **Model type** " menu.

**Contrast** In order to guarantee the optimal visibility of the display of the mx-20 HoTT in any weather and at any temperature, you can adjust its contrast:

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «normal »

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT

GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flt «normal »

**K78** 0:00 0:00

5.5V 5.2V M HoTT

For this purpose, using the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad, select the "Contrast" line: 1

SEL PPM10

0 Contrast BASIC SETTINGS Stick mode DSC Output Pitch min back

Then briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. Now you can adjust the display contract in a range of ±20 using the arrow keys of the right touch pad in the inverse value fi eld. Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) resets the inverse fi eld to "0". **Display light** In this line you can determine how long the backlight of the display should remain switched on after switching on the transmitter or the last key actuation. The available options are "unlim(ited), "30 s", "60 s" and "120 s". Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) sets the inverse fi eld to "unlimited". **Power-on beep** In this line you can switch the power-on beep of the transmitter on ("yes") and off ("no"). Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) switch the inverse fi eld back to "yes". **Battery type**

SEL 0

Ni-MH Battery type Contrast Display light unlim. BASIC SETTINGS

Power-on beep yes

In this line you indicate to the transmitter whether its power supply is provided from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo battery. Depending on this setting, you are offered a suitable voltage range in the (next) line "Battery warning". Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) switches back to "Ni-MH" in the inverse fi eld. **Battery warning threshold**

SEL Ni-MH

4.7V Battery type Battery warning Display light unlim. BASIC SETTINGS

Power-on beep yes

You can arbitrarily specify the warning threshold for the display ... battery needs charging
... – depending on the selection of the battery type in the line above it – in increments of 0.1 volt between 4.5 and 5.5 V (NimH battery) or 3.4 and 4.2 V (LiPo battery.227 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you still have suffi cient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning. Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) switches back to the factory default values 4.7 or 3.4 V in the inverse fi eld. **Power-on warning**

SEL Ni-MH

4.7V Batterie type Batterie warning BASIC SETTINGS Power-on beep yes

Power on warn. unlim

In this line you can determine how long the transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an operating element until the activation of an optical and acoustic power-on warning before the transmitter switches off automatically one minute later. The values "unlim(ited)", "30 s" and 1, 5, 10, 20, 30 and 60 minutes are optional selections. Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) switches to "unlimited" in the inverse fi eld.

Notice: In order to be able to restart the transmitter after automatic shut-off, slide the power switch of the transmitter fi rst towards the display, to the "OFF" position and, after approx. fi ve seconds, back towards the antenna to the "ON" position. **Touch sensitivity**

SEL Ni-MH

4.7V

2 Batterie type Batterie warning

Touch Sense BASIC SETTINGS

Power on warn. unlim

In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the touch pads in a range from 1 to 10. Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) resets to "2" in the inverse fi eld. **Region**

SEL 4.7V

2 Euro Batterie warning

Touch Sense Region BASIC SETTINGS

Power on warn. unlim

The region is needed for compliance with various regulations (FCC, ETSI, IC etc.). In France, for example, the operation of a remote control is only permitted within a limited frequency band. Therefore, the region setting of the transmitter **MUST be switched to "France" mode**  **as soon as it is operated in France** . In no case may the Universal/EURO mode be used in France! Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) resets to "Euro" in the inverse fi eld. **Voice volume**

SEL 2 Euro 3 Touch Sense Region Voice volume BASIC SETTINGS Power on warn. unlim

The volume of the voice output through the earpiece connection is defi ned in a range of "0" to "10" in this line. Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) resets to "3" in the inverse fi eld. **Beep volume**

SEL 2 Euro

3 3 Touch Sense Region Voice volume Beep volume BASIC SETTINGS

The volume of the transmitter's internal beep generator is defi ned in a range from "0" to "6" in this line. Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) resets to "3" in the inverse fi eld.228 **Detail program description - Control adjust**229 **Detail program description - Control adjust**230 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Servo display

Display of the servo position Scroll to the menu item " **Servo display** " of the multifunction menu using the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad:
Telemetry

info display Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock

By briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, you open this menu item. The visual display of the current servo positions, however, can be opened both by selecting this menu and by simultaneously pressing the keys  left touch pad directly from the base screen of the transmitter, as well as nearly all menu positions. By briefl y pressing the central **ESC** key of the left touch pad, you return to the respective starting point.

1 3 5 7



### + 0%

0% 9 11 0%

0% 2 4 6 8



### + 0% 0%

0% 0% 10 12 0% –100%

+100% +100%

The current position of a servo is displayed in a bar diagram between -150 % and +150 % of the normal path, in consideration of the control and servo settings, the dual-rate/expo functions, the interplay of all active linear and curve mixers, etc. 0 % corresponds precisely to the servo center position. This way, you can quickly check your settings without having to switch on the receiver. However, this does not absolve you from fi rst carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the fi rst operation of the model in order to eliminate errors! **For winged models the display takes place according to the following scheme:**  Bar 1 = Throttle/brake servo Bar 2 = Aileron or left aileron Bar 3 = Elevator Bar 4 = Rudder Bar 5 = Right aileron Bar 6 = Camber-changing fl ap (left) / free channel Bar 7 = Right camber-changing fl ap / free channel Bar 8 = Free channel / second elevator servo Bar 9 = Free channel / Left FL2 Bar 10 = Free channel / Right FL2 Bar 11 = Free channel Bar 12 = Free channel **... and with helicopter models:** Bar 1 = Pitch or roll (2) or pitch (2) servo Bar 2 = Roll (1) servo Bar 3 = Pitch (1) servo Bar 4 = Tail servo (gyro) Bar 5 = Pitch (2) servo / free channel Bar 6 = Throttle servo or speed controller Bar 7 = Gyro sensitivity / free channel Bar 8 = Speed regulator / free channel Bar 9 = Free channel Bar 10 = Free channel Bar 11 = Free channel Bar 12 = Free channel Notice: However, please note that the servo display is only • based on the original sequence of servos, so any switching of the outputs do not take place in either the " **Transmitter output** " menu or " **Receiver output** "

menu. The number of channels shown in this menu • correspond to the 12 control channels available in the mx-20 HoTT transmitter. The number of actually usable channels, however, depends on the receiver type as well as the number of servos connected to it and, therefore, may be considerably lower under certain circumstances. Use this display during the model programming, • because you can immediately check all settings on the transmitter. However, this does not absolve you from fi rst carefully testing all program steps, as well as on the model, prior to the fi rst operation of the model in order to eliminate errors!231 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Servo test

Function test of Servo 1 ... 8 Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to the menu item " **Servo test** " of the multifunction menu:
Telemetry

info display Basic settings Servo display

Code lock Servo test

By briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, this menu item opens:

SERVO TEST

act off 123 4 5 6 7 8 0.5s
Any of the inputs 1 ... 8 can be activated for the servo test by selecting with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and then briefl y pressing **SET**key of the right touch pad. As soon as you have set only one of the inputs 1 ... 8 to "active", the following notice appears at the bottom of the display screen:

123 4 5 6 7 8 0.5s CLR=act./deact. SERVO TEST

act off

Simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) would now start and stop the servo test for input "1", fo r example, with a cycle time of 0.5 s. To change the cycle time, select the time input fi eld with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. After activation of the input fi eld by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the movement cycle can be changed in 0.5 s increments between 0.5 s and 3.0 s using the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad. Briefl y pressing the central **ESC** of the left touch pad or the central **SET**key of the right touch pad completes the time presetting.

123 4 5 6 7 8 3.0s HLD = aktiviert SERVO TEST

act off

The "servo test" function started by simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) automatically control all servos as though the would simultaneously and permanently move the corresponding control back and forth between -100 % and +100 % in the set time. All active mixing and coupling functions in the respective model memory, therefore, are effective and the servos move within the specifi ed servo paths and servo delimitations. As soon as you have started the servo test by simultaneously pressing the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ), a window opens: 123 4 5 6 7 8 3.0s CLR=act./deact. Servo test act. SERVO TEST

act off

Simultaneously press the arrow keys  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) in order to end the test. **Important notice: The shut-off of the transmitter does not**  **automatically end an active servo test. Therefore, always stop a servo test manually BEFORE**  **SHUTTING OFF the transmitter, because the servo test is otherwise restarted after switching on the**  **transmitter again.**232 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Code lock

Locking of the multifunction list Scroll with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to the menu item ...
Telemetry

info display Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock

... of the multifunction menu. By briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, this menu item opens:
CODE LOCK Desired (new) secret number (_ )

SET 3 2 1 4

Access to the multifunction menu can be locked for unauthorized use by a four-digit secret code comprised of the numbers 1 to 4, which you enter according to the scheme shown in the display with the arrow keys of the left touch pad; for example :

(123_)

CLR 3 2 1 4 CODE LOCK Desired (new) secret number

As soon as you not enter the fourth number by pressing one of the other arrow keys of the left touch pad, the following notice appears in the display: 789 10 11 12 STO FAIL SAFE

Pos hold

DELAY : 0.25s
By briefl y pressing the central **ESC** key of the left touch pad, you confi rm the secret code and leave the menu

. By briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, on the other hand, you confi rm the active **CLR** fi eld in the bottom right in the display and thereby delete the number you entered

. **Make note of the secret code and keep it safe. Otherwise, the transmitter must be sent in to**  **Graupner Service for decoding.**  The lock becomes active the next time the transmitter is switched on. However, the control remains ready for operation. Calling the multifunction list and thereby a model change, for example, is no longer possible without entering the correct number combination:

(_ )

SET 3 2 1 4 CODE LOCK Desired (new) secret number

A renewed attempt following an incorrect entry is only possible after the lapse of a time-out. (123_)

CLR 3 2 1 4 CODE LOCK Desired (new) secret number Input error Time lock

**Deletion of the secret code** If the secret code should be deleted again at a later point in time, after opening this menu, immediately press the central SET key of the right touch pad **twice** :

(1234)

CLR 3 2 1 4 CODE LOCK Desired (new) secret number

The fi rst time you press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the secret code is deleted ( **CLR** ):

1.234

2048MB 2011/02/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s

1234MB firmware ver. date time SD-Card available

And the second time you press the key the empty input fi eld is confi rmed ( **SET** ). The display shows:233 **Detail program description - Control adjust** (123_)

SET 3 2 1 4 CODE LOCK Desired (new) secret number Memorise secret
  none

Now leave the menu by briefl y pressing the central **ESC** key of the left touch pad. **Leaving the menu without input of a secret code** You would like to leave the menu opened out of curiosity or by accident and have not pressed any other key. Therefore, the display appears as follows:

1.234

2048MB 2011/02/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s

1234MB firmware ver. date time SD-Card available

Press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad **once**

. The following display appears:

(123_)

SET 3 2 1 4 CODE LOCK Desired (new) secret number Memorise secret
  none

Now leave the menu by briefl y pressing the **ESC** key of the left touch pad. Tip: If you generally want to dispense with a programmer lock, you should, if applicable, remove this menu from the multifunction list with " **Suppress menus** " so that unauthorized persons cannot enter a secret code "on the sly".234 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Info display

Transmitter ID, date, time and memory card With the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad, scroll to the menu item ...
Telemetry Basic settings Servo display Servo test Code lock info display
... of the multifunction menu. Briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad opens this menu:

RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card available 1.234

0MB

0% ABCDEF12

2011/08/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s 0MB

Transmitter-specifi c information is shown in this menu and – insofar as necessary and benefi cial – also changed. Select the appropriate line with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad and then briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. In the inverse value fi eld you can now change the respective default value – insofar as possible and necessary – with the arrow keys of the right touch pad and complete your entry by pressing the central **SET**key again. **RFID**

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12

2011/08/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

The RF identifi cation number of the transmitter is shown in this line. It is transmitter-specifi c, is only issued once per transmitter and cannot be changed. During the connection process, this is sent to the receiver, among other things, so that it is always capable of identifying the radio signals of "its" transmitter.

**Firmware Version**

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12

2011/08/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

The current version number of the transmitter software is shown in this line. Through a comparison of the number shown here with the update version offered on the internet download page of the corresponding product under www.graupner. de, you can determine whether a current update of the transmitter operating system is available. If applicable, the version number is also required for inquiries with the service department. **Date**

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12

2011/08/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

If necessary, select this line with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and, if applicable, the month or date fi eld. After activation of the respective value fi eld by pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the year, month or date can be set with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. Pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad again completes the respective entry. Years ranging from 2000 to 2135 are available. The abbreviated day of the week to the right outside in brackets is automatically generated from the respective date.

Notice: If the transmitter is connected to a PC as described • on page 39, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product on the internet page at www.graupner.de. The date and time are protected against data loss • due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 15.235 **Detail program description - Control adjust Time** 

1.234

0MB ABCDEF12

2011/08/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

If necessary, select this line with the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad and the minute fi eld, if applicable. After activation of the respective value fi eld by pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the hour or minute can be adjusted with the arrow keys of the right touch pad. Pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad again completes the respective entry. Contrary to this, the seconds display cannot be directly adjusted; it can only be restarted by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad with "00".

Notice: If the transmitter is connected to a PC as described • on page 39, the date and time can also be set through the PC program provided for the respective product on the internet page at www.graupner.de. The date and time are protected against data loss • due to power failure by a buffer battery for situations like a battery change, see page 15. **SD card**

1.234

2048MB ABCDEF12

2011/08/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s RFID firmware ver. date time SD-Card

In this line the memory capacity of a memory card inserted in the transmitter, if applicable, is shown in MB. Depending on the memory capacity of the inserted micro SD or micro SDHC memory card, it may take several minutes until the correct value is shown after switching on the transmitter.

**available**

1.234

2048MB 2011/02/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s

1234MB firmware ver. date time SD-Card available

Display of the available storage space in MB. As mentioned before, the display of the available storage space – depending on the capacity of the inserted memory card – does not appear until some time has passed after switching on the display. The display of the available storage space in relation to the total memory capacity is shown in the line below: 2048MB 2011/08/01(Mo ) 11:22:33s

1234MB 60% date time SD-Card available

As mentioned before, the display of the available storage space – depending on the capacity of the inserted memory card – does not appear until some time has passed after switching on the display.236 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# mx-20 **HoTT programming** Preparatory measures based on the example of a winged model

**Programming models in an** mx-20 **HoTT ... ... is easier than it may appear at fi**  **rst!** The basic requirement for "clean" programming, however, and this applies not only to the mx-20 HoTT, but basically to all programmable transmitters, is the mechanically correct installation of all remote control components in the model! Therefore, it should be ensured no later than on connection of the linkages that the servos are in their respective neutral position and their rudder lever is also in the desired position. Otherwise you should loosen the rudder and re-fasten it with an offset of a few lobes. If, in the process, the servos are moved into position using a servo tester, such as the RC-Tester with Order No. **2894.12** , the "correct" position can be determined very easily. The possibility of changing the neutral position of a servo in practically every modern transmitter is only intended for the fi ne-tuning . Greater deviations from "0" can result to further asymmetries in the course of the further signal processing in the transmitter. In the same manner: A car with a bent chassis does not get any straighter if only the steering wheel is trimmed to "straight"! An additional important point is the adjustment of the rudder paths: This should take place through a corresponding adjustment of the steering points, insofar as possible. Ultimately this is far more effi cient than extensive efforts with the path adjustments in the transmitter! In this case: Path adjustments serve fi rstand foremost for to compensate for the manufacturerstipulated tolerances for the servos and their fi ne-tuning

, and less for the compensation of carelessness. If two separate aileron servos are used for a winged model, the ailerons, controlled through the corresponding activated wing mixer – see the following pages – can be assigned with both the fl ap function and raised with the brake fl aps – however this would make more sense in a glider or electro glider than in a motor model.

In this case the rudder arms – starting from the neutral position – should be tilted forward one lobe, pointing toward the nose, set to the respective servo. The mechanical differentiation achieved through this asymmetric assembly contributes to the fact that the brake effect of the elevated ailerons increases with their defl ection and, therefore, does not normally require a greater path upward than downward. Correspondingly, when planning to operated separately controlled fl ap servos, they should also be integrated into a crow system. Since the brake effect of this fl ap position referred to as a "crow position" is infl uenced less by the elevated ailerons than the downward defl ection of the fl aps, the rudder arms should be installed somewhat toward the rear in this case, tilted toward the trailing edge. As a result, there is a greater available path for the downward defl ection. With such a combination of lowered fl aps with raised ailerons, however, the latter should only be elevated moderately, because they have more of a stabilizing and controlling function than a braking function in this type of crow system. A "tip" for seeing the brake effect in this connection: Spread the fl aps and look above and below the surface from the front. The greater the projected surface of the protruding rudder, the greater the brake effect.

Outboard ailerons

Inboard camber-changing flaps

(Eine ähnlich asymmetrische Montage der Ruderarme kann z. B. an Spreiz- bzw. Landeklappen auch in einem Motormodell sinnvoll sein.) If a model is completed and mechanically attuned in this respect, you can basically begin with the programming of the transmitter. The following examples, an attempt is made to follow the practice of fi rst describing the general basic settings and then fi ne-tuning or specializing them in the subsequent steps. After the initial fl ight and over the course of the further fl ying in of a model, it may be necessary to occasionally adjust some of the settings. As a pilot's experience increases, however, so does the desire for enhancements and expansions of settings. For this reason, the sequence of options is not always adhered to or some options are even mentioned multiple times. Of course, just the opposite can also be the case, that not everyone of the described steps is relevant for a certain model, just as some users may miss the description of a certain step for their model ...237 **Detail program description - Control adjust** whatever the case may be, you should consider a logical assignment of the control mechanisms before you begin with the model programming. For models in which the emphasis is on the "motor", regardless of whether it is powered by an electric or combustion motor, there should be no problem in this respect, because the assignment of the two joystick units essentially lies in the four basic functions "Power regulation (= throttle)", "Side", "Altitude" and "Transverse"! However, in the menu ... **"Model type"** (beginning 82)

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL
... you should determine whether you would like the minimum throttle position in the "front" or "rear", because "none (motor)" is entered by the program in the creation of a model memory as a basic principle. The difference between "no" and "idle front/rear" is not only in the effect of the C1 trimming, which is over the entire joystick path with "none" and with "idle front/ rear" only effects the idle direction. In the process, the "effective direction" of the C1 joystick is adapted accordingly, so that with a change from "front" to "rear" or vice versa, the rotational direction of the throttle servo or brake system do not have to be adapted as well. In addition, with an "idle front/rear" setting, a warning indication appears in the display for safety reasons and issues a warning beep, if the throttle joystick is too far in the full-throttle direction: GRAUBELE #01

2:22h Stop Flug

**K78** 0:00 0:00

0.0V 50% 5.2V M HoTT Throttle too high!

In any case, you will also have to consider "special functions". With electro gliders, on the other hand, it is only occasionally different. In this regard, one must ask how the drive and brake system are actuated. Certain solutions have shown to be practical and others have shown to be less practical. For example, it is certainly less practical, if you have to release a joystick for the approach of a glider model in order to be able to appropriately control the spoilers or a crow position using one of the other controls. It may be more advantageous to either design the function of the C1 joystick to be switchable (see Example 4, beginning on page 247) or to leave the control of the brake system at the joystick and to control the motor through one of the other controls or even with a switch! Since this type of model does not normally have a motor, and just a "start assistance" function to either "lift" the model in the sky with full force or, in any case, to "tow" it with "half" force by a wind fi eld, Therefore, the motor can be switched on and off without having to release one of the joysticks – even in the approach. The selection is not diffi cult with the mx-20 HoTT transmitter. For the control of the motor you use a two-stage switch SW 3 or 8 or, even better, one of the two three-stage switches CTRL 9 or 10. In any case, select a switch which you can reach easily in order to perform this option without having to release the joystick. In addition, this procedure should take place on the transmitter side, which is modifi ed for a holding hand with a manual start of the model. In other words: If the model is started from the right hand, the motor switch should be assigned to one of the switches available on the left side and vice

versa. The idea is the same for the control of fl aps, regardless of whether only ailerons or fl aps covering the entire wingspan (combinations) are raised or lowered. If everything is now in order, you can begin with the programming.238 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Initial steps for the programming of a new model Example: Winged model with two ailerons and – initially – without motor propulsion

In the scope of the **initial commissioning of a new transmitter,**  in the selection menu ... **"General settings"** (page 224)

Batterie type Batterie warning

Touch Sense Contrast

Ni-MH Display light

Region Voice volume 2 4.7V

0

Euro 3 unlim.

Beep volume 3 BASIC SETTINGS Own Stick mode 1 DSC Output PPM10 Pitch min back

Power-on beep yes

Power on warn. unlim H-J Sandbrunner

... some basic information should be entered. This serves various purposes: In this menu the name of the owner can be entered and defaults can be entered for new model memories in the lines " **Stick mode** ", " **DSC Output** " and **Pitch min**  ". These are then adopted on the activation of a new model memory in its basic settings, but can be changed there at any time. In the " **Contrast** " line, as an alternative to the line with the same name in the " **Hidden mode** " menu, page 28, you can adjust the display contrast by changing the standard default "0" in a range of ±20. The setting in the " **Display light** " line determines how long the display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on or after the last key actuation. With the selection of "yes/no" in the " **Power-on beep** " you can determine whether the "Recognition melody", which sounds when switching on the transmitter, is switched on or off. In the " **Battery type** " line you indicate to the transmitter whether its power supply comes from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-cell LiPo- battery and in the " **Battery warning**  " line you can determine the corresponding switching threshold for the battery warning on an individual basis. Make sure that you do not enter a value which is too low, so that you do not have suffi cient time to safely land your model in the event of a battery warning. In the " **Power-on warning** " line, you can determine, as necessary, how long the transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an operating element until the activation of an optical and acoustic power-on warning, whereas the settings in the lines " **Touch sensitivity** ", " **Voice volume**  " and " **Signal volume** " are provided for personal comfort. On the other hand, the setting in the " **Region** " is anything but a matter of taste and is determined by statutory regulations: **Therefore, when in France, only commission the transmitter with the "France"**  **setting.** You can leave this menu after completion of your "General settings" with the central **ESC** key of the left touch pad to return to the multifunction list. For the programming of a new model, now use the arrow keys of the left or right touch pad to switch to the

menu ... **"Select model"** (page 63) ..., and with the select a free model memory location with the arrow keys of the right or left touch pad:

03 04 05  free  02 01

06 R12

 free   free   free   free 

Immediately after pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad for the confi rmation of this selection, the type of model to be programmed is requested: Select model type

Since we want to work with a winged model in this section, the symbol for a winged model is confi rmed by pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. The display switches back to the base screen.
Notice: Of course, you can also use the predefi ned default • "winged model" supplied with the receiver as model memory 01 for the programming of your fi rst model. Once the "Select model type" option has been • opened, the process can no longer be canceled! Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must be made! In any case, you can undo this by subsequently deleting the respective model memory.239 **Detail program description - Control adjust** If the battery voltage is too low, you cannot switch • models for safety reasons. A corresponding message appears in the display:
not possible now voltage too low
Once this fi rst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the receiver built into the model to this model memory can be made in the menu ... **""Basic model settings"** (page 68 ... 73) . For this purpose, switch to the line " **RF bind** ":

1 n/a n/a

BD1 GRAUBELE

BD2 RF transmit n/v OFF Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Notice: After confi rmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you confi rm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds ...

BIND N/A OK
... by pressing the **SET**key of the right touch pad, you automatically come to this line. In this line you delete the connection process between model memory and receiver, as described in detail on page 69. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver. Afterwards, using the arrow keys  of the left or right four-way pad, move up to the fi rst line and begin with the actual model programming in the " **Mod. Name** " line:

1 n/a

BD2 BD1 n/a R12 bind Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map

Now enter the " **Model name** " here by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad to switch to the character map:
!"#$%&’()+,–./012 3456789:;

Mod Name GRAU B FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@A B CDE

If applicable, the defaults adopted from the " **General settings**  " menu for **"Stick mode"** and **"DSC output"** are also checked and changed as necessary. In the menu ... **"Model type"**

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL
... the principle arrangement of the servos in the model is selected and communicated to the transmitter. The following selections are available: **"Motor at C1"** "none" • Trimming works independently of the joystick position and the "Brake settings" submenu of the " **Wing mixers**  " menu, beginning on page 146, is available without limitation. The "Throttle too high" warning message, see page 36 and/or 61, and the "Motor stop" option are deactivated

. "(Idle) front or rear" • C1 trimming is affected in the front or rear and the "Motor stop" option is activated

. If the throttle joystick is too far in the full throttle direction when switching on the transmitter, this is indicated to you with the warning message "Throttle too high". In parallel to this, the "Brake settings" submenu of the " **Wing mixers** " menu, beginning on page146, is only available if "none" is entered in the "Motor" column for the currently active fl ight phase in the

" **Phase settings** " menu, page 128. In the next two lines, the principle arrangement of the servos in the model is selected and communicated to the transmitter:

+100% SEL Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 1AIL

M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1

**Tail type** : "Normal", "V-ta(il)", "Delta/fl " or "2ELSv3+8"240 **Detail program description - Control adjust** " **Aile/fl aps**  ": 1 or 2 AIL servos and 0, 1, 2 or 4 FL

servos Since we want to actuate the brake system of the "Brake settings" submenu under the " **Wing mixers** " menu with the C1 joystick, we will leave the setting to the outer right in the " **Brake off** " set to "Input 1". With the "Offset value" to the left of this, you should only place the mixer neutral point at the point where the brake system is retracted or inactive. If, in the process, the offset is not place completely at the end of the control path, the rest of the path is "idle travel", which means the mixer is not infl uenced in this range of the joystick movement. By now, the servos should be plugged into the receiver in the standard Graupner sequence:

Receiver power supply

Free or left aileron 2 or aux. function Rudder

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or 1st elevator Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron or aux. function Flap or left flap Right flap or free or aux. function

Comments: If a V-tail unit should move incorrectly either "high/ • low" or "left/right", please observe the information in the table on page 57 in the right column. The same process applies for the ailerons and fl aps. The settings described in the following are based on • a model with "normal" tail unit and "none (motor)". The settings are adopted for models with a V-tail with practically no changes at all. However, the transfer of this information is not so simple for delta/fl ying-wing models. Therefore, a special programming example for this model type is provided on page 272. In the menu ... **""Servo setting"** (page 90)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

... the servos can now be adapted to the requirements of the model for " **Rotational direction** ", " **Neutral position**  ", " **Servo travel** " and " **Travel limit** ". In this sense, all settings which serve for the compensation of the servos and minor adaptation to the model are "necessary".

Notice: The maximum possible throw of a Graupner servo • is 150% per side, based on both mechanical and electrical reasons. For example, if the the sum of the values of the columns "Center" and "Servo travel" exceed this limit, the respective servo can no longer follow the control commands starting from this point. Therefore, please bear in mind that the mixer and settings in the " **Dual Rate / EXPO** " menu also have an infl uence on the servo travel. The settings options provided in this menu for • asymmetric servo travel do NOT serve for achieving differentiations for ailerons and/or fl aps. There are options better suited for this purpose in the **"Wing mixers"**  menu. In the last column, " **Lim. +** ", the basic settings can and should be taken back signifi cantly from 150% in each

case. The values entered in this position act as a quasi "limiter", whereby the setting is actually for which point of travel the respective servo may not exceed, so that it does not start up mechanically and thus unnecessarily draw current. In this case the End of the available mechanical play on the servo, rudder and/or steering is crucial for the value to be set. An example of this would be the selection of a model with cruciform tail, with which the rudder moves in a wedge-shaped cutout of the elevator. In order to prevent the rudder on the elevator starting up and possibly blocking it, the travel is normally mechanically adjusted (at the linkage) so that the rudder does not start with the full throw of the joystick. As long as the rudder is only controlled with the corresponding joystick, there will not be any further problems with this. Currently, however, in addition to the normal rudder signal a mixer infl uences the rudder, such as an "AI  RU" mixer (aileron to rudder), and the two signals can combine to have an excessive effect. A correctly set limit of travel intercedes precisely at this point and thus reliably prevents the mechanical starting of the rudder. The limit of travel should, however, not be too small, so that the rudder throw is permanently and excessively limited. Of course, the travel on both sides could, of course, also be reduced to the that a start-up would not even occur with an addition of the maximum values. With this method, however, the prevention of an actually occurring event would result in a permanent reduction of the normal rudder throw.
The241 **Detail program description - Control adjust** menu ... **"Joystick setting" is not only interesting for pilots of models with motors.**  (page92)

Ch.1 Aile Elev

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Rudd 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL GL

St In addition to the generally interesting adjustment of the increments in the column St" (number of trim increments for each "Trim lever click") of the digital trimming – separately adjustable for each of the four trim levers – in the case of the (later) programming of fl ight phases in the second column of this menu you can select whether the trimming of transverse, altitude and side should work "globally" in equal measure over all fl ight phases or separately in each (fl ight) "phase". The "Time" column, on the other hand, is not of interest for this initial programming. With the previous settings, you can basically fl y winged and motor models – the latter if you have set the idle joystick direction correctly in the "Motor at C1" of the **"Model type"** . However, the "fi ne-tuning" is still missing. The fi ne-tuning certainly adds to the enjoyment of fl ying over the course of time. Therefore, if you can already fl y your model safely, you should delve into the

menu... **"Wing mixer"** (page 146 ... 163) ... where various options are available depending on the specifi cations made in the **"Model type"** menu, page 82. Since in this section we are dealing with a model with only two servos in the wings, the Multi-fl ap menu beginning on page 157 is not shown.

Aile.diff. Brake settings 0% AI 0% WING MIXERS

EL AI 0% 0% –––

––– RU

normal
Therefore, we will begin with the submenu ...

BRAKE SETTINGS

normal normal off

If this display appears, you model is equipped with a motor, contrary to the assumption of this section, and therefore you have selected "front/rear" instead of "none" in the line "Motor to C1" of the " **Model type**  " menu, page 82. Therefore, change this setting temporarily or change the "yes" entry in the "Motor" column of the " Phase setting " menu, page 128 to "no" for the currently active fl ight phase

**–** Phase 1 in this

case.

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name motor Pha4 Pha5  normal Start Strecke

–

– yes yes yes yes

no

–

–

... Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

WK WK2 normal

After this statement about mutual dependencies, back to the topic: If the ailerons should be elevated for braking, an appropriate value is then entered in the " **Crow** " line after activation of the value fi eld of the "AILE" column. In addition, a value should always be entered in the line below it, " **D.red.** " (differentiation reduction), which corresponds to the value you entered or would like to enter on the fi rst page of the " **Wing mixers** " menu in the line "Aile.diff." (see fi gure above)! With this entry, on actuation of the brake joystick, the set aileron differentiation is hidden again proportionally in order to increase the downward the throw of the raised ailerons and thus signifi cantly improve its effect in the braking phase. A setting of the " **Elevat curve** " mixer is then only necessary if the fl ight speed of the model changes too dramatically on actuation of the brake system. In any case, you should try out the setting at a suffi cient and readjust, if necessary, whereby you should focus less on the fl ight position than on maintaining the "normal" fl ight speed of the model. Otherwise there is the risk that the model plunges when engaging the brake system, because it became too slow in the meantime:242 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Input Output Point 1 –19% –6% –7% Brake

Normal EL Curve on

After exiting the "Brake settings", the " **Aileron differentiation**  " can be set: This serves to eliminate the negative torque. The downward defl ected aileron normally generates a higher level of resistance during the fl ight than when defl ected upward the same distance, whereby the model is pulled to the "wrong" side. In order to prevent this, with the input of a differentiation of the travel of the respective servo defl ected downward is reduced accordingly. A value between 20 and 40 %, in this case, seldom arises, however, the "correct" setting must be sought. The option " **AI**  **RU** " (Aileron  rudder) also serves a similar purpose, as well as for the comfortable control of a model. A value around 50 % is a practical value to start with. However, this function should be made switchable with the assignment of a switch if you ever have aerobatic fl ight ambitions. (The author, for example, switches off this mixer "automatically" when switching to the "Speed" fl ight phase, in which he assigns both options to the same switch accordingly.) The last option of the " **Wing mixers** " menu, "EL  AI" mixer, is not currently of interest. If the model-specifi c settings were made thus far, the initial start can be considered. If course, at fi rst you should perform a "dry run", meaning you should carefully check all the settings once again on the ground. Incorrect programming can damage more than just the model! In case of doubt, ask the advice of an experienced model pilot.

If you should fi nd during the testing that one or multiple settings must be made for the adjustment of the rudder effects to your control habits, the control throws are too long or short on the whole, you should adjust this in the ... **""Dual Rate / Expo" menu** (page 108) ... to your own requirements and habits. With " **Dual Rate** " the relationship of the joystick travel to control travel is adjusted, see page 108:

100%

100% 100% Ail Ele Rud DUAL –––

–––

–––

SEL

On the other hand, if the maximum throws are OK and only the reactions around the center position are to strong for more sensitive controls, then the "exponential" functions comes (additionally) into play:

0%

0% 0%

EXPO –––

–––

–––

SEL Ail Ele Rud

If a switch is also assigned, switching can even take place between two dual-rate/expo settings during the fl ight. This is similar for the option ... **"Channel 1 curve"** (page 116)

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% C1

normal Curve Curve off

With this option, one or multiple points of the control curve of the throttle/brake joystick can be infl uenced in such a way that a pleasant or even purposeful behavior is guaranteed. An example of this would be the "dead" travel of spoilers. The fl aps fi rst pass through this after a certain "idle travel" of the brake joystick from the wing. With a corresponding "bending" of the curve, the "dead' travel is covered more quickly. The spoilers come out from the wing earlier and then the remaining travel can be controlled with greater sensitivity. (This also applies for the control of a motor in the same manner, which can be controlled through C1 as an alternative.)

After this, you must defi ne the behavior of the receiver in the event of a failure in the ...243 **Detail program description - Control adjust "Fail safe" menu**  (page 196)

FAIL SAFE

Pos hold 123 4 5 6 DELAY : 0.25s STO
... because "doing nothing" is the worst thing which can be done for a winged model. In the transmitter's home position, "Hold" is specifi ed and "Hold" means that the receiver continuously sends the last correctly recognized control impulse to the servos in the model. In the best case scenario the model fl ies straight ahead for an indefi nite amount of time and then hopefully "lands" somewhere without causing signifi cant damage! However, if something like this happens in the wrong place at the wrong time, the model ma y become uncontrollable and "tear" across the fl ight fi eld completely out of control, putting the pilot and/ or spectators at risk. Therefore, it would obviously be benefi cial to program the the function "Motor off" at the very least, in order to prevent such risks. With electro gliders, on the other hand, the fail-safe setting "motor off" can also be used, for example, for outlanding, to reliably stop the motor or its propeller by immediately switching off the transmitter after the landing. The author usually prefers a "braking fi nish" within eyeshot to fl oating off "somewhere else".244 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Integration of an electric drive into the model programming

An electric drive can be controlled in different ways: The simplest method to integrate one such drive into the model programming is with the use of a throttle/ brake joystick (C1). However, since this is already specifi ed for the brake system in the course of the model programming described above, either the switchable solution described beginning on page 247 or even the use of an alternative control is possible. As such, one of the two three-stage switches CTRL 9 or 10 is better suited than the proportional rotary control CTRL 6 ... 8. (Unlike rotary controls, switches can be operated with one fi nger without having to release the joystick). An alternative would also be one of the two-stage switches. Basically, the switch should be positioned conveniently within reach. Before we turn to the individual examples, it is important must be noted that all inputs in the **Control adjust**menu can be selectively programmed as fl ight-phase specifi c ("PH" in the "Type" column) or model memory specifi c ("GL" in the "Type" column)! However, since the drive should usually be available depending on the current fl ight phase, we recommend leaving the standard default "GL" ("global") in the "Type" column which your are using. Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ A common option in the following examples 1 ... 5, the automatic tracking of the elevator trimming in the power fl ight, should also be mentioned at the beginning of this section: If it becomes apparent after the initial power fl ights that the model must be continuously corrected with the elevator while the motor is switched on, this situation can be corrected by setting a free mixer and adjusting it accordingly. For this purpose, switch to the menu ...

**""Free mixers"** ... and program one of the linear mixers M1 ... 8 or, if applicable, also one of the curve mixers K9 ... 12 from "channel controlling the motor" according to "Ele", e. g. of "8  Ele":

typ fr to M1 M2 M3 8 EL

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

On its second screen page, the required – usually low – correction value is entered: L.MIX 1

0% Offset

ASY SYM 8 EL Mix input +4% +4%

Notice: The adjustment of a curve mixer is described in detail in the section " **Channel 1 curve** " starting on page 116.
**Example 1 Use of a proportional rotary control**  **CTRL 6 ... 8** If one of these controls is used, the connection is very simple. Only the motor controller (speed control) has to be connected to a free servo connection 5 ... 12 of the receiver. Bear in mind that, depending on the model type and number of aileron and fl ap servos, the output 2 + 5 or 6 + 7 are already linked. Therefore connect your speed controller to the next free input and assign the selected input – for example, "Inp. 8" – one of the proportional rotary controls CTRL 6 ... 8. For example, CTRL 7. This is carried out in the menu ... **""Control adjust"** (page 96) With the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad, select the desired line. Then, by pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, you active the "Switch and control assignment". Now turn the knob of the proportional rotary control. After a short time, the entry, e. g. "Control 7", appears in the inverse fi eld.245 **Detail program description - Control adjust** the selected control close to "Full throttle" so that the marking frame is only placed around one value fi eld. Now enter a value of at least 1 s, ...
Input 5

– time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 normal

... with which a movement of the proportional control in the "ON" on direction which is too fast is processes move gently, and you can check immediately this by switching to the " **Servo display** ".

Notice: No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the • drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it merely "runs down". If you have defi ned fl ight phases in the " • **Phase setting**  " and " **Phase assignment** " menus, the settings described above must be made in the same manner for each active fl ight phase. Otherwise, you may wonder why the drive motor begins running at half power after a phase change, but does not react to movements or the rotary knobs ... The adjustment of the appropriate control travel and directions for the motor control (speed controL) is normally carried out in the " **Control adjust** " menu in the "- Travel +" column. Alternatively, you can also carry out these settings in the menu ... Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct7

Since the drive should usually be available depending on the current fl ight phase, if applicable, you should leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column – as already mentioned earlier in this section. If applicable, for the necessary adjustment of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control), use one of the arrow keys to switch to the right from the "Offset" column to the "- Travel +" column.

typ fr to M1 M2 M3 8 EL

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

If you now switch to the  Servo display" by simultaneously pressing the keys of the left touch pad and then actuate the rotary control, you will see the columns of Channel 8 "wander from one side to the other and back. However, if you rotate the proportional rotary controltoo fast – in practice – the resulting abrupt motor startup can briefl y strain the entire drive string. You should defi nitely counteract this effect ahead of time with an appropriate value in the "Time" column for such cases. Therefore, using one of the arrow keys, switch one column to the right, to the "Time" column and then move **""Servo adjustment"** (page 90)

S4 S5 S6

Rev centr + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S7 S8

. **Example 2 Use of a three-stage switch CTRL 9 or 10**  This variant realizes a three-stage speed setting, such as Motor OFF, "half" and full power. A corresponding motor control (speed control) is required on the receiver side. The required settings are basically the same as those described under Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply. Apart from the infi nitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the three-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the two control types only has an effect on the type of clock control, see page 252.

Notice: By shifting the neutral position and then adjusting the • travel so that the offset value on the side to which the neutral point was shifted is subtracted from the travel and added to the other, the "Half throttle position" can be infl uenced in the " **Control adjust** " menu. Therefore, with an offset value of -20 %, for example: +80 % on the minus side of the travel setting and +120 % on the plus side and vice versa. If you have defi ned fl ight phases in the " • **Phase**246 **Detail program description - Control adjust setting**  " and " **Phase assignment** " menus, the settings described above must be made in the same manner for each active fl ight phase. Otherwise, you may wonder why the drive motor begins running at half power after a phase change, but does not react to movements or the switch ... **Example 3 Use of a two-stage switch SW 2, 3 or 8**  This variant realizes a purely ON/OFF function. On the receiver side, either a simple electronic switch or – if a gentle motor start-up, for example, is desired – an appropriate motor control (speed control) is required. With the exception of the assignment of a different control, the settings required for this are essentially the same as those described under Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations also apply. Apart from the infi nitely variable motor control under Example 1 and the two-stage motor control in this example, the selection of the two control types only has an effect on the type of clock control, see page 252. Only the type of representation of the selected switch in the dispay of the menu ... **""Control adjust"** (page 96) **differs from the description there.** 

Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Like with example 1, you also switch to the line of a free input, activate the "Control and switch assignment" in the third column and then move the selected control, in this case Switch "2" from the desired Motor OFF position to Motor ON. In this case – as already mentioned earlier in this section – you leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column. The setting of the appropriate control travel for the motor control (speed control) is made in the "- Travel +" column. If the motor should up gently with the use of a motor control (speed control), an appropriate delay time can be set – as described in Example 1 – in the "- Time +" column:
Input 5

– time + 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 normal

All other settings - as already mentioned earlier in the example - take place analogously to Example 1. Therefore, the same comments and recommendations apply.

Notice: No delay is entered on the "OFF" side, so that the • drive can be switched off instantly at any time. This does not additionally stress the drive, because it merely "runs down". If you have defi ned fl ight phases in the " • **Phase setting**  " and " **Phase assignment** " menus, the settings described above must be made in the same manner for each active fl ight phase. Otherwise, you may wonder why the drive motor begins running at half power after a phase change, but does not react to movements or the switch ...247 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

## Control E-motor and crow alternatingly with C1 joystick

**Example 4** Before we discuss the programming of this fourth example or turn the to the expansion of the previously described basic programming, a few words should be said about the position of the throttle/brake joystick with "Motor OFF" or "Brake OFF". Normally the C1 control joystick is moved forward for the throttle control and backward for the extension of the brake. If, in this "classic" assignment, you switch to the brake system with Motor "OFF" (= joystick "back"), for example, "full brake" would be applied after the switch time you specifi ed in the " **Phase setting** " menu, or vice versa, if you switch to drive with the "brake retracted" the motor would be switched to "full power" within this time range... A "glider pilot" can make the best of this "Emergency" – normally with "brake retracted = front" – by switching to motor "ON" only if necessary and then the power decreases, if applicable (and hopefully you will not forget to push the C1 joystick "forward" again when switching back). A typical "motor pilot", on the other hand, operates in the opposite manner, only switching to the brake if necessary, etc... You can also combine the "Zero point" of both systems to avoid confusion, whereby a "glider pilot" would tend prefer the "front" and a "motor pilot", on the other hand", would likely prefer the "rear". Whatever the case may be, the mx-20 HoTT transmitter enables both variants. In the following text, however, the combination of the two "OFF" positions to "front" is assumed. However, if you have a different preference, it is not a problem: The only difference from the described version lies in the logical selection of "Throttle min rear/front" and, if applicable, of a SEL vorne

–90%

STO Tail type Motor at C1

Aile/flaps 2AIL M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 Normal

In the process, if the offset point is not placed completely at the end of the control travel, the remainder of the travel is "idle" up to this limit. This idle path ensures that all brake settings remain at "neutral", even with minor deviations from the limit of the brake fl ap control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %. For this reason, in the next step it must be ensured that the infl uence of the C1 joystick on the motor can be infl uenced. For this purpose, switch to the menu ... **"Phase setting"** (page 128) ... and assign a meaningful name, such as "normal", from the list for "Phase 1" after activation of the selection fi eld in the "Name" column. The asterisk in the second column indicates which phase is currently active. As long as no phase switches are assigned, this is always Phase 1. Give "Phase 2" the name "Landing" in accordance with the example. In the "Ph.Tim" column you can assign a so-called fl ight phase timer for the measurement of the motor running time and/or the gliding times as necessary for each phase. You could, for example, assign one of the "Timers 1 ... 3" to the "Normal" fl ight phase in order to measure the total motor run time through the C1 joystick: corresponding brake offset in the menu ... **""Model type"** (beginning on page 82) Here you fi rst specify in the "motor" line whether the throttle minimum position (= Motor "OFF" position) should be at the "front" or "rear" - as already discussed: In the following programming example, "Motor OFF" and "Brake OFF" are combined at "front":

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal Aile/flaps 2AIL M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL front

Notice: With the selection of "Throttle min front/rear" the trimming will then only have an effect in the "idle" direction of the motor and is not the same as with the "none" entry, having the same effect at every position of the C1 joystick. Since the C1 trimming is not normally used with electric drives, however, this has no further relevance. You adjust the "according to your model, in this case "normal". In the "Aileron/fl aps" line you enter the correct number of aileron and fl ap servos – in this example "2 AIL". In the last line you leave the standard entries for the selection of "Brake retracted = rear". On the other hand, if you prefer "Brake retracted = front", select the "Brake offset" line and defi ne the offset point – as described on page 83 – as "front":248 **Detail program description - Control adjust** menu. For example, you name the phase for the front switch position "normal" and "landing" for the rear position (or vice versa):

PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F 2 prior combi

2 Landing
These phase names then appear in all fl ight-phase dependent menus and, of course, also in the base screen of the transmitter. Now switch to the " **Landing** " fl ight phase and in the "Crow" line of the submenu ... **""Brake settings"** (page 160)

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

WK WK2 Landing 0%

... of the " **Wing mixers** " menu, set the desired throw of the ailerons with actuation of the C1 joystick ("brake") upward. Then, if applicable, switch to the "FL" column in order to specify the desired through of the fl aps with C1 actuation downward (hidden in the fi gure above). This fl ap position is referred to as "Crow position" or "Butterfl y; see also page 160. In the line "D.red" (differentiation reduction), enter a value which corresponds to the value you entered or enter on the fi rst page of the " **Wing mixers** " menu in the Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 Normal

Strecke

–

– – –  Landing 1.1s

0.1s 0.1s 0.1s 1.1s

Then you must assigned these two fl ight phases to a switch with which you can switch between the two fl ight phases during the fl ight. In this case, a single switch is suffi cient. It should be easy to reach, however, so that you can still switch between "motor" and "brake" during a landing approach, for example, without having to release a joystick. The assignment of the selected switch takes place in the

menu ... **"Phase assignment"** (page 134) Select the switch symbol under "C" with one of the arrow keys. After briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, actuate the desired switch, such as "SW 2".

PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 prior combi

Both switch positions, in other words ON (I) and OFF ( ) are initially assigned in the bottom right of the display to the phase "1 normal". With one of the arrow keys, select this value fi eld and then, by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, activate the selection list of the phases which you set up in the " **Phase setting** " Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4 Pha5 Normal

Strecke

–

– – –  Clk 1 Landing

Then the timer is controlled through a corresponding control switch to be defi ned on the C1 joystick. As soon as you switch to the "Landing" fl ight phase, this fl ight phase timer is automatically stopped and hidden in the base screen. More about this can be found on page 142. Now move the marking frame over the "Ph.Tim" column to the "Motor" column to the right. Here you can decide with "yes/no" in which phase the motor is controlled by the throttle/brake joystick and the brake system to be adjusted in the "Brake settings" submenu of the " **Wing mixers**  " menu should be shut off (= "yes") and vice versa (= "no"):

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name motor Pha4 Pha5 Normal

Strecke

–

– – –  yes Landing no

Now move the marking frame once more to the right and enter an appropriate switching time after activation of the value fi eld of the "Sw.Time" column; for example:249 **Detail program description - Control adjust** line "Aile.diff." With the "Elevat curve" mixer the normally occurring "Upward tilting" of the model on the raising of the ailerons can be automatically suppressed. The suitable correction values for the respective value must be tested out through fl ight. Set this mixer so that the fl ight speed of the model does not change too much with the brake system extended in comparison with the "normal" fl ight speed. Otherwise, there is the risk, among other things, that the model plunges when the brake system is retracted, e. g. for the extension of a landing approach which is too short. If everything is correctly set so far, only the motor is controlled with the C1 joystick in the "normal" fl ight phase, whereas this should be switched off in the fl ight phase "landing" (Servo 1 in " **Servo display** " independently of "Throttle min front/rear" to -100% or adequately for a servo travel setting deviating by 100 %, if necessary). In this fl ight phase the C1 joystick then only controls the raising of the ailerons and, if applicable, the lowering of the fl aps with the neutral point in the C1 control position selected per offset.250 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

## C1 joystick switchable between E-motor and spoiler

**Example 5** If, contrary to the assumptions of the preceding Example 4, the model has additional spoilers or only spoilers, they can be incorporated into the control of the model by means of the following programming. For this purpose, program the menus " **Model type** ",

" **Phase setting** " and " **Phase assignment** " in the same manner as described under Example 4. The settings described there in the "Brake settings" submenu of the " **Wing mixers** " menu, on the other hand, are only relevant if you would like to use an additional crow system in parallel to your spoilers. With the settings described under Example 4, the control of the E-motor and, if applicable, that of a crow system will function as usual. Only the control of a spoiler connected to Output 8, for example, must additionally be programmed. For this purpose, switch to the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96) ... and switch to the fl ight phase " **normal** ". Now, using the arrow keys, switch to the "Offset" column of the line "Inp. 8". After activation of the value fi eld by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, change the offset value in the now inverse value fi eld of Input 8 until your spoilers are "retracted" again:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– –––

Normal ––– –––

–100%

Confi rm this setting by briefl y pressing the central **ESC** key of the left key pad or the central **SET**key of the right touch pad and then switch to the center column to the left. Now switch to the fl ight phase " **Landing** " and then briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. The display shows the window ...
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

–100% Eing. 6 Eing. 7 Input 8

––– ––– ––– Move desired switch or control adj.
Landing

Now move the C1 joystick As soon as this is recognized, "Ct1" appears in the display instead of "---":
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Ct1 –––

Landing ––– –––

–100%

Leave the offset value in this fl ight phase to "0 %". If necessary, however, you may have to change the leading symbol of the travel setting to reverse the control direction by switching the travel setting from +100 % to -100 % in the "Travel" column. Now we are practically fi nished. Check the programming in the " **Servo display** " menu, which you can reach from the base screen of the transmitter as well as nearly every other menu position by simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left touch pad. You will discover that "Servo 1" (motor control) is controlled in the "normal" phase and in the "landing" phase only the spoiler is controlled at "Servo 8" and, if applicable the aileron and fl ap servos – just as we intended.251 **Detail program description - Control adjust**252 **Detail program description - Control adjust** SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH –85%

STO ––– ––– ––– Ct1

In order to assign the control switch you just crated to the desired timer, switch to the menu ... **""Timers (gen.)"** (page 138 ... 141) ..., and, with the arrow keys, select the line "Top", to which the "Tim(ers)" are assigned by standard. In this line, move the marking frame over the "Timer" column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate arrow key of the left or right touch pad. Now press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad twice: Pressing once activates the switch assignment and tapping again opens the list of the "expanded switches":

Model time Akkuzeit Oben: Mitte: Flug

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s 0s Stopp

–––

–––

SEL Control/fix sw C1 C2 C3 C4 FX FXi C1i C2i C3i C4i

Now select the previously programmed control switch, Ct1 in the example, and assign it to the timer by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad: Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s 0s Stop C1

–––

SEL

The timer in the base screen now starts with movement of the C1 joystick toward full throttle and stops if you pull the C1 joystick back over the switching point. **Example 1 of the preceding pages** If you have decided to continue with the model programming described on the previous pages in Example 1 on page 244, fi rst switch to the menu ...
**"Control switches"** (page 123)
... and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned yet with the arrow keys. After activation of the control assignment by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the following window appears:

SEL +75% 0% 0% G1 G2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH Gb1 Gb1 –75%

STO ––– ––– ––– Move desired control adj.

Now simply move the respective proportional rotary control, e.g. CTRL 7, from the motor "OFF" position in the motor "ON" direction. The switch to the column above **STO** using the appropriate arrow key and move the selected control near the motor "OFF" position and defi ne the switch **Examples 4 and 5 of the preceding pages** If you have decided to continue with the model programming on described on the previous pages for **Example 4,** page 247 or **5,** page 250 or you intend to use the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) for the power regulation completely independently of this example programming, you can use a control switch for the automatic starting and stopping of the timer. For this purpose, fi rst switch to the menu ...
**"Control switches"** (page 123)
... and select the line of a control switch which has not been assigned yet with the arrow keys. After activation of the control assignment by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the following window appears:

SEL +75% 0% 0% G1 G2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH Gb1 Gb1 –75%

STO ––– ––– ––– Move desired control adj.

Now simply move the C1 joystick (throttle/brake joystick) from the motor "OFF" position in the motor "ON" direction. The switch to the column above **STO** using the appropriate arrow key and move the C1 joystick near the motor "OFF" position and defi ne the switch point at the selected position by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. The switch status is shown to the right of the control number: 

# Timer confi **rmation with control or switch**253 **Detail program description - Control adjust** point at the selected position by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. The switch status is shown to the right of the control number:

SEL 0% 0% 0% C1 C2 C3

––– C4 CONTROL SWITCH –85%

STO ––– ––– ––– Ct6

Notice: Now place the switching point; but do not put it at the limit position of the control, because safe switching is not assured when doing so. Ct1 used in the example here should be "closed" in the "full throttle" direction and "open" below the switching point. Now switch to the menu ... **""Timers (gen.)"** (page138 ... 141) ..., and, with the arrow keys, select the line "Top", to which the "Tim(ers)" are assigned by standard. In this line, move the marking frame over the "Timer" column to the right, to the column above the switch symbol, using the appropriate arrow key of the left or right touch pad. Now press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad twice: Pressing once activates the switch assignment and tapping again opens the list of the "expanded switches": Model time Akkuzeit Oben: Mitte: Flug

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s 0s Stopp

–––

–––

SEL Control/fix sw C1 C2 C3 C4 FX FXi C1i C2i C3i C4i

Now select the previously programmed control switch "Ct1" and then press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad.

Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s 0s Stop C1

–––

SEL

The timer in the base screen now starts with movement of the proportional rotary control toward full throttle and stops if you pull it back over the switching point. **Examples 2 and 3 of the preceding pages** If you control your motor with a switch, on the other hand, you do not need the described control switch described above. It is completely suffi cient if you assign the same switch to the timer, so that it also begins to run when you switch on the motor. Tip: If the motor run time for an E-model is limited by the battery capacity, you can have the stopwatch count down. Enter the maximum permissible motor run time in the "Timer" column, e.g. "5 min", and briefl y before the expiration of the permissible time, e. g. "30 s" before, have the transmitter issue an acoustic warning signal: Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Timer ––– 12:34h

1:23h

0:00 Stop 5 :00

Model time Batt. time Top : Centr:Flight

Alarm ––– 0:34h 1:23h

0s Stop C3

–––

SEL 30s254 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Servos running in parallel

A second servo running in parallel is often required, such as when brake fl aps or spoilers installed in the wings or the left and right elevator or a double fi n should be actuated by a servo or a large rudder fl ap should be simultaneously controlled by two servos due to high throw forces. In principle, this task could also be solved by connecting the servos together on the model side using V-cable. However, this has the disadvantage that the servos combined in this manner can no longer be adjusted individually and separately from the transmitter – the advantage of a fi nely tuned adjustment of the respective servos to one another by a computer remote steering system would no longer be provided. This is similar for the so-called "Channel Mapping" described in the scope of the " **Telemetry** " menu: In comparison to the adjustment possibilities of the transmitter, there are also limitations with this process. The fi rst example, therefore, describes the coupling of two brake or spoiler servos, the second describes the operation of two or more throttle servos and the third describes the coupling of two elevator servos. The "two rudder servos" example on the next page describes the coupling of two rudder servos, whereas Variant 1 is preferable for applications of this type, because with the use of a " **cross-mixer** ", because this is quicker and easier to program. Contrary to this, thesecond variant, also permits asymmetric and/or nonlinear curves with the use of the " **Free mixer** " menu. **Two brake or spoiler servos** For the operation of your brake fl aps and/or spoilers in each wing half you have installed a servo and kept the default linear control characteristics unchanged in the

" **Channel 1 curve** " menu. Then connect one of the two servos to Output 1, provided for this purpose by standard, and the second to an arbitrary free receiver connection 5 ... 12, such as Output "8". Now switch to the menu ... " Control adjust" (page 96) ... and, using the arrow keys, assign the "Control 1" in the line of Input 8:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct1

Leave the standard settings for the remaining values. If necessary, carry out the required servo travel adjustments in the " **Servo adjustment** " menu. There you can also adjust the travel of servo 1 and 8 to one another, if necessary. Important notice: If you have defi ned fl ight phases in the " **Phase setting** " and " **Phase assignment** " menus, the settings must be made in the same manner for each active fl ight phase. Otherwise, you may wonder why only one spoiler can be moved as intended and the other remains in its half extended position ...
**Multiple-motor aircraft** As described above, a model can also be operated with two or more motors. The fi rst throttle servo and/or the fi rst motor control is connected as usual to (receiver) Output 1 and each additional throttle servo and/or each additional motor control is connected to a free (receiver) Output 5 ... 12. The inputs of the corresponding assigned control channels are then each assigned to Control 1; for example :
Input 8

offset 0% 0% 0% 0% Input 9 Input10 Input11 GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct1 Ct1 Ct1 Ct1

Important notice: Since the motor control unit should be available regardless of a currently active fl ight phase, make sure to leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column.

**Two elevator servos** Two elevator servos should be switched in parallel. According to the receiver assignment plan, see page 57, the receiver output 8 is intended for the connection of the second elevator servo. This would be taken into account on the software side in the preconfi guration of a corresponding mixer. You can fi nd this in the ... **"Model type" menu** (page 82) In this menu switch to the "Tail" line using the arrow keys, activate the value fi eld by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right key pad and select the entry "2ELSv3+8":255 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Tail type Motor at C1 None

Aile/flaps 1AIL M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL 2ELSv3+8

Then carry out the fi ne-tuning of the travel of the two servos "as accustomed" in the " **Servo adjustment** "

menu.
**Two rudders** We want to switch two rudders "in parallel". The second rudder is located at the free receiver output 8. Variant 1 In the menu ...
**"Cross-mixer"** (page 194) ... select one of the cross-mixers and enter "8" and "RU" in its left and center value fi elds, as shown in the fi gure:

Typ Diff. zu DUAL MIXER Mixer1 Mixer2 8

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% 0% RU

The same defl ection "  ", which would take place through "Input 8" may not have an effect here. Therefore, you should make absolutely sure in the ... **"Control adjust" menu** (page 96)

Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal –––

... that "Input 8" is set to "free" so that the control function is separate from the control channel. Alternatively, You can set Input 8 in the " **Only mix channel**  " to "no control", regardless of the fl ight phase, by setting Channel 8 to "only mix":

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

only normal 789 10 11 12

Variant 2 With this variant a mixer, "Tr Rudd 8" should be set in the menu ...

**" Free mixers "** (page 181)
 . In the "Type" column, select the setting "Tr" so that the rudder trimming affects both rudder servos:

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 RU 8 ?? ??

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? Tr Then switch to the graphic screen and set a symmetric mixture of +100%.

L.MIX 1

0% Offset

ASY SYM RU 8 Mix input +100% +100%

"Input 8" should also be programmed to "free" here in the " **Control adjust"** - in all fl ight phases, if applicable. However, control function "8" can be separated from control channel "8" more easily in the fl ight-phase independent menu " **Only mix channel** ", page 193:

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

only normal 789 10 11 12256 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Use of fl **ight phases**

Up to seven different fl ight phases (fl ight statuses) can be programmed with settings independent of one another within one of the model memories. Each of these fl ight phases can be called with a switch or a switch combination. This makes it possible to switch between different settings for the various fl ight statuses, such as "Normal", "Thermal", "Speed", "Distance", etc., simply and conveniently. However, with the fl ight phase programming you can also make slight modifi cations, e. g. of mixers, to try out by switching during the fl ight in order to fi nd the optimal settings for each model more easily. Before you begin with the actual programming of fl ight phases, you should consider whether the digital trimming of transverse, altitude and side should have be "global" – in other words, the same for all fl ight phases – or per "Phase" – in other words, each fl ight phase is individually variable. If you decide in favor of a phase-specifi c trimming of the elevator, for example, switch the menu ... **"Joystick setting"** (page 92) ... and change the standard "global" default accordingly. The same applies for the number of trimming steps in the column "St":

Tr + 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL

GL

St PH Ch.1 Aile Elev

time Rudd **Example 1 ... ... continuing with the previous programming of an**  **electric glider with 2 aileron servos.**

AI

AI EL

RU

The control of the E-drive takes place independently of the C1 joystick with one of the two proportional rotary controls CTRL 7 or 8 or with one of the two three-stage switches CTRL 9 or 10. The motor control is connected to receiver Output 9 according to the description beginning on page 244 and Examples 1 and two which serve as the basis of this continuation. In the " **Model type**  " menu, therefore, "None" was selected in the "Motor to C1" line, which has the consequence, among other things , that the "Motor" column in the " **Phase setting**  " menu is hidden and the "Brake settings" submenu of the " **Wing mixers** " menu is available without limitation. **1. Step "Phase setting"**  (page 128 )

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4 Pha5 

+
+ Normal Thermal Speed

+

– Launch Initially, one or multiple fl ight phases are provided with a specifi c identifi cation ("Name") for the respective fl ight status. This identifi cation has no infl uence on the programming of the transmitter; it only serves for an improved differentiation of the individual fl ight phases and is shown later in all fl ight-phase dependent menus and in the base screen. The selection of the respective line, a name and the setting of the switching time take place, as "usual", by pressing the corresponding key(s) of the two four-way touch pads.

Notice: With the exception of Phase 1, which should always be assigned with the name "Normal" since it is always active, if the fl ight phases are deactivated, it is completely irrelevant which name is assigned to which phase! In everyday use by a model pilot, three to a maximum of four fl ight phases are usually completely suffi cient: "Start" with the climb settings • "Thermal" for "Flying high", • "Normal" for normal conditions and • "Speed" for high gear. • In the "Sw.time" column (switching time) ...

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 

+
+ Normal Thermal Speed

+

– 3.0s 2.0s 4.0s

0.1s Launch 1.0s

... you can defi ne the time for the "cross-fading" when switching from any other fl ight phase to this one in order257 **Detail program description - Control adjust** to enable a "smooth" transition of the various servo positions. Thus, an increased stress of the model under certain circumstances with a "hard" change of rudder or fl ap positions, for example, is prevented The "Status" column shows you the currently active fl ight phase with an asterisk "  ". **2. Step** In order to actually be able to switch between the individual fl ight phases, the assignment of one ormultiple switches is necessary. One of the two threestage switches (CTRL 9 or CTRL 10) is best suited for switching of up to three fl ight phases. Each of the two switch limit positions is assigned to one of the fl ight phase switches A ... F, starting from the center position . The assignment of the switch takes place in the menu ... **"Phase assignment"** (page 134) First select "C" with the marking frame. The briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad and move the switch from the center position to a limit position, for example, downward:

PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 6 7 prior combi

Move the switch back to the center position and then select "D", and after activation of the switch assignment, move the switch to the other limit position, for example, to the top: PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 6 7 prior combi

Now the three-stage switch is programmed. Now and additional switch could be assigned for the "start" fl ight phase, if applicable. In this case under "A", so that the "start" phase is always switched to from every other fl ight phase in parallel to the switching-on of the motor:

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 6 7 PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior combi

Then the respective switch positions must be assigned corresponding fl ight phases (names). Although you have already assigned names for some fl ight phases, the phase name "1 normal" still appears in the right of the display; see the fi gures above. First move the three-stage switch to the limit position, for example to the top, and switch with the marking frame in the display down to the right to the value fi eld for the fl ight phase name. Briefl y press the central **SET** key of the right touch pad for the activation of the input fi eld and select the desired fl ight phase for this switch position, in this example "2 Thermal", with the arrow keys: A B C D E F 2 6 7

2 Thermal PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior combi

Proceed in the same manner for the other switch limit position, which is assigned the name "3 Speed". If applicable move Switch 2 and assign this switch combination the name "4 Start". Briefl y pressing the central **ESC** of the left touch pad or the central **SET**key of the right touch pad completes the time name assignment. The fl ight-phase dependent model settings made before the assignment of phase switches are now in the fl ight phase "1 Normal". This is the phase which is called with the open "Start" switch in the center position of the three-stage switch. **3. Step** In order to not have to carry out all previously made settings for the model in the "new" fl ight phase from the ground up, we recommend fi rst copying the already tested programming of the fl ight phase "Normal" to the other fl ight phases. This is carried out in the menu ... **"Copy / Erase"** (page 64)

=>

=>
=>
=>

=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD258 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Here, select the menu item "Copy fl ight phase" with the arrow keys and then briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. In the appearing window, "Copy from phase", "1 Normal" is selected ...

7 Copy from phase:

3 5 =>

=> 2 4 6 1 Normal Thermal

Speed Launch

... and then briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, whereby the display switches to "Copy to phase". Now the target is selected (initially "2 Thermal") and confi rmed by pressing the central **SET** key of the right touch pad again. After confi rmation of the subsequent safety query, all settings are copied according to the selection. Proceed in the same manner with the other two phases ("1 Normal" to "3 Speed" and "1 Normal" to "4 Start"). **4. Step** Now three or four phases are programmed, the settings are also copied and there is even a "soft" transfer, but ... there are still no fl ight-phase specifi c settings. Now, if applicable, in order to adapt the fl ap positions to the different requirements of the individual fl ight phases, in the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96) ... the standard default "GL" is fi rst changed to "PH" for "Phase" in the type column: Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– PH

GL GL

GL

typ Normal –––

Then switch to the "Offset" column and make the settings deviating from the "Normal" fl ight phase for the ailerons. However, switch to the desired fl ight phase beforehand, whose name is shown at the bottom in the display, appropriate to the switch position. Both positive and negative throw changes are possible. These settings are to be made separately for each fl ight phase:
Input 5

offset 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– PH

GL GL

GL

typ Normal ––– –7%

**5. Step** Any necessary phase-specifi c trimming of the elevator is made with the help of the digital trimming of the elevator joystick. This requires that you have at least set the elevator trimming to "Phase" in the " **Joystick setting** " menu - as already shown in this programming example. Alternatively, you can also carry out these settings in the

" **Phase trim** " menu ... Normal
 0%

ELEV Thermal 0%

QR Launch Thermal Speed 0% 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

**6. Step** In the menu ... **"Wing mixers"** (beginning on page 146) ... the fl ight phase name of the newly activated fl ight phase appears at the bottom edge of the display. If the switch position is now changed, the name of the fl ight phase selected with the switch appears, but with the previously copied settings of the fl ight phase "Normal". Here you set you values phase-specifi cally for the aileron differentiation, the share of the mixture of transverse to side, and if applicable, also a mixture of altitude to transverse. (The latter increases the agility over the transverse axis when "Turning".)

Aile.diff. Brake sttings

AI 55% WING MIXERS

EL FL 0% 0% –––

––– RU

Thermal 33%

Notice: The list of displayed options depends on the number of servos entered in the "Ailerons/fl aps" line in the " **Model type**  " menu.
Now switch to the submenu ...259 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red +30% +33% 0% 0% 0% 0%

WK WK2 Normal

... and enter how wide the ailerons should be raised in the "Crow" line. With "D.red" (differentiation reduction), you should enter the value previously set in the aileron differentiation line in order to suppress it again while breaking. In the "Elevat curve" submenu, enter a correction value for the elevator, see page 162.

Notice: The "Brake settings" submenu of the " **Wing mixers** " menu is switched "off" if "yes" is entered for the current fl ight phase in the " **Model type** " menu, page 82 "Motor at C1 front/rear" and in the "Motor" column of the

" **Phase setting** " menu, page 128. Change the fl ight phase, if applicable.260 **Detail program description - Control adjust Example 2 ...** 
**Glider with four fl ap wings, two large fl**  **aps and tow coupling** 

AI
FL

FL

AI EL

RU

The following example is based on the assumption that you have already mechanically preadjusted the model and you have already ensured the correct defl ection of all rudders or checked this again in the scope of this programming and made adjustments, if applicable, through servo switching at the receiver and/or through the " **Servo setting** " menu. This programming example is based on an assignment of the receiver connections in accordance with the following diagram:

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or left rudder / elevator 2nd airbrake servo or 2nd elevator or aux. funct

Receiver power supply

1st airbrake servo Right aileron Flap or left flap Right flap Aero-tow release or free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Rudder or right rudder / elevator Begin with the new programming of the model in a free model memory location. In the menu " **Base setup model** ", connect your receiver to the transmitter, enter a model name and select or check, if applicable, the stick mode. Later, before the fl ight operation, also activate the range test in this menu. In the menu ... **"Model type"** (page 82) ... leave "Motor to C1" at "None" and the tail type at "Normal". In the "Aile/fl ap" line, on the other hand, set "2 AIL 2 FL". In the "Brake" line, program or leave "In1", because the brake and spoiler fl ap servos connected to 1 + 8 should be activated later with the corresponding C1 joystick as the control:

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 2AIL2FL M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +90% SEL

STO
The setting in the "Brake offset" value fi eld defi nes the neutral position of all mixers of the "Brake settings submenu of the " **Wing mixers** " menu. Place this neutral point at approx. +90%, insofar as the brake fl aps should be retracted in the front position of the C1 joystick. The remaining path between +90 % and the full throw of the joysticks, +100 %, is then assigned as idle travel. This assures that the rudders or fl aps addressed by the mixers of "Brake settings" remain in their "Normal" position, even with slight deviations from the limit position of the C1 control. At the same time, the effective control path is automatically spread to 100 %. In the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96 ) ... assign a switch to Input 9, for example, for the operation of the tow coupling. In order for this switch to work independently of the fl ight phase, leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column of this input. With "– Travel +" you can adjust the control travel for the switching of the switch:
Input 6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ 9

By simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left touch pad, the setting in the " **Servo display** " can be checked. Since the C1 control should actuate Servo 8 simultaneously with Servo 1, establish this link through the menu " **Control adjust** ". For this reason, also switch to the line before and assign "Control 1" to Input 8.
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct1

However, please note in this connection, that a nonlinear control curve programmed in the " **Channel 1** 

# Use of fl **ight phases**261 **Detail program description - Control adjust curve**  " menu has as little effect on this input as brake offset set to less than 100 %, which you can check very easily in the " **Servo display** " menu. You can reach this from nearly every menu position by simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left touch pad: The travel and, if applicable, the directions of rotation of the spoiler servos 1 and the second spoiler servo connected to Output 8 can be adjusted in the menu ... **Servo adjustment** (page 90)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

... In the Multi-fl ap menu of the ... **"Wing mixers" menu** (beginning on page 146) ... you now enter the fi rst mixer values for the four wing fl aps; for example:

0% fl.pos

AILE Diff. Ail-tr AI +100% +100%

+50% 0%

FLAP Diff. +66% +66% +33% fl.pos Ail-tr AI

Notice: The parameter values shown here are model-dependent and must be determined by test fl ights.
In the ...

 **AI**  line you defi ne the percentage with which the two fl ap pairs "AI and "FL" should follow the aileron control. Also check whether the ailerons are defl ected in the right direction during the adjustment of the parameter values. The adjustment range from -150 % ... +150 % enables the correct throw direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the servos. **Ail-tr**Here you determine the percentage with which the aileron trimming should affect the AI and FL. **Diff.** Here you specify the differentiation of the aileron control on the AI and FL fl aps. For the signifi cance of the differentiation, see page 148. The adjustment range from -100 % ... +150 % enables the correct differentiation direction adjustment regardless of the direction of rotation of the aileron and fl ap

servos. **fl .pos.**  In this line you set the fl ight-phase specifi c fl ap positions for all fl aps available on the respective model. In the process, you can determine the positions the fl aps assume for each fl ight phase.

Notice: The values appearing in this line are based on the same data set as in the comparable position in the " **Phase trim** " menu, which is why changes always take effect in both directions.

 **FL**  Since all inputs in the " **Control adjust** " menu are set to "free" by default, neither the ailerons nor the fl aps can be actuated in this standard setting. In this respect, you also leave the default entry here. However, if you would like to be able to vary the fl ap positions with a switch or proportional rotary control by the position specifi ed in the "fl .pos." line, assign the desired control to Input 6 in the " **Control adjust**  " menu and set the desired reaction to the movement of the control selected for this purpose over the percentage in this lane. **EL**  **FL** This mixer incorporates the ailerons (AI) and fl aps (FL) with elevator actuation. The mixing direction is to be selected so that all fl aps are defl ected downward with the elevator pulled up and defl ected upward with the elevator pushed down (= hydroplane). The mixing proportion is normally in the low double-digit range. Now switch to the "Brake settings" within the " **Wing**262 **Detail program description - Control adjust mixers**  " menu ...

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

QR Crow D.red +44% +77% 0% +66% 0% +55%

WK WK2

Notice: The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if "yes" is entered for the currently active fl ight phase in the

" **Model type** " menu, page 82, "Motor to C1 front/rear" and in the "Motor" column of the " **Phase setting** " menu, page 128. If applicable, switch to the fl ight phase
**Crow**Further above we designated the C1 joystick for the brake fl ap control. In this line you determine the share with which the AI and FL should be included on actuation of C1 in the manner that both ailerons are defl ected "slightly" upward and both fl aps are defl ected as far downward as possible. By simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left touch pad, you switch to the **"Servo display"**  menu so that you can observe the servo movement and, in particular, that there is no infl uence on the fl aps above the adjusted brake offset, e.g. +90 %, up to the throw limit of the controller C1; see above ("Idle travel" of the C1 joystick). **D.red** In the line " Differentiation reduction " you should enter the value previously set in the ailerons differentiation line in order to suppress it again during braking. **Elevat curve**In this line you set another correction value for the elevator, see page 162. Insofar as necessary, check and adjust all fl ap throws, the servo center, the servo travel and the travel limitation through the menu " **Servo adjustment"**

. It may also be time to start the initial fl ight testing,insofar as all global settings - that is to say, all fl ightphase independent settings - are completed.

**Two additional fl ight phases should be set up in**  **the following, each of which requires a somewhat different fl**  **ap position.** Therefore, switch to the menu ... **"Phase setting"** (page 128) ... and activate the assignment of phase names in the "Name" column by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4 Pha5 normal Start Strecke

–

– – – 

Now give Phase 1 - the "Normal phase" - that is also the phase which includes the previous settings, the name "Normal", which you select with the arrow keys. Phase 2 receives the name "Thermal" and Phase 3 receives the name "Speed". Now conclude your entry by briefl y pressing the **ESC** key of the left touch pad or the **SET**key of the right touch pad: Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4 Pha5 Normal Thermal Speed

–

– – – 

Now move the marking frame over the column "ph.Tim." to the right to the column "Sw.time" and set a "switching time" from any other phase to the respective phase in order to avoid an abrupt phase change ; in other words erratic changes of fl ap positions. Now try out different switching times. In this example we have specifi ed 1 s in each case:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4 Pha5 

+
+ Normal Thermal Speed

–

– 1.0s 1.0s 1.0s

0.1s 0.1s

Now assign the corresponding switches for these fl ight phases in the menu ... **"Phase assignment"** (page 134) ... with which you can switch between the three phases. Since no special priority is necessary, assign the switch "C", for example, in the display and select one of the two limit positions of one of the two three-stage switches, CTRL 9 or 10 as the switch. Then move the selected switch back to the center position, activate the switchassignment under "D" and move the selected threestage switch from its center position to the other limit position in order to:263 **Detail program description - Control adjust** PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 6 7 prior combi

After the switch assignment is complete, use the arrow keys to switch to the bottom right and activate the assignment of phase names by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. Now close "SW 7" by moving the selected three-stage switch upward. Assign the name "<2 Thermal>" to this switch position and leave the name "<1 Normal>" in the "OFF position" of this switch.

PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F 2 6 7 prior combi

2 Thermal

PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F 2 6 7 prior combi

1 Normal
Then move the three-stage switch down toward "SW 6" and assign the name "<3 Speed>" to this switch position: PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F 2 6 7 prior combi

3 Speed
The phase names selected in the programming are nowshown, depending on the switch status, in all fl ightphase dependent menus, see the table on page 268.Since we have already made some settings in fl ightphase dependent menus, such as in the " **Wing mixers"** menu, we will now copy these settings to the "Thermal" fl ight phase. For this purpose, open the menu ... **"Copy / Erase"** (page 64) ... and switch to the "Copy fl ight phase" line:

=>

=>
=>
=>

=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

The maximum seven fl ight phases are listed in "Copy from phase": Select the fl ight phase to be copied, 1. "1 Normal".

7 Copy from phase:

3 5 =>

=> 2 4 6 1 Normal Thermal

Speed By briefl y pressing the central 2. **SET**key of the right touch pad, switch the window to the entry of the target memory "Copy to phase". Select phase "2 Thermal" as the target: 3.

7 Copy to phase:

3 5 =>

=> 4 6 1 Normal

Speed Thermal 2

Confi rm the selection by 4. briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. A security query follows, who should be confi rmed 5. with "Yes":

Phase to:

to be copied?

NO YES 1 Normal 2 Thermal

Then repeat the process with fl ight phase "3 Speed". 6. **Now we will program the required settings in the fl**  **ight phase "Thermal" as an example.** In order to also be able to vary the camper changing fl ap position in the "Thermal" phase, in the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96) ... you assign an operating element to Input 6 – as described on page 96 . If you assign one of the two proportional rotary controls to this input, independent of the fl ight phase if applicable (CTRL 7 in the example, the ailerons (2 + 5) and camber264 **Detail program description - Control adjust** changing fl aps (6 + 7) are moved continuously with a mixer proportion to be set in the " **Wing mixers** menu.
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– ––– Ct7

Normal

If you assign the still free second three-stage switch to Input 6 instead, you can call three different FL positions of the ailerons (AIL) and camber changing fl aps (FL) as well as three elevator positions (Elev) in the "Thermal" fl ight phase, see the following page. (These three switch positions correspond to the center position and the two limit positions of the previously mentioned proportional rotary control.)

Notice: The FL and AIL fl ap positions in the two limit switch positions or in the switch center depend on the value set in the column "- Travel +" as well as the offset value and the mixer proportion set in the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the

" **Wing mixers** " menu, see further below. We will leave the (control) "- Travel +" at the standard settings of symmetric + 100 % and the offset value at 0 %. Specifying a symmetric or asymmetric time for smooth switching between the three switch positions - in the example "1.0 s 1.0 s" - in the column "- Time +" is recommended: Input 5

– time + 0.0

0.0 0.0 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 0.0

0.0 0.0 Normal 1.0 1.0

In the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the ... **"Wing mixers" menu** (beginning on page 146) ... change only the values for "FL-pos" and "  FL  " in the "Thermal" fl ight phase: **FL-pos** Here you position the AIL and FL in the "Thermal" fl ight phase in case the assignedcontrol (proportional rotary control or threestage switch) is in its neutral or center position in the fl ight.

 **FL**  In this line you specify the percentage at which the aileron and camber changing fl ap servos should be moved as camber changing fl aps with the selected control (see above) or with the three-stage switch:

–9% +10% 0% 0% +10%

AILE Thermal +55% +100% +100%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff. Ail-tr AI –14% +15% 0% 0% +15%

FLAP Thermal +33% +60% +60%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff. Ail-tr AI

Simultaneously pressing the key combination  or  of the right touch pad ( **CLEAR** ) resets changed values back to the standard settings.

Notice: Due to the improved lift distribution, the degree of mixture should be set so that the camber changing fl aps are slightly "lower" than the ailerons. By simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left touch pad, you can check the reaction of the AIL and FL servos with actuation of the selected camber changing fl ap servo in the " **Servo display** ". (Push the C1 joystick to the front position so that the "AIL" and "FL" fl ap positions can be better followed on actuation of the corresponding control.)

**Attention: With actuation of the ailerons, the bars of the "Servo**  **display" move in the same way and the opposite way with the actuation of the camber changing**  **fl aps:** 

In the control center position, only • the – example – "FL-pos." setting of +10 % for the AIL and +15 % for the FL work. In the one limit position of the control, AIL and FL are • back in their neutral position, because the degree265 **Detail program description - Control adjust** of mixture specifi ed for the example compensates directly for the FL-pos. setting, whereas ... ... in the other limit position, AIL and FL reach the • maximum downward offset prescribed by the mixer percentage. In order to set a – corrective – admix for the elevator, exit the "Multi-fl ap menu" and return to the base screen of the " **Wing mixers** " menu:

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

FL EL +5% +5% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

Thermal
In the two limit positions of the three-stage switch the elevator is moved symmetrically in this example with +5 % (true to side). If, on the other hand, you use a proportional rotary control, the elevator is defl ected according to the degree for the control position. Then make the settings for the "Speed" fl ight phase in the same manner.

Notice: The digital trimming of transverse, altitude and side • work independently of these settings – depending on the setting selected in the " **Joystick setting** " menu, page 92 – "Global" or for each "Phase". All setting values are model-dependent. Carry out • the settings on your fi nished model and/or during the fl ight.266 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Control of temporal processes using time delay and curve mixers

A useful, but less known capability of the mx-20 HoTT software is the ability to activate nearly any servo movements with a maximum duration of 9.9 seconds using a switch. The programming for this should be shown on the basis of some examples in the following. Additional applications can certainly be found once you become familiar with these capabilities. The programming is begin in the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96) ... and in order to be able to approach any point of the control curve during the programming, fi rst assign one of the proportional rotary controls to the desired control channel – in this example CTRL 8 to the Input 9. However, leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column so that this setting is effective for all fl ight phases analogously to the free mixers to be programmed in the following. The input of a time delay in the "- Time +" column should also be dispensed with initially:
Input 6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct8

Then in the menu ... **"Only mix channel"** (page 193) ... of the selected control channel, "9" in this case, is set to "Only MIX": MIX ONLY CHANNEL

only normal 789 10 11 12

It is mandatory that this is set to "Only MIX", because the control curves of the curve mixers described in the following example only function on the output of the same channel as desired if there is no direct connection between the control and output! Only then can the linear control signal be manipulated almost arbitrarily around a curve mixer and to the appropriate output. Therefore, in the next step, switch to the menu ...

**"Free mixers"** (page 181) ... and program a curve mixer for the same channel, e.g. from "9" to "9":

ty fr to M8 C9 C10 ?? ?? 9 9

C11 C12 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ??

On this second screen the desired path of the control curve is then set, whereby the following examples should only be "food for thought" for the design of your own control curves. **For example,** the control curve could be for ... **... delayed lighting of a headlight after the beginning of the extension of the landing gear:** 

+50% –100% Input Output Point 1 C.MIX 9

normal Curve off 9 9

–100%

**... the control of a landing gear fl ap which closes**  **again after the landing gear is extended:**

–100% –100% Input Output Point L C.MIX 9

normal Curve off 9 9

–100%

**... a smooth motor start-up or the extension of a self-launch ...** 

–100% –100% Input Output Point L C.MIX 9

normal Curve 9 9

–100% on267 **Detail program description - Control adjust ... triggered by the same switch, but with a delayed**  **startup of the drive motor connected to Output 10:**

–100% –100% Input Output Point L C.MIX10

normal Curve 9 10

–100% on

The function you programmed functions as desired according to these suggestions – which you can verify at any time after switching to the " **Servo display** " by simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left touch pad – then to, complete the programming, an arbitrary switch, such as "SW 8" is assigned in the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96)
... to the control channel used instead of the selected proportional rotary control – in in these examples "CTRL 8" to channel "9" – and the desired symmetric or asymmetric time span is set in the "- Time +" column for the amount of time in which the function should ultimately take place:
Input 6

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ 8 Input 9

– time + 9.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 Input10 Input11 Input12 9.9 0.0 0.0 0.0

Notice: In the course of the switch assignment, always bear in mind that you can also trigger multiple functions with one switch! For example , with the same switch a landing gear connected to Output 6 can be started and, as shown here as an example, the time-controlled landing gear fl aps connected to Output 9 and/or the headlight, etc.268 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Eight-fl **ap wing**

By standard the mx-20 HoTT supports the comfortable control of up to eight servos for the aileron/ camber changing fl ap functions. In the following we will consider a model without motor drive and without spoilers in the wings. The example is also based on the assumption that you have already mechanically preadjusted the model and you have already ensured the correct defl ection of all rudders or checked this again in the scope of this programming and made adjustments, if applicable, through servo switching at the receiver and/or through the "Servo adjustment" menu. The servos should be connected to a suitable receiver as follows:

7 2 5 6 12 11

3 4 9 10

**Rudder Receiver output**
Aileron 2 + 5
Aileron 2 11 + 12 Camber changing fl aps (exterior) 6 + 7
Camber changing fl aps 2 (interior) 9 + 10

Elevator 3
Rudder 4 For the control of all fl aps, up to two additional proportional rotary controls are required in addition to the two joysticks or, alternatively up to two two-stage switches (SW). In order to be able to control all servos, fi rst switch to the

menu ... **"Model type"** (page 82) ... and select "4AIL 4FL" in the "Ailerons/fl aps" line.



### Tail type Motor at C1 Normal None

Aile/flaps 4AIL4FL M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL
In order to also be able to actuate the camber changing fl ap servos 6 + 7 (FL) and 9 + 10 (FL2), if applicable, in the **Multi-fl ap menu**  of the menu ... **"Wing mixers"** (beginning on page 146) ... set the corresponding values for the aileron control of the two camber changing fl ap pairs in the line "  **AIL**  " and in the line " **Ail-tr.** " for the adoption of the aileron trimming:

FL 0% +100% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% +100%

FLAP Normal Diff. 0% Ail-tr AI +77% +77% 0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 0% +55% +55%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Normal Diff. Ail-tr AI

You can check the previous settings in the " **Servo display**  " menu, which you can reach from nearly any menu position by simultaneously pressing the keys  of the left touch pad: The servos 6 + 7, 9 + 10 and 11 + 12 now move for • the aileron control exactly like the servos 2 + 5. The aileron trimming lever also affects all these servos. The C1 joystick only actuates the servo connected to • receiver output 1.

**Attention: With aileron actuation the bars of the "Servo**  **display" move in the same manner and in the opposite manner with camber changing fl**  **ap actuation.**  The necessary fi ne-tuning of the servos is carried out in the ... **"Servo adjustment" menu** (page 90),

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5269 **Detail program description - Control adjust** ... if necessary. In doing so, the basic programming of the eight-fl ap wing is completed. **Camber changing fl ap positioning and fl**  **ight changes** First program two or more fl ight phases in the **"Phase setting"**  and " **Phase assignment"** menus. On this occasion, also change the standard default "Global" to "Phase" in the **"Joystick setting",** page 92 for the effect of the digital trimming, if applicable, on your individual requirements. An example of fl ight phase programming can be found on page 256. **One camber changing fl ap setting per fl**  **ight phase** If one camber changing fl ap position per fl ight phase is suffi cient for you, then in the **Multi-fl ap menu**  " of the ... **"Wing mixers" menu** (beginning on page 146) ... in the line "FL-pos" adjust the camber changing fl ap position(s) of the servo pair "AIL" (2 + 5), "AIL2" (11 + 12), "FL" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) to your preferences in each of the programmed fl ight phases:

–5%

+100% 0% 0% +100%

AILE +33% +100% +100%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI –7% +100% 0% 0% +100%

AILE2 +33% +90% +90%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI

–9% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0% +77% +77%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI

–12% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 0% +55% +55%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI

Notice: Whether positive or negative values must be set in the "FL-pos." line depends on the installation of the servos, among other things. Alternatively, if you would like **to set variable camber changing fl ap positions for**  **each fl ight phase with a proportional rotary control,**  ... you can additionally vary the basic settings of all eight fl aps with a single control specifi c to each fl ight phase. For this purpose, in the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96) ... the inputs 5, 6 and 11 are assigned for each fl ight phase to the same respective control, for example the proportional rotary control CTRL 7, and in parallel, the travel is reduced to approximately 50 % or even less so that the fl aps can be trimmed with the appropriate fi ne-tuning. With travel settings differing from one another, you can also attune the throws of the individual fl ap pairs to one another specifi c to the fl ight phase in

a menu. For this purpose, you only have to switch the corresponding inputs from the standard default "GL" (global) to "PH" (phase):
Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– ––– ––– PH

GL PH

GL

typ Normal

Input 9

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input10 Input11 Input12

––– ––– ––– GL

PH GL

GL

typ Normal270 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Input 5

– travel + +25% +25% +100% +100% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 +25% +25% +100% +100% Thermal

Input 9

– travel + +100% +100%

+25% +100% Input10 Input11 Input12 +100% +100%

+25% +100% Thermal

Notice: With the use of a switch, set the respective "Deviation" of the offset point symmetrically or asymmetrically in the "- Travel +" column.
**Elevator compensator with actuation of the camber changing fl**  **aps** If it should become evident in the fl ight that a correction of the elevator is necessary after setting the fl aps, this correction can be made in the ... **"Wing mixers" menu** (beginning on page 146)

Brake settings AI 0% WING MIXERS

FL EL 0% 0% –––

––– RU Multi-flap menu

Thermal
. For this purpose, select the line "FL  Elev" and enter an appropriate value independent of the fl ight phase. If you have assigned the same control to the inputs 5, 6 and 11 – as specifi ed above – all eight fl aps move simultaneously while the elevator follows the set degree of mixture. **Camber changing fl ap movement on elevator actuation**  Camber changing fl ap movement on elevator actuation – normally only used in "High gear" to increase the agility over the transverse axis – is also carried out in the "Multi-fl ap menu" of the... **"Wing mixers" menu** (beginning on page 146) . Enter the desired fl ight-phase dependent values in the line "Elev -> FL":

–5% +33% 0% 0% +33%

AILE +33% +100% +100%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI

–7% +33% 0% 0% +33%

AILE2 +33% +90% +90%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI –9% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP 0% +77% +77%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI

–12% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 0% +55% +55%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Thermal Diff. Ail-tr AI

In addition to the two camber changing fl ap pairs (servos 6 + 7 and 9 + 10), the two aileron pairs (servos 2 + 5 and 11 + 12) are now tracked with the degree of mixture corresponding to the camber changing fl aps - normally opposite the elevator. **Brake settings**

Notice: The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if "yes" is entered for the currently active fl ight phase in the

" **Model type** " menu, page 82, "Motor to C1 front/rear" and in the "Motor" column of the " **Phase setting** " menu, page 128 . Change the fl ight phase, if applicable.
In the " **Brake settings** " submenu, which is also fl ightphase specifi c, of the " **Wing mixers"** menu, you can make the settings so that the aileron pairs 2 + 5 and271 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 11 + 12 extend upward and the camber changing fl ap pairs "FL" (6 + 7) and "FL2" (9 + 10) extend downward, whereas the elevator is trimmed in parallel to this, see page 162. In order for the brake system to react to the C1 joystick as desired, however, the mixer neutral point (offset) of the brake system must be adjusted accordingly. This takes place in the menu ... **"Model type"** (page 82) After selection of the line "Brake Off." the C1 joystick is moved to the position from which the mixer for the brake system should be set – normally just before the limit position – and after selection of the appropriate value fi eld, the set point is defi ned by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. If the C1 joystick is not moved o ver this point toward the pilot, all mixers of the brake system are carried along according to their respective degree of mixing. Below this point the mixer remains inactive, whereas the selection of "dead travel" is possible. If the model has additional brake fl aps or spoilers and your receiver has another free Output 1, you can also control this through the C1 joystick by connecting the spoiler servo to receiver Output 1. However, if you control the left and right spoiler each with its own servo, and not together, the receiver Output 8 is still available for the connection of the second spoiler servo. In this case, program the connection to the second spoiler servo as described in the section "Servos running in parallel" on page 254. **Reduction of the aileron and camber changing fl ap**  **differentiation** For the improvement of the aileron effect in the crow position, you should automatically suppress any programmed aileron differentiation. For this purpose, use the "Differentiation reduction" in the " **Brake settings** " of the **"Wing mixers"** menu, which continuously reduces the degree of the aileron differentiation to a variable extent when you move the rudders to the crow position with the C1 joystick. For this purpose, see page 162.

.272 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Of course, the general comments regarding the installation and the adjustment of the RC system to a model at the beginning of the wing model programming on page 236 also applies for delta and fl ying wingmodels! Similarly, the comments for test fl ying and fi netuning the settings to the programming of fl ight phases also apply.

left

right

Delta and fl ying wing models differ signifi cantly from a "normal" fl ight model due to their unique characteristic shape and geometry. The differences in the servo arrangement, on the other hand, are more subtle. For example, with "classic" delta/fl ying wing models, only two rudders are normally provided. They are responsible for both "transverse" and "height/depth", like the side rudder/elevator function on a V-tail unit. With more elaborate designs, on the other hand, it may be the case that one (or two) interior rudders have only an elevator function and the exterior ailerons only support the height/depth function, under certain circumstances. Even with a four or six-fl ap wing the use of camber changing fl ap functions and/or even a crow system is now entirely possible. In all these cases, however, the following assignment of the receiver outputs should be used, see also page 57. Unneeded outputs a simply left free: Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Right elevon Right elevon Free or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Free or aux. function Free or left flap / elevator Free or right flap / elevator Free or aux. function or left flap 2 / elevato Free or aux. function or right flap 2 / eleva t

Free or rudder

According to the assignment of the receiver outputs, in the menu ... **"Model type"** (page 82)

None

2AIL

In 1 +100% SEL Delta/fl Tail type Motor at C1

Aile/flaps M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off

... the necessary settings are made:

" **Motor at C1** " "none" or "Throttle min front/rear"

" **Tail type** " "Delta/fl "

" **Aile/FL** " "2AIL" (appears automatically). Insofar as necessary, expand the default "2AIL" with 1, 2 or 4 camber changing fl aps ("1FL", "2FL" or "4FL").

" **Brake** " remains or is only of interest with a delta or fl ying wing aircraft of the type "2 AIL 1/2/4 FL". In this case, see under "Brake offset" on page 83. 

# Delta and fl **ying wing models**

These settings specifying the model type affect the available " **Wing mixers** " fi rst and foremost. Therefore, the options are discussed separately for two-fl ap and multi-fl ap models in the following:
**Delta/fl ying wing of the type: "2AIL"** 

+100% SEL Delta/fl 2AIL None

In 1 Tail type Motor at C1

Aile/flaps M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off

In keeping the standard default "2AIL" in the "Aile./ FL" line, the elevator and aileron control, including the trimming function, are only mixed automatically on the software side. On the transmitter side, however, you can infl uence the effect of the elevator and aileron joystick in the " **Dual Rate / Expo** " menu, page 108. Settings in the menu ... **"Wing mixers"** (beginning on page 146) ... are, if need be, advantageous with the "AIL  FL" mixers and are "played' with a great deal of "feel" for the fl ying behavior with minor differentiation values.

Aile.diff Brake settings +10% AI +50% WING MIXERS

HR WK 0% 0% –––

––– RU

normal
Due to the specifi c idiosyncrasies of this model type, additional settings lead to incompensable moments.273 **Detail program description - Control adjust** FL 0% 0% fl.pos

EL FL 0% 0% 0%

AILE normal Diff. 0%

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP normal 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

0% +100% 0% 0% +100%

FLAP2 normal 0%

FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

Notice: Contrary to the separately set aileron trimming, see below, the trimming is transferred proportionally to the set mixer value with the mixer "Elev  FL".
**The following settings are model-specifi c and may**  **not be adopted without checking that they are correct!**  In the top line of this "Multi-fl ap menu", analogously to "normal" four or six fl ap wings, the effect of the aileron joystick on the aileron, camber changing fl ap and, if applicable on FL2 is set. In the line "Ail-tr." below this, on the other hand, the infl uence of the aileron trimming **Delta/fl ying wing of the type: "2 AIL 1 / 2 / 4 FL"** 

Tail type Motor at C1 None

Aile/flaps M O D E L T Y PE

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL Delta/fl 2AIL4FL

With delta/fl ying wing constructions with more than two fl aps, more moments can be compensated for. For example , the "lifting" moment caused by the raising of the ailerons (= elevator effect) can be compensated for with camber changing fl aps lowered correspondingly wide ( = hydroplane effect). If you decide in favor of this model type and have assigned the receiver outputs in accordance with the connection plan shown above, the aileron function of the two (exterior) aileron servos will function correctly immediately, but not the elevator function of the two aileron servos and, if applicable, the (interior) camber changing fl aps. This is achieved with the specifi cation of "2AIL 1/2/4 FL", if the effect of the elevator control, in the " **Multi-fl ap** 
**menu** " of the ... **"Wing mixer" menu** (beginning on page 146) ... is set appropriately in the "Elev  FL" line for aileron, camber changing fl ap and, if applicable, camber changing fl ap 2: on ailerons and camber changing fl aps. The setting of a differentiation is rather tricker due to the model type and should only take place based on a feel for the fl ight behavior of the model. In the line "  FL  ", for the sake of safety, you should set the standard setting +100 % in the "FL" and, if applicable "FL2" column – as shown – to 0%:

0%

0% 0%

FLAP normal 0%

0% 0% FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

0%

0% 0%

FLAP2 normal 0%

0% 0% FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

In the **"Control adjust"** menu, all inputs are set to "free" by default, but if there is ever confusion in regard to the assignment of a control ... this has little effect at all. The last line, "Elev  FL", has already been addressed earlier in this section. In principle, the author of this manual had programmed a delta model years ago operated with the mc-20 and a crow system as landing assistance ... entirely without tilting moments through correspondingly attuned wing mixers "Brake  aileron" and "Brake  camber changing fl ap", whereby "aileron" refers to the exterior rudder pair and "camber changing fl ap refers to the interior rudder pair.274 **Detail program description - Control adjust** In order to now achieve this with the mx-20 Hott, switch to the " **Brake settings** " of the ... **"Wing mixers" menu** (beginning on page 146)
... and enter the values for the ailerons to be raised and the "fl aps" to be lowered in the "Crow" line so that the occurring moments compensate one another and the altitude of the model remains stable. In the process, however, you should leave the fl aps with enough "play" for the elevator function!!! Therefore, do not utilize the entire servo travel for the crow alone; for example:

Elevat curve BRAKE SETTINGS

AILE Crow D.red +55% 0% 0% –44% 0% 0%

FLAP FLAP2 Normal

You can ignore all other settings in this menu.

Notice: The "Brake settings" menu is switched "off" if "yes" is entered for the currently active fl ight phase in the

" **Model type** " menu, page 82, "Motor to C1 front/rear" and in the "Motor" column of the " **Phase setting** " menu, page 128. Change the fl ight phase, if applicable. Similarly, a modern, tapered fl ying wing air craft can also be operated. With some of these models there are also interior and exterior rudders: The prior is in front of the center of gravity and the latter is behind. A downward throw of the central rudder(s) increases the ascending forces and has an elevator effect. An upward throw has the opposite effect. On the exterior ailerons, on the other hand, the effect is just the opposite: A downward throw shows an elevator effect and vice versa. With appropriate adjustment of the "leading" mixer to the setting of curve mixers in order to achieve a supporting effect from the external rudder pair with only extreme joystick defl ection in the height/depth direction, "everything" is possible here. The author of this manual uses a curve mixer for his model, which is defi ned by a total of four points:

0% 0% Input Output Point C.MIX 9

normal Curve EL 5

0% on

In this example the two interpolation points 1 and 2 are each at 0 % as well as the left edge point at +60 % and the right edge point at -65 %. Then the curve was rounded by pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. In this case: Regardless of which type of servo arrangement was selected, any type of differentiation should be set with caution! On a tail-less model, differentiations show a single-sided height/depth elevator effect, so we urgently recommend beginning at least the initial fl ights with a setting of 0 %! Over the course of the further fl ight testing, under certain circumstances it may be advantageous to experiment with differentiations deviating from zero. With larger models, rudders in the winglets - the "ears" mounted on the wing ends - can be benefi cial. If these are controlled with two separate servos, with the use of one of the mixers in the menu ... **"Cross-mixer"** (page 194) ... the rudder signal can be "split" very easily and even differentiated, whereby the second rudder servo is connected to one of the still free receiver outputs. For a model of the type " **Delta/Nf** ", the receiver output "5" may still be free, and we want to use it in the following:

Typ Diff. zu DUAL MIXER Mixer1 Mixer2 5 RU

Mixer3 Mixer4 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 0% 0% 0% +66%

In this case a differentiation is necessary, because the respective exterior rudder fl ies over a larger curve radius than the interior rudder, which is comparable to the wheel position of the front wheels of a car when traveling on curves.

Notice: The rudder can only be differentiated as programmed above!
If these two rudders should also defl ect outward on the actuation of a brake system with the C1 joystick, this can be achieved, for example, by setting an additional mixer " **C1**  **5** " with an appropriate travel setting. Set the offset according to your habits to "front" (+100 %) or "rear" (-100 %), because the winglet rudder should defl ect outward proportionally on extension. Independently of this, you should, for safety's sake, uncouple the "false" control function from the control signal to which the second servo was connected – even if all inputs are "free" by default in the " **Control adjust** " menu – through the fl ight-independent menu ...275 **Detail program description - Control adjust "Only mix channel"**  (page 193) ... for safety's sake! Corresponding with the above example, therefore, the control channel 5 should be set to "only MIX":

MIX ONLY CHANNEL

only normal 123 4 5 6276 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# F3A model

F3A models are a part of the group of motor-driven winged models. They are powered by a combustion or electric motor. Models with electric motors can be used in both the electric acrobatic class F5A and are also competitive in the international model acrobatic class F3A.

The basic comments and notices for the mechanical installation of a remote steering system, which was already referred to in the fi rst programming example on page 236, also applies, of course, for F3A models and does not need to be mentioned here again. Faultlessly constructed F3A models exhibit a largely neutral fl ying behavior. Ideally, they react with a good nature but precisely to control movements without the individual fl ight axes infl uencing one another. F3A models are controlled with ailerons, elevator and rudders. Normally, each aileron is actuated by a separate servo. There is also the regulation of the drive output of the motor (throttle function) and a retractable landing gear in many cases. The assignment of the channels 1 to 5, therefore, do not differ from the previously described winged models. The additional "Retractable landing gear" function is to be provided on one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 9. It is best to actuate the landing gear with a switch without center position. In addition, another mix offset for the carburetor can – if necessary – be provided. You normally use one of the two proportional rotary controls on the transmitter, which actuates one of the unassigned auxiliary channels.

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron Elevator or 1st elevator Free or 2nd elevator or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Airbrake or throttle servo or speed controller (electric motor) Right aileron Free or aux. function (retracts) Free or aux. function (mixture) Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

With the assignment of auxiliary channels at the transmitter, we recommend making sure that the operating elements required for this are easily within reach, because during fl ight – especially in competition – you have "very little time" to release the joystick. **Programming** Since the basic programming of the transmitter was already described in detail on pages 236 ... 243, only F3A-specifi c tips are added here. In the menu ... **"Servo adjustment"** (page 90)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

... the settings for the servos are carried out. Experience has shown that working with at least 100 % servo throw is benefi cial, because the control precision is signifi cantly better if greater servo travel is used. This should already be taken into account during the construction of the model in the design of the rudder linkages. Check the servo's direction of rotation. The servo center should be adjusted mechanically, insofar as possible. Any corrections can be made on the software side in the third column during the initial test fl ights. Through the menu ... **"Model type"** (page 82 ) ... the idle trim is activated for Channel 1 (normally "rear", because full throttle is "front"). The trimming then only works in the idle direction:

Tail type Motor at C1 Normal Aile/flaps 2AIL M O D E L T Y P E

Brake Off In 1 +100% SEL back

The remaining settings are made or left as shown in the fi gure.277 **Detail program description - Control adjust After test-fl**  **ying and trimming of the model,** we recommend reducing the trim travel for the elevator and ailerons The model has signifi cantly less of a reaction to a movement of the trim lever. "Overtrimming" can be avoided, because with full trim travel, under certain circumstances, the movement by just one trimming step can have too strong of an effect: Therefore, the model which previously pulled slightly to the left, hangs somewhat to the right after the trimming. For this purpose, switch to the menu ... **"Joystick setting"** (page 92) ... and reduce the number of trimming steps accordingly in the "St" column:

Ch.1 Aile Elev

Tr + time 4 2 2 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s Rudd 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s GL GL GL GL

St 2

It may also be necessary to assign a corresponding operating element to a specifi c input for the activation of the retractable landing gear and the mixer movement through the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 96) ... such as one of the ON/OFF switches to the Input 6 for the landing gear and one of the proportional rotary controls, e.g. CTRL 7, to the Input 7. However, since it involves fl ight-phase independent settings, leave the standard default "GL" in the "Type" column: +33%

+33% +33% Ail Ele Rud EXPO –––

–––

SEL normal –––

(Some experts even use up to a +60 % exponential degree.) Since (some) combustion motors do not react linearly to movements of the throttle joystick, through the menu ...
**"Channel 1 curve"** (page 116) ... a "bowed" or, in other words, non-linear throttle curve can be set. Four-cycle motors with Roots pumps, in particular, such as OS Max FS 120, require a steep ascension of the curve in the lower speed range. However, the corresponding values must be adapted. The C1 control curve for the motor could appear as follows:

Input Output Point 1 –50% 0% 0% C1

normal Curve Curve on

Only three interpolation points, "L" at -100 %, "H" at +100 % and "1" at -50 % give the control travel the rounded curve above. Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input 6 Input 7 Input 8

––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ Ct7 3

The control travel of the operating elements must be adapted and can also be reversed with a negative travel setting.

Notice: A delay time for the extension and retraction can be specifi ed for the retractable landing gear, which does not work, however, for the landing gear servo C 713 MG, Order No. **3887**

. F3A models fl y comparatively fast and thus react "harshly" to the control movements of the servos. However, since small control movements and corrections are not optically perceptible, because this results in inevitable point deductions in competition, we recommend setting an exponential control characteristic of the joystick. For this purpose, switch to the menu ... **" Dual Rate / Expo "** (page 108) Experience has shown positive results with values of approx. + 30 % on the ailerons, elevator and rudders, which you set in the right column with the arrow keys. In order to be able to control the F3A model to run smoothly and cleanly:278 **Detail program description - Control adjust Basic procedure:**  Move the C1 joystick and, along with it, the vertical • line in the graphic display toward idle to -50 % control travel and briefl y press the central **SET**key of the right touch pad. In order to attain the curve shape shown, raise • this point with the arrow keys to approx. 0 % in the inverse value fi eld of the "Point" line. Then round the characteristic curve by moving the • marking frame up to the "Curve" line, briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad and then changing the value from "Off" to "On" with the arrow keys. If additional interpolation points between the left ("L") and right ("H") end are necessary, repeat Steps 2 and 3 analogously. Since F3A models normally have two aileron servos, experience has shown that it is benefi cial to move both ailerons upward somewhat when landing. In the process, the model usually fl ies somewhat slower and, fi rst and foremost, more steadily for the landing. For this reason, it is necessary to program mixers through the

menu ...
**"Free mixers"** (page 181) ... accordingly. The ailerons are extended as landing assistance depending on the position of the throttle stick, starting from approximately half throttle toward idle. The further the joystick is moved toward idle, the more the ailerons defl ect upward. Just the opposite applies when "throttling"; the ailerons are retracted again in order to prevent a sudden rise of the model. In order to prevent the model from climbing with the aileron landing fl aps extended, the elevator must be mixed in somewhat. For this purpose, set the two linear mixers shown in the following display. The activation of the mixers takes place with one and the same switch, such as SW 8, to which both mixers must be assigned with identical switching direction.

ty fr to M1 M2 M3 C1 5 C1 EL

M4 M5 ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? ?? 8 8

Then switch to the second respective display screen in order to adjust the respective mixing degrees. In both cases the mixer neutral point is at the C1 control center. Enter 0 % above the control center after selection of the **ASY**fi eld for both mixers and below the control center toward idle for: MIX 1: -60 % ... -80 % and MIX 2: -5 % ... -10 % . Example L.MIX 1:

0%

0% 0%

FLAP normal 0%

0% 0% FL fl.pos

EL FL Diff.

With this, the base setup model of an F3A model is concluded. **Compensation of model-specifi c errors** Unfortunately, there are nearly always minor modelspecifi c "errors" through the mixers of a computer remote control which must be compensated for. However, before you begin with these settings, it should be ensured that the model is faultlessly constructed, optimally balanced over the longitudinal and transverse axes and the down thrust and side thrust are correct.

**Infl**

**uence of longitudinal and transverse axes by the rudder**  The actuation of the rudder often infl uences the behavior of the longitudinal and transverse axes. This is particularly disruptive in so-called knife-edge fl ying, in which the lift of the model with the rudder defl ected should be created by the fuselage alone. In the process, the model can rotate and change directions as though it were controlled with the ailerons and elevator. Therefore, a correction over the transverse axis (elevator) and/ or the longitudinal axis (ailerons) must be made, if applicable. This can also be carried out with the " **Free mixers** " of mx-20 HoTT. If, for example, the model rotates away to the right over the longitudinal axis with the rudder extended in knife-edge fl ying, the aileron can be defl ected to the left with the mixer. Changes in direction over the transverse axis can be performed analogously with a mixer on the elevator: Correction over the transverse axis (elevator) • L.Mix 3: "Rudd  Elev" Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in fl ight. Correction over the longitudinal axis (aileron) • L.Mix 4: "Rudd  AIL"279 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Asymmetric setting. The appropriate values must be tested in fl ight. Relatively small mixer values are usually suffi cient in this case, the range lies below 10 %, but can vary from model to model. With the use of curve mixers, the mix ratios can be adapted even more precisely to the corresponding throw of the rudder. Again, no values are indicated for this, because this would be model-specifi c.

**Vertical ascent and descent** Some models have a tendency to deviate from the ideal line in vertical ascents and descents. In order to compensate for this, it is necessary to have a center position of the elevator dependent on the throttle joystick position. If, for example, the model begins to hold off on its own in the vertical descent with a throttled motor, some elevator must be mixed in at this throttle position. For this purpose, program a free mixer "C1  Elev". The corresponding mixer values are normally under 5% and must also be tested in fl ight. **Turning away over the longitudinal axis in idle** If the throttle is reduced, the model may begin to turn away over the longitudinal axis in idle. This can be counteracted with the aileron. However, the more elegant solution is to correct this effect with a free mixer "C1  Ail". The input values here are usually very low (approx. 3 %) and the settings should be made in calm weather. It often suffi ces to only use the mixer between half throttle and idle. Therefore program the mixer asymmetrically, if applicable. **Turning away with the ailerons/landing fl aps**  **extended** If you move the ailerons upward for the landing, the result is often a turning away over the longitudinal axis due to various servo paths of the aileron servos or due to design precisions. Therefore, the model begins to automatically hang the left or right wing. This is also easy to compensate for with a mixer "C1  AIL" depending on the position of the ailerons/landing fl aps. The mixer must be switched on and off with the same switch with which you can switch the aileron/landing fl ap function on and off (see previous page). Therefore, it only works with the aileron/landing fl ap function activated. The appropriate value must be tested in fl ight. One additional comment regarding ... **"FAIL-SAFE setting"** You utilize the safety potential of this option by the safety potential by programming at least the motor throttle position for combustion models to idle and the motor function for electrically powered models to stop for a Fail-Safe case. Then, in the event of a failure, the model cannot become independent as easily and cause property damage or even personal injury. If you additionally program the fail-safe positions of the rudders to that the model fl ies in gently sinking circles in the event of a failure, there is a good chance that the model even lands relatively gently on its own in the event of a continuing connection failure. You also have suffi cient time to re-establish the connection if the entire 2.4 GHz frequency band is temporarily disrupted. In the receiver's condition as supplied, however, the servos maintain their last validly recognized position ("hold") in the event of a fail-safe situation. As described on page 196, you can defi ne a "Fail-safe position" for each of the individual servo outputs of your receiver (Fail-safe mode). **Summary** The settings described on this page are especially useful for the "expert" who would like to have an entirely neutral, precisely fl ying F3A model acrobatic model at his or her disposal. It should be mentioned this takes a lot of time, effort, instinct and know-how. Experts even program during the fl ight. To do this, however, is not suggested for an advanced beginner who ventures into an F3A acrobatic model. It would be best to turn to an experienced pilot and carry out the settings step by step until the model has the desired neutrality in its fl ight behavior. Then the pilot can begin to learn the not always easy to perform acrobatic fi gures with a model which fl ies faultlessly.280 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 

# Helicopter models

With this programming example, you must have already covered the description of the individual menus and you must be familiar with the use of the transmitter. In addition, the helicopter's mechanical construction should correspond exactly to the corresponding manual. The electronic capabilities of the transmitter should by no means be used to straighten out rough mechanical imprecision. As the case often is in life, there are also various ways and possibilities of achieving a specifi c goal with the programming of the mx-20 HoTT. The following example should provide you with a clearer structure for logical programming. If there are multiple possibilities, the simplest and most clearly arranged solutions are recommended fi rst. In order for the helicopter to function faultlessly later on, you are, of course, free to try out other solutions which may be better for you.

The programming example is based on the clockwiserotating STARLET 50 helicopter from Graupner with three pivot points each offset 120° of the swashplate type "3sv(2 Roll)", beginner adjustment without increased throttle curve; without heading-lock gyro system and without transmitter-side gyro infl uence of the "normal operating mode" and without speed regulator. This simple program was also consciously selected to demonstrate that a helicopter which fl ies really well can also be attained with relatively little (programming) effort. However, we do not want to dispense entirely with the enhancement possibilities: Therefore, after the basic description, you will fi nd adjustment information for the gyro effect, the speed regulators and for the fl ight-phase programming.

Notice: If you are not interested in the combustion helicopter described here, but a electric helicopter, please continue reading anyhow! With the exception of the omitted idle settings, you can practically adopt most of the settings described in the following unchanged. Some basic settings of the transmitter are necessary with the initial commissioning. For this purpose, switch to the menu ... **"General settings** (page 224)

Batterie type Batterie warning

Touch Sense Contrast

Ni-MH Display light

Region Voice volume 2 4.7V

0

Euro 3 unlim.

Beep volume 3 BASIC SETTINGS Own Stick mode 1 DSC Output PPM10 Pitch min back

Power-on beep yes

Power on warn. unlim

... and start with the entry of the " **Owner name** ". Select the characters for this from an extensive list on the second display screen, which you can reach through the symbol by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad:
!"#$%&’()+,–./012 3456789:;

Owner H-J Sand b FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`a b cdefghijk ?@ABCDE

Select the default " **Stick mode** " according to the criteria described on page 224. The same applies for the default " **DSC output** ". The default " **Pitch min** " is based on your control habits. With the creation of a new model memory you can281 **Detail program description - Control adjust** change these in the adopted defaults " **Stick mode** ",

" **DSC output** " and " **Pitch front/rear** " as well as within the respective model memory location. The setting the " **Contrast** " line determines the legibility of the display under poor light conditions and the setting in the " **Display light** " line determines how long the display lighting remains illuminated after the transmitter is switched on or after the last key actuation. With " **Power-on beep yes/no** " you determine whether the transmitter plays a recognition melody when switching on. In the " **Battery type** " line you specify whether the transmitter is supplied with current from a "NiMH" or a "LiPo" battery, and in the " **Battery warning** " line below it, you determine the voltage at which the low-voltage warning of the transmitter should trigger. Do not enter a value that is too low here, so you have enough time to land your helicopter. In the " **Power-on warn.** " line you can adjust how long the transmitter should wait after the last actuation of an operating element until it alerts you that it is still switched on with optical and acoustic warning signals. With the values of the lines " **Touch sense** ", " **Voice volume**  " and " **Signal volume** ", you can adjust the corresponding behavior of the transmitter to your requirements. And, in the event that you (would like to) commission your transmitter in France, the setting in the

" **Region** " line is important: The legal regulations of this country require the selection of "France" instead of the default setting "Euro". If these settings are activated, it continues with the

menu ...
**"Model select"** (page 63) Select a free storage location with the arrow keys ... 03 04 05  free  02 01

06 R12

 free   free   free   free 

...and open this by briefl y pressing the central **SET** key of the right touch pad. In the subsequently opening display, with the key  of the left or right touch pad, select... Select model typ

... the "Heli" model type. The display immediately switches to the base screen if you confi rm this selection by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad.
Notice: If the "Select model type" option has been opened, • the process cannot be canceled. Even if you switch off the transmitter, this selection must be made! In any case, you can undo this by subsequently deleting the respective model memory. If the "Throttle too high" warning appears, this can • be deleted by turning the proportional rotary control CTRL 6 counterclockwise until its limit. If battery voltage is too low, the model switchover • cannot be made due to reasons of safety. An appropriate message will appear in the screen: not possible now voltage too low
Once this fi rst hurdle is cleared, the connection of the receiver built into the model at this model memory must be made in the menu ... **"Base setup model"** (page 74 ... 80) . For this purpose, switch to the line " **RF bind** ":

1 n/a n/a

BD1 Starlet

BD2

E12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

RF transmit OFF

Notice: After confi rmation of the model selection in the base screen, if you confi rm the message appearing in the screen for a few seconds ...

BIND N/A OK
... by pressing the **SET**key of the right touch pad, you automatically come to this line. In the line"RF Bind." you delete the connection process between model memory and receiver, as described in detail on page 74. Otherwise, you cannot address the receiver. Afterwards, using the arrow keys of the  left or right four-way pad, move up to the fi rst line and begin with the actual model programming in the " **Mod. Name** " line: Now enter an appropriate name for the model memory,282 **Detail program description - Control adjust** 99sec PPM10 8I ON

DSC Output Autorotation RF transmit BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

RF Range Test

The selected switch should be in a location on the transmitter which is easily within reach – without releasing a joystick – e. g. above the pitch joystick.

Notice: More more information about the setting of this "emergency shutoff", see the beginning of the second following double-page.
Another tip: Make a habit of giving all switches a common switch-on direction; then a quick glance over the transmitter prior to the fl ight should suffi ce – all switches off. The possible settings of the lines " **Automatic C1 position**  " and " **Motor stop** " are not of interest at fi rst. Additional settings specifi c to helicopters are made in the menu ... **"Helicopter type"** (page 86)
Under " **Swashplate type** ", select the control of the swashplate and/or the pitch function. In this example: "3Sv(2rol)". The line **Linear swashpl.** " is not of interest at fi rst. In the line " **Rotor direct** " you defi ne whether the rotor - as viewed from above - rotates to the right or left. In other words, whether it rotates counterclockwise or clockwise. In this example "right". With the default " **Pitch min** " adopted from the " **General** ...

1 n/a bind

BD2 BD1 n/a R12 Mod.name Stick mode RF BIND BASIC SETTINGS, MODEL

Rcv Ch Map

... which is comprised of the characters available for selection on the second screen of the " **Mod. Name** " line:
!"#$%&’()+,–./012 3456789:;

Mod Name STAR L FGHIJK L MNOPQRSTUVWX YZ[¥]^_`abcdefghijk ?@ABCDE

After entering the " **Model name** " the specifi cations for the " **Stick mode** " and " **DSC output** " adopted from the

" **General settings** " are checked again, for which you can change the storage location, if applicable. An additional option is activated in the line

" **Autorotation** ". Even if you are not an advanced pilot, the autorotation switch should at least be set an an emergency shutoff switch for the motor. For this purpose, select the line " **Autorotation** ", activate the switch assignment by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad and move one of the twostage switches, e. g. SW 8, to the ON position: **settings** ", it is checked whether the entry "front" or "back" corresponds to your habits and changed, if applicable:

3Sv(2rol)

SEL Linear. swashpl. Swashplate

no Rotor direct right HELI TYPE

Pitch min. back

" **Expo thro lim.** " in the bottom line of this display is not of interest yet. By now, the servos should be plugged into the receiver in the intended sequence:

Receiver power supply

Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo Pitch-axis 1 servo Free or speed governor or aux. function

Receiver power supply

Collective pitch or roll 2 or Pitch-axis 2 servo Free or aux. function Throttle servo or speed controller Gyro gain Free or aux. function Free or aux. function

Notice: Please note that with the newer Graupner mc and
mx remote control systems the fi rst pitch servo and the throttle servo are reversed when compared with the older systems. The degrees of mixing and mixing directions of the swashplate servos for pitch, roll and nick are already preadjusted to +61 % in the menu ...283 **Detail program description - Control adjust "Swashplate mixer"**  (page 196)

SWASH MIXER Pitch Roll Nick +61% +61% +61%

SEL
... If the swashplate mixer should not follow the joystick movements properly, fi rst change the mixing directions from "+" to "-" before you change the servo directions in the menu ... **"Servo adjustment"** (page 90)

S1 S2 S3

Rev cent + trv 0% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 0% 0% 100% 100% 100% 100% S4 S5

... In this menu you can also adjust the travel and the directions of the individual servos. As a basic rule you should strive to maintain the servo travel 100 % in order to attain the best resolution and positioning precision. The direction of travel is determined with "Rev." and, in the process, make sure that the direction is correct. The tail rotor servo must run so that the nose (!) of the helicopter follows the tail joystick direction. In the menu ... **"Joystick setting"** (page 94)

Thr. Roll Nick

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Tail 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s TL GL GL GL

St ... adjust the incremental width for each "click" of the digital trim keys in the " **St** " column. The C1 trimming only affects the throttle servo for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go into the particulars of this trimming ("cut-off trim") once again. For this purpose, please refer to page 54. (Thanks to the digital trimming, trim values can be automatically saved with a model changeover and with the mx-20 HoTT and even with a change of the fl ight phase). An additional setting which is specifi c to helicopters can also be made in this menu in which you determine which function the trim slider on the pitch joystick should have. For this purpose, the setting " **TL** " is selected or left in the "Throttle" line. In doing so, the trim lever corresponds to the accustomed idle trim. If you "slide" it all the way to the front, the throttle limiter seamlessly adopts the throttle release later, which is assigned to "Th.L.12" in the ... **""Control adjust"** menu (page 100 ... 107)

Input 9

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Input Input Th.L.12 Ct6 ––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal 10 11

... whereas "free" is specifi ed for all other inputs. This input, "Th.L.12" serves as the **throttle limiter** . It only has an effect on output "6", where the throttle servo is located. The left proportional rotary control CTRL 6 is assigned to the throttle limiter by default. Once again, as a reminder: W • ith the user of the "throttle limiter" function, you do not have to program a fl ight phase "throttle preselection". The throttle limiter does not control the throttle servo; • it only limits the travel of the throttle servo in the full throttle direction according to its position. In general, the throttle servo is controlled through the throttle curve(s) set in the " **Helicopter mix** ", which is why Input 6 must be left "free". In the respect, refer also to the pages 168 to 170 of the manual. The C1 trimming also affects only the throttle servo • for the helicopter. At this point there is no need to go into the particulars of this trimming ("cut-off trim") once again. For this purpose, please refer to page 54. (Thanks to the digital trimming, trim can be automatically saved values with a model changeover as well as with a change of the fl ight phase). A detailed description of the idle run base setup • model and the adjustment of idle and throttle limit can be found beginning on page 104.284 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Then switch to the "Travel" column with the arrow keys  of the left or right touch pad and increase the now inversely highlighted value from +100 % to +125 % with a fully opened throttle limiter after briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad:

– travel + +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% +100% normal Input 9 Input10 Input Th.L.12 +125% 11

In doing so, it is assured that the throttle limiter releases the entire throttle travel with the pitch joystick later during fl ight. Adjustment notice for electric helicopters: Since electric drives do not, by nature, require an idle setting, in the scope of the base setup of an electrically driven helicopter it must only be ensured that the regulating range of the throttle limiter safely exceeds and undercuts the normally reached adjustment range of the motor control of -100% to +100 %. If necessary, therefore, the adjustment of the "travel" setting of the throttle limiter described above must be modifi ed accordingly, for example, to symmetric 110 %. The further adjustment, however, can take place analogously to the combustion helicopter described here. With this process, you have not carried out the basic settings for the transmitter as they are needed again later for further model programming. The actual helicopter-specifi c settings take place primarily in the menu ... **""Helicopter mix"** (page 164 ... 179)

C1 C1 Pitch Throttle Tail Tail 0% Roll 0% Throttle

Roll Throttle Tail Nick Nick Throttle Tail

Swash rotation Swash limiter 0% 0% 0%

0° OFF Normal Gyro suppress 0%

The "Pitch" function appears right in the fi rst line. By pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, you switch to the corresponding submenu. The graphic representation of the pitch curve appears here; it is initially only defi ned by the points "L" and "H":

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% Pitch

normal Curve off

Now place point "1" in the center by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad: Input Output Point 1 0% 0% Pitch

normal Curve off

0%

Always try to make due with these three points initially; more points can "over-complicate" the matter and are more of a burden at this point. The reference point for the hovering should generally be the mechanical center position of the pitch joystick, because this position comes closest to the normal control feel. Although the curve adjustment enables other settings, you must know exactly what you are doing. First set the pitch joystick in the center. The servos which you had previously set according to manufacturer specifi cations have their levers at positioned perpendicularly to the servo housing (normally). The hovering pitch value of 4 ° to 5 ° is now mechanically set at the control levers for the blades. In principle, all known helicopters fl y with this setting. Then move the pitch joystick towards maximum pitch until the limit position. (The vertical line shows you the current joystick position.) Now change point "H" of the pitch curve with the arrow keys of the right touch pad so that the pitch maximum is approximately 9 ° at the rotor blades of the main rotor. With a value of approximately +50 % this may be the case:285 **Detail program description - Control adjust** H +100% +50% Pitch

normal +50% Input Output Point Curve off

Notice: A rotor adjustment gauge, such as the Graupner adjustment gauge, Order No. **61**is very useful in reading the angle. Now move the pitch joystick toward the pitch minimum position until its limit position. Depending on the ability of the pilot, adjust the value of point "L" so that the blade angle of approach is 0 to -4 °. Now a slightly pitched line arises at the hovering points, the so-called pitch curve, which can appear as follows:

L –100% –75% Pitch

normal –75% Input Output Point Curve off

Now you can, if you like, move the marking frame upward with the arrow keys to the "Curve" line and after activation of the value fi eld by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, set the curve function of the mixer to "on". L –100% –75% Pitch

normal –75% on Input Output Point Curve

If you now switch to autorotation phase – at the bottom left of the display the fl ight phase name "Autorot" appears – the "old" pitch curve is again:

? 0% 0% 0% Pitch

Autorot Input Output Point Curve off

Now carry out the same setting as before in the normal phase. Only at point "H" – at pitch maximum – the pitch angle can be increased by approximately 2 °. In doing so, you will have somewhat more of an angle to catch the model later on (1). After setting the pitch curve, move the autorotation switch back and return to the helicopter mixer menu selection by briefl y pressing the central **ESC** key of the left touch pad. From there, switch to the line

" **C1**  **Thro** " in order to adjust the throttle curve. First the adjustment range of the idle trim must be adjusted with the throttle curve. For this purpose, move the pitch joystick to its minimum position and then set point "L' to approximately -65 %. –100% –65% C1 Throttle

normal L –65% Input Output Point Curve off

With the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim completely open, move the pitch joystick back and forth somewhat at the minimum limit position. The throttle servo may not move with it in the process. No you have established a seamless transition from the idle trim to the throttle curve. The further settings along the throttle curve must be carried out later in fl ight. If you switch from this graphic to the autorotation phase for testing purposes, the following appears instead of the accustomed representation:

OFF C1 Throttle

Autorot

That means that this mixer is switched off and the throttle servo is switched to a fi xed value, which can be adjusted as follows: Return to the menu list by pressing **ESC** . As long as you are still in the autorotation phase, new submenus are listed; specifi cally:286 **Detail program description - Control adjust** Pitch Thr setting AR Tailoffset AR Gyro suppress 0% Swash rotation 0° OFF Autorot –90% 0%

Swash limiter

The line "Thr. setting AR" is important. Enter the value to the right depending on the servo direction to either approximately +125 % or -125 %.

0% 0°

Autorot 0%

SEL –125% Pitch Thr setting AR Tailoffset AR Gyro suppress Swash rotation OFF Swash limiter

In doing so, the motor is safely switched off in the autorotation phase (in case of emergency). Later, when you have gained enough experience to practice the autorotation fl ight, a more stable idle can be entered here. Adjustment notice for electric helicopters: Since the motor must also be shut off for electrically powered helicopters in case of an emergency, this setting is adopted without change. The further submenus are not important at the moment. By switching off "autorotation", it returns to the fi rst menu list. Select the setting screen of " **C1**  **Tail** " in order to adjust the static torque balance at the tail rotor. In this case, also work with a maximum of three interpolation points; everything else is reserved for the experienced pilot. For this purpose, change the presetting intended for heading lock systems from a uniform 0 % at point "L" (pitch minimum) to -30 % and at the opposite end, at point "H" to +30 % (pitch maximum). These values may have to be corrected in fl ight. If applicable, you must also set point "1" in the center when doing so:

0% 0% 0% Tail C1

Input Output Point Normal Curve off

?

Now, for testing purposes, switch back to the autorotation phase. Here the setting is also deactivated; the tail servo no longer reacts to pitch movements (no torque usually arises when the main rotor is not powered). All additional interpolation points are not currently of importance yet. If, contrary to the specifi cation, the gyro has a transmitter-side sensitivity setting, you still need a free proportional control, e.g. CTRL 7. In the menu ... **"Control adjust"** (page 100 ... 107) ... you can assign this to the "Gyr" input. Activate the control assignment by briefl y pressing the central **SET** key of the right touch pad and then turning the rotary control until its control number appears in the display: Input 5

offset 0% 0% 0% –––

0% Throt Gyro Input 8

––– ––– GL

GL GL

GL

typ normal 6 7 Ct7

Conclude this entry by briefl y pressing the **ESC** key of the left touch pad and then switch with the arrow key  of the left or right touch pad to the "- Travel +" column. After pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad, the maximum sensitivity of the gyro, e. g. 50 %, can now be set in the inverse value fi eld. For this purpose, rotate the selected control to the corresponding screen so that only one value fi eld is represented inversely:

– travel + +100% +100%

+100% +100% +100% +100% +100% Normal Input 5 Throt Gyro Input 8 6 7 +50%

Now you have a fi xed value as long as the rotary control is at the right limit position. The correct value must be adjusted in fl ight. **In the process, however, always observe the adjustment instructions accompanying your gyro**  **sensor, because your helicopter will not be able to fl**  **y otherwise!** To conclude this initial programming, a few words should be mentioned about the menu ...287 **Detail program description - Control adjust "Channel 1 curve"**  (page 119)

Input Output Point ? 0% 0% 0% C1

normal Curve Curve off

This function is a type of "convenient exponential curve" for the throttle/pitch joystick and the mixer functions connected to it. If ever , this curve should only be applied "cautiously" at the very end, when all adjustments have been made. It should never be used for the throttle/pitch adjustment! The overlappings result in "nasty" effects.

With this, all helicopter-specifi c settings which can be made on the "workbench" are now completed. The further fi ne-tuning must take place in fl ight. The fl ight-tested, (hopefully) minor (digital) trim settings are automatically saved. Larger deviations should fi rst be mechanically adjusted or adjusted according to the previously discussed settings. **Further settings** Following this programming example, you have provided a helicopter with a basic adjustment for the hovering training and simple trips. Depending on your knowledge and experience as a pilot, additional functions can, of course, also be activated. If you want to fl y at different speeds and with different trimming, you activate the so-called "fl ight phases", which can be called with assigned switches as an alternative to the previously described "normal phase". For this purpose, fi rst open the menu ... **"Phase setting"** (page 132) ... whereby the symbols appearing in the second column after the switch assignment in the " **Phase assignment**  " menu have the following meanings: "–": No phase switch available "+": Phase switch available

"  ": Currently active phase

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4 Autorot

–

– – + Auto


However, you should consider beforehand whether you want to activate the up to six additional fl ight phases with single switches or, more logically, with three-stage switches in addition to the autorotation phase. The latter possibility is more logical and usually more clearly laid out. In the upper fi gure the line " **Autorot** " is already selected. When activated, the autorotation phase always has precedence over any other phases you assign switches to. However, in the "Name" column you fi rst assign "meaningful" names to Phases 1 to 3, which are adopted from a list. These identifi cations serve for the better differentiation and are shown later in the base screen and for all fl ight-phase dependent menus, for example:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name ph.Tim. Pha4  +

+ Normal Hover

–

– 0.1s 0.1s 0.1s

0.1s 0.1s Speed Autorot Auto

Then, in the fourth column, enter the switching time with which the FROM phase should switch TO the next respective phase. Approximately 1 s should suffi ce:

Pha1 Pha2 Pha3

Name Sw.time Pha4  +

+ Normal Hover

–

– 1.1s 1.1s 5.0s

0.1s Speed Autorot Auto

1.1s

This value can also be adjusted later according to your personal preferences. Please observe in the process that TO the autorotation phase, whose name is defi ned as " **Autorot** ", is switched without a time delay. If necessary, enter the time with which a change FROM the autorotation phase to a different phase should be affected. In order to be able to switch between the individual fl ight phases, the assignment of the individual switches or the three-stage switch is necessary.288 **Detail program description - Control adjust** The assignment of the switch takes place in the menu ... **"Phase assignment"** (page 134) Under "C" and "D" assign the three-stage switches SW 4 + 5, for example:

PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 4 5 prior combi

Now you must assign the corresponding fl ight phase from the **"Phase setting"** menu to the respective switch position. Since you have already assigned names, the name of the phase "1 Normal" appears to the right in the display. If the already assigned autorotation switch was activated, the following warning message appears in the display:

PHASE ASSIGNMENT

A B C D E F

1 Normal 2 4 5 prior combi Autorot

As a reminder: The autorotation phase has absolute precedence. Therefore, move the autorotation switch back and thenmove the selected switch, in our example the threestage switch SW 4 + 5, to the one limit position. Then switch to the bottom right with the arrow keys and activate this input fi eld: A B C D E F 2 4 5

1 Normal PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior combi

Now select the desired fl ight phase for this switch position - for example, "2 Hover" ...

A B C D E F 2 4 5

2 Hover PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior combi

... and confi rm this selection by briefl y pressing the central **SET**key of the right touch pad or move the switch to the other limit position and defi ne the name for this switch position, such as "3 Speed".

A B C D E F 2 4 5

3 Speed PHASE ASSIGNMENT prior combi

The switch center then receives the name "1 Normal" as shown above to the left.

Notice: Exchanged or different name assignments for the three switch positions are, of course, also possible. For example, with the use of one of the rotational speed controllers programmed according to the description in the next column, a sequences like "normal / hover / acro" would be logical. The model settings made before the assignment of a phase switch are now in the fl ight phase "Normal". This is the phase which is called after the above defi nition in the switch center position. This normal setting, which was already tested in fl ight, can be copied to a different fl ight phase so that fl ying can take place in the same manner in every phase at fi rst. For this purpose, use the menu ... **"Copy / Erase"** (page 64)

=>

=>
=>
=>

=> Copy flight phase Erase model Copy model–>model Export to SD Import from SD

With the operation of the fl ight phases, it is possible to carry out changes in the phase-dependent menu for each individual phase. Since the mx-20 HoTT has digital trimming, in addition to the fl ight-phase dependent menu settings in the helicopter program, the trim positions of roll, nick and tail rotor joystick are also saved depending on the fl ight phase, see menu **"Joystick setting"** page 94:

Thr. Roll Nick

Tr + time 4 4 4 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 4 0.0s Tail 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s TL GL GL GL

St289 **Detail program description - Control adjust Enhancement recommendation:**  **Rotational speed regulator** At some point in time you may want to install a rotational speed regulator in the helicopter, such as mc-Heli-Control, in order to be able to fl y with speeds automatically kept at a constant. In the process, it is logical to couple the individual rotational speeds with the fl ight phases so that further additional adjustments are possible. It is mandatory for the transmitter-side programming that the rotational speed regulator was installed and programmed according to the manufacturer's instructions. Of course, the mx-20 HoTT also enables further possibilities for the realization of different speeds in the individual phases. For a practical recommendation with maintenance of the throttle limiter function, see the description beginning on page 169.

If you have adjusted your helicopter according to this programming principle, it is not yet a competition helicopter, but it already permits sophisticated fl ying. You should only activate additional functions if the model fl ies faultlessly so that the (desired) improvements are also easy to follow. Insofar as possible, activate individual functions on an individual basis so that you can actually recognize and attribute the change. Bear in mind that it is not the quantity of functions used that distinguishes good pilots, but what they can do in terms of fl ying with relatively little.290 **Appendix Vario module**  **Graupner HoTT**  Order No. **33601**
Vario with altitude signals and 5 ascend and descend signal tones each, altitude display and memory of the min. and max. altitude

Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of • ascend and descend in two stages

Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always • Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once • The Vario sensor can be connected directly at the telemetry input of • the receiver.

Technical data

Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m • Resolution: 0.1 m • Vario sensitivity: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3 s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/1 s, 3 m/s • programmable by tone

Average calculation: 4 - 20 measurements programmable per • measurement value **PRX (Power for Receiver)** Order No. **4136**
Highly developed, stabilized receiver current supply with intelligent power management. The unit ensures a stabilized and adjustable current supply of the receiver in order to increase the reliability of the current supply even further. Suitable for various receiver batteries in order to guarantee an uncomplicated and wide range of application. Even if the battery voltage is only interrupted for a short time, this is recorded and displayed in order to counteract an under-dimensioning or even the failure of the receiver battery with this notice. • For the operation of one or two receiver batteries.

(Simultaneous discharge with the operation of two batteries) • Suitable for fi ve or six-cell NiMH or two -cell LiPo or LiFe batteries.

Graupner /JR, G3.5, G2 and BEC plug systems. • Three adjustable levels for the output voltage for the supply of the

receiver (5.1V / 5.5V / 5.9V). • Two ultra-bright LEDs show the operating statuses of Battery 1 and

Battery 2 separately. • Integrated high-quality On/Off switch • High-current resistant design • Flatter design of the switch and the LEDS in order to not infl uence

the appearance and characteristics of the model. • Linear layout of fastening lugs, LEDs and switches for a simple

installation using an accompanying hole template. **GPS/Vario module Graupner**  **HoTT** Order No. **33600**
Vario with altitude signals and and fi ve ascend and descend signal tones as well as integrated GPS with range fi nding, distance measurement, display of the fl ight direction and the coordinates

Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of • ascend and descend in two stages

Altitude display and memory of the min. and max. altitude. • Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always • Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once • The GPS/Vario sensor can be connected directly at the telemetry • input of the receiver.

Vario technical data:

Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m • Resolution: 0.1 m • Vario sensitivity: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3 s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/1 s, 3 m/s • programmable by tone

Average calculation: 4 - 20 measurements programmable per • measurement value 

# Appendix291 **Appendix General Engine-Module**  **Graupner HoTT**  Order No. **33610**

General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with combustion or electric motor:

2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds • for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature

Single cell measurement with warning thresholds for min. voltage • Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds • for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current

Programmable current limiting • Current limiting with shunt resistors 2 x 1 mOhm parallel = 0.5 mOhm • Rotational speed measurement and warning thresholds for min. and • max. rotational speed

Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25 % increments • (after software update).

Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always • Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once • 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120 °C or 200 °C and voltage • measurement up to 80 V DC

1x rotational speed measurement up to 100,000 rpm with a two• blade propeller

1x speed controller/servo input, 1x rotational speed regulatio • n input, 1x speed controller/servo output for rotational speed

regulation 1x current, voltage and capacity measurement up to 40 A (pulse 1 s • up to 60 A) and up to 30 V

1x single cell monitoring for 2 - 6S lithium batteries (LiPo, LiIo, LiFe) • etc.; see www.graupner.de for the respective product • **General Air-Module Graupner**  **HoTT** Order No. **33611**

General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with combustion or electric motor:

Vario with altitude signals and ascend and descend signals and • additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of

ascend and descend in two stages Altitude display (-500 ... +3000 m) and memory of the min. and max. • altitude.

2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds • for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature

Single cell measurement with warning thresholds for min. voltage • Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds • for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current

Rotational speed measurement with rotational speed regulation • (programmable) and warning thresholds for min. and max. rotational

speed Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25 % increments. • Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always • Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once • 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120 °C or 200 °C and voltage • measurement up to 80 V DC

1x rotational speed measurement up to 100,000 rpm with a two• blade propeller

1x speed controller/servo input, 1x rotational speed regulation input, • 1x speed controller/servo output for rotational speed regulation

1x current and voltage and capacity measurement up to 40 A (pulse • 1s: 60 A ) and up to 30 V

etc.; see www.graupner.de for the respective product • **Electric Air-Module Graupner**  **HoTT** Order No. **33620**

General sensor for Graupner HoTT receiver and models with electric motor

Vario with altitude signals, ascend and descend signals as well as • additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, rate of

ascend and descend in two stages Altitude display (-500 ... +3000 m) and memory of the min. and max. • altitude.

2x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds • for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature

Single cell measurement 2 ... 14S with warning thresholds for min. • voltage

Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds • for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current

Adjustable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, always • Adjustable warning repetition time: Always, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once • 2x temperature selectively 0 to 120 °C or 200 °C and voltage • measurement up to 80 V DC

1x speed controller input, 1x speed controller output for single cell • undervoltage correction

1x current and voltage and capacity measurement up to 150 A • (short-term 1 sec 320 A) and up to 60 V

1x single cell monitoring for 2 - 14S lithium batteries (LiPo, LiIo, LiFe) • 1x telemetry connection for receiver •292 **Appendix Graupner**  **HoTT Smart-Box** Order No. **33700**
Wide-ranging functions combined into one device make the SMART BOX your future smart companion. Whether it comes to displaying real-time telemetry data or settings are made on your HoTT system, 8 x 21 characters on a large display enable easy use. An integrated sounder for the emission of an acoustic signal and warning tone enhances the fl exible use of the BOX even further. Using the accompanying installation set, the device can be mounted on brackets of the transmitter and is thus optimally positioned to enable the reading of real-time telemetry data even while controlling your model. The capability of user-installed updates ensures that the SMART BOX always has the latest software and can be safely expanded with future functions.

Transmitter voltage display with • adjustable warning threshold Region setting •
Range test • Signal quality • Receiver temperature • Receiver voltage • Servo reversal • Servo neutral position • Servo travel • Cycle time • Channel switching • Fail-Safe settings • Mixer settings • Servo test • Dimensions: approx. 76 mm x 72 mm x 17 mm (L x W x H) Weight: approx. 55 g **RPM Magnet Sensor Graupner**  **HoTT** Order No. **33616 RPM Optical Sensor**  **Graupner HoTT**  Order No. **33615 Graupner**  **HoTT USB interface** Order No. **7168.6**
This USB interface is required together with the separately available adapter cable, Order No. **7168.6A** , for the updating of receivers and sensors and the mx-20 HoTT transmitter can be updated directly with the USB cable included in the scope of delivery of the interface.

**Graupner HoTT adapter cable**  Order No. **7168.6A**
This adapter cable is required together with the separately available USB interface, Order No. **7168.6** , for the updating of receivers and sensors. The mx-20 HoTT transmitter can be updated directly with the USB cable included in the scope of delivery of the interface.293 **FCC Information Graupner mx-20 HoTT #33124** 

**FCC ID: ZKZ-MX-16-20A**
**FCC Statement** This device complies with Part 15C of the FCC 1. Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause un desired operation. Changes or modifi cations not expressly approved by 2. the party responsible for compliance could void the user‘s authority to operate the equipment.
**NOTE** This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and • receiver. 

# FCC Information

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit • different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV • technician for help. **FCC Radiation Exposure Statement** This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for un uncontrolled envirionment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the antenna and your body.294 **Declaration of Conformity** 

# Declaration of Conformity**Konformitätserklärung gemäß dem Gesetz über Funkanlagen und Telekomunikationsendeinrichtungen (FTEG) und der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)** Declaration of Conformity in accordiance with the Radio and Telecomunikations Terminal EquipmentAct (FTEG) and Directive 1999/5/EG (R&TTE)Graupner GmbH & Co. KGHenriettenstraße94-96D-73230 Kirchheim/Teckerklärt, dass das Produkt:declares that the productGeräteklasse:**2**Equipment classden grundlegenden Anforderungen des § 3 und den übrigeneinschlägigen Bestimmungen desFTEG (Artikel 3 der R&TTE) entspricht.complies with the essential requirements of § 3 and the other relevant provisions of the FTEG (Article 3 of theR&TTE Directive).Angewendete harmonisierte Normen:Harmonised standards applied**EN 60950:2006 EN 301 489-1 V1.7.1** **EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1 EN 300 328 V1.7.1** Health and safety requirements pursuant to § 3 (1) 1. (Article 3 (1) a))Protection requirement concernig electromagnetic compatibility§ 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))Measures for the efficient use of the radio frequency spectrum§ 3 (2) (Article 3 (2))Kirchheim,09. März 2011Stefan Graupner, GeschäftsführerStefan Graupner, Managing Director**Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstraße 94-96 D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck Germany Tel: 07021/722-0 EMail: info@graupner.de** **Fax: 07021/722-188**Gesundheitund Sicherheit gemäß § 3 (1) 1. (Artikel 3 (1)a))Schutzanforderungen in Bezug auf elektromagnetischeVerträglichkeit § 3 (1) 2, Artikel 3 (1) b))Maßnahmen zur effizienten Nutzung des Frequenzspektrums§ 3 (2) (Artikel 3 (2))**mx-12 HoTT - No. 33112, mx-16 HoTT - No. 33116, mx-20 HoTT - No. 33124,** **GR-12 HoTT - No. 33506, GR-16 HoTT - No. 33508, GR-24 HoTT - No. 33512** 295 **Warranty** 

### Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von **This product is warrantied for Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de**  

# 24 **Monaten months**  **mois** 

# Warranty Certifi **cate**

**Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente Graupner -Zentralservice**  Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96 D-73230 Kirchheim **Service hotline**  (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76* Monday ... Friday 9:30 ... 11:30 & 13:00 ...15:00

**United Kingdom** Graupner Service Brunel Drive GB, NEWARK, Nottingham shire NG242EG  (+44) 16 36 61 05 39 **Sverige** Baltechno Electronics Box 5307 S 40227 Göteborg  (+46) 31 70 73 00 0 **Schweiz** Graupner Service Wehntalerstrasse 37 CH 8181 Höri  (+41) 43 26 66 58 3 **Luxembourg** Kit Flammang 129, route d’Arlon L 8009 Strassen  (+35) 23 12 23 2

**France** Graupner France Gérard Altmayer 86, rue St. Antoine F 57601 Forbach-Oeting  (+33) 3 87 85 62 12 **Espana** Anguera Hobbies C/Terrassa 14 E 43206 Reus (Tarragona).  (+34) 97 77 55 32 0 info@anguera-hobbies.com **Ceská Republika Slovenská Republika**  RC Service Z. Hnizdil Letecka 666/22 CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne  (+42) 2 33 31 30 95 **Belgie/Belgique/Nederland** Jan van Mouwerik Slot de Houvelaan 30 NL 3155 Maasland VT  (+31) 10 59 13 59 4

**Italia** GiMax Via Manzoni, no. 8 I 25064 Gussago  (+39) 030 25 22 73 2 * 0.14 cent / minute from a German Telecom land-line. Calling price variations possible for calls from cell phones or from the land-lines of other providers. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck provides a warranty for this product of 24 months from the date of purchase. The warranty is only valid for the material or functional defects already present at the time of the purchase of the product. Schäden, die auf Abnützung, Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder unsachgemäße Behandlung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der Garantie ausgeschlossen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und Gewährleistunsansprüche des Verbrauchers werden durch diese Garantie nicht berührt. Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer Reklamation oder Rücksendung das Produkt genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit die entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94 - 96. D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a period of 24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee applies only to such material or operational defects which are present at the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear, overloading, incompetent handling or the use of incorrect accessories is not covered by the guarantee. The user ́s legal rights and claims under guarantee are not affected by this guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects before you are make a claim or send the item to us, since we are obliged to make a charge for our cost if the product is found to be free of faults.
La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96, D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde sur ce produit une garantie de 24 mois à compter de la date d’achat. La garantie ne s’applique qu’aux défauts de matériel et de fonctionnement du produit acheté. Les dommages dus à une usure, à une surcharge, à l’emploi d’accessoires non compatibles ou à une manipulation non conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette garantie ne remet pas en cause les droits légaux des consommateurs. Avant toute réclamation ou retour de matériel, vérifi ez précisément les défauts ou vices constatés, car si le matériel est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été constaté par nos services, nous nous verrions contraints de facturer le coût de cette intervention. 

### Garantie-Urkunde Warranty certifi cate / Certifi cat de garantie



## mx-20 **HoTT Set**

 Order No. **33124**

Übergabedatum: Date of purchase/delivery: Date d’achat :

Name des Käufers: Owner ́s name: Nom de I`acheteur : Straße, Wohnort: Complete address: Adresse complète : Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers: Stamp and signature of dealer: Cachet et signature du détaillant :HOPPING.TELEMETRY.TRANSMISSION

**GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG POSTFACH 1242**  **D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK GERMANY**  **http://www.graupner.de Changes and delivery options reserved. Available only**  **through dealerships. A directory of suppliers will be provided. No liability is accepted for print errors.**  **Printed in Germany PN.PK-01 Although the information provided in these instructions has been carefully scrutinized**  **for viability, no form of liability can be accepted for errors, omissions or print errors. Graupner**  **reserves the right to change the described hardware and software features at any time without prior notifi**  **cation.**